VEREX Director
User's Guide
V4.91
Contents
Welcome ..................................................................................................................................................... 1 Entering an Area and Disarming the System .......................................................................................... 2 Welcome to VEREX Director .................................................................................................................. 4 Start-up and Logging In ............................................................................................................... 4 Exiting, Logging Off, or Changing Operators ............................................................................... 6 The Desktop ................................................................................................................................ 7 Other Desktop Choices ................................................................................................................ 8 Running Reports, and Monitoring System Activity .............................................................................. 11 Time-and-Attendance Reporting ........................................................................................................... 12 Required-Attendance Time-Periods ..................................................................................................... 16 Roll-Call Reports (v4.61) ...................................................................................................................... 18 Reporting on System & Personnel Activity ........................................................................................... 19 Reporting on Previous Guard-Tours ..................................................................................................... 22 Reporting on User Access Authorities (by Area, Door, or Floor) .......................................................... 24 Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc. ............................................................................... 27 Reporting on Operator Audits or Panel Communications Logs ............................................................ 29 Reporting on Panel Diagnostics (V4.4)............................................................................................... 31 Working with the Report Viewer ........................................................................................................... 33 Monitoring System Activity.................................................................................................................... 34 Alarm and Activity Monitoring .................................................................................................... 34 'Activating' and Using the Monitoring Window............................................................................ 35 Limiting the Window to Show Only Specific Messages (Sorting and Filtering) .......................... 37 Acknowledging Alarms (Comment / Resolve) ............................................................................ 39 When Messages Cannot be Transmitted to the VEREX Director Software ............................... 40 Working with Video Events (V4.5)............................................................................................ 40 Visually Verifying Users (Photo-Verification) ........................................................................................ 42 Photo-Verification....................................................................................................................... 42 Related Features ....................................................................................................................... 43 Setting up This Feature .............................................................................................................. 44 Guard-Tours: Monitoring...................................................................................................................... 45 Introduction to Guard Tours ....................................................................................................... 45 Activating and Monitoring Guard Tours (that have already been set up) ................................... 46 Guard Tours: Initial Set Up ....................................................................................................... 48 Checking Status and Controlling Items ................................................................................................. 51 Maps and Video (Visual Monitoring & Status/Control) .......................................................................... 52 Status and Control Using Visual Director ................................................................................... 52 Camera Status/Control and Adjustments.............................................................................................. 59 Initial Set Up of: Views, Maps, Cameras.............................................................................................. 64 Checking Status & Controlling Items .................................................................................................... 73 Introduction to Status & Control ................................................................................................. 73 Using the Status Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 75 Miscellaneous Status Tasks ................................................................................................................. 77 Panel Date and Time ................................................................................................................. 77 Resetting Users' Antipassback Status .................................................................................................. 79 Clearing a "Bad Card/PIN Global Lockout" ................................................................................ 81 Checking System Status (Remote Diagnostics) ........................................................................ 82 Checking the Status of Panels (Equipment) ......................................................................................... 84 Panel Status (Equipment) .......................................................................................................... 84 21-0381E v4.9.1 (2013.06)
© 2013 UTC Fire & Security Americas Corporation, Inc.
i
Checking Power Levels (V4.4) ........................................................................................................... 86 Checking the Status of Modules ........................................................................................................... 88 Suite Security System Messaging ........................................................................................................ 90 Checking Status or Controlling a Suite Security System ...................................................................... 91 Checking Status or Controlling Items by Area ...................................................................................... 93 Area Users (Activity, User Count, and APB-Reset) ................................................................... 96 Checking User In/Out Status ................................................................................................................ 99 Checking Status or Controlling Individual Doors ................................................................................ 101 Checking Status or Controlling Elevators ........................................................................................... 103 Checking Status or Controlling Floors ................................................................................................ 105 Checking Status or Bypassing Input Points (Sensors) ....................................................................... 107 Checking Status or Controlling Outputs (Electronically switched Devices)........................................ 109 Panel Communications and Updates ................................................................................................. 111 Panel Communications ............................................................................................................ 111 Activating Communications and Transferring Panel Settings .................................................. 113 Viewing the Status of Previous Communications Sessions ..................................................... 117 Correcting Communication/Update Errors ............................................................................... 119 Checking Account Status (V4.4)....................................................................................................... 121 Panel Firmware Files, and Updating Panel Firmware (V4.4) ............................................................ 122 Activating Panel Firmware Files............................................................................................... 122 Updating Panel Firmware ........................................................................................................ 123 Administration and Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 125 Operators (People Who Can Use This Software) ............................................................................... 126 Setting or Changing an Operator's Password .......................................................................... 128 Operator Settings (v4.6) ..................................................................................................................... 129 Operator Permissions ......................................................................................................................... 131 Scheduled Event Filtering for Operators............................................................................................. 133 Schedules for User-Access and Area Automation .............................................................................. 136 Holidays and Time-Change Dates ...................................................................................................... 139 Authority Groups to Manage Large Numbers of Authorities (v4.6) .................................................... 141 Authorities for Users/Entrants (V4.4) ................................................................................................ 143 Custom Information Categories for Users (Custom User Information) ............................................... 149 Users (Entrants / Panel Users) ........................................................................................................... 151 The Photo-Badging Option ...................................................................................................... 156 Cards that Have Been Lost ................................................................................................................ 161 Fall-Back Users (Can Enter During Comms Failure) .......................................................................... 163 Ensure 'Fall-Back User' Mode is Enabled ................................................................................ 163 Viewing or Assigning Fallback Users ....................................................................................... 164 System Maintenance Tasks ............................................................................................................... 165 Password and Personal ID Number (PIN) Issues .................................................................... 165 Large Systems--Checking for Software vs. Panel Differences / Conflicts ................................ 167 Client/Server Systems: Checking to See Who Else is Logged onto the Database ................ 169 Checking / Repairing the VEREX Director Database Tables ................................................... 170 Backing up or Restoring the Database .................................................................................... 172 Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs (Archive) ............................................................ 179 Removing old Activity or Audit Logs (Purge)............................................................................ 181 Operating System Maintenance............................................................................................... 182 System Configuration............................................................................................................................ 184 Working with Accounts and Folders (Multi-Account Systems) ............................................................ 185 After a Multi-Server Login ........................................................................................................ 187 ii
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Advanced Sorting..................................................................................................................... 189 Users and Holidays Shared Across Multiple Accounts ....................................................................... 190 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 190 Phase 1: Account-Specific Data.............................................................................................. 191 Phase 2: Community Groups .................................................................................................. 193 Phase 3: Shared Users and Holidays ..................................................................................... 196 Phase 4: Assign Shared Items to Accounts ............................................................................ 198 Account-Wide Panel Settings (Feature-Set, Service PIN, etc.) .......................................................... 200 Event Responses for Acknowledging Alarms ..................................................................................... 204 Alarm / Event Instructions ................................................................................................................... 205 Enabling Sounds (to be associated with event/alarm messages) ....................................................... 206 Customizing How Events are Displayed (Event Priority) .................................................................... 208 Detailed Operator and User Audit Trail (V4.6) .................................................................................. 210 Setting up Video Events (V4.5) ........................................................................................................ 211 Software-Based Text Paging (Serial Reporting) v4.4 ....................................................................... 212 Panels, Panel Groups, and Connection Settings ................................................................................ 214 Panel Groups and Connection Settings ................................................................................... 214 System Panels and Displayed Item-Numbers .......................................................................... 216 System Settings for each Panel (V4.4) ............................................................................................. 218 General System Settings for a Panel ....................................................................................... 218 Intrusion Settings for a Panel (V4.4) ...................................................................................... 220 Monitoring, Numeric Paging, & Remote Mgt. Settings ............................................................. 222 System Card-Access Settings ................................................................................................. 226 Equipment Settings (Pseudo / Internal Inputs) ................................................................................... 229 Areas and Related Settings ................................................................................................................ 231 Activity Monitoring and Auto-Arming ........................................................................................ 236 More Tabs ................................................................................................................................ 237 Area Groups (V4.4) and Multi-panel Arm/Disarm (V4.5) ............................................................... 239 Setting up Area Groups ........................................................................................................... 239 Setting up Multi-Panel Arm/Disarm (V4.5) ............................................................................. 240 Expansion Modules ............................................................................................................................ 241 Suite-Security Keypads and Related Settings .................................................................................... 245 Doors, Readers, and Related Settings ............................................................................................... 249 Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a Door ............................................................................................. 252 More Tabs ................................................................................................................................ 254 Elevators (Lifts) and Associated Readers ........................................................................................... 257 Floors (Pertaining to Access-Controlled Elevators / Lifts) ................................................................... 262 Input Points—Monitored Sensors ....................................................................................................... 264 Input Points—Pre-Defined Sensor Types ........................................................................................... 269 Input Points—Custom Point Types ..................................................................................................... 270 Custom Circuit-Types for Input Points (V4.4) ................................................................................... 273 Programmable Outputs (Signalling & Device-Switching) .................................................................... 275 Programmable Output Functions ........................................................................................................ 280 Output to follow an Area "Fail to Arm" (≥V4.80) .................................................................................. 285 E-mail / SMS Messaging .................................................................................................................... 286 Detect Duplicate Cards ....................................................................................................................... 289 Installation and Technical Reference ................................................................................................... 294 PC Issues and Software Installation ................................................................................................... 295 Welcome .................................................................................................................................. 295 Recommended Computer Specifications ................................................................................. 295 21-0381E v4.9.1 (2013.06)
© 2013 UTC Fire & Security Americas Corporation, Inc.
iii
Serial Port Installation and Set Up ........................................................................................... 298 Windows Settings Required ..................................................................................................... 298 Software Installation for a Fresh/New System ......................................................................... 300 Upgrading from an Earlier Version of Software........................................................................ 301 If You Need to Transfer the Database to a Different PC (i.e., changing the VEREX Directorserver PC)................................................................................................................................ 303 DCOM Setup (Required for Client-Server VEREX Director Systems): .................................... 305 Software Activation and Licensing ...................................................................................................... 306 Software "Activation Key" ........................................................................................................ 306 Activating Your Software ......................................................................................................... 306 Upgrading Your Software (Adding Optional Features) ............................................................. 308 March Networks R4-R5 DVR Support ................................................................................................ 309 1) Activate Your license option ................................................................................................ 309 2) Install the March DVR Drivers ............................................................................................. 309 Network USB HASP Key (Director V4.51) ........................................................................................ 310 Introduction: ............................................................................................................................. 310 Instructions: ............................................................................................................................. 310 Remote Software Download and Remote Access (V4.7) ................................................................. 311 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 311 Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 311 Downloading and Installing the Software ................................................................................. 311 Client/Server Issues and the Director Server Manager (v4.7) ............................................................ 312 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 312 Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 312 The Director-Server manager .................................................................................................. 312 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 313 Client/Server Access and Permissions ............................................................................................... 314 Server Validation Certificates (V4.72) .................................................................................... 314 Client Access (Allowable Client List) ........................................................................................ 315 Setting Up Client Permissions ................................................................................................. 318 New Installation? Try the Wizard ! ..................................................................................................... 320 Panel Connection Overview ............................................................................................................... 321 Connections Supported (V4.4) ............................................................................................... 321 Welcome .................................................................................................................................. 321 Steps ....................................................................................................................................... 321 IP Connectivity ................................................................................................................................... 323 Secure IP Communications (V4.72) ....................................................................................... 323 Operation ................................................................................................................................. 323 Requirements: ......................................................................................................................... 323 Set-up Overview: ..................................................................................................................... 323 Basic IP Connections / Older Firmware ................................................................................... 324 PC-to-Panel—Direct Connection ........................................................................................................ 324 Physical Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 324 Windows Direct-Cable-Connection Setup ................................................................................ 324 PC and Panels—Modem Connections ............................................................................................... 326 PC Modem Installation or Connection ..................................................................................... 326 Windows Modem Setup ........................................................................................................... 326 Panel Modem........................................................................................................................... 326 Serial Port / Modem Setup (Communications Manager) .................................................................... 328 Communication Pools for System Panels ........................................................................................... 332 Setting Up a New System (Commissioning) ....................................................................................... 334 Welcome .................................................................................................................................. 334 iv
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Before You Begin (Form-by-Form Data Entry) ......................................................................... 335 Basic Settings for Testing, and Panel Communications........................................................... 336 Importing Settings from an Existing VEREX Director System Panel ....................................... 338 Customizing the MyTools Bar ............................................................................................................. 339 System Capacities .............................................................................................................................. 341 Software Licensing and Activation Key .................................................................................... 341 Checking or Updating Your System Capacities ....................................................................... 341 Software Versions and Basic Capacities ................................................................................. 341 System-Wide Capacities .......................................................................................................... 342 Common Per-Panel Capacities (not based on 'Feature-Set')................................................... 344 Advanced Database Features ............................................................................................................ 346 Overview of Features ............................................................................................................... 346 SQL Server Support................................................................................................................. 346 User-Logins (Needed for: Database Query, and SQL Server Support) .................................. 347 Linking to the Database (Used for: Custom Query/Reporting; ERM Integration) ................... 349 Automated User-Import (Used for: ERM Integration) .............................................................. 353 Manually Importing User-Data From a Text File ...................................................................... 355 System / Hardware Reference ............................................................................................................ 356 System Design Aspects (Topology) ......................................................................................... 356 Alarm System Hardware .......................................................................................................... 357 Keypad Tone Reference (V4.5 with V4.42 firmware) ...................................................................... 359 On-Line Support & Product Information .............................................................................................. 361 On-Line Information and Support ............................................................................................. 361 Additional information ......................................................................................................................... 362 Windows XP ............................................................................................................................ 362 Adding a Modem ...................................................................................................................... 362 The TCP/IP Protocol is Missing ............................................................................................... 362 Index ................................................................................................................................................... 363 21-0381E v4.9.1 (2013.06)
© 2013 UTC Fire & Security Americas Corporation, Inc.
v
Copyrights and Trademarks
Disclaimer
™ VEREX Director, G-Prox, and Netvision are
trademarks of UTC CCS Systems
™ Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation
® Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000, and
Windows XP, are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
All software, firmware, drawings, diagrams,
specifications, catalogues, literature, manuals
and other supplied materials shall constitute
the
proprietary
information
of
the
manufacturer. In the interests of ongoing
improvement in quality and design, we reserve
the right to change product specifications
without prior notification.
Attention: Physical alteration of hardware
components or removal of electrical devices
may void warranties, and/or affect radiofrequency and electromagnetic emissions.
This document is not to be copied, decompiled, or re-distributed in any form without
prior written consent.
© Copyright 2013 UTC Fire & Security Americas
Corporation, Inc. All rights reserved.
© Copyright 2013 UTC Fire & Security Americas
Corporation, Inc.
vi
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
1
Entering an Area and Disarming the System
Reader/Door Mode
Area
Setting
Disarmed (Off)
Locked &
Card Only
Locked &
Card+PIN
Present card,
open the door
Present card, enter PIN
open the door
Armed & 'Auto
Disarm on Valid
Token'
Armed & 'PINOnly' or 'ID+PIN'
Present card,
open the door
Present card, enter PIN
open the door
Present card, open the
door. Then log into
panel and disarm it.
Present card, enter PIN
open door. Then log
into the panel & disarm
it.
Armed &
Dual Custody
Present card, open the
door. Then login with
two user PINs (or
ID+PIN), & disarm
area.
Present card, enter PIN
open door. Then login
with two user PINs (or
ID+PIN), & disarm
area.
2
Locked &
Card or UID/PIN
Locked &
UID/PIN Only
Present card or enter
user no., enter PIN
open the door
Present card or enter
user no., enter PIN
open the door
Enter UID+PIN (or PIN
only), open the door
Present card or enter
user no., enter PIN
open door. Then log
into the panel & disarm
it.
Present card or enter
user no., enter PIN
open door. Then login
with two user PINs (or
ID+PIN), & disarm
area.
Enter UID+PIN (or PIN
only), open the door.
Then log into panel and
disarm it.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
Enter UID+PIN (or PIN
only), open the door
Enter UID+PIN (or PIN
only), open the door.
Then login with two
user PINs (or ID+PIN),
& disarm area.
21-0381E v4.9.1
If the door is unlocked, access is not controlled (simply
open the door to enter the area). Conversely, if the
door is locked, and all cards are presently 'locked out',
users will be unable to enter.
Card Number: As an alternative to the user ID number
(UID), and/or access cards, the system can be set for
entry and login using the card number instead (4-10
digits).
Visitors that must be Escorted: Persons with a card set
as "Visitor (Escort-Required)" must be escorted at each
controlled reader (valid escort or regular cardholder-depending on the system settings).
To enter at a controlled door and disarm the area, an
entry delay must be in effect. As well, only the users
with authority to both enter the door at this time AND
disarm the area will be granted entry.
The 'ID + PIN' or 'PIN Only' login requirement is
determined by the 'Feature-Set' selection for the
account.
Dual Custody (and Escort mode) is supported at
individual readers as well.
Using an Arming Station: Additional features
and entry options are provided through an
arming station. These units are essentially a
proximity reader with keypad, plus additional
status indicators and features. For details on
using an arming station, please refer to the xL
(panel/keypad) User's Guide.
Readers set to Enable or Disable Cards:
Some readers may be set to enable or disable
specific types of cards (such as visitor cards,
or all temporary cards, etc.)--with or without an
associated door being unlocked at this time.
All other (valid) cards will be granted access as
usual.
To Enter using a Door-Opener Button: Use
your access card and/or PIN to unlock the door
(and activate the button). Then, simply press
and release the door-opener button. Once
inside the area, 'log' in at an LCD keypad, and
disarm the area if required (i.e., if NOT set for
"Auto-Disarm on Valid Token").
If You are Being Forced to Enter: With
Card+PIN mode in effect, you can trigger a
'Duress' alarm by reversing the last 2-digits of
your personal ID number (PIN). This can also
be done when 'logging' into an LCD keypad.
To Exit Using an RTE (REX) Button: Simply
press and briefly hold the request-to-exit
button.
If you Hold the Door Open: If the door is
held open for 'too long', a 'Door Held Open'
message will be logged.
A person holding a door open, or indicating that they
are being forced to enter may also trigger an alarm
(depending on the monitoring settings for the specific
door).
Entering During the Pre-Arming Cycle:
With a scheduled arming, authorized persons
entering during the 15 minute pre-arming cycle
will be granted access--without interrupting the
arming cycle. They would then have to:
+ Extend the closing time ("work-late"), or
+ Manually disarm the area once the final prearm countdown begins, or;
+ Leave before the arming occurs.
Note: Cards can either be disabled permanently, or
allowed to be re-enabled later.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
3
Welcome to VEREX Director
shut down the software (incl. the communications or
server module), then start the software and login again.
Start-up and Logging In
Multiple Instances: Beginning with Director v4.70, you
can run multiple copies of the interface (…Director.exe).
This allows you to access different features and/or
different accounts at the same time.
Starting the VEREX Director Software
Select Start, Programs, VEREX Director V4,
and VEREX Director, and wait for the start-up
screen to appear.
Activation Key: The VEREX Director software uses a
small 'activation key' to manage software licensing and
optional features. This device must be plugged onto
the PC that contains the software database (V4: USB
connector; V3.3.2: Parallel/printer port; V3.3.3:
Either).
Note: Director software V4 will not start up if the
USB key is missing.
Client/Server Systems: Take care to ensure that the
VEREX Director software is NOT already running
before attempting to start it. Troubleshooting Tip: If the
desktop is acting strangely, you may have two copies of
the software running (and you've run out of memory).
On-Line Help Language
For versions of VEREX Director that include
multi-language help files, the on-line help will
normally come up in the language associated
with your operator settings. You can also
select a different language-version if desired
(for this work-session).
Selecting a Different Help Language: Open the Help
menu, select Language, and then select from the
available choices.
The Auto-Lockout Feature
If you do not use your keyboard for a specific
period of time, the software will automatically
go into 'lockout' mode to protect against an
unauthorized person viewing or changing
items. (For details, refer to the [Lockout]
description).
To set the period of time before the keyboard lockout
will occur (when you are logged in), refer to the section
on "Operators".
Logging In (Single-PC)
To gain access to your assigned items and
features, you must first perform a 'Login':
Select Login from the toolbar, and then enter
your name and password, pressing Tab in
between. Then, press Enter, or click Login.
Screen Reference
- Name: A valid operator's name.
Logging In (Client/Server)
Select Login from the toolbar, and then enter
your name and password, pressing Tab in
between. (Ensure the "Server Location" is set
as well, if present.) Then, press Enter, or click
Login.
If a "Cannot Connect to Server" screen
appears, check that you have not mistyped the
"Server Location".
Note: The Director-server PC and software must be
running (this is the PC that includes "...DirectorServer.exe", and typically contains the database as
well. For additional things to check, refer to "Director
Server Manager and Client/Server Issues" (near the
back of this guide).
If you just upgraded for client/server (server location
missing on login screen): You may need to login once,
4
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
- Password: The operator's assigned
password.
Default Operator Name & Password:
Operator, 1234
The default login name and password take effect
only until changed by a system administrator.
To protect against unauthorized access to the
software, the default password should be
changed right away.
If your login name and password are no longer
supported after upgrading from an earlier
software revision, refer to "Upgrading from an
Earlier Version of Software", paying special
attention to converting your previous database.
- Server Location: In a multi-PC (clientserver) installation, this allows you to
identify the VEREX Director server. Select
(or type in) the server "PC name" (or its
network "IP address").
Director-Server PC: This is the PC that includes
"...Director-Server.exe", and typically contains
the database as well.
Tip: This can be an IP address, or a name
(FQDN). Contact your IT rep. for assistance if
needed. For remote access (different PC) with
certificate authentication, this value must be as
supported by the certificate.
More: Server Validation Certificates
Multi-Server Login: You can select up to 6
servers for simultaneous login. This allows
listing and selecting accounts from any of the
server PCs without having to log out in between.
(All servers you are logged into appear under
[Server] in the 'tree'.) Related: "Working with
Accounts and Folders"
Tip: Use semicolons (;) to separate multiple server
names, or click [...].
- [...]: Opens a small screen to allow selecting multiple
servers. (The login will apply to all server PCs
shown in this screen.) For each server, type or
select the PC name (or IP address) at the bottom of
the screen, and click [Add]. You can also [Delete]
a selected server, or [Replace] it after typing a new
name.
Attention: Your operator login name and password
must be valid for all of the desired servers. (You will
be logged into the servers for which your login name
and password are valid.)
To login at the server PC itself, use the PC name
(not the IP address).
------------------------- [Login]: If the entered name and password are
valid, the operator will be provided access to the
items and features as assigned in their operator
permissions.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Server Connection Status: A small screen will show
you the connection progress while a connection is
made with your selected server(s).
- [Lockout]: This shuts down the software except
for the status toolbar. (Tip: If the same
operator logs back in, the software will also
remember what account they were 'in'.)
The status toolbar requires that the software be
connected with the applicable panels. For details on
the status toolbar, or on establishing panel
communications, refer to "Checking Status and
Controlling Items".
- [Cancel]: Aborts the login request.
- [PROXY]: Provides settings used to connect
out to the Director-server via the internet
through a proxy server.
Settings: "Proxy Type" (select "None" if not using this
feature), "Domain", and a "User Name" and
"Password" that has suitable permissions on that
domain. (For these and other proxy settings, get an
'IT' person to help you.)
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
5
Note: Port 443 must be 'open' on the network for the
Director-server.
Exiting, Logging Off, or Changing
Operators
Shutting Down the VEREX Director
Software
To shut down the VEREX Director software,
click the X in the extreme upper-right corner of
the VEREX Director screen (or open the File
menu, and select Exit).
Tip: If you changed any desktop settings, and would
like to retain them, be sure to click the check-box
provided.
Then, select "Yes" on the confirmation screen.
The RPC Server is Unavailable: This message
appears if the Director-Server application had been
shut down previously (before the Director software).
- [Yes] (Logout): Logs the present operator out,
shutting down access to the VEREX Director
software.
(Until the next valid operator performs a 'login'.)
- [No] (Lockout): This shuts down the desktop
except for the status toolbar (and login button).
(Tip: If the same operator logs back in, the
software will also remember what account they
were 'in'.)
The status toolbar requires that the software be
connected with the applicable panels. For details on
using the status toolbar, or on establishing panel
communications, refer to "Checking Status and
Controlling Items"
- [Cancel]: Aborts the logout request, leaving the
present operator logged in.
If you have changed any desktop settings, a checkbox will be provided to let you save your settings.
(For a related topic, see "The Auto-Lockout Feature",
previous.)
(When Exiting)
Logout or Lockout
To 'log' off, simply select Logout on the
toolbar (or open the File menu, and select
Logout).
Tip: If you changed any desktop settings, and would
like to retain them, be sure to click the check-box
provided.
Then, select Yes to 'logout', or No to put the
software in 'Lockout' mode. (See the 'Logout /
Lockout' screen descriptions for details.)
To protect against unauthorized access to the VEREX
Director software, it is always a good idea to use the
logout (or lockout) feature before leaving your
workstation. (For a related topic, see "The AutoLockout Feature", previous.)
Logout / Lockout
Changing Operators
Changing operators is simply a matter of one
operator logging out, and the second operator
logging in. (For details, see previous / above.)
Screen Reference
- [Yes]: Logs the present operator out, and shuts
down the VEREX Director software.
- [No]: Aborts the exit request.
If you have changed any desktop settings, a checkbox will be provided to let you save your settings.
6
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
The Desktop
Your 'Window' to the System
Navigating the Desktop
The desktop is your interface to the VEREX
Director software, providing a familiar Windows
'look and feel', with access to all features and
items assigned to you as a VEREX Director
operator.
The VEREX Director interface can be set as
desired by each individual operator. This
includes whether they prefer the MyTools bar,
or the Tree window, plus the sizing of the
desktop sections, and other settings.
Many screens are divided into 'tabs' of related
settings. (Start with the 'Standard' tab, and
look in any additional tabs that are of interest
to you.)
Some screens also include the
familiar windows ‘scroll-bars’ whenever an item
is too large to fit on-screen.
Selecting Desktop Items to be
Displayed
The [Tree], [MyTools] and [Events] buttons
on the toolbar allow viewing or hiding different
aspects of the desktop (try it!).
Your MyTools Bar: You can customize the look and
content of the MyTools bar to your own preferences.
For details, refer to "Customizing the MyTools Bar".
Account-Folders: For systems with single-account
licensing, only one account will appear in the tree. In
larger systems, [Account Folders] will be shown in the
tree for operators with multi-account permissions (or
that have the authority to edit account folders).
Saving Your Desktop Settings
After changing an aspect of the desktop (the
sizing, Forms/Grid mode, and/or which aspects
are to be displayed, you can save your
changes so the desktop appears in the same
format the next time you login. To save your
changes, open the View menu, select
Desktop Settings, and then Save.
Tip: You will also be asked if you want to save your
changes whenever you logout or exit from the software.
Changing the Size of the Desktop
To resize the entire desktop, click and drag the
bottom right corner to the desired position. (If
the screen is presently 'maximized', you'll first
need to double-click the blue title-bar, or click
the middle button in the upper right corner of
the screen.)
To ‘maximize’ the desktop, double-click the
blue title-bar, or click the middle button in the
upper right corner of the screen.
Changing Proportions of Desktop Areas
To change the proportion of the desktop, move
the mouse to the edge of a screen area (such
as between the 'tree' and forms/grid area), and
watch for the cursor to change shape. Then,
click-and-drag the edge of the window to a
new location.
Tip: You can also maximize the form/grid
area, or the monitoring window (i.e., cause it to
fill the entire screen) by double-clicking the
title-bar for the specific window twice. (Also
see "Resetting...", to follow.)
Changing the Position of Desktop Items
Each portion of the desktop can be
repositioned, and/or viewed on its own. This is
especially useful on a multi-monitor PC,
allowing an item such as the monitoring
window to be viewed separately.
To relocate an item, 'drag-and-drop' the item
by its title-bar, while watching for the greyed
box indicating the new position.
To view an item 'full-screen' (such as the monitoring
window), double-click its title-bar twice. To access the
main desktop screen again, double-click the title-bar
once again.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
7
Resetting the Desktop
After moving and resizing areas of
the screen, you may wish to reset the
desktop to either your last saved
settings, or to the initial factory default
layout.
Last Saved Settings: Click Reset on
the toolbar (or open the View menu,
and select Desktop Settings, and
Reset).
Factory-Default Layout: Open the
View menu, and select Desktop
Settings, and Default).
Tip: If a window or portion of the desktop is
presently "maximized" (fills the entire
screen), you'll need to double-click its titlebar to access the menu or toolbar.
Note: If your desktop was accidentally
saved with the monitoring window
'undocked' and hidden behind the main desktop, follow
the preceding steps for "Factory Default Layout".
Screen Reference
- The Menu: Provides access to some
miscellaneous features of the VEREX Director
software. Tip: The Tools menu provides
access to Wizards that simplify setting up a
new system, and/or enabling communications
with a panel.
- The Toolbar: Provides access to some
common tasks.
- The 'Tree' (optional): This is an expandable/
collapsible outline that allows selecting an
account, and provides access to most topics
including system configuration, management,
and status & control. Click [Tree] on the toolbar
MyTools Doesn't Work: If you select [ MyTools ],
and only a small empty 'button' appears, this means
no items are assigned to the 'MyTools' bar. See the
previous tip to fix this.
- The Forms/Grid Area: This area shows
details on your present topic (as selected from
the tree or MyTools bar). This can be set for
either a forms view (typical / data entry), or
'grid' format (experienced persons / viewing
and sorting lists).
(Use the Form / Grid button on the toolbar to switch
views.)
- The Monitoring Window (optional): This
area shows recent events that have been
received (for a selected account).
Click [Events] on the toolbar to view or hide the
monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: With multiple accounts, the
monitoring window shows the events for your present
account. (Select [Account Folders] in the tree, then
locate and double-click your desired account.)
To set the account to be monitored by the status
toolbar, click [Monitor] on the far-right end of the
toolbar.
to view or hide the 'tree'.
- The 'MyTools' Bar (optional): This is a
customizable list of tasks/items that can be
used as alternative to the 'tree'.
Tip: Click [MyTools] on the toolbar to view or hide the
MyTools list/bar. Note: Only the items allowed by
your operator permissions will be visible in the Tree
and MyTools Bar. As well, for items pertaining to a
specific account, you must first double-click to enter
the account.
Tip: You can customize the look and content of the
MyTools bar when you are logged in (View  MyTools
 Customize). For details, refer to "Customizing the
MyTools Bar".
8
- The Status Bar: This area (at the extreme
bottom of your desktop) shows whether or not
you are connected with a selected account
(i.e., associated panels), plus other
communications-related status messages.
Other Desktop Choices
.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Tip: You can save your desktop changes at any time:
Open the View menu, select Desktop Settings, &
Save. Note: You will also be asked if you want to save
your changes whenever you logout or exit from the
software
Selecting Desktop Items to be
Displayed
The [Tree], [MyTools] and [Events] buttons
on the toolbar allow viewing or hiding different
aspects of the desktop (try it!).
Listing Items Panel-by-Panel vs. in a
Single List and Showing or Hiding
Panel References in Forms
For some tasks, you have two choices as to
how items will be displayed (in a single list,
versus panel-by-panel), and/or whether or not
panel (and panel group) references will appear
in the form / grid portion of the desktop.
Logical Tree View?
You can customize the look and content of the MyTools
bar to your own preferences . For details, refer to
"Customizing the MyTools Bar".
No
Yes (  )
Show Panel/Panel Group Information:
Listing Configuration and Control &
Status Topics in the Tree "Panel-byPanel":
1) Click your account/site button in the tree.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click an account.
2) Right-click a topic in the tree (or open the
View menu), and check to ensure that
Logical Tree View is not selected.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
9
Listing Configuration and Control &
Status Topics in the Tree as a Single
List:
1) Click your account/site button in the tree.
("View" menu when a Configuration
or Control & Status Topic is Selected
in the Tree)
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click an account.
2) Right-click a topic in the tree (or open the
View menu), and check to ensure that
Logical Tree View is selected.
To Show Panel References in the
Forms/Grid Window
(This is available only when "Logical Tree View" is in
effect.)
1) Set the tree to show items in a single list (see
previous / above).
2) Open Configuration (or Control & Status) in
the tree, and select any topic (such as
"System").
3) From the View menu, select Panel
Information, and ensure that "Show Panel /
Panel-Group Information" is selected.
Tip: The "ID and Name" selection causes the
name to be included in the 'Panel' and 'Group'
columns when working in Grid view.
Screen Reference
(This is available only when "Logical Tree View" is in
effect.)
- Panel Information:
+ Show Panel / Panel-Group Information: Identifies
system panels and panel groups at the bottom of
configuration forms (and in grid view);
+ ID and Name: In conjunction with the setting
above, this shows the name for each system
panel and panel group (instead of ID only) when
working in Grid view.
In Forms view, selecting "Show Panel / Panel-Group
Information" always displays the ID and Name for the
panels & groups. (The "ID and Name" setting has no
effect when working in Forms view).
(Right-Click within the Tree
for an Account)
- Logical Tree View: 'Toggles' the tree between
listing all topics for an account () versus listing
the topics separately for each system panel (by
panel group).
Note: This setting mostly pertains to the "Control &
Status", and "Configuration" topics.
10
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Running Reports,
and Monitoring
System Activity
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
11
Time-and-Attendance Reporting
In/Out Status Tracking: This feature requires "User
In/Out Status Tracking" to be enabled.
Related Setting: YourAccount, Account
Information, Setup (tab), "Enable User In/Out
Status for this Account"
Time and Attendance Reports
Cardholder time and attendance reporting
allows generating reports pertaining to the
presence (roll-call), tardiness, number of hours
at work, etc. for users pertaining to a specific
account.
These reports are extrapolated from entry and
exit (access granted) messages in the activity
log, and compared against a selected
"attendance-period" that defines when the
users are supposed to be inside the facility.
TechTip: Reports pertaining to past events are based
on the present event list, plus any archived data that
has been re-imported using the archive feature.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs".
For accurate attendance reporting:
 All doors used to enter and exit the facility must
have entry and exit readers.
 The site (account) must have a ‘Required
Attendance Zone’ defined by setting the "Area" as
"Outside" for all readers used to exit from this
zone.
For details, refer to "Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a
Door".
 Persons must use their access card / token
EVERY time they enter and exit the facility.
Note: Persons last reported as 'In', but with no card
activity for 24 hours will be set as 'Out'.
Attendance reports can take a full minute or longer to
appear--depending on the number of cards at the site,
and the number of activity messages being scanned.
For better performance, be sure to select the smallest
date-range that meets your requirements. Also, you
can keep the activity log to a suitable size via regular
use of the Archive and/or Purge features.
Required-Attendance Time Periods
To allow time & attendance reporting, each site
(account) must have required attendance time
periods set up that specify the days and blocks
of time that employees are supposed to be
inside the facility.
For details, refer to "Required-Attendance Time
Periods".
Running a Time and Attendance Report
1)
2)
Tip: This option appears only if you didn't already
have an account 'open' in the tree.
3)
For details on the 'Antipassback' feature, and the "APB
Auto-Reset" selection, refer to the "Antipassback"
settings in the "Area" configuration topic.
12
Select the range of dates to be covered by
the report ("From" and "To"), and the time to
be used as the "Start of Day".
Tip: See the item-descriptions for more info.
4)
5)
Select the desired type of report (see the
"Report Type" description for details).
Select the "Attendance period" that specifies
when persons are supposed to be in the
facility.
Notes: An attendance period is not required for
"Arrival / Departure", "Roll-Call" or "In/Out Status"
reports. If a suitable attendance-period is not
listed, refer to "Required-Attendance Time
Periods" to set one up now.
6)
7)
For details, refer to "Exporting or Importing Activity or
Audit Logs", and "Removing old Activity or Audit Logs".
Areas set for Antipassback Checking: The "APB AutoReset" feature is generally not recommended where
Time & Attendance reporting functions will be used.
Select Time and Attendance Report from
your MyTools bar, or click [Reports] in the
'tree', and select Time and Attendance.
Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired
account near the centre of the screen.
8)
To limit the report to a specific authority,
user, etc., click [Search For], and select the
desired criteria.
Tip: To clear a selection, select it and use your
Backspace or Delete key.
Tip: You can scroll within the form to view
additional items if necessary.
Select a report 'destination' (i.e., whether it is
to be viewed, printed, or saved as a file).
If you select "Archive" or a type of "File",
click [File...], set the location and filename
as desired, and click Save.
Click [Run], and respond to any additional
screen(s) that appear (details to follow).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
If Printing an Attendance Report
To print a report without viewing it first: Select
the type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select Printer as the destination. Then,
select Run, and click OK when the 'Print'
screen appears. Tip: To select a different
printer click Printer, and make your selection
from the 'Print Setup' screen that appears.
To view a report before printing: Select the
type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select 'Screen' as the destination.
Then, click Run.
For details on viewing and printing the
displayed report, refer to "Working with the
Report Viewer".
If Exporting an Attendance Report as a
File (Archive/Text File/Report Emulation
File)
Select the type of report and other criteria as
usual, and the desired file-type as the
'destination'. Then, click [File...]. In the next
screen, set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save when finished. Then
click Run.
Viewing/Printing a Previously Saved
Attendance Report-Archive
Select Time and Attendance Report from
your MyTools bar, or click [Reports] in the
'tree', and select Time and Attendance.
Then, click [Load archived report] at the
bottom of the form (scroll down if necessary).
Multi-Account Systems: You do not have to select an
account since that was done when the report was
archived.
In the next screen, locate and select the
desired archived report (.raf), and click Open
(or simply double-click the file).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
13
Reports Time and Attendance
Screen Reference
Report Period
- From and To (date): The beginning
and end date from the event log to be
checked for cardholder activity.
(Change the values manually, or click
the arrow to access a pop-up
calendar.)
Note: Roll-call and In/Out status reports use
the previous 48 hours as a date/time range
(instead of the "From" and "To" settings).
- Start of Day: This setting allows
shifts that span midnight to be handled
(Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
properly. Leave this as 12:00 AM for
- This area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
all work shifts that begin and end on
account that your report pertains to. Tip: This option appears only if
the same day. For a shift that spans
you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
midnight, select a time at some
midpoint between the end of one shift
- Roll Call: All persons presently tracked as
and the beginning of the next one (perhaps 1:00
being inside the facility's required-attendance
PM).
zone (see note);
Report Type
(and Strict Interval / Relaxed Interval)
- Absentee: Persons who were not present
during some part of each specific time interval of
the required-attendance period.
Exception: With "Relaxed Interval", only persons
absent for the whole day are listed (if two intervals,
both will be reported the same).
- Arrival/Departure: The time of the first arrival
and last departure for all persons present on
each day covered by the report.
- Early Departure: Persons who left before the
end of one or more time intervals of the
required-attendance period.
Note: With "Strict Interval", persons who leave during
a required time-interval, and then return after-hours
(on the same workday) are treated as early
departures. Select "Relaxed Interval" to stop this.
- Late Arrival: Persons who arrived after the
beginning of one or more time intervals of the
required-attendance period.
Note: With "Strict Interval", persons who arrive and
leave beforehand (on the same workday) and then
return during a required time interval are treated as
late arrivals. Select "Relaxed Interval" to stop this.
- Totalization: The duration each person spent
inside the facility on each day during the
required-attendance times.
14
v4.61: After selecting "Report Type: Roll Call", select
"System" (system-wide), or an individual area, as
desired. (If you select "System", the report will list
persons on an area-by-area basis.)
- In/Out Status: A list of all users, showing
whether they are presently tracked as being
inside or outside of the facility's requiredattendance zone (see note).
Tip: Persons last reported as 'In', but with no card
activity for 24 hours will be set as 'Out'.
Note: For details on setting up a ‘Required
Attendance Zone’, refer to "Reader 1 & 2 Settings for
a Door".
Attendance Period
A time period (previously-defined) that specifies
when persons are required to be inside the
facility.
An attendance period is not required for
"Arrival/Departure", "Roll-Call" or "In/Out Status"
reports. To set up an attendance period, refer to
"Required-Attendance Time Periods".
[Search For] / [Clear Search]
- This displays or closes the centre of the screen,
which contains selections for 'fine-tuning' the
report to a specific person, or users with a
certain authority-profile or other criteria.
To clear a selection: Select it and use your
Backspace or Delete key.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Searching by Name: For reports that allow searching
by user-name, you can enter the 1st or last name
only, 1st and last name (separated with a space), or
"LastName, 1stName". If searching for a first or last
name, you can enter the first few characters plus an
asterisk (e.g., nam*).
Custom User Field: This pertains to (optional) custom
user information categories that can appear at the
bottom of the 'User' screen.
Note: Reports cannot be filtered on multi-line fields.
Be sure to make your selection with this in mind.
Past Employees Deleted from the System: You can
type a name rather than selecting it. This allows
running a report on persons (and/or items) that have
been recently deleted.
- [Run]: This runs the report based on your
selected criteria. Additional screens will appear
depending on your selections (such as the
printer selection form, report viewer, etc.).
Report Destination / Output To
- Screen: This has the report sent to the 'Report
Viewer' window for viewing and/or printing
desired pages;
- Printer: This allows selecting a printer and
page-range, etc., and printing the report (without
viewing it first);
- Text File: This has the report saved as a
'comma-delimited' text file for manipulation with
another program. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
- Report Emulation Text File: This has the
report saved as a formatted text file for viewing,
printing, or editing with a text editor or word
processor. Allows you to change the location
and/or filename if desired.
- Archive: This has the report saved as a
viewable archived report for viewing or printing
at a later time. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
(Remaining Buttons)
(You may need to scroll within the form and/or resize
the window to view additional items. Click Reset on the
toolbar to reset the desktop.)
- [File...]: This allows changing the location and
file-name for a report being saved for future
viewing, printing, etc. Tip: Use a different
name each time to avoid overwriting previous
reports.
- [Load Archived Report]: This allows browsing
for, and opening a previously saved reportarchive (not for use with text files). The report
will appear in the report-viewer window for
viewing and/or printing.
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
15
Required-Attendance Time-Periods
Attendance Periods
Attendance periods are weekly blocks of time
that allow time & attendance reports to 'know'
when users are supposed to be in the facility.
Schedules for cardholder access must span a larger
period of time than the applicable attendance period--to
let people enter the facility before their shift begins, and
leave after it ends.
Adding (Setting up) an Attendance
Period
Select Attendance Period from your MyTools
bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree', open the
Time and Attendance branch, and select
Attendance Period.
Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired account
near the centre of the screen. Tip: This option
appears only if you didn't already have an account
'open' in the tree.
Now, click [+] at the bottom of the form, or
right-click the form, and select Add New from
the pop-up menu.
Alternative: You can also select a blank/grey item from
the list (bottom of the form). Note: Grid view does not
apply to this screen.
The attendance period is shown graphically,
for Sunday through Saturday. Add a new timeinterval by right-clicking a specific day, and
selecting Create New Time Interval.
Then, drag the interval and/or its end-points to
the desired location. Tip: Copying, pasting,
and deleting is also allowed when you rightclick a specific time-interval.
Repeat this process until the desired times are
set up for all days in the attendance period.
(You can use up to 6 unique time intervals
throughout each schedule.)
Now refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen for additional information.
Viewing or Changing Settings for a
Required-Attendance Period
Select Attendance Period from your MyTools
bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree', open the
Time and Attendance branch, and select
Attendance Period.
Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired account
near the centre of the screen.
Now, choose the desired attendance period
from the list (bottom of the form), and refer to
the selection-descriptions for this screen while
viewing and/or changing settings as desired.
Deleting an Attendance Period
Select Attendance Period from your MyTools
bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree', open the
Time and Attendance branch, and select
Attendance Period.
Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired account
near the centre of the screen.
Now, choose the desired attendance period
from the list (bottom of the form). Then, rightclick a blank area near the bottom, and select
Delete. When asked to confirm, choose Yes.
Tip: You can copy all settings for an attendance
st
period, and paste them into another one: In the 1 one,
right-click near the bottom of the form, and select Copy.
Then, select a blank/new attendance period from the
list, right-click near the bottom of the form, and select
Paste. After 'pasting', change the name and any
settings as desired. Note: 'Copy' and 'Paste' are also
available from the Edit menu.
16
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Reports Time and Attendance Attendance Period
Screen Reference
Pick-Lists (bottom of the
Form)
- Attendance Period (bottom of form):
This is where you select an attendance
period to view or edit. This area
shows a reference number assigned
by the system, and the name of the
attendance period, once defined;
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name/description for
the attendance period, or its intended
use;
(Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
- This area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
account that your attendance-period pertains to. Tip: This option
appears only if you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
On this Form (Intervals )
- Days of the Week (with Associated TimeIntervals): The days of the week showing the
time intervals for each day. (To add an
interval, right-click the specific day. To adjust
an interval, drag the interval and/or its endpoints to the desired position.)
Tips: You can copy and paste (or delete) time
intervals using the right-click menu. Up to 6 unique
time-intervals can be used as desired throughout the
weekdays in each attendance period.
Split Shift: Be sure to include an interval for after a
meal break—assuming the break is not part of the
'required attendance' times.
Work Shift that Spans Midnight: In this case, each day
will need two intervals for the times before and after
midnight, plus any other required intervals (such as for
after a meal break—assuming the break is not part of
the 'required attendance' times).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
17
Roll-Call Reports (v4.61)
In/Out Status Tracking: This feature
requires "User In/Out Status Tracking" to be
enabled.
Related Setting: YourAccount, Account
Information, Setup (tab), "Enable User
In/Out Status for this Account"
An instant roll-call feature has been
added to the status toolbar.
This sends a roll-call report for your
monitored account to your default Windows
printer.
(The report will list persons on an area-byarea basis.)
Note: A communications session with the
applicable panel(s) must be in effect.
To start a communications session:
1) Select Communications from your MyTools bar, or
click [Communications] in the 'tree', and select
Pending/OnLine. 2) Click [Edit], and make your
selections from the screen that appears.
Tip: Once there, you can open the online help at the
applicable topic by pressing F1.
To set or change the account to be monitored:
1) Click [Monitor] near the far-right end of the toolbar;
2) Make your selections from the screen that appears.
To select a default printer under MS Windows:
1) Go to your Windows "Control Panel"; 2) Double-click
"Printers and Faxes"; 3) Double-click the desired
printer.
As well, "Time and Attendance - Roll-Call"
reports can now be run on individual areas.
18
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Reporting on System & Personnel Activity
screen(s) that appear (details to follow).
Activity Reports
Activity reporting allows viewing or printing a
listing of various types of events that have
occurred for a specific account. A date/time
range can be specified, and the report can also
be limited to a specific area, device, person,
etc.
TechTip: Reports pertaining to past events are based
on the present event list, plus any archived data that
has been re-imported using the archive feature.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs".
As well, activity reports can be viewed and/or
printed right away, saved for future reference,
or exported for manipulation with another
program.
For better performance, activity reports cover only the
latest 5000 messages in the activity log. For even
faster execution, keep the activity log to a suitable size
via regular use of the Archive and/or Purge features.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs",
and "Removing old Activity or Audit Logs".
Running an Activity Report
1) Select Activity Report from your MyTools
bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree', and select
Activity.
2) Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired
account near the centre of the screen.
Tip: This option appears only if you didn't already
have an account 'open' in the tree.
3) Select the date/time range to be covered by
the report (under "From" and "To").
Tip: See the item-descriptions if you need help.
To clear an individual selection, select it and use
your Backspace or Delete key. To reset/clear all
selections, scroll down and click [Reset].
Tip: You can scroll within the form to view
additional items if necessary.
6) Select a report 'destination' (i.e., whether it is
to be viewed, printed, or saved as a file).
If you select "Archive" or a type of "File", click
[File...], set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save.
7) Click [Run], and respond to any additional
Welcome
Report
If Printing an Activity Report
To print a report without viewing it first: Select
the type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select Printer as the destination. Then,
select Run, and click OK when the 'Print'
screen appears. Tip: To select a different
printer click Printer, and make your selection
from the 'Print Setup' screen that appears.
To view a report before printing: Select the
type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select 'Screen' as the destination.
Then, click Run.
For details on viewing and printing the
displayed report, refer to "Working with the
Report Viewer".
If Exporting an Activity Report as a File
(Archive/Text File/Report Emulation
File)
Select the type of report and other criteria as
usual, and the desired file-type as the
'destination'. Then, click [File...]. In the next
screen, set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save when finished. Then
click Run.
Viewing/Printing a Previously Saved
Activity Report-Archive
4) Select the types of events to be included in
the report (you must select at least one).
5) To limit the report to a specific person, area,
door, etc., click [Search For], and select the
desired criteria.
21-0381E v4.9.1
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Control
Select Activity Report from your MyTools bar,
or click [Reports] in the 'tree', and select
Activity. Then, click [Load archived report]
at the bottom of the form (scroll down if
necessary).
Multi-Account Systems: You do not have to select an
account since that was done when the report was
archived.
In the next screen, locate and select the
desired archived report (.raf), and click Open
(or simply double-click the file).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Screen Reference
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
19
user information categories that can appear
at the bottom of the 'User' screen.
Note: Reports cannot be filtered on multiline fields. Be sure to make your selection
with this in mind.
Show on Resolution: This lets you have the
list include events depending on whether or
not they have been 'resolved' (i.e., dealtwith). "All": This shows all events--including
ones not associated with the
comment/resolution feature.
For details on resolving events, refer to
"Dealing with Alarms (Comment / Resolve)"
in the section on monitoring activity
(previous).
Show on Priority: This allows limiting the
window to show only events of a desired
priority value (or range).
Show on Custom Filter: This allows limiting
the window to show only events of a desired
'custom-filter' value (or range).
Also See: To assign priorities or 'Custom
Filter' values, refer to the configuration topic:
"Customizing How Events are Displayed".
Tip: To clear an individual selection, select
it and use your Backspace or Delete key. To
reset/clear all selections, click the [Reset]
(Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
button at the bottom of the form (scroll down
- This area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
if this button is not visible).
account that your report pertains to. Tip: This option appears only if
Past Employees Deleted from the System:
you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
You can type a name rather than selecting it.
This allows running a report on persons
(and/or items) that have been recently deleted.
Reports Activity
Report Destination / Output To
Event Period
- From and To (date and time): The beginning
and end date from the event log to be checked
for cardholder activity.
Tip: You can change the dates manually, or click the
arrow to access a pop-up calendar. To set the times,
click within the 'hours' or 'minutes', and use the
up/down arrow keys.
Event Type
- The various types of messages that can be
included in the report (select the ones that you
want included).
Note: You must select at least one event-type.
"Toggle All" allows selecting or de-selecting all eventtypes.
[Search For] / [Clear Search]
- This displays or closes the centre of the screen,
which contains selections for 'fine-tuning' the
report to a specific person, area, door, etc.
Custom User Field: This pertains to (optional) custom
20
- Screen: This has the report sent to the 'Report
Viewer' window for viewing and/or printing
desired pages;
- Printer: This allows selecting a printer and
page-range, etc., and printing the report (without
viewing it first);
- Text File: This has the report saved as a
'comma-delimited' text file for manipulation with
another program. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
- Report Emulation Text File: This has the
report saved as a formatted text file for viewing,
printing, or editing with a text editor or word
processor. Allows you to change the location
and/or filename if desired.
- Archive: This has the report saved as a
viewable archived report for viewing or printing
at a later time. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
(Remaining Buttons)
Tip: You can scroll within the form and/or resize the
window to view additional items when necessary.
(Click Reset on the toolbar to reset the desktop.)
- [File...]: This allows changing the location and
file-name for a report being saved for future
viewing, printing, etc. Tip: Use a different
name each time to avoid overwriting previous
reports.
- [Reset]: This provides a quick way to reset/clear
the "Search for" criteria and other selections on
the form.
- [Load Archived Report]: This allows browsing
for, and opening a previously saved reportarchive (not for use with text files). The report
will appear in the report-viewer window for
viewing and/or printing.
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
- [Run]: This runs the report based on your
selected criteria. Additional screens will appear
depending on your selections (such as the
printer selection form, report viewer, etc.).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
21
Reporting on Previous Guard-Tours
Guard Tour Reports
If Printing a Guard Tour Report
Guard tour reports allow viewing or printing a
listing of events pertaining to previous guard
tours for a specific account. A date/time range
can be specified, and the report can also be
limited to specific items such as guard tour
alarms, or the guard arriving early or late.
To print a report without viewing it first: Select
the type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select Printer as the destination. Then,
select Run, and click OK when the 'Print'
screen appears. Tip: To select a different
printer click Printer, and make your selection
from the 'Print Setup' screen that appears.
To view a report before printing: Select the
type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select 'Screen' as the destination.
Then, click Run.
For details on viewing and printing the
displayed report, refer to "Working with the
Report Viewer".
TechTip: Reports pertaining to past events are based
on the present event list, plus any archived data that
has been re-imported using the archive feature.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs".
Active Guard Tours: For details on monitoring a guardtour, refer to "Guard Tours".
As well, guard tour reports can be viewed
and/or printed right away, saved for future
reference, or exported for manipulation with
another program.
For better performance, activity and guard-tour reports
cover only the latest 5000 messages in the activity log.
For even faster execution, keep the activity log to a
suitable size via regular use of the Archive and/or
Purge features.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs",
and "Removing old Activity or Audit Logs".
Running a Guard Tour Report
1) Select Guard Tour Report from your
MyTools bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree',
and select Guard Tour.
2) Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired
account near the centre of the screen.
Tip: This option appears only if you didn't already
have an account 'open' in the tree.
3) Select the date/time range to be covered by
the report (under "From" and "To").
Tip: See the item-descriptions if you need help.
4) Select the types of events to be included in
the report (you must select at least one).
5) Select a report 'destination' (i.e., whether it is
to be viewed, printed, or saved as a file).
If you select "Archive" or a type of "File", click
[File...], set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save.
6) Click [Run], and respond to any additional
screen(s) that appear (details to follow).
If Exporting a Guard Tour Report as a
File (Archive/Text File/Report Emulation
File)
Select the type of report and other criteria as
usual, and the desired file-type as the
'destination'. Then, click [File...]. In the next
screen, set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save when finished. Then
click Run.
Viewing/Printing a Previously Saved
Guard Tour Report-Archive
Select Guard Tour Report from your MyTools
bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree', and select
Guard Tour. Then, click [Load archived
report] at the bottom of the form.
Multi-Account Systems: You do not have to select an
account since that was done when the report was
archived.
In the next screen, locate and select the
desired archived report (.raf), and click Open
(or simply double-click the file).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Screen Reference
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
22
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Event Period
- From and To (date and time): The
beginning and end date from the event
log to be checked for guard-tour
events.
Reports Guard Tour
Tip: You can change the dates manually,
or click the arrow to access a pop-up
calendar. To set the times, click within the
'hours' or 'minutes', and use the up/down
arrow keys.
Event Type
- The various guard tour events to be
included in the report (the guard
arriving late, etc.). Select the ones
that you want included).
Note: You must select at least one eventtype. "Toggle All" allows selecting or deselecting all event-types.
Report Destination / Output To
- Screen: This has the report sent to the
'Report Viewer' window for viewing
and/or printing desired pages;
- Printer: This allows selecting a printer
and page-range, etc., and printing the
report (without viewing it first);
- Text File: This has the report saved
(Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
as a 'comma-delimited' text file for
- This area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
manipulation with another program.
account that your report pertains to. Tip: This option appears only if
Allows you to change the location
you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
and/or filename if desired.
archive (not for use with text files). The report
- Report Emulation Text File: This has the
will appear in the report-viewer window for
report saved as a formatted text file for viewing,
viewing and/or printing.
printing, or editing with a text editor or word
processor. Allows you to change the location
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
and/or filename if desired.
- [Run]: This runs the report based on your
- Archive: This has the report saved as a
selected criteria. Additional screens will appear
viewable archived report for viewing or printing
depending on your selections (such as the
at a later time. Allows you to change the
printer selection form, report viewer, etc.).
location and/or filename if desired.
(Remaining Buttons)
- [File...]: This allows changing the location and
file-name for a report being saved for future
viewing, printing, etc. Tip: Use a different
name each time to avoid overwriting previous
reports.
- [Reset]: This provides a quick way to reset/clear
all selected items on the screen.
- [Load Archived Report]: This allows browsing
for, and opening a previously saved report21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
23
Reporting on User Access Authorities (by Area, Door, or Floor)
User Access Reports
User-access reports provide a list of the
persons with authority to access a specific
area, door, or floor on specific weekdays and
times. You can also list:  Cards that have
expired;  Cards that will expire in the future
(selectable date-range);  Cards that have not
been used since a specific date;  Cards
identified as being 'Lost' • Cards that have not
been used in selected area(s) (selectable daterange).
Related: Users, Lost Cards
 Cards that have been Lost
Tip: This is a powerful report that checks more than
schedules and area assignments. It also checks things
like "Master Override", scheduled door unlockings, etc.
Note: This report pertains to users who are intended
to have access based on system configuration. (It
cannot allow for things such as manual door
unlockings.)
User-access reports can be viewed and/or
printed right away, saved for future reference,
or exported for manipulation with another
program.
Running a User-Access Report
1)
2)
Select User Access Report from your
MyTools bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree',
and select User Access.
Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired
account near the centre of the screen.
Tip: This option appears only if you didn't already
have an account 'open' in the tree.
3)
Refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while setting up your report as
desired.
4)
Click [Run], and respond to any additional
screen(s) that appear (details to follow).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
If Printing a User-Access Report
To print a report without viewing it first: Select
the type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select Printer as the destination. Then,
select Run, and click OK when the 'Print'
screen appears. Tip: To select a different
24
printer click Printer, and make your selection
from the 'Print Setup' screen that appears.
To view a report before printing: Select the
type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select 'Screen' as the destination.
Then, click Run.
For details on viewing and printing the
displayed report, refer to "Working with the
Report Viewer".
If Exporting a Report as a File
(Archive/Text File/Report Emulation File)
Select the type of report and other criteria as
usual, and the desired file-type as the
'destination'. Then, click [File...]. In the next
screen, set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save when finished.
Then click Run.
Viewing/Printing a Previously Saved
Report-Archive
Select User Access Report from your
MyTools bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree',
and select User Access. Then, click [Load
archived report] at the bottom of the form
(scroll down if necessary).
Multi-Account Systems: You do not have to select an
account since that was done when the report was
archived.
In the next screen, locate and select the
desired archived report (.raf), and click Open
(or simply double-click the file).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Screen Reference
Report Type
- Select the type of information to be included in
your report.
User Access to Area/Door/Floor: This lists
users/cards that have access to a specific area, door,
or floor during selected days and times.
Expired Cards: This lists cards that are presently
expired, or that will expire in the future (per your
selections). Tip: You can change the date numerals
manually, or click the arrows to access pop-up
calendars.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Inactive Cards: This lists cards that have
note been used since a selected date. Tip:
You can change the date numerals
manually, or click the arrow to access a
pop-up calendar.
Lost Cards: This lists cards that have been
identified as 'lost'. User names and IDs will
be included in the report for cards set as
'Lost' through the "Users" screen.
Related: Users, Lost Cards
 Cards that have been Lost
Inactive Cards in Areas: This lists cards
that have note been used in selected areas
(selectable date-range)
Reports User Access
Time Range
- Select the time of day to be examined
for cardholder access (i.e., the starting
time and end time).
Tip: To set the times, click within the
'hours' or 'minutes', and use the up/down
arrow keys. Note: The report will include
everyone with access during any portion
of your selected time range.
Selected Days
- Select the weekdays to be examined
for cardholder access.
(Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
- This area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
account that your report pertains to. Tip: This option appears only if
you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
Note: You must select at least one
weekday. Note: The report will include everyone with
access on any of the days you select.
- Area is not scheduled, list users with access
when area is off: This causes the report to
disregard if the area is presently armed.
- Process Authority Plus: Select this for users
that may have a second authority assigned
(authority plus).
- Custom User Field x: This allows selecting
one or two custom user fields to be included in
the report.
Note: These cannot be multi-line fields.
Report Destination / Output To
- Screen: This has the report sent to the 'Report
Viewer' window for viewing and/or printing
desired pages;
- Printer: This allows selecting a printer and
page-range, etc., and printing the report (without
viewing it first);
- Text File: This has the report saved as a
'comma-delimited' text file for manipulation with
another program. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
- Report Emulation Text File: This has the
report saved as a formatted text file for viewing,
printing, or editing with a text editor or word
processor. Allows you to change the location
and/or filename if desired.
- Archive: This has the report saved as a
viewable archived report for viewing or printing
at a later time. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
(Remaining Buttons)
- [File...]: This allows changing the location and
file-name for a report being saved for future
viewing, printing, etc. Tip: Use a different
name each time to avoid overwriting previous
reports.
- [Reset]: This provides a quick way to reset/clear
the "Search for" criteria and other selections on
the form.
- [Load Archived Report]: This allows browsing
for, and opening a previously saved reportarchive (not for use with text files). The report
will appear in the report-viewer window for
viewing and/or printing.
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
25
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
- [Run]: This runs the report based on your
selected criteria. Additional screens will appear
depending on your selections (such as the
printer selection form, report viewer, etc.).
26
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc.
Customizable Reports
The VEREX Director software allows viewing
or printing a listing of programmed information
in your system. This includes settings for the
system, areas, devices, panel users, etc.
Related Topic: You can also link to the database and
set up custom queries of nearly any scope and content.
Details: Advanced Database Features
These reports show a list of your selected
items, in a customizable format:
 Set the fields/settings to appear in the report,
and the order of these 'columns';
 Include only the users/items that match
specific criteria;
 Set the sort order for the listed users/items.
Tip: These reports can also be saved as a 'commadelimited' text file for manipulation with another
program.
Running these Types of Reports
1a) To view or print a customizable list of users,
select User Report from your MyTools bar,
or click [Reports] in the 'tree', and select
Users .
1b) For a customizable list of other programmed
items, select Panel Configuration Report
from your MyTools bar, or click [Reports] in
the 'tree', and select Panel Configuration.
2) Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired
account in the account selection 'tree' near
the centre of the screen.
Tip: This option appears only if you didn't already
have an account 'open' in the tree.
3)
4)
5)
Panel Configuration Reports: Select the
"Type" of report (e.g., list settings for areas,
doors, schedules, etc.).
Select the columns of items to be included in
the report (  ).
Tip: For more information, refer to "Columns" in
the selection-descriptions.
Select a report 'destination' (i.e., whether the
report is to be viewed, or printed without
viewing it first).
Tip: If saving a report as a text file, click [File...],
set the location and filename as desired, and click
Save.
6)
Welcome
Report
If Printing one of These Reports
To print a report without viewing it first: Select
the type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select Printer as the destination. Then,
select Run, and click OK when the 'Print'
screen appears. Tip: To select a different
printer click Printer, and make your selection
from the 'Print Setup' screen that appears.
To view a report before printing: Select the
type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select 'Screen' as the destination.
Then, click Run.
For details on viewing and printing the
displayed report, refer to "Working with the
Report Viewer".
If Exporting one of these Reports as a
Text File
Select "User", and set the 'destination' as
"Text File". Then, click [File...]. In the next
screen, set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save when finished.
Then click Run.
Tip: The report will be saved as a 'comma-delimited'
text file that can be manipulated with another program
as desired.
Viewing/Printing a Previously Saved
Report-Archive
Select the desired type of report as described
previously ("Users", or "Panel Configuration").
Then, click [Load archived report] at the
bottom of the form.
Multi-Account Systems: You do not have to select an
account since that was done when the report was
archived.
In the next screen, locate and select the
desired archived report (.raf), and click Open
(or simply double-click the file).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Screen Reference
Click [Run], and respond to any additional
screen(s) that appear (details to follow).
21-0381E v4.9.1
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
27
Reports Users;
Reports Panel Configuration
- Type (Panel Config. Reports only):
The desired topic to be covered by the
report (areas, doors, etc.).
Note: Reports pertaining to "Areas" and
physical devices (modules, doors, etc.) are
available only for operators with the
applicable 'Configuration' permissions.
- (Columns): Data fields/settings to be
included in the report.
Tip: The "Group" column in panel config.
reports pertains to the "Panel Group" (e.g.,
location) for the specific panel.
Set the Column Order: To change the
(Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
position of a column, click the column once
- This area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
to select it, and then click-and-drag it to the
account that your report pertains to. Tip: This option appears only if
new location. Tip: You can use the
you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
horizontal scroll-bar to view additional
columns.
manipulation with another program. Allows you
Select Desired Columns: Click the check-box for
to change the location and/or filename if
each column to appear in the report (  ). Tip: You
desired.
will be notified if you selected more than can fit in the
space available (de-select some if required).
Note: Any custom user categories (department,
position, etc.) set as the "Memo" data type (multi-line
Setting the Sort-Order: To sort the report by any one
edit) will be omitted.
value (such as last name), open the 'sort' box for the
desired column (click the down arrow), and select the
(Remaining Buttons)
desired sort order (ascending or descending).
- [File...]: This allows changing the location and
Limiting to People/Items that match some Criteria: To
file-name for a report being saved for future
limit the report to persons/items that match a specific
viewing, printing, etc. Tip: Use a different
value (authority, custom user category, etc.), open the
name each time to avoid overwriting previous
'filter' box for the desired column (click the down
arrow), and select an item from the list. Tip: You can
reports.
filter on multiple columns if desired. Note: Reports
- [Reset]: This provides a quick way to reset/clear
cannot be filtered on multi-line fields. Be sure to make
all selected items on the screen.
your selection with this in mind.
- [Load Archived Report]: This allows browsing
"Input Point" Panel Configuration Reports: To allow
reporting on input points for a specific panel, filtering
for, and opening a previously saved reportmust be selected for the applicable panel group first.
archive (not for use with text files). The report
This will enable the "Panel" filtering checkbox to
will appear in the report-viewer window for
allow selecting a specific panel. [Select All
viewing and/or printing.
Data] and [Clear All Data]: These buttons
allow selecting or deselecting all fields/columns
for the report.
Report Destination / Output To
- Screen: This has the report sent to the 'Report
Viewer' window for viewing and/or printing
desired pages;
- Printer: This allows selecting a printer and
page-range, etc., and printing the report (without
viewing it first).
- Text File (for User reports): This has the report
saved as a 'comma-delimited' text file for
28
- [Run]: This runs the report based on your
selected criteria. Additional screens will appear
depending on your selections (such as the
printer selection form, report viewer, etc.).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Reporting on Operator Audits or Panel Communications Logs
Audit Reports
Audit reporting allows viewing or printing a
listing of changes made by operators, or
records of panel communications sessions. A
date/time range can be specified, and the
report can also be limited to desired criteria.
TechTip: Reports pertaining to past events are based
on the present event list, plus any archived data that
has been re-imported using the archive feature.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs".
As well, audit reports can be viewed and/or
printed right away, saved for future reference,
or exported for manipulation with another
program.
For better performance, be sure to select the smallest
date-range that meets your requirements. Also, you
can keep the audit log to a suitable size via regular use
of the Archive and/or Purge features.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs",
and "Removing old Activity or Audit Logs".
Running an Audit Report
1) Select Audit Report from your MyTools bar,
or click [Reports] in the 'tree', and select
Audit Report.
2) Select the date/time range to be covered by
the report (under "From" and "To").
Tip: See the item-descriptions if you need help.
3) Select the desired criteria for the report.
(Refer to the details under "Search Criteria".)
4) Select a report 'destination' (i.e., whether it is
to be viewed, printed, or saved as a file).
If you select "Archive" or a type of "File", click
[File...], set the location and filename as desired,
and click Save.
To view a report before printing: Select the
type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select 'Screen' as the destination.
Then, click Run.
For details on viewing and printing the
displayed report, refer to "Working with the
Report Viewer".
If Exporting an Audit Report as a File
(Archive/Text File/Report Emulation
File)
Select the type of report and other criteria as
usual, and the desired file-type as the
'destination'. Then, click [File...]. In the next
screen, set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save when finished.
Then click Run.
Viewing/Printing a Previously Saved
Audit Report-Archive
Select Audit Report from your MyTools bar,
or click [Reports] in the 'tree', and select
Audit Report. Then, click [Load archived
report] at the bottom of the form.
In the next screen, locate and select the
desired archived report (.raf), and click Open
(or simply double-click the file).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
Screen Reference
5) Click [Run], and respond to any additional
screen(s) that appear (details to follow).
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
If Printing an Audit Report
To print a report without viewing it first: Select
the type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select Printer as the destination. Then,
select Run, and click OK when the 'Print'
screen appears. Tip: To select a different
printer click Printer, and make your selection
from the 'Print Setup' screen that appears.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
29
Reports Audit Report
Log Period
- From and To (date and time): The beginning
and end date from the audit log to be
scanned for the report.
Tip: You can change the dates manually, or click
the arrow to access a pop-up calendar. To set the
times, click within the 'hours' or 'minutes', and use
the up/down arrow keys.
Client/Server Systems: Times are stored as GMT
in the database, and adjusted for correct display in
the time-zone at each specific workstation.
Search Criteria
- Log Type: Select "Operator" for
configuration changes made by operator(s),
or "Communication" for panel update
sessions.
- Account: Select a specific account, or "All"
accounts.
- Action: This changes depending on the type
of report:
For an Operator audit report: The type of action
that was performed (add, delete, etc.). "All" is
recommended here, unless you're looking for
something more specific.
For a Communications Log Report: The type of
communications session (normal/sync , get from
panel, or send to panel).
- Operator (operator audit report only): Select a
(Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
- The area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
account that your report pertains to. Tip: This option appears only if
you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
desired operator, or "All" for audits by any
operator.
- Topic (operator audit report only): This is the type
of information that was changed. Select "All" for
changes made to any topic.
Report Options
- Show Transaction Date/Time (for communication
logs): The date and time for each
communications event will be shown only if this
is selected ().
- Show Transaction Details (for operator logs):
Selecting this () will cause details for user and
operator audits to be included in the report.
Note: This data will be available for reporting only if
this feature is turned on under “[Management],
Reporting”.
Details: Detailed Operator and User Audit Trail
(V4.6)
Director-Server Language: Some of the detailed audit
text comes through the Director-server. To
30
temporarily set it to a specific language, right-click the
Director-Server keypad/folder icon near the right-hand
end of the Windows taskbar, and make your selection
under “Language”.
Report Destination / Output To
- Screen: This has the report sent to the 'Report
Viewer' window for viewing and/or printing
desired pages;
- Printer: This allows selecting a printer and
page-range, etc., and printing the report (without
viewing it first);
- Text File: This has the report saved as a
'comma-delimited' text file for manipulation with
another program. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
- Report Emulation Text File: This has the
report saved as a formatted text file for viewing,
printing, or editing with a text editor or word
processor. Allows you to change the location
and/or filename if desired.
- Archive: This has the report saved as a
viewable archived report for viewing or printing
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
at a later time. Allows you to change the
location and/or filename if desired.
Tip: See the item-descriptions if you need help.
(Remaining Buttons)
- [File...]: This allows changing the location and
file-name for a report being saved for future
viewing, printing, etc. Tip: Use a different
name each time to avoid overwriting previous
reports.
- [Reset]: This provides a quick way to reset the
search criteria (to "Operator" audit report, and
find "All" audits).
- [Load Archived Report]: This allows browsing
for, and opening a previously saved reportarchive (not for use with text files). The report
will appear in the report-viewer window for
viewing and/or printing.
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
- [Run]: This runs the report based on your
selected criteria. Additional screens will appear
depending on your selections (such as the
printer selection form, report viewer, etc.).
Reporting on Panel
Diagnostics (V4.4)
Panel Diagnostic Reports
This type of report allows viewing and printing
diagnostics logs generated by the 'Remote
Diagnostics' feature under Control & Status.
Related: Control & Status, Panel Control & Status,
System, [Get System Status]
 Checking System Status (Remote Diagnostics)
As well, panel diagnostic reports can be
viewed and/or printed right away, saved for
future reference, or exported for manipulation
with another program.
Running a Panel Diagnostic Report
Tip: This option appears only if you didn't already
have an account 'open' in the tree.
3) Select the desired report from the list near the
middle of the screen.
Welcome
Report
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
If Printing an Activity Report
To print a report without viewing it first: Select
the type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select Printer as the destination. Then,
select Run, and click OK when the 'Print'
screen appears. Tip: To select a different
printer click Printer, and make your selection
from the 'Print Setup' screen that appears.
To view a report before printing: Select the
type of report and other criteria as usual,
and select 'Screen' as the destination.
Then, click Run.
For details on viewing and printing
displayed reports, refer to "Working with
the Report Viewer".
If Exporting an Activity Report as a File
(Archive/Text File/Report Emulation
File)
Select the type of report and other criteria as
usual, and the desired file-type as the
'destination'. Then, click [File...]. In the next
screen, set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save when finished.
Then click Run.
Viewing/Printing a Previously Saved
Activity Report-Archive
Select Activity Report from your MyTools bar,
or click [Reports] in the 'tree', and select
Activity. Then, click [Load archived report]
at the bottom of the form (scroll down if
necessary).
1) Select Panel Diagnostic Report from your
MyTools bar, or click [Reports] in the 'tree',
and select Panel Diagnostic.
2) Multi-Account Systems: Select the desired
account near the centre of the screen.
21-0381E v4.9.1
4) Select a report 'destination' (i.e., whether it is
to be viewed, printed, or saved as a file).
If you select "Archive" or a type of "File", click
[File...], set the location and filename as
desired, and click Save.
5) Click [Run], and respond to any additional
screen(s) that appear (details to follow).
Control
Multi-Account Systems: You do not have to select an
account since that was done when the report was
archived.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
31
In the next screen, locate and select Reports Panel Diagnostic
the desired archived report (.raf), and
click Open (or simply double-click the
file).
For details on viewing and printing displayed
reports, refer to "Working with the Report
Viewer".
Screen Reference
(Top of the Form)
- Panel: Select the panel you are
interested in here.
- Diagnostic Reports: The middle of
the screen shows a list of diagnostics
logs/reports that you can select from.
Tip: These logs are generated by the
'Remote Diagnostics' feature under Control
& Status.
Related: Control & Status, Panel
Control & Status, System, [Get System
Status]
 Checking System Status (Remote
Diagnostics)
Note: The Director software retains 24
months worth of diagnostics sessions, or
the last 100—whichever is greater.
Report Destination / Output To
- Screen: This has the report sent to the (Multi-Account Systems: Account Selection 'Tree')
- The area (near the centre of the screen) is where you select the
'Report Viewer' window for viewing
account that your report pertains to. Tip: This option appears only if
and/or printing desired pages;
you didn't already have an account 'open' in the tree.
- Printer: This allows selecting a printer
and page-range, etc., and printing the
file-name for a report being saved for future
report (without viewing it first);
viewing, printing, etc. Tip: Use a different
name each time to avoid overwriting previous
- Text File: This has the report saved as a
reports.
'comma-delimited' text file for manipulation with
another program. Allows you to change the
- [Reset]: This provides a quick way to reset/clear
location and/or filename if desired.
selections on the form.
- Report Emulation Text File: This has the
- [Load Archived Report]: This allows browsing
report saved as a formatted text file for viewing,
for, and opening a previously saved reportprinting, or editing with a text editor or word
archive (not for use with text files). The report
processor. Allows you to change the location
will appear in the report-viewer window for
and/or filename if desired.
viewing and/or printing.
- Archive: This has the report saved as a
For details on viewing and printing displayed reports,
refer to "Working with the Report Viewer".
viewable archived report for viewing or printing
at a later time. Allows you to change the
- [Run]: This runs the report based on your
location and/or filename if desired.
selected criteria. Additional screens will appear
depending on your selections (such as the
(Remaining Buttons)
printer selection form, report viewer, etc.).
- [File...]: This allows changing the location and
32
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Working with the Report Viewer
The Report Viewer
When a report is set to be
viewed, it appears with a
toolbar allowing:
When Viewing a Report
 Viewing different pages of the
report;
 Setting the portion of each
page that will be visible at one
time (zooming in or out);
 Selecting a printer, and/or
setting the pages to be
printed;
 Printing the report.
Setting the Size / Visible
Portion
of a Report
To change the size/visible
portion of a report:
 Select one of the pre-set
magnification levels (page
symbols), or;
 Enter a desired magnification in the "%" box,
and press Enter.
report-viewer toolbar, or click the 'X' in the topright corner of the report viewer window.
Screen Reference
Viewing Different Pages
(Report Viewer Toolbar)
To view a different page:
 Use the 'browse' buttons to find a page
(typical), or;
 Enter a desired page-number into the
'current page' box.
Printing a Report
To print the report that is presently on-screen,
click the print button (printer symbol). When
the next screen appears, select your desired
page-range, etc., and click OK. Tip: To select
a different printer click Printer, and make your
selection from the 'Print Setup' screen that
appears.
VEREX Director automatically sets the preferred page
orientation for each report (portrait or landscape). This
setting should be left as-is.
Closing a Displayed Report and
Returning to the Main Screen
To close the report viewer window, and return
to the main desktop, click [Close] on the
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
- Print (printer symbol): This allows selecting
and/or setting up a printer, and printing either
the whole report, or a specific range of pages.
- Pre-set Magnifications (page symbols):
These selections allow viewing an entire page at
a time, or the page width, or viewing each page
actual-size (100% magnification);
- Zoom (xx%): This area shows the present
magnification level for the displayed report, and
allows entering a different value.
- |< < > >| (browse buttons): These buttons
allow moving to the first, previous, next, or last
page respectively.
- Current Page (xx): This area shows the page
number that is presently displayed, and allows
jumping to a different page by entering the page
number directly.
- [Close]: This closes the report viewer, returning
you to the VEREX Director desktop. (This is the
same as clicking the X in the top-right corner of
the screen.)
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
33
Monitoring System Activity
Alarm and Activity Monitoring
The System Monitoring Window
Alarm and Activity Monitoring through
the VEREX Director System
The monitoring window shows the alarms and
activity messages for the account selected in
the tree (double-click an account to select).
When the VEREX Director system is
connected with specific panel(s), all events
and alarms are transmitted for display in the
monitoring window, allowing the tracking of
guard tours, and to allow for various types of
report generation.
Dial up panels with dedicated external modems (one
panel per modem) can be set to automatically dial-in to
the VEREX Director system to transmit alarms or
blocks of activity messages. In other configurations,
the alarms and events are transmitted when a
connection is made with the specific panel(s)—either
manually, or at scheduled times.
Real-time monitoring (immediate reporting) through
VEREX Director requires that the software remain
connected with the specific panel(s).
Multi-Account Systems: The monitoring window is
activated for a specific account when you double-click
the account (under [Account Folders] in the tree).
For details on activating a panel connection, and the
"Stay Connected" setting, refer to "Panel
Communications and Updates".
To set a dial-up panel to automatically transfer alarms
or blocks of activity messages, refer to the configuration
topic: "Monitoring, Paging, & Remote Mgt. Settings".
Sites Monitored through a CentralMonitoring Station
Sites can additionally be monitored through a
dedicated central-monitoring facility. In this
case, you can set whether only the 'alarms' or
all activity is to be transmitted—on an area-byarea basis. As well, individual sensors (input
points) and monitored panel conditions
(equipment / pseudo-points) can be set as to
the area arming states for which each
condition will be reported to the central-station
(On, Stay, and/or Off).
Monitoring Station Connection: Central monitoring is
supported through:
 The panel's built-in dialler ('Bell 103', 300 baud
modem), and/or;
 An "IP" connection (LAN/WAN--if  v3.3 panel &
software), or;
 A high-security Mark 7 / DVACS connection (Canada).
34
Tip: Alarms typically appear with a red box next to
them (click the red box to open a "Notes" window).
Events with a camera symbol on the left are “Video
Events”. (Details to follow/below.)
Time Format: Beginning with Director v4.5, the time is
indicated in 12 hour or 24 hour format as per the time
format on each specific PC. This is set through the
Windows Control Panel under:
Regional and Language Options
(Regional Options), [Customize], Time.
The top of the monitoring window shows either
the newest messages, or all 'unresolved' (and
higher priority) events first.
As well, the
window can be set to show all activity, or only
specific types of events (saved per operator).
For details, refer to "Limiting the Window to Show Only
Specific Messages", to follow/below).
Tip: You can customize how alarms and events will be
displayed, and assign a sound to specific events if
desired. For details, refer to the configuration topic:
"Customizing How Events are Displayed"
The scroll-bar on the right allows viewing
events that have been pushed off the bottom
of the screen.
Note: The 'heartbeat' icon in the bottom-right corner of
the screen will change to a red  until you select
[Return to Real-Time Mode]. (While scrolling, new
messages will not appear in the window.)
Messages are transmitted the VEREX Director
software:
 When you connect with an associated panel
(such as when updating a panel with
changes, or to check the status of a device);
 When a (dial-up) panel calls in to transmit
messages.
The Archive and Purge features allow keeping the
activity log to a more manageable size.
See: "Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs",
and "Removing old Activity or Audit Logs".
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Split Screen Mode (Show Alarm
Window)
Connecting to the Associated Panel(s),
An Overview:
For operators set to "Show Alarm Window",
unacknowledged alarms will appear in a
separate window at the top.
For the latest up-to-date messages, you must
be connected with the associated panel(s).
(Otherwise, you will see only messages that
were received previously).
Related: [Management], Operator, Operator
 Operators (People who can use this Software)
Notes:  The "unacknowledged alarm" window will be
unavailable (greyed-out) whenever you choose to
[Browse Offline];  Any selections you make under
[Filter] will apply to both parts of the window (details to
follow/below);  Details on acknowledging alarms
follows/below.
The Status Bar (bottom of the form)
The status area at the extreme bottom of the
screen shows whether or not the software is
presently connected with a specific panel,
and/or if an update is presently in progress.
Activity messages are held at the specific panel
whenever it is being updated/synchronized with the
software (the messages will be available for
transmission after the update is finished).
Also See: (Topics Pertaining to Central Monitoring):
 "Primary Reporting" selections under "Monitoring,
Paging, & Remote Mgt. Settings".
 "Reporting" setting under "Areas and Related
Settings".
 "Inputs—Monitored Sensors", and the "Transmit"
selections under "Inputs—Pre-Defined Point Types",
"Inputs—Custom Point Types", and "Equipment
Settings (Pseudo/Internal Inputs)".
'Activating' and Using the
Monitoring Window
Selecting an Account (Multi-Account
Systems)
Click [Account Folders] in the 'tree', and
locate and double-click the desired account.
The monitoring window will show the
messages for the account that have been
received.
Tip: Your selected account will remain 'open' (e.g., for
the event monitoring window) until you select [Account
Folders] or [Management] in the 'tree'. Selecting an
account is typically not required for a single-account
system (single account license and/or operators without
authority to edit account folders).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
1) See if you're already connected by
checking the status bar at the bottom of
the monitoring window.
Multi-account systems: Ensure your
desired account is selected
(click [Account Folders] in the tree, and
then double-click the specific account).
2) If not connected, check to ensure the
communication software is running on
the specific PCs.
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start
the communications service by right-clicking the
icon, and selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
3) Select Communications from your
MyTools bar, or click
[Communications] in the 'tree', and
select Pending/OnLine.
4) Click the [+] at the bottom of the form, or
right-click the form, and select Add New
from the pop-up menu. Then, select the
desired panel(s) (double-click to select),
and set "Action" to "Normal", and
"Frequency" to "Stay Connected" ().
(Click OK when finished.)
5) Check that the connection is made, and
watch for the panel updates to occur.
(Click the 'Panel Group', and look for the status on
the right side of the screen.)
Note: Alarm and activity messages are transferred
after the panel updates (look for a connection state of
'Connected' and 'Idle State'.)
Also See (Related Topics):
+ "Panel Communications and Updates"
Opening and Adjusting the Monitoring
Window
If the monitoring window is not visible, click
[Events] on the toolbar.
If nothing seems to happen, click [Reset] on the toolbar
(and click [Events] again if necessary). Note: If your
desktop was accidentally saved with the monitoring
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
35
window 'undocked' and hidden behind the
main desktop, open the View menu, select
Desktop Settings, and then Default.
To adjust the size of the monitoring
window, position the mouse cursor at
the top of the window, watching for
the cursor to change shape. Then,
click-and-drag the top of the window
to the desired new position.
To maximize the size of the
monitoring window, double-click its title-bar
twice.
To restore the VEREX Director desktop at any time,
simply click Reset on the toolbar.
(If the monitoring window is presently maximized,
double-click its title-bar first.)
Tip: With multi-monitor support, you can place the
monitoring window in a separate screen: Double-click
the monitoring window title-bar, and then drag it onto
the second screen.
Reminders: The monitoring window is updated only
when you are connected with the specific panel(s).
Muti-Account Systems: The monitoring window is
active only while you have a specific account 'open' in
the tree (select [Account Folders], and then doubleclick the account).
Monitoring Window Blank During or After a Panel
Update: The monitoring window may take a minute or
two to refresh at the end of a panel communications
session (please be patient). As well, to ensure the
desired type of messages are shown, click [Filter], and
verify the filtering / sorting selections (details in a
following topic).
Viewing Activity Messages
To view older messages in the monitoring
window, click [Browse Offline], and then use
the scroll-bar on the right (click the up or down
arrows, or slowly drag the control bar in the
middle).
Click [Return to Real-Time Mode] to view the
newest events as they occur. (These will
appear at the top of the monitoring window.)
For longer messages, use the horizontal scrollbar (bottom-right) to view the end or beginning
of the desired message(s).
If you wish to print activity messages, refer to
"Reporting on System & Personnel Activity.
When alarms occur, ensure they are not ignored. Be
sure to dispatch someone to deal with any
conditions that require attention.
Note: Sounds may be associated with alarm
36
messages. (The default for alarms that require
resolution is your PC's "exclamation" sound--as set
through the Windows control-panel.)
To have unacknowledged alarms appear in
a separate window at the top for a specific
operator:
1)
Ensure the specific operator is set for "Show
Alarm Window".
Related: [Management], Operator, Operator
 Operators (People who can use this Software)
2)
Ensure the 'Sort Order' and 'Filtering' is set
as desired under [Filter].
(See "Limiting...", to follow/below);
Note: To return to a single 'pane' monitoring
window, ensure "Show Alarm Window" is NOT
selected on the form for the specific operator.
Also see "Split Screen Mode (Show Alarm
Window)", previous/above.
Screen Reference
- Vertical Scroll-Bar (right-hand side): Allows
scrolling up and down to view older messages in
the monitoring window. (Click the up or down
arrow, or slowly drag the control bar.)
Note: This puts you into "Offline Browsing" mode, and
stops new events from entering the window. (Same
as clicking [Browse Offline].)
- Horizontal Scroll-Bar (bottom-right): Allows
scrolling to the left and right to view longer
messages. (Click the left or right arrow, or drag
and release the control bar.)
- Status Bar (bottom of screen): Shows if the
software is connected with a specific panel, and
if an update is in progress.
- [Browse Offline] / [Return to Real-Time
Mode]: Allows activating the event monitoring
window vs. scrolling inside it.
- [Show Photo]: This allows manually opening
the photo-verification window to view the last 1,
4, or 9 entrants.
For more information, refer to "Visually Verifying Users
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
(Photo-Verification)".
- [Filter]: Allows resorting the event / monitoring
window, limiting the list to show specific types of
messages only, and/or only messages that have
not been 'resolved' (see last 2 items below, plus
"Limiting the Window to Show Only Specific
Messages".);
- (Activity Messages): Each message shows:





A colored bar for the message priority;
The date and time the event occurred;
The type of event/message;
Details on the specific event.
A reference number and the name of the
panel that sent the alarm;
"Session Code" messages pertain to panel
communications/update sessions being started or
completed. (For details on communications sessions
that have occurred, refer to "Panel Communications
and Updates".
"System Check" messages are for internal use, and/or
of interest only when working with your technical
support representative.
------------------------(colored box): Alarms are shown with a
box/button on the left of the message (typically
red, but customizable). Clicking the button
allows entering a comment for the message
(and viewing previous comments), and/or setting
messages as being 'resolved';
: The event has been set as 'Resolved' (dealt with).
(you'll see this only if displaying resolved events);
?: A comment has been entered, but the event was
not set as 'Resolved'.
Sounds: Custom sounds can also be associated with
different types of alarms. The default sound for
alarms that require resolution is the PC's 'exclamation'
sound (as set through the Windows control panel).
Related Topic: Customizing How Events are
Displayed
- Resolve All (Right-click, or from the Edit Menu):
Limiting the Window to Show Only
Specific Messages (Sorting and Filtering)
Operators with "Event Filter" permission can
set the monitoring window to show:




All event messages for an account;
Only 'unresolved' events;
Events of a specific priority range;
Events pertaining to a specific door, area,
person, etc.
Tip: These selections are saved separately for each
operator.
Exception: Scheduled Event Filters can be set up and
assigned to operators--to determine the types of
messages each operator will be able to see during vs.
outside of set times.
Tip: A clock symbol on the [ Filter ] button at the
bottom of the monitoring window indicates that
scheduled event filtering is presently in effect (for the
current operator).
Related Topic(s): Scheduled Event Filtering for
Operators
You can also set the 'sort-order' for messages.
To determine the present sort-order, and
whether or not the list is limited to specific
events, look for references in the title-bar of
the monitoring window.
To set the window to show only specific types
of messages, click [Filter] at the bottom, and
make your selections from the pop-up window.
Tip: You can select [Clear] to remove your present
'filters', and return to showing all messages for the
present account.
Allows entering a comment for all displayed
alarm messages, and setting them all as being
'resolved'.
TechTip: Alarms and events can be set as 'resolvable'
or not (i.e., whether or not the comment/resolution
screen will be available). For details, refer to the
configuration topic: "Customizing How Events are
Displayed".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
37
When you Click [Filter]
Screen Reference
- Sort Order By: This allows listing
messages in order by date/time only,
or showing 'unresolved' (and higher
priority) events first.
- Filter on Resolution: This lets you
have the list include events depending
on whether or not they have been
'resolved' (i.e., dealt-with).
All: This shows all events--including ones
not associated with the comment/resolution
feature (i.e., not set as 'resolvable').
- Filter on Priority: This allows limiting
the window to show only events of a
desired priority value (or range).
- Filter on Custom Filter: This allows
limiting the window to show only
events of a desired 'custom-filter' value
(or range).
Also See: To assign priorities, 'Custom
Filter' values, and other parameters, refer to
the configuration topic: "Customizing How
Events are Displayed".
- [Clear]: Removes all filters--i.e.,
returns to the factory settings (and
closes the 'filter' window).
- [Return to Scheduled Filter]: For an
operator who's selections have temporarily
overridden scheduled event filtering (requires
"Events Filter" permission), selecting this will
return to the scheduled settings.
Note: This button becomes available once the filtering
changes have been saved (e.g., exit, then return to
this screen).
Related Topic(s):  Scheduled Event Filtering for
Operators;  Operator Permissions
[More] / [Hide]
- Filter on Item: For events pertaining to a
specific person or door, etc., select the desired
item here.
38
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
(Click the Coloured Box for an Alarm Message)
Acknowledging Alarms
(Comment / Resolve)
Alarm Notes / Comments
While responding to alarms, you can
enter a note for each alarm
describing what caused it, what was
done to correct the problem, etc. You
can also set the alarm as 'resolved' (
 ), or 'Keep Unresolved' ( ? ).
Tips: Whether 'Resolved' or not, alarms will
be considered to be 'Acknowledged'--unless
you click [Cancel]. You can set the
monitoring window to show only alarms that
either have, or have not been 'resolved' (for
details, refer to the preceding topic).
For operators set to "Show Alarm Window",
unacknowledged alarms will appear in a separate
window at the top.
Related: [Management], Operator, Operator
 Operators (People who can use this Software)
Note: To be available here, sample responses must
be defined first:
Ref: Account Information Event Response
 Event Responses for Acknowledging Alarms
Entering or Viewing Alarm Comments
To enter (or view) an acknowledgement note
for an alarm, click the red area beside the
alarm.
Then, enter the desired message and select
[Resolved], or [Keep Unresolved].
You can enter two or three short notes (saved
individually by clicking OK) or a single larger one for
each alarm as desired.
Screen Reference
- Alarm Detail: Details on the alarm, and when it
occurred.
- Comments: Previously entered comments, plus
an area to enter new one(s). Tip: There is
enough space for two or three short notes
(saved individually by clicking OK), or a single
larger note.
- [Resolved]: Sets the event as having been
dealt-with. If the alarm/monitoring window is not
set to show only unresolved alarms, you'll see
the message with a "" beside it.
- [Keep Unresolved]: This saves your comment,
and displays the event with a "?" beside it to
indicate further resolution is needed.
- [Cancel]: This aborts any changes you entered
in the 'Alarm Acknowledge' screen.
TechTip:
Alarms and events can be set as
'resolvable' or not (i.e., whether or not the
comment/resolution screen will be available). As
well, if 'instructions' have been set up for the specific
type of alarm, they will appear here. For details, refer
to the configuration topics:
+ "Alarm/Event Instructions", and
+ "Customizing How Events are Displayed".
Tip: You can type your response, or select a
previously-defined one to use as a starting point under
"Select Response" (to follow).
- Select Response: This allows selecting a
previously-defined response (open the 'drop-list'
and make your selection). These responses
can be used as-is, or edited as desired.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
39
Opening a Video Event
When Messages Cannot be
Transmitted to the VEREX Director
Software
If the VEREX Director software is not
connected with the specific panel, messages
are not transmitted, and each individual panel
will retain up to 65,536 of the latest events
that occurred.
Exception: Remote (dial-up) panels with their own
dedicated external modem (i.e. one panel per modem)
can be set to automatically 'dial-in' and transmit
messages to the Director software. These messages
will appear in the monitoring window when you access
the associated account.)
For details, refer to "Monitoring, Paging, & Remote
Mgt. Settings".
Note: Panel connections require that the
communications software be running on the specific
PC. The event-log capacity of each panel depends on
the panel's "Feature Set" selection. For details, refer
to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
Open your desired account in the ‘tree’, and
ensure the event monitoring window is
displayed. To view the associated recording,
click the camera symbol for the specific event.
If a video that coincides with the event is
available, it will open and start playing
automatically starting at the time of the
triggering event.
If an image does not appear, this typically means that
either a recording is not available from the specific
camera for this time-slot, or the Director software is
unable to communicate with the video device.
Then, refer to the item-descriptions for this
screen for details on your available choices.
Working with Video Events (V4.5)
About Video Events)
Video events are specific events pertaining to
input points and doors that have been
associated with recordings from one or two
specific camera(s).
These appear with a
camera symbol on the left in the event
monitoring window.
DVR Types: Supported video servers include:
NetVision (V2.1 or V2.2 and newer)
Yes (via "Visual Director")
March R4 & R5
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.7).
VeDVR / NVe (embedded)
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.71).
TVN20, TVN40, TVR10, TVR30, TVR31, TVR40,
TVR60
Available in Director >= 4.90.
TVR11, TVR41
Available in Director >= 4.91.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for
March R4 DVRs.
Related: "Setting up Video Events".
Also See:
+ Maps and Video (Visual Monitoring & Status/Control)
+ Camera Status/Control and Adjustments
40
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
(Click the Camera Symbol for a Video-Event Alarm
Message)
Screen Reference
- Vertical Slider bar on the right: This
indicates your relative position within
the recorded video during playback.
For recordings associated with a video
event, a dark band will show when the
triggering event occurred within the
recording.
Tip: This is used as the default starting
location for playback.
-
(Play Previous Clip): Plays
the video recording saved immediately
prior to the present one (at the
NetVision PC).
-
(Play): Starts or
continues playing the present (I.e.,
displayed) video clip.
-
(Fast-Forward Play): Causes
the present video to play at doublespeed.
-
(Pause): Stops a playing video,
while remembering your present
location in the video.
-
(Stop): Stops playing the
present video and disregards your present
location. (Clicking play will restart the video at
the time of the triggering event (if applicable), or
otherwise at the beginning of the file.
-
(Play Next Clip): Plays the video
recording saved immediately after the present
one (at the NetVision PC).
-
(Save As): Allows downloading and saving
the displayed video-clip to any location that is
accessible through your PC.
correctly. (You may also need to enlist the help of
your network administrator.)
Related: "Setting up Video Events".
- [ Close ] : Closes the video viewer.
Tip: If this action fails, check to ensure that all
requirements are being met, and everything is set up
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
41
Visually Verifying Users (Photo-Verification)
Photo-Verification
Connecting to the Associated Panel(s),
An Overview:
Introduction
Each operator can select door(s) to have the
stored photo for entrants displayed each time
someone gains access (or is denied entry) at
any of the selected door(s). The last 1, 4, or 9
entrant's photos can be displayed.
The photo can then be used to verify each
entrant's identity. This can be done locally-such as by an attendant in a reception area, or
remotely through a camera on a map.
This feature is configurable separately for each
operator (as described in a following section/below).
This pertains to the photo associated with
each card/person in the "Users" screen.
For details, see "The Photo-Badging
Option".
This feature works only while you are
communicating with the specific panel(s). To
establish a connection:
1) See if you're already connected by
checking the status bar at the bottom of
the monitoring window.
Multi-account systems: Ensure your desired
account is selected (click [Account Folders] in the
tree, and then double-click the specific account).
2) If not connected, check to ensure the
communication software is running on
the specific PCs.
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start
the communications service by right-clicking the
icon, and selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
3) Select Communications from your
MyTools bar, or click [Communications]
in the 'tree', and select Pending/OnLine.
4) Click the [+] at the bottom of the form, or
right-click the form, and select Add New
from the pop-up menu. Then, select the
desired panel(s) (double-click to select),
and set "Action" to "Normal", and
"Frequency" to "Stay Connected" ().
(Click OK when finished.)
5) Check that the connection is made, and
watch for the panel updates to occur.
(Click the 'Panel Group', and look for the status on
the right side of the screen.)
Note: The photo-verification feature will be available
after the panel updates finish (look for a connection
state of 'Connected' and 'Idle State'.)
Also See (Related Topics):
+ "Panel Communications and Updates"
42
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Using This Feature
The
photo
window
opens
automatically whenever a person
gains access at the specific door.
View (menu) Photo Verification Show
(or when a person enters at the specific door)
Multi-Account Systems: This works only
while the specific account is selected. (Click
[Account Folders] in the 'tree', and doubleclick the specific account.)
You can also open the photo window
manually by clicking [Show Photo] at
the bottom of the monitoring window.
Window Empty: The photo window is cleared each
time settings are changed for this feature, and when
you select anything outside of the specific account.
Now, visually compare the displayed photo
with the person to verify their identity.
Setting the Window Position
This screen shows the last 1, 4, or 9 persons
who gained entry (or were denied access) at a
door that you selected for photo-verification.
The photo window is cleared each time you change
settings for this feature, and when you select anything
outside of the specific account.
To reposition the photo window, simply clickand-drag its title-bar to the new location.
Closing the Photo Window
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
To close the photo window at any time, click
the [X] in the upper-right corner.
Related Features
Screen Reference
Additional features can be used in conjunction
with photo-verification (all optional):
 Event-Triggered camera-viewing
See: "Initial Set Up of: Views, Maps, Cameras"
(especially step 3b)
 Card-enrolment (or disabling) readers--that are
also set to unlock. See: "Reader 1 & 2 Settings for
a Door" (look for [Card Action] ).
 "Command Point" custom input points (e.g.,
to unlock the door, or "Grant Last User").
See: "Input Points—Custom Point Types", and
"Input Points—Monitored Sensors"
 "Grant Last User" command (right-click the
door on a map)
See: In the section on using maps and cameras,
see: "Controlling an Area or Device" (look for
"Door Commands", then "Grant Last User...").
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
43
View (menu) Photo Verification Customize
Setting up This Feature
Each operator can set the photoverification feature to suit their
preferences.
Authorities: This feature is available to all
operators.
Steps:
1)
Multi-Account Systems: Ensure
you are 'in' the desired account.
(Click [Account Folders] in the
'tree', and double-click the specific
account.)
2)
From the View menu, select
Photo Verification
Customize.
3)
Refer to the selection-descriptions
for this screen while making your
selections.
Screen Reference
Photo Verification
- Disable: Photo verification will be turned off
while you are logged in (i.e., the present
operator);
- Enable for Current Account: Select this to
have photo-verification turned on while you are
logged in (i.e., the present operator);
-------------------------
Event Trigger
This allows setting the type of card-activity that will
trigger the photo for each user at the selected door.
You can select any or all of these items.
- Granted: Persons that are granted access;
- Denied: Valid/programmed cards that are
denied access for general reasons (card
expired, wrong time, wrong area, etc.);
- Denied Invalid Card: Persons denied access
due to:  Wrong system code;  Wrong PIN
entered;  Antipassback violation;  Wrong
card version number;  Dual custody violation.
44
Doors
This area shows all main panels and doors
associated with your account, and allows
selecting the door(s) to be associated with
photo-verification. (Click to select or de-select
doors in the list.)
Tip: You can change the way doors are displayed by
right-clicking this area, and selecting from the pop-up
menu (try it!). Note: To exit from "Physical view" (),
just select it again.
-------------------------
Photo View
This allows selecting the number of user photos
that will be visible at one time (1, 4, or 9);
Photo Display Duration
- Always Visible: The photo-verification window
will remain open for as long as you remain 'in'
the specific account;
- Duration Time (min): If you do not select
"Always Visible", this allows selecting how long
the photo window will remain open each time it
is activated (1-99 minutes).
Note: You can also close the photo window manually,
by clicking the [X] in the upper-right corner.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Guard-Tours: Monitoring
Connecting to the Associated Panel(s),
An Overview:
1) See if you're already connected by
checking the status bar at the bottom
of the monitoring window.
Introduction to Guard Tours
Guard Tours
A guard-tour can be thought of as either:
 A path that must be completed by a guard in
a certain amount of time—including stations
(checkpoints) along the way, or;
 The process of the guard making his/her way
through the assigned route.
Multi-account systems: Ensure your desired
account is selected (click [Account Folders]
in the tree, and then double-click the specific
account).
Tip: If so configured, areas can be disarmed and rearmed automatically as the guard moves through the
designated route.
Note: A guard tour cycles through the defined 'stations'
(checkpoints) and then stops (it does not automatically
restart at the beginning).
Each 'station' can be a reader/door (that will be
monitored for a specific user), or a physical
input-point (key-switch, etc.) that is operated
by the guard.
Once defined guard tours can be activated
and/or monitored by anyone with the
appropriate permissions. As well, reports can
be generated on guard tours that occurred
previously.
Guard Tour Monitoring
When any guards are to begin their assigned
routes, the associated "Guard Tours" can be
activated, thus allowing an operator to monitor
each guard's progress, and respond if needed.
Guard Tour Events: Activity messages pertaining to
guard-tours (and guard-tour stations) are not
transmitted to a central monitoring facility.
Guard Tour Setup: Before a guard-tour can be
monitored, it must first be defined as per the stations
(checkpoints) along the way, and the allowable times
between stations. (Details appear in a following section
/ below.)
2) If not connected, check to ensure the
communication software is running
on the specific PCs.
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start
the communications service by right-clicking the
icon, and selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
3) Select Communications from your
MyTools bar, or click
[Communications] in the 'tree', and
select Pending/OnLine.
4) Click the [+] at the bottom of the
form, or right-click the form, and
select Add New from the pop-up
menu. Then, select the desired
panel(s) (double-click to select), and
set "Action" to "Normal", and
"Frequency" to "Stay Connected" ().
(Click OK when finished.)
5) Check that the connection is made, and
watch for the panel updates to occur.
(Click the 'Panel Group', and look for the status on
the right side of the screen.)
Note: Guard-tour monitoring features will be available
after the panel updates have finished (look for a
connection state of 'Connected' and 'Idle State'.)
Also See (Related Topics):
+ "Panel Communications and Updates"
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
45
Activating and Monitoring Guard
Tours (that have already been set up)
Activating a Guard Tour
(Adding it to the Guard Tour Monitor)
Initiate a connection with the associated
panel(s) as described previously / above.
Then, select Guard Tour Monitor from the
MyTools bar, or click your site/account button
in the tree, 'open' Control & Status (click the
"+"), and select Guard Tour Monitor.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and double-click the desired account.
Now, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Status for one guard-tour at a time;
Grid View: All active tours in a list.
In 'Forms' view, right-click the form, and select
Start Tour (or Add New). (For 'Grid' view,
click the [...] beside the word "Start".)
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while selecting a "Guard Tour", "Start
Point", and "User". (Click OK when finished.)
Stopping the Monitoring of a Guard Tour
(Deleting it from the Guard Tour Monitor)
Select Guard Tour Monitor from the MyTools
bar, or click your site/account button in the
tree, 'open' Control & Status (click the "+"),
and select Guard Tour Monitor.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and double-click the desired account.
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
In forms view, you can select a 'tour' at the
bottom of the window, or right-click the form
and select Find to search for a guard-tour by
name (or the 1st few characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, right-click the form and select End Tour
(or Delete). When asked to confirm, select
Yes.
(In Grid view, click the (Stop) [...] on the row
for the desired tour. When asked to confirm,
select Yes.)
Monitoring Guard Tours in Progress
Select Guard Tour Monitor from the MyTools
bar, or click your site/account button in the
tree, 'open' Control & Status (click the "+"),
and select Guard Tour Monitor.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and double-click the desired account.
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
In forms view, you can select a 'tour' at the
bottom of the window, or right-click the form
and select Find to search for a guard-tour by
name (or the 1st few characters--e.g., nam*).
Refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while monitoring the specific guard
tour. Be sure to dispatch someone promptly if the
need arises.
Tip: To view additional items, you can use the scrollbar at the bottom of the window.
Note: Guard tour monitoring will be suspended if the
panel connection is dropped for any reason. (You can
check your connection status simply by checking the
status bar at the extreme bottom of the desktop.)
46
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Control & Status Guard Tour Monitor
Screen Reference
- Monitor Tour (bottom of form): This is
where you select an active guard tour
to view its progress/status. This area
shows the name of the guard tour (as
defined under "Guard Tour");
- General: This area shows the 'tour'
being monitored, plus the name of the
guard (user), and the defined action to
occur if the guard is late or absent at
any of the stations (checkpoints).
- Station Status: This area lists the
stations (checkpoints) in the selected
tour being monitored, plus the status,
elapsed time, and other items for each
checkpoint;
Not Initialized: A status of 'Not Initialized' refers to a
guard-tour station that occurs later in the tour (i.e.,
after the next / pending station).
Area Arm/Disarm Commands: These trigger
automatically when the guard accesses the preceding
station within the allowed time.
Tip: To view additional items, you can use the scrollbar at the bottom of the window.
Grid View: In Grid view, you will see a list of all active
guard-tours, showing the tour names, guard (user)
names, present status, and the present (last) station
accessed. Selections are also provided to Stop the
monitoring of an active tour, or Start (activate) a tour.
Right-click screen, and select "Start Tour" (Add New)
- Guard Tour: This is where you select
a (previously defined) guard tour to
begin monitoring;
- Start Point: This allows starting the
tour at any station / checkpoint (select
the station that the guard will begin
with).
Notes: For the station selected as the
'Starting Point', the min/max times are
relative to the tour activation time (i.e.,
when you click OK).
A guard tour cycles through the defined
'stations' (checkpoints) and then stops (it
does not automatically restart at the
beginning).
- User: This is the "user" (i.e., the
guard) to be performing the guard tour.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
47
Guard Tours: Initial Set Up
Overview
Viewing or Changing Settings for a
Guard Tour
To set up a guard-tour:
1)
2)
Ensure the applicable readers and other
guard-tour stations (checkpoints) have been
defined in the system.
Select Guard Tours from the MyTools bar, or
click your site/account button in the tree, and
select Guard Tours.
Guard tour inputs require a "Custom Point Type"
with the "Preprocess" set as "Guard Tour" (and the
"Level" set as "24 hours").
To add a reader/door or guard-tour input-point to
the system, refer to:
 "Doors, Readers, and Related Settings",
 "Input Points—Custom Point Types", and
 "Input Points—Monitored Sensors", as
applicable.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and double-click the desired account.
Set up the new guard-tour, which includes
the readers and other guard-tour 'stations'
along the guard's route. (Refer to the
selection-descriptions for this screen for
details);
Tip: Areas and associated arm/disarm commands
can also be inserted as desired. (These trigger
automatically when the guard accesses the
preceding station within the allowed time).
3)
Double-check the order for the 'stations', and
the acceptable range of time between each
location.
Note: "Grid" view does not apply to this topic.
Adding a Guard Tour
Select Guard Tours from the MyTools bar, or
click your site/account button in the tree, and
select Guard Tours.
Then, choose the desired guard-tour at the
bottom of the window.
Tip: You can also use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
st
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Now, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing or changing settings as
desired.
Deleting a Guard-Tour
Select Guard Tours from the MyTools bar, or
click your site/account button in the tree, and
select Guard Tours.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and double-click the desired account.
Now, choose the desired guard-tour at the
bottom of the window.
Tip: You can also use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
st
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, right-click a blank (grey) area near the
top or bottom of the form (not the centre
portion), and select Delete. When asked to
confirm, select Yes.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and double-click the desired account.
Now, click [+] at the bottom of the form, or
right-click near the top or bottom of the form
(not the centre portion), and select Add New
from the pop-up menu.
Alternative: You can also select "New Tour" from the
list at the bottom of the window.
Now, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while setting up the guard-tour as
desired. (Set the name and "Action", and add
stations (checkpoints), with associated timeranges).
48
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Guard Tours
Screen Reference
- Guard Tour (bottom of form): This is
where you select a guard tour to view
or edit (or "New Tour" to add a new
one). This area shows a reference
number assigned by the system, and
the name of the guard tour, once
defined;
- Name: A suitable name / description
for the guard-tour.
Tip: Be sure to change this from the
default setting of "New Tour".
- Action: The actions to occur if the
guard is late or absent at one of the
checkpoints (whether to abort the tour,
trigger an alarm, and/or sound the
siren output on the specific panel);
- (Station / Checkpoint List): The main portion
of this screen shows the stations (checkpoints)
for the selected guard-tour, in the order they
occur. The minimum and maximum times are
also shown (both since the previous checkpoint,
and the total).
Area Arm/Disarm Commands: These trigger
automatically when the guard accesses the preceding
station within the allowed time.
- [Select Station]: Click this to allow adding
doors and guard-tour input-points to this guardtour, and setting the allowable time-range for the
guard to arrive from the previous station /
checkpoint (in minutes);
- [Up]: Moves a selected checkpoint up to an
earlier position in the guard-tour, while leaving
the time-range values as-is;
- [Down]: Moves a selected checkpoint down to a
later position in the guard-tour, while leaving the
time-range values as-is.
After changing the position of any stations (checkpoints)
in a guard-tour, be sure to always re-check the min/max
time values. (To change the times, select the item in
the guard-tour, click [Edit], and make your desired
changes, clicking [Ok] when finished.)
This is the same as right-clicking the centre portion of
the form and selecting "Add New".
Multi-Panel Systems: Items to be added to a guardtour can be set to display either as a single list, or on a
panel-by-panel basis. For details on these choices,
refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
- [Remove]: Click this to remove a selected
checkpoint (door or input-point) from the guardtour;
- [Edit]: Click this to allow changing an existing
checkpoint:
+ Selecting a different door or guard-tour input-point,
and/or;
+ Changing the allowable time-range for the guard to
access this checkpoint;
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
49
Guard Tours [Select Station]
(or [Edit] )
- Doors and Input Points (top of the form): This
is where you select the specific door or inputpoint pertaining to the guard-tour station being
added or changed;
Area Selections: See "Automatic Area Disarming /
Rearming", to follow / below.
To be available here, the specific areas and devices
must already be defined in the system. As well, guard
tour inputs must be set as a "Custom Point Type" with
the "Preprocess" set as "Guard Tour" (and the "Level"
set as "24 hours"). For details, refer to:
 "Doors, Readers, and Related Settings",
 "Input Points—Custom Point Types", and
 "Input Points—Monitored Sensors", as applicable.
- Minimum Time: The minimum allowable time
for the guard to reach this station (from the
previous one);
- Maximum Time: The maximum allowable time
for the guard to reach this station (from the
previous one);
st
Note: For the 1 station (i.e., the "Start Point"
selected under "Guard Tour Monitor"), the time is from
when the guard tour is activated (i.e., when the guard
tour is 'added' to the Guard-Tour monitor screen).
-------------------------
Automatic Area Disarming / Rearming
If you select an area instead of a door or input
point, this allows setting that area to disarm or
rearm automatically when the guard accesses
the preceding station within the allowed time.
(Off); "Disarm to Stay" will occur only if the area
is fully armed (On).
- Arming Option: For an area selection, this sets
the type of arming (i.e., whether or not any
sensors (points) that are not 'OK' will be
automatically bypassed to allow the arming to
occur).
- Arming Level: For an area selection, this
provides area arm/disarm choices. Note: "Arm
to Stay" will occur only if the area is disarmed
50
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status
and Controlling
Items
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
51
Maps and Video (Visual Monitoring & Status/Control)
Status and Control Using Visual Director
Welcome to Visual Director
(Map/Camera Views)
The 'Views' Toolbar
Beginning with V4.0, VEREX
Director includes a customizable
visual interface for viewing live
cameras, monitoring alarms, and
controlling items.
We call this
"Visual Director".
The "Views" toolbar provides access to all map/camera views
that are presently set up.
To show or hide the view-name text in the toolbar:
Right-click within the title-bar, and select "Show Button Captions".
Also See: "Initial Set Up of: Views, Maps, Cameras"
Software Licensing: This is an optional
feature (requires suitable software
licensing). For details on activating purchased features,
refer to "Software Activation and Licensing".
Camera Support: Cameras are supported through
Netvision and other video servers. For more
information, refer to the on-line help or documentation
provided with the Netvision software.
Grid view: Due to its visual nature, this feature uses
'forms' view only.
Initial Set Up / Camera Control and Adjustments: This
section covers using 'Visual Director' to perform
monitoring, status, and control tasks.
Also See: "Camera Status/Control and
Adjustments", and "Initial Set Up of: Views, Maps,
Cameras" (both to follow / below).
Items to be available under Control & Status depend on
the authorities associated with the user ID and PIN
entered when logging into "Control & Status". If you
were not asked to enter a user ID and PIN, then one
has been set up for automatic entry in your operator
settings. For details, refer to the section on
"Operators".
Status monitoring (either manually, or through the
status toolbar), requires that the VEREX Director
system be connected with the specific panel(s), and the
specific devices must be communicating.
Also See ( V4.0):
+ For Form-based Status & Control:
"Checking Status and Controlling Items"
+ To Set up Panel Communications for a New System:
"New Installation? Try the Wizard "
Connecting to the Associated Panel(s),
An Overview:
Tip: If you will only be viewing or controlling cameras,
you do not need to initiate a panel connection
(i.e., you can skip these steps).
1) See if you're already connected by
52
checking the status bar at the bottom of
the monitoring window.
Multi-Account systems: Ensure your desired
account is selected (click [Account Folders] in the
tree, and then double-click the specific account).
2) If not connected, check to ensure the
communication software is running on the
specific PCs.
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the
Windows taskbar is black-and-white (color =
running), start the communications service by
right-clicking the icon, and selecting "Start
Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
3) Select Communications from your
MyTools bar, or click [Communications]
in the 'tree', and select Pending/OnLine.
4) Click the [+] at the bottom of the form, or
right-click the form, and select Add New
from the pop-up menu. Then, select the
desired panel(s) (double-click to select),
and set "Action" to "Normal", and
"Frequency" to "Stay Connected" ().
(Click OK when finished.)
5) Check that the connection is made, and
watch for the panel updates to occur.
(Click the 'Panel Group', and look for the status on
the right side of the screen.)
Note: Control & Status features will be available after
the panel updates have finished (look for a connection
state of 'Connected' and 'Idle State'.)
Also See (Related Topics):
+ "Panel Communications and Updates"
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Accessing This Feature (Visual Director)
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window. Multi-Account
Systems: First select [Account Folders] in the
'tree', and double-click the desired account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
as described previously/above.
Exception: If you will only be viewing or controlling
cameras, you do not need to initiate a panel connection
Topic Locator:
Using the MyTools Bar:
Select "Visual
Director" from the MyTools bar (and login with
your user ID and PIN if prompted for this).
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button
in the tree, open Control & Status, and Panel
Control & Status (click the "+"), and login with
your user ID and PIN if prompted for this.
Then, select "Visual Director" under "Panel
Control & Status".
If this feature is not present: This feature is available
only to operators with permission to access ALL
configuration topics. You may also need to upgrade
your software licensing.
Related
+ "Operator Permissions".
Topics:
+ "Software Activation and Licensing".
Multi-Panel Systems: Maps are not limited to individual
panels (and cameras are not related to panels).
Automatic Login: To set the 'login' to occur
automatically for a specific operator, refer to the section
on "Operators".
Selecting Views
When 'in' the visual-director screen, defined
map/camera 'views' appear on the "views
toolbar". (Default Position: Top-right corner of the
Views that contain alarms are
screen).
indicated with a flashing alarm-clock.
To open a desired 'view', select it on the
toolbar.
Event-Triggered Cameras: These appear in 'cameraviews' that show the last triggered camera (pertaining to
the specific 'camera-view'). Exception: This type of
window closes when you select a different 'view', or
move to a different screen/topic.
If you see a small down-arrow on the end of the toolbar,
you can click it to access additional map/camera views.
Note: If your display mode is set to 800x600, you may
need to hide the view-names on the toolbar to allow
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
accessing the down-arrow. (Right-click the "Views"
toolbar, and deselect Show Button Captures.)
The bars on the left end of the toolbar allow you to drag
it to a new position if desired (in a fixed location, or
floating above the desktop). Tip: If you 'drop' it in an
undesired location, click [Restore] on the main toolbar.
Moving Around and 'Zooming' In or Out
To enlarge a map or camera image, doubleclick the image (a blank area). To return to the
previous size, click [Return].
Similarly, if your maps include links to cameras
and/or other maps, you can double-click a link
to view the image.
(Method 2: Right-click the link, and select Go to Link.)
When you're ready to go back to the previous
map, click [Return].
If Area/Device Icons are Grey in Colour: This means
you are not connected with the specific panel or
account. For details, see: "Connecting to the
Associated Panel(s), An Overview" (previous/above).
If Camera(s) are Not Available: This may mean that the
applicable Netvision capture station is not running.
Camera Control and Adjustments: You can easily aim
or zoom any camera that supports Pan-Tilt-Zoom
operation. A number of other camera controls are also
provided.
QuickRef: (bottom of camera window).
Also: Tools, Options, (Visual Director )
 Camera Status/Control and Adjustments
(a following section).
-------------------------
Full-Screen: To make the Visual Director
window fill the whole screen, double-click its
title-bar twice. (To return to normal, doubleclick the title-bar once again, and click [Reset]
on the main toolbar.)
Zooming in or out on a map: Click the
desired map, then use one of these methods:
 Use your mouse scroll wheel, or;
 Use the (+) / ( - ) (magnifying glass) buttons at
the bottom, or;
 Use the 'slider bar' on the right edge of the
screen, or;
 Right-click a blank portion of the map. Then,
select Zoom, and your desired action.
To move around (scroll) within a map, you
have 3 choices. (1st click the desired map.)
Then:
 Click-and-drag a blank area on the map
(hold the mouse button down), or;
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
53
 Use the scroll bars provided, or;
 Use the "Universal Scroll" feature of your
mouse (if it is set up for this).
Locating Items on a Complex Map, and
Filtering to Show Fewer Items at a Time
Tips: The map will automatically shift to display the
selected item. For status & control details, see a
following section / below.
To temporarily limit a map to show only a
specific type of devices / objects:
When You Right-Click a Blank Spot on a
Map
Zoom:
3)
4)
Click within the desired map.
Click the small down-arrow to the right of
"Filter:".
Note: This is at the bottom of the map window (NOT
the [Filter] button at the bottom of the event/monitoring
window).
- Provides various selections for zooming in or out
on a map.
3) Select your desired topic from the popup menu.
View:
Then, scan the map for your item(s) of interest.
If you cannot find the desired item on the map,
look for (and select) it in the item-list at the
bottom of the map window.
- Show Zoom Slider: This sets whether or not
the 'zoom slider' will be displayed (allowing you
to zoom in and out visually).
- Show Item Text: This sets whether or not
descriptions will be shown for visual items on
maps.
Tip: Beginning with Director v4.66, this value is saved
independently for each operator.
54
(If you still can't find it, ensure the desired item is not
filtered-out accidentally.)
Tip: The map will automatically shift to display the
selected item. For status & control details, see a
following section / below.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
Visual Director
Screen Reference
- Item (bottom of the form): This allows
you to find a specific item on a
complex map;
Tip: Making selections here is well-suited
for complex maps. For simpler maps, you'll
likely prefer to scan the map visually. For
status & control details, see a following
section / below.
- Filter: This allows temporarily limiting
a selected map to show specific types
of devices only (click the small downarrow to see the available choices).
Tip: Do not confuse this with the [Filter]
button at the bottom of the event/monitoring
window. Note: The filtering stays in effect
only until you select a different map (or any
topic outside of Visual Director).
- (+) / ( - ) (magnifying glass symbols) and
the 'slider bar' on the right edge of the screen: These
allow zooming in or out on a selected map.
To show or Hide the Slider Bar: Right-click a blank
area on the map. Then select "View", and "Show
Zoom Slider" from the pop-up menu.
Item Legend
An Area (including all associated devices);
A Door and associated reader(s);
An Input Point (sensor);
An Output Point (electronically triggered device);
An Expansion Module;
An Elevator (lift) and associated reader;
A Suite-Security Keypad;
A link to a live camera, or another Map.
Flashing Green Box: This indicates a 'selected' item on a
map. (This pertains to navigating using the browse buttons at
the bottom of the screen.)
To show or Hide Item-Names on a Map: Right-click a blank
area on the map. Then select "View", and "Show Item Text"
from the pop-up menu.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
55
Viewing the Status of an Area or
Device
Area and Device Status (Mouse hovered over an item)
Open the applicable "View", and
(locate) and select the desired device
(Details: Previous/above).
Then, 'hover' your mouse cursor on
top of the item, and watch for a popup status screen.
Jumping to the Control & Status Form:
Right-click the area or device and select
"Switch to Control & Status Screen for this
Item" from the pop-up menu.
Screen Reference
Various status aspects will be shown for the
specific area or device. If you require more
information on the listed information, look for an
applicable topic under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items".
User's Guide: Look in the table of contents near the
front of the manual.
On-Line Help: Open the Help menu, and select
"Topics" (and ensure the Contents tab is selected).
If the Help is already open, select [Topics], and then
the Contents tab.
56
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Controlling an Area or Device
Open the applicable "View", and (locate) and
select
the
desired
device
(Details:
Previous/above).
Then, right-click the device and select your
desired action from the pop-up menu.
Jumping to the Control & Status Form: Right-click
the area or device and select "Switch to Control &
Status Screen for this Item" from the pop-up menu.
Dealing with Alarms
To return the Event/Monitoring Window to Its Previous
State: Click [Return to Previous Filter] at the
bottom of the window.
- Switch to Control & Status screen for this
Item: This jumps you to the form-based
"Control & Status" screen for the selected item.
___________________________________________
When an alarm occurs, always verify what
caused it. Be sure to dispatch someone
to deal with any conditions that require
attention.
Screen Reference
------------------------
To silence an alarm, right-click the specific
'Area' on the map, and select Silence.
To set the event/monitoring window to show all
events associated with a device or area, rightclick the item and select "Resolve and Show
All Events for This Item". To view only the
alarms associated with a device or area, rightclick the item and select "Resolve".
For more information on working with the monitoring
window, refer to "Monitoring System Activity".
-------------------------
To enter a comment and set a single-alarm
as having been resolved (or not), click the
colored box on the left of the alarm
message. When the small screen appears,
enter a suitable comment and select
[Resolved] or [Keep Unresolved].
To enter a comment and set all alarms for a
device or area as 'Resolved' (or not), rightclick the monitoring window and select
"Resolve All".
Then, enter a suitable
comment, and select [Resolved] or [Keep
Unresolved].
___________________________________________
Common Commands--All Items
(After right-clicking the item)
------------------------------------------------------------------------ Resolve (when alarms present): Sets the
event/monitoring window to show only the
present alarms for the selected area or device;
21-0381E v4.9.1
- Resolve and Show all Events for This Item
(when alarms present): Sets the event/monitoring
window to show all alarms and events for the
selected area or device;
Welcome
Report
Control
Area Commands (After right-clicking an Area)
Also See: "Common Commands", previous/above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Off / Stay / On: These selections allow
manually arming or disarming the area (i.e.,
setting the arming level);
Tip: If any input points (sensors) are presently tripped
or bypassed, you will be guided though the steps to
deal with this first (bypass / acknowledge).
- Silence (when an item is in 'alarm'): This shuts off
the sounding of present alarms (i.e., shuts off
the system siren output, and LCD keypad
sonalerts).
- Worklate: This allows adjusting the area's
scheduled closing time in increments of 30
minutes.
- Lock All Doors in this Area: This locks all
doors with at least one reader associated with
the specific area;
- Unlock all Doors in this Area: This unlocks all
doors with at least one reader associated with
the specific area;
- Reset User Count In Area: This allows
resetting this area's "user-count" to zero.
Note: 'User-counting' is configurable for each area.
Ref: Configuration Areas Activity.
___________________________________________
Door Commands (After right-clicking a Door)
Also See: "Common Commands", previous/above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Lock: This locks (re-locks) the specific door.
- Unlock: This unlocks the specific door.
- Momentary Normal Unlock: This unlocks the
door for a duration equal to the standard "unlock
duration". This is the same as someone gaining
entry with an access card or token.
- Momentary Extended Unlock: This unlocks
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
57
the door for a duration equal to the "extended
unlock duration". This is the same as a user
who is set for "extended unlock/challenged"
gaining entry with an access card or token.
- Pending Unlock: This is an unlock command
that waits for one person to enter the facility at
the specific door.
- Grant Last User -- Reader 1 (or 2): If the last
user at a reader was denied access, this will
issue a 'Momentary Unlocking', and log that
card/user as being granted entry.
 Cards can be denied due to being expired, locked
out, wrong time, wrong door class, etc. -- as long as
they are defined in the system.
 This feature will be unavailable if someone else is
granted entry, or after 5 minutes from the time the
person was denied access (although they can
simply present their card/token again).
 This may be used in conjunction with an eventtriggered camera-view for the door (so a remote
attendant can see the person).
Related Topics: "Initial Set Up of: Views, Maps,
Cameras" (step 3b).
 This can also be used in conjunction with the popup "Photo-Verification" feature (if it is set to trigger
on 'Access Denied' events).
Related Topics: Visually Verifying Users (PhotoVerification)"
 This cannot be used (or does not apply) with:
- Cards being enrolled or disabled at a reader set to
do this (although it will apply for cards denied due
to wrong area/time, etc.);
- Access being denied due to door interlock
violations or area/disarm authority issues.
___________________________________________
- Normal: No manual control (i.e., return to
normal operation);
- Always: Allows setting the output as On or Off
continuously (until manual control is removed);
- Momentary: Allows setting the output to
pulse/toggle once. Additional selections will
appear for:  Whether it is to be triggered On
(high), or Off (Low);  The state it will be left in
afterwards (Off, On, or Normal);  How long the
relay will remain triggered (1 second to 1 week).
- Duty Cycle (1 sec. On/1 sec. off): The output
will be pulsed on and off continuously for a
selected duration (1 second to 1 week).
___________________________________________
Elevator Commands
(After right-clicking an Elevator)
Also See: "Common Commands", previous/above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Secure / Desecure: This allows applying or
removing controlled-access for all floors as
accessed from the specific elevator (lift).
(Secure: An access card or token provides access to
specific floors;  Desecure: Anyone can access any
floor without a card or token.
Controlling a Floor (as accessed from all cabs): Refer
to "Checking Status or Controlling Floors"
Input-Point Commands
(After right-clicking a Sensor)
Also See: "Common Commands", previous/above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Bypass / Remove Bypass: "Bypass" allows
arming an area with a tripped or faulty input
point (sensor). "Remove Bypass" allows
monitoring the input point again (for a sensor
that is "OK").
____________________________________________
Output-Point Commands
(After right-clicking an Output/Device)
Also See: "Common Commands", previous/above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Tips: First, select "Manual Output Control".
Additional parameters appear when applicable
(duration, etc.).
58
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Camera Status/Control and Adjustments
Introduction
A number of camera controls are provided,
allowing you to:
 Aim or zoom PTZ
cameras;
 Check connection status;
 Adjust image quality, etc. These features are
provided through the video toolbar in each
camera-image, with additional camera settings
available under: Tools, Options.
The Video Toolbar
When working in a 'view' that contains a
camera-image, a small button in the bottomleft corner will provide access to the video
toolbar.
To use this feature, refer to the itemdescriptions for the video toolbar, plus the
sections that follow.
(Show Video Toolbar)
- Hide Video Toolbar: Closes/hides the video
toolbar;
- Change View Size: Allows setting the
maximum displayed image size for a camera
(details to follow);
- View Messages: Allows viewing the
camera/PTZ connection status for the camera
(details to follow);
- Start PTZ: Allows working with a PTZ camera
(details to follow);
Note: The video toolbar is available when viewing or
customizing maps, but not when setting up 'Views'.
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
59
Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom
Camera

Then hover over the Camera-Image
You can easily aim or zoom any
camera that supports Pan-Tilt-Zoom
operation.
Initial Set Up: PTZ cameras must be
identified and properly set up. Details:
Step 1b: Define Cameras (under "Initial Set
Up of: Views, Maps, Cameras", to follow).
User Permissions: Only one person can
control a specific PTZ camera (COM port) at
a time. Who will get access is based on:
 The username assigned to the camera
during initial set up;
 PTZ user priorities defined at the capture
station (for each PTZ username).
Event-triggered 'camera-views': Control of
PTZ cameras is not supported in eventtriggered 'camera-views'--although you can
use a 'view' that contains the specific camera
(or a link to the camera) to access PTZ
control.
Steps:
1)
Open the 'View' that contains the
desired camera-image.
MyTools Bar: Visual Director (+User login if
prompted). Tree: Control & Status, Panel
Control & Status (+User login if prompted),
Visual Director.
Then, select from the 'Views' toolbar (top-right).
2)
3)
Open the video toolbar by clicking the
button in the bottom-left corner of the
camera-image. Then, click the 4th button
("Start PTZ").
'Hover' your mouse around the cameraview, and watch for the cursor to change
to an arrow or magnifying glass.
and-hold with the mouse indicating the desired action.)
To zoom out: Right-click-and-hold near the centre of
the screen (magnifying glass).
- Adjust PTZ Speed: After clicking "Start PTZ",
an additional button will appear on the right
which allows opening the PTZ speed control.
The length of the blue bar indicates the present
relative speed. To adjust the speed click a new
position on the speed indicator bar, or click the +
/ - symbols at either end.
- X: This closes the PTZ speed control, and
returns you to the camera-image.
4) Click (or click and hold) the image with
the cursor indicating your desired
action.
For options and more information, refer to
the screen image and item-descriptions.
Screen Reference
- For cameras that support pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ)
control, your mouse cursor will change to
indicate different pan-tilt-zoom directions as you
move around the camera-view. (Click, or click60
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Camera/PTZ
Connection Status

Camera and PTZ connection status
can be viewed at any time.
Steps:
1)
Open the 'View' that contains the
desired camera-image.
MyTools Bar: Visual Director (+User
login if prompted). Tree: Control &
Status, Panel Control & Status (+User
login if prompted), Visual Director.
Then, select from the 'Views' toolbar
(top-right).
2) Open the video toolbar by
clicking the button in the
bottom-left corner of the
camera-image. Then, click the
3rd button ("View Messages").
- This screen shows the connection status for the
camera being viewed.
For more information, refer to the itemdescriptions for this screen.
Flashing Yellow Symbol: When a problem occurs
(such as PTZ timeout), the 'View Messages' button will
appear with a warning symbol.
Screen Reference
- X: This closes the status window and returns
you to the camera-image.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
61
Setting the Maximum CameraImage Size

Camera-images auto-size relative to
the window they are displayed in.
Exception: To avoid jagged looking
images, you can set the maximum
displayed image-size for each
camera.
Steps:
1)
Open the 'View' that contains the
desired camera-image.
MyTools Bar: Visual Director (+User login if
prompted). Tree: Control & Status, Panel
Control & Status (+User login if prompted),
Visual Director.
Then, select from the 'Views' toolbar (top-right).
2)
3)
- This screen allows setting the maximum
displayed image-size for the camera being
viewed.
- X: This closes the image-size control, and
returns you to the camera-image.
Open the video toolbar by clicking the
button in the bottom-left corner of the
camera-image. Then, click the 2nd button
("Change View Size").
Click the down-arrow on the right to open
the list and make your selection.
For more information, refer to the itemdescriptions for this screen.
Screen Reference
62
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Tools (menu) Options (Visual Director )
Adjusting Camera Quality for
your Connection/Bandwidth
Various
camera-Image
quality
settings are provided to allow for
slower connection speeds and
reduced-bandwidth applications.
Notes: These selections affect all cameras
for the selected account. Features
pertaining to maps and cameras are not
supported with single-panel licensing.
Maximum Image Quality: Camera images
are transmitted based on the recording mode
at the NetVision capture station (if presently
being recorded there), or per the present/last
displayed image size for any camera on the
same capture board displayed at the capture
station.
Steps:
1)
Multi-Account Systems: Ensure
you are 'in' the desired account.
(Click [Account Folders] in the 'tree', and
double-click the specific account.)
2)
Open the Tools menu, and select
Options. (Tip: If not listed, see step 1).
changes from the previous frame. Lower values
provide better image quality and require more
bandwidth
------------------------- Coloured Buttons: These buttons provide
(from left to right): A quick way to return to:
 General default values, or;
Select pre-defined defaults suitable for:
 Low,  Medium, or;  High available
bandwidth (i.e., dial-up connection, DSL/cable,
or local network).
Note: If the "Options" screen contains only an
'Autostart' option, this means you have singlepanel licensing (maps/cameras not supported).
3)
Refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while making your selections.
Tip: The easiest way to change these settings is using
the colored buttons across the bottom. See "Coloured
Buttons" for details.
Screen Reference
- Interval: Sets the duration between camera
image requests--in milliseconds (1000 = 1 frame
per second).
- Quality: Sets the relative amount of video detail
to be included in non-key frames. Also see "Key
Rate", to follow.
- Data Rate: This is a bandwidth control property
that determines the maximum video data
transmission rate.
(Defaults: Low = 56, Medium = 220, High =
3000).
- Key Rate: This determines how often a
complete frame is sent compared to only
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
63
Initial Set Up of: Views, Maps, Cameras
running.)
Introduction to Map/Camera Set Up
Supported Map File Formats
 The IP address (or name) of each specific
capture station PC must be known;
 The capture station "Video Server" must be
set to allow anyone to view cameras (through
the Windows Control Panel);
 The desired camera number should be
known;
 For control of PTZ cameras (pan-tilt-zoom),
you will need to have a valid PTZ username
for each specific capture station.
 The supported protocol of each defined
video devices must be known.
 The configured network connection port of
each defined video devices must be known.
Map images to be used with this feature must
have been saved in one of these file-formats:
For details on setting up a video device, refer to the online help or other documentation provided with the
video device.
"Views" and "Maps" must be set up before
visual monitoring and/or status & control tasks
can be performed.
Notice: It is extremely useful to familiarize yourself
with the operation of this feature, and plan how you
want your views and maps set up before you begin.
Grid view: Due to its visual nature, this feature uses
'forms' view only.
Permissions: Setting up maps, cameras, and 'views'
requires an operator with permission to "Configure
Visual Director". This permission is also required to
change camera image quality/sizing (right-click menu).
 Vector/Drawing Formats: WMF, EMF
 Bitmap/Photo Formats: BMP, JPG
Note: Scalable graphics work best (EMF, WMF), and
are recommended--especially for more detailed maps.
Requirements for Camera Viewing
Camera viewing (and PTZ control)
supported through video devices.
is
DVR Types: Supported video servers include:
NetVision (V2.1 or V2.2 and newer)
Yes (via "Visual Director")
March R4 & R5
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.7).
VeDVR / NVe (embedded)
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.71).
TVN20, TVN40, TVR10, TVR30, TVR31, TVR40,
TVR60
Available in Director >= 4.90.
TVR11, TVR41
Available in Director >= 4.91.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for
March R4 DVRs.
Required Items:
 TCP/IP protocol must be installed and set up
on your PC (this is typically done automatically
as part of the MS Windows installation);
 You must have an available connection to a
network, the internet, or "dial-up networking"
to allow connecting with the capture station;
(And the capture station PC and software must be
64
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Visual Director Customize Views Maps 
Step 1a: Define Source Maps
Map image files need to be identified - [Add]: Allows identifying a new map image;
to the system before they can be Note: Scalable graphics work best (EMF, WMF), and are
recommended--especially for more detailed maps.
displayed.
Topic Locator:
MyTools Bar: Customize Views,
(login with a user name & ID if needed),
select the Maps .
In the Tree: Click your site/account
button in the tree, open Control &
Status, and Panel Control & Status
(click the "+"), and login with your user
ID and PIN if prompted for this. Then,
select: "Visual Director" (click the "+"),
Customize Views, Maps.
Multi-Account Systems: First select
[Account Folders] in the 'tree', and doubleclick the desired account.
- [Delete]: Allows deleting an existing map from the list.
After Right-clicking an Existing Map in the List
- Add New Map: Allows identifying a new map image;
Note: Scalable graphics work best (EMF, WMF), and are
recommended--especially for more detailed maps.
- Edit Map: Allows changing the name or source file for a map
that has already been identified to the system;
- Create Duplicate Map: When areas and devices are added
to a specific map (step 3a, to follow/below), all views that use
the same map will show the same items. "Create Duplicate
Map" allows setting up different maps based on the same
image file.
Notes: For a map with devices already placed on it, the device
placement will be copied as well (delete/change these as desired).
Click [Add] to set up a new map, or - Delete Map: Allows deleting an existing map from the list.
right-click an existing one and select Visual Director Customize Views Maps 
Edit Map. Then, set the name as
[Add] (or right-click a map in the list, and select "Edit Map")
desired, and click [...] to browse for a
desired image file (select the file and click
[Open] ).
See the selection-descriptions for more
information (especially "Create Duplicate
Map").
Screen Reference
- Name: Enter a suitable name for the map. (This will typically
refer to the location or department associated with the image.)
- Image File: This is the location (path) and filename of the
map image file. Tip: Click [...] to browse for the file.
(Select the file and click [Open] ).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
65
Step 1b: Define Cameras
Cameras need to be identified before they can
be displayed by the Director software.
Topic Locator:
MyTools Bar: Customize Views, (login with a
user name & ID if needed), select Cameras .
In the Tree: Click your site/account button in
the tree, open Control & Status, and Panel
Control & Status (click the "+"), and login with
your user ID and PIN if prompted for this. Then,
select: "Visual Director" (click the "+"),
Customize Views, Cameras.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Click [Add] to identify a new camera, or rightclick an existing one and select Edit Camera.
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions while
entering values for this camera.
-------------------------
Also See: Once the cameras and views have been set
up, you can easily aim or zoom any camera that
supports Pan-Tilt-Zoom operation. A number of other
camera controls are also provided.
QuickRef: (bottom of camera window).
Also: Tools, Options, (Visual Director )
 Camera Status/Control and Adjustments
(previous).
Note: The video toolbar is available when viewing or
customizing maps, but not when setting up 'Views'.
Visual Director Customize Views
Cameras 
- [Add]: Allows identifying a camera to the
system.
- [Delete]: Allows deleting an existing camera
from the list.
After Right-clicking an Existing Camera
in the List
- Add New Camera: Allows identifying a camera
to the system.
- Edit Camera: Allows changing the name and
other information for a camera that has already
been identified to the system.
- Create Duplicate Camera: This saves some
time for additional cameras from the same
capture station (i.e., you won't have to re-type
the capture station IP address). After using this
selection, right-click "Copy of CameraName" in
the list, select "Edit Camera", and set the name
and camera number as desired.
- Delete Camera: Allows deleting an existing
camera from the list.
Screen Reference
66
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Visual Director Customize Views
Cameras [Add] (or right-click a camera in the
list and select "Edit Camera")
Tip: This can be an IP address, or a name (FQDN).
Contact your IT rep. for assistance if needed.
Note: To view cameras, a connection must be
available. If unsure, go to a command prompt and try
'pinging' the IP address.
- Camera: This is the camera number/ID as seen
from its capture station;
- IP camera: Select this if the specified camera is
an IP camera (has its own IP adress);
- Port: This is the network connection port
specified at the video device;
- Streaming Type: This is the connection
protocol supported by the video device;
------------------------- Camera Supports Pan/Tilt/Zoom: Select this
to allow PTZ control for a camera that supports
this;
Tip: For a non-PTZ camera (or if PTZ control is not
desired), ensure this is NOT selected.
- Version: Select the type of DVR (video server)
here.
DVR Types: Supported video servers include:
NetVision (V2.1 or V2.2 and newer)
Yes (via "Visual Director")
March R4 & R5
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.7).
VeDVR / NVe (embedded)
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.71).
TVN20, TVN40, TVR10, TVR30, TVR31, TVR40,
TVR60
Available in Director >= 4.90.
TVR11, TVR41
Available in Director >= 4.91.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for
March R4 DVRs.
- Name: Enter a suitable name for the camera.
- Server Name or IP: This is the IP address (or
PC name) of the specific video device;
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
- PTZ User: Enter a valid remote user name
(with permission to control PTZ cameras) as set
up at the specific capture station.
- PTZ Password: Enter the login password for
the 'PTZ User'.
------------------------- Camera Login Required: Select this if the
video device is set to only allow registered users
to view cameras (i.e., NOT set to allow anyone
to access the video server).
- User Name: Enter a valid remote user name
(with permission to view cameras) as set up at
the specific capture station.
- Password: Enter the login password
associated with the 'User Name' entered above.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
67
Note: For a PTZ camera, the same user name and
password is typically used for viewing cameras and
PTZ-control.
- Timezone: For embedded DVRs (e.g., VeDVR
/ NVe). Select the timezone associated with the
DVR unit here.
Notes: This setting is used with video events. For
other types of DVRs, this is handled internally, and this
field will be greyed-out.
- (camera display area): A sample image from
the selected camera indicates a valid
connection. (See next item.)
- [Apply and Connect]: Click this button to verify
the camera connection and display a sample
image.
68
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Step 1c: Define Camera-Views
Visual Director Customize Views
Camera-Views 
(this is required only for event-triggered
camera-views)
As an alternative to fixed cameras
appearing in different locations onscreen, camera-views can be thought
of as 'locators' that allow you to set
where specific types of eventtriggered camera images will appear
(separately for each 'view'). Each
camera-view shows the last-triggered
camera associated with it.
Exception: Camera-views close when you
select a different 'view', or move to a
different screen/topic.
Tip: Be sure to create additional cameraviews for cameras that are to appear in
different locations on-screen.
(For more information on this feature, and to
assign a camera-view and camera to each
device, see step 3b.)
Topic Locator:
MyTools Bar: Customize Views,
(login with a user name & ID if needed),
select Camera-Views .
In the Tree: Click your site/account
button in the tree, open Control &
Status, and Panel Control & Status
(click the "+"), and login with your user
ID and PIN if prompted for this. Then,
select: "Visual Director" (click the "+")
Customize Views,
Camera-Views.
- [Add]: Allows creating a new camera-view.
- [Delete]: Allows deleting an existing camera-view.
After Right-clicking an Existing Camera-View in
the List
- Add New Camera-View: Allows creating a new camera-view
(same as clicking the [Add] button).
- Edit Camera-View: Allows changing the name for a cameraview that was defined previously.
- Delete Camera-View: Allows deleting an existing cameraview.
Notice: This will disable the event-triggered camera display feature
for any doors and input points that are using this camera-view.
Visual Director Customize Views CameraViews [Add] (or right-click one in the list and select
"Edit Camera-View")
- Name: Enter a suitable name for the camera-view. This will
pertain to your specific needs and preferences (e.g., Doors,
Motion-Detectors, Sensors in Area X, Button ABC pressed,
etc.).
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Click [Add] to define a new camera-view, or
right-click an existing one and select Edit
Camera-View. Then, set the name as desired
(see the name description for details).
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
69
Visual Director Customize Views
Step 2: Set up Views
"Views" are definable layouts for maps and
camera images. These must be set up to
allow viewing maps and/or cameras.
Topic Locator:
MyTools Bar: Customize Views, and (login
with a user name & ID if needed).
In the Tree: Click your site/account button in
the tree, open Control & Status, and Panel
Control & Status (click the "+"), and login with
your user ID and PIN if prompted for this.
Then, select: "Visual Director" (click the "+"),
Customize Views.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Tip: For additional space, it's a good idea to turn off
the event/monitoring window when setting up
'Views'. (Click [Events] on the main toolbar.)
-------------------------
Creating a New View: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form,
and select Add New View from the pop-up
menu. Alternative: You can also select "New
View" from the list (bottom of the window).
Changing an Existing View: Select the
desired "View" from the pop-up list at the
bottom of the window.
Searching for an Existing View: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
(or the first few characters + "*" ), and click
[Find].
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for
this screen while viewing or changing
settings as desired.
To Copy an Entire View: Right-click, "Copy View";
right-click, "Add New View"; right-click, "Paste View".
Then, change the name and other items as desired.
If you Need to Delete a View: Right-click a blank
area on the view, and select "Delete View".
Screen Reference
- View (bottom of the form): This allows
selecting an existing 'View' (or select "New
View" to set up a new one).
70
On This Form
- Name: This is a description for the displayed
map/camera view;
- Style: This is a basic layout style for the
displayed map/camera view (the centre of the
screen will change per your selection);
Maps , Cameras , and
Camera-Views 
These 'tabs' show a list of the presently defined
Maps and Cameras. Click-and-drag items to the
desired location.
Tip: For items that have already been placed on the
left, you can click the item to have it identified on the
right. (Try it! )
To remove an item from a 'view', drag the item back
into the list (or drag to item called "No Selection" to the
item's location).
Notes: Each item can appear only once within a
single view. The software will attempt to connect with
cameras right-away.
Camera-views: These allow you to set where specific
types of event-triggered camera images will appear
(for each view that uses this feature). Each cameraview shows the last-triggered camera associated with
it. Be sure to use additional camera-views for
cameras that are to appear in different locations onscreen. (For more information, see step 3b.)
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Step 3a: Place Items onto Maps
(Doors, Sensors, etc.)
Visual Director Customize Maps
Customizing maps pertains to placing
objects on specific maps to enable
visual monitoring, and status/control
features.
Attention: Items added to a specific map
here will appear on that map in every 'view'
that contains it. (To avoid this, you can copy
a map and save it as a new one, or create
new map(s) using the same image file. For
details, see step 1a.)
Topic Locator:
MyTools Bar: Customize Maps, and
(login with a user name & ID if needed).
In the Tree: Click your site/account
button in the tree, open Control &
Status, and Panel Control & Status
(click the "+"), and login with your user
ID and PIN if prompted for this. Then,
select: "Visual Director" (click the "+"),
Customize Maps.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Then, refer to the details for this screen while
viewing or changing settings as desired.
Screen Reference
This screen shows your selected view with its
associated maps and cameras, along with the
areas and devices that have been placed on
each map (so far).
To select (or search for) a desired 'view', see step 2
(previous/above).
Navigating: You can enlarge (double-click),
and zoom/scroll within maps as desired.
device.
Creating a Link to a Camera or Another
Map: The 'link' icon (arrow) allows linking
to a camera or other map, and setting the
location it will appear. When you drop the
link icon in place, a form will appear
showing defined maps and cameras, with a
copy of the present view. To complete the
link, drag the item to the desired location
(or select the item, then the location).
Then, click [OK].
Removing an Item from a Map: Right-click
the item, and select Delete from the pop-up
menu.
Note: If the menu does not include a "Delete"
selection, right-click the item again.
For details on: What the Device Icons mean, and
how to scroll and zoom within a map, refer to:
"Moving Around and 'Zooming' in or Out" (under
"Maps and Video (Visual Monitoring &
Status/Control)", previous).
To position objects on a map: Drag the
symbol for your desired item-type (upper
left) to the desired location on each specific
map. When you 'drop' the item in place,
you'll be asked to select the specific area or
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
71
Step 3b: Set Up Event-Triggered
Camera-Views
Doors and sensors on maps can be associated
with a 'camera-view' to trigger a camera when
selected events occur at the device (access
denied, sensor tripped, etc.).
Visual Director Customize Maps
(right-click an item)
Advanced Camera Settings
Notes: This feature pertains to individual 'views' (i.e.,
the map and 'camera-views' must be on the same
'View', and the camera images will be visible only when
that 'view' is displayed. Conversely, "Advanced
Camera Settings" (camera-view assignments) on a
specific map will apply to ALL 'views' that contain the
same map, though the camera(s) will be visible only for
'views' that contain the target 'camera-view'.
Panel Firmware: This feature requires panel firmware
version 4.15 or 4.2 (where available) or newer.
Overview of Steps:
 Define maps (1a), cameras (1b), and
camera-views (1c).
 Define view(s) and arrange the desired
maps, cameras, and/or 'camera-views'
therein (2).
 Place items such as doors and sensors
(input points) onto the maps (3a).
 Set "Advanced Camera Settings" for each
device that is to trigger a camera (to follow).
Topic Locator:
MyTools Bar: Customize Maps, and (login
with a user name & ID if needed).
In the Tree: Click your site/account button in
the tree, open Control & Status, and Panel
Control & Status (click the "+"), and login with
your user ID and PIN if prompted for this.
Then, select: "Visual Director" (click the "+"),
Customize Maps.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Then, right-click the item (door or sensor), and
select Advanced Camera Settings from the
pop-up menu.
Now, refer to the details for this screen while
viewing or changing settings as desired.
Screen Reference
- Camera View: A previously-defined placeholder
that determines where the camera image will
appear. (Each camera-view shows the lasttriggered camera associated with it.)
72
Exception: Camera-views close when you select a
different 'view', or move to a different screen/topic.
Note: For a camera-image that cannot be overwritten
by another one, use :  A fixed camera (step 2);  A
link to a fixed camera (step 3a), or;  Set up a
'camera-view' that will not be used with any other
cameras (steps 1c & 3b).
On This Form
Door with two Readers: The following sections are
available separately for each reader.
- Activation: Select the states/conditions that you
wish to trigger the camera (e.g., alarm, trouble,
access denied, etc.);
Alarm: Forced entry, door held open too long, etc.
Trouble: Door sensor circuit problems (e.g., cut or
shorted wiring).
- Camera: Select the camera that is to be
displayed when the selected event(s) occur at
the specific door or sensor;
- Clear: Whether or not the camera image is to be
closed/cleared automatically after a certain
period of time;
Never: The camera image will be left in place (until
you select a different view, or select some other task).
Timer: The camera image will remain only for the
number of minutes that you select below (or until you
select a different view, etc.).
- Minutes: With "Clear" set as "Timer", enter the
number of minutes here (1 – 1440).
Tip: 1440 minutes is one day (24 hours).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status & Controlling Items
account).
2) If not connected, check to ensure the
communication software is running
on the specific PCs.
Introduction to Status & Control
The Status and Control Feature
VEREX Director can monitor the status of most
system, area, and device aspects, and allows
controlling the system on an area-by-area
basis, or for individual doors or input points.
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To Connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard
The status for individual items at specific site
can be checked manually, as desired. As well,
the status toolbar allows monitoring a desired
account for various items (sirens, fire alarms,
other alarms, and trouble conditions), and
provides a quick way to view the details for
each item.
Items to be available under Control & Status depend on
the authorities associated with the user ID and PIN
entered when logging into "Control & Status". If you
were not asked to enter a user ID and PIN, then one
has been set up for automatic entry in your operator
settings. For details, refer to the section on
"Operators".
Status monitoring (either manually, or through the
status toolbar), requires that the VEREX Director
system be connected with the specific panel(s), and the
specific devices must be communicating.
If an item is listed as 'Off-Line', this typically indicates
either a communications problem, or a set-up error
(such as an incorrect module/POD serial number).
If all items on a screen are grey in color, this generally
means that you are either not connected with the
specific panel, or the applicable module is 'off-line' (not
communicating).
Items changed through 'Control & Status' (such as
unlocking a door, or locking-out cards, etc.) remain in
effect until changed by another person or by a
scheduled Configuration setting.
Connecting to the Associated Panel(s),
An Overview:
1) See if you're already connected by
checking the status bar at the bottom
of the monitoring window.
Welcome
Report
3) Select Communications from your
MyTools bar, or click
[Communications] in the 'tree', and
select Pending/OnLine.
4) Click the [+] at the bottom of the
form, or right-click the form, and
select Add New from the pop-up
menu. Then, select the desired
panel(s) (double-click to select), and
set "Action" to "Normal", and
"Frequency" to "Stay Connected" ().
(Click OK when finished.)
5) Check that the connection is made, and
watch for the panel updates to occur.
(Click the 'Panel Group', and look for the status on
the right side of the screen.)
Note: Control & Status features will be available after
the panel updates have finished (look for a connection
state of 'Connected' and 'Idle State'.)
Also See (Related Topics):
+ "Panel Communications and Updates"
Accessing the Control and Status
Topics for a Panel
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
as described previously/above.
Then, access your desired topic:
Using the MyTools Bar: Select the desired Control
and Status topic from the MyTools bar (and login with
your user ID and PIN if prompted for this).
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
Multi-Account systems: Ensure your desired
account is selected (click [Account Folders]
in the tree, and then double-click the specific
21-0381E v4.9.1
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the
Windows taskbar is black-and-white (color =
running), start the communications service by
right-clicking the icon, and selecting "Start
Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
73
tree, open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+"), and login with your user ID and
PIN if prompted for this. Then, select your desired topic
in the 'tree' (under "Panel Control & Status").
If 'Panel-Groups' and 'Panels' are Listed Under Control
& Status: Select (open), your desired panel-group and
panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip: "Control &
Status" (and configuration) topics can be set to display
either as a single list, or on a panel-by-panel basis.
(To change the view: Right-click "Control & Status",
and select or deselect Logical Tree View). For more
information, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
-------------------------
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode (forms view is
generally recommended for Control & Status
topics).
Then, refer to the topic associated with your
desired Control & Status topic.
Note: If the status window appears blank, or
unavailable (items are grey in color), this means you
are not connected with the specific panel or account.
To initiate a connection, refer to "Connecting to the
Associated Panel(s), An Overview" (previous/above).
Automatic Login: To set the 'login' to occur
automatically for a specific operator, refer to the section
on "Operators".
If "Cannot Log In to Control and Status due to a
Conflict" appears: This means the same data may
have been changed through the software and locally
through a keypad. When an operator with configuration
permissions accesses the 'configuration' topic for the
mentioned item, they will be prompted to correct the
conflict. For details, refer to "Correcting
Communication / Update Errors".
74
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Using the Status Toolbar
The Status Toolbar
The Status Toolbar
The status toolbar allows monitoring for
various items (sirens, fire alarms, other
alarms, and trouble conditions), and
provides a quick way to view the details for
each item.
Multi-Account Systems: You can set the account to be
monitored by the status toolbar (when each operator is
logged in) by clicking [Monitor] on the far-right end of
the toolbar. This can also be set in the screen for each
operator. For details, refer to the section on
"Operators".
The status toolbar is active only when the system is
connected with the specific panel(s).
The status toolbar will remain active when the software
is in lockout mode (operator/keyboard lockout). This
allows continuous monitoring of an account while
blocking access to other features.
For details on the lockout feature, refer to "Exiting,
Logging Off, or Changing Operators".
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
Using the Status Toolbar
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Multi-Account systems: To verify which account is
being monitored by the status toolbar, click the button
on the far-right end of the toolbar.
-------------------------
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while selecting an item from the
toolbar.
If the software is presently in 'lockout' mode (with only
the status toolbar available), you'll be asked to login
with your operator name and password when you click
the toolbar.
Similarly, if you are not presently 'logged' into 'Control &
Status', you'll be asked to enter your user ID and PIN.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Screen Reference
- Siren: This button is shown in color (and with a
'siren' sound) if any inputs set to trigger a 'siren'
or 'sonalert' have been 'tripped' in an armed
area (unless the alarm has been silenced).
Clicking this button displays the Area status
screen, allowing you to identify the alarm(s)
quickly.
- Fire: This button is shown in color if any "fire"
inputs have been 'tripped' (e.g., by a smoke, fire,
or CO detector). Clicking this button displays
the Area status screen, allowing you to quickly
identify the area(s) that may need to be
evacuated.
- Alarm: This button is shown in color if any input
points (monitoring sensors) have been 'tripped'
in an armed area. Clicking this button displays
the Area status screen, allowing you to identify
the alarm(s) quickly.
- Trouble: This button is shown in color if any
'equipment' conditions are active (i.e., panel or
module in trouble). Clicking this button displays
the Equipment status screen, allowing you to
locate the problem(s) quickly. If the 'trouble'
button is flashing, this indicates that an ACfailure is in effect at the panel.
- Monitor: This allows selecting the account to
be monitored by the status toolbar (for the
operator who is presently logged in).
(If you change this, you can save your changes by
opening the View menu, selecting Desktop Settings,
and then Save).
The toolbar is active only when the VEREX Director
software is connected with the associated panel(s).
This does not effect the account to be monitored in
the monitoring window. (The monitoring window
pertains to the account that is selected (doubleclicked) in the 'tree.)
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
75
Monitor (from the Status Toolbar)
Selecting the Account to be Monitored
by the Status Toolbar
For systems with multiple accounts, you can
set the account to be monitored by the status
toolbar (for each operator who is logged in):
Click Monitor on the far-right end of the
toolbar (or open the View menu, and select
Change Monitor Account). Then, select
your desired account, and click OK.
When finished, save your changes by
opening the View menu, selecting Desktop
Settings, and then Save.
This does not effect the account to be monitored in
the monitoring window. (The monitoring window
pertains to the account that is selected (doubleclicked) in the 'tree.)
The status toolbar is active only when the VEREX
Director software is connected with the associated
panel(s).
Screen Reference
(Account Folders and Accounts)
- The account to be monitored by the status
toolbar (identified with a small green square).
Select the desired account, and click OK.
76
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Miscellaneous Status Tasks
Panel Date and Time
VEREX Director lets you check the date and
time stored at a system panel, compare it with
that at the host computer, and adjust the
panel's date / time to match the computer, if
necessary.
'difference' value to see if the panel date and
time need to be changed.
If you need to set the date and time at the
panel to match the VEREX Director computer,
click [Set Panel Time with Server Time].
Initiate a Connection, and Access this
Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - System from
the MyTools bar, or select System under
Control & Status in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
When the screen appears, use the Grid /
Form toolbar-button to select your preferred
view-mode (forms view is recommended here).
Multi-Panel Systems: Select the desired panel at the
bottom of the form (if not shown/selected in the 'tree').
Checking or Changing the Date / Time
To 'read' the date and time from the panel,
click [Get Panel Time]. Then, check the
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
77
Screen Reference
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System (Date/Time Portion)
-Panel (bottom of the form): This is where you
select a desired panel (for systems with more
than one).
Alternative: You can also set the 'tree' to list status
topics on a panel-by-panel basis. For details, refer
to "Other Desktop Choices".
- Panel Time Zone: This shows the 'time
zone' for the specific panel. If different from
the PC/server time zone, any clock updates
will be adjusted accordingly.
This will be different from the PC/server time zone
only for remote panels managed via modem or
wide area network. The panel time zone is set
through the panel-group screen. For details, refer
to "Panel Groups and Connection Settings".
- [Get Panel Time]: Reads the date and time
setting at the panel.
- [Set Panel Time with Server Time]: Changes
the time at the panel to match the computer.
Note: In multi-PC (client-server) systems, the panel
time is synchronized with that of the VEREX Director
server PC. Director-Server PC: This is the PC that
includes "...Director-Server.exe", and typically
contains the database as well.
- Panel Date / Time: The present date & time
setting at the panel.
- PC Server Date / Time: The present date &
time setting at the VEREX Director computer
(server if applicable).
- Difference (Approximate): The approximate
time-difference between the panel and the
computer.
If necessary, you can set the date and time for the
computer through the windows 'Control Panel' (select
Start, Settings, Control Panel, and Date/Time).
When finished, be sure to synchronize the panel clock
(i.e., "Set Panel Time...").
78
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Resetting Users' Antipassback Status
Antipassback (APB): A feature that blocks individual
cards from being used to:
+ Re-enter the same area, or;
+ Re-enter the facility from 'outside', and/or;
+ (Optional): Enter other areas;
…Unless they are recorded as exiting first--i.e., each
person must use their card/token at every reader they
encounter (that is set to "Detect Antipassback"). Tip:
This helps to protect against unauthorized card usage.
Enabling the Antipassback Feature: To enable
antipassback tracking for specific areas and doors,
refer to the "Antipassback" selections under "Areas and
Related Settings", and the "Detect Antipassback"
selection under "Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a Door".
Antipassback Reset
From time-to-time, a person may be unable to
enter a door due to an antipassback violation
(such as if they entered or exited when the
system unlocked a door for someone else).
This can be corrected by resetting the
antipassback status for the specific user, or all
users, as desired.
Resetting Antipassback Status
Initiate a connection with the panel(s), and
access the "System" Control & Status topic as
described previously/above.
Multi-Panel Systems: Select the desired panel at the
bottom of the form (if not shown/selected in the 'tree').
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Then, click [Anti-Passback Reset]. In the
next screen, select an individual user, or "All
Users", and the panel(s) to be affected by the
reset (i.e., the ones associated with the
specific areas and doors).
When finished, click OK, and respond to any
additional messages that appear.
Reset APB Status by Area: You can also reset user
antipassback status on an area-by-area basis. For
details, refer to "Checking Status or Controlling Items
by Area" (in a following section).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
79
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System (Antipassback)
Screen Reference
-Panel (bottom of the form): This is where you
select a desired panel (for systems with more
than one).
Alternative: You can also set the 'tree' to list status
topics on a panel-by-panel basis. For details, refer
to "Other Desktop Choices".
Anti-Passback
- [Anti-Passback Reset]: This opens a small
screen that allows resetting the antipassback
status for a single user, or all users for doors
associated with selected panel(s).
-User: This allows selecting a specific user, or
"All Users" to have their antipassback status
reset at the selected panel(s).
Anti-Passback Settings
These choices allow you to select the panels
associated with the user APB status-reset (for
systems that have more than one panel). (If you
have only one panel, these settings all have the
same effect.)
- All Panels in this Account: This will reset
the antipassback status for all panels in your
presently-selected account.
- All Panels in this Panel Group: This will
reset the antipassback status for your
selected panel, plus any others that
communicate through the same cable or
remote modem.
- Just this Panel: This will reset the
antipassback status for your selected panel
only.
80
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System [Anti-Passback Reset]
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Clearing a "Bad Card/PIN Global Lockout"
Global User Lockouts
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
The 'Bad Card/PIN' tracking feature System [Clear User Lockout]
helps to prevent unauthorized persons
'hacking' their way into a controlled area.
All users can be locked out automatically
if a lot of invalid cards and/or PINs are
detected during a set time.
Related:  Account Information Bad
Card/PIN;  Configuration Areas
Access "Bad Card Action"
The [Clear User Lockout] button allows
clearing the lockout, so all authorized
persons can enter as usual.
Clearing a Global User Lockout
Initiate a connection with the panel(s),
and access the "System" Control &
Status
topic
as
described
previously/above.
Multi-Panel Systems: Select the desired panel at the
bottom of the form (if not shown/selected in the 'tree').
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Then, click [Clear User Lockout], and watch
for the status indicator to change.
Screen Reference
- Panel (bottom of the form): This is where you
select a desired panel (for systems with more
than one).
Alternative: You can also set the 'tree' to list status
topics on a panel-by-panel basis. For details, refer to
"Other Desktop Choices".
User Status
- [Clear User Lockout]: This allows resetting a
"Global User Lockout" triggered by the 'Bad
Card/PIN' tacking feature.
- Global User Lockout: This shows whether or
not a 'Global User Lockout' is presently in effect.
Related:  Account Information Bad Card/PIN
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
81
Checking System Status (Remote Diagnostics)
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
This feature allows you to check the System ("Get System Status" portion)
Remote Diagnostics
status of a number of hardware and
communications aspects of a panel.
Attention: This feature is supported for xL
panels only (narrow rectangular mainboard).
Tip: You can also run reports based on
previous status/diagnostic sessions.
Related: Reports, Panel Diagnostic
 Reporting on Panel Diagnostics
Running Remote Diagnostics
Initiate a connection with the panel(s),
and access the "System" Control &
Status
topic
as
described
previously/above.
Multi-Panel Systems: Select the desired
panel at the bottom of the form (if not
shown/selected in the 'tree').
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if
you'd like more information), refer to
"Accessing the Control and Status Topics for
a Panel" (<<).
Then, click [Get System Status], and watch
for a small screen to appear showing status
details.
Screen Reference
- Panel (bottom of the form): This is where you
select a desired panel (for systems with more
than one).
Tip: "Control & Status" (and configuration) topics can
be set to display either as a single list, or on a panelby-panel basis. (To change the view: Right-click
"Control & Status", and select or deselect Logical Tree
View). For more information, refer to "Other Desktop
Choices".
Remote Diagnostics
- [Get System Status]: This shows a progress
bar while collecting data, and then opens a
small screen showing various status items for
the specific panel.
82
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
- On This Screen: This shows various
physical status aspects for the specific
panel.
- [Print]: This allows printing the onscreen diagnostic data.
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System [Get System Status]
Tip: A print-setup screen will appear—
allowing you to select a printer, and set up
the print-job as desired.
- [OK]: This saves the on-screen data
(internally), and closes the Remote
Diagnostics screen.
Tip: You can also run reports based on
previous status/diagnostic sessions.
Related: Reports, Panel Diagnostic
 Reporting on Panel Diagnostics
Note: The Director software retains 24
months worth of diagnostics sessions, or
the last 100—whichever is greater.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
83
Checking the Status of Panels (Equipment)
Panel Status (Equipment)
Conditions Monitored for Each Panel
Working with This Screen
When the status screen appears, use the Grid
/ Form toolbar-button to select your preferred
view-mode.
Various conditions (such as low battery,
tampering, etc.) can be monitored for each
panel. This helps to maintain the integrity of
each system panel.
Forms view: All equipment topics on a graphical
screen;
Grid View: A list of monitored equipment topics.
Also See: Control & Status, Panel Control & Status,
System, Power
 Checking Power Levels
Items to be Monitored: To set the conditions to be
monitored for a panel, refer to "Equipment Settings
(Pseudo / Internal Inputs)".
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the available status
information.
Initiate a Connection, and Access this
Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
Multi-Panel Systems: Select the desired panel at the
bottom of the form (if not shown/selected in the 'tree').
Tip: Any alarm conditions that are in effect will be
shown in color. Be sure to dispatch someone to deal
with any conditions that require attention.
Individual items that are grey in color are not presently
being monitored by the system.
To block the monitoring of a specific condition:
Go to "ConfigurationSystemEquipment" for the
specific panel, and set the "Preprocess" for the desired
item to "Undefined". For details, refer to "Equipment
Settings (Pseudo/Internal Inputs)".
Screen Reference
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Equipment
from the MyTools bar, or select Equipment
under "Control & Status: System" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, Panel Control &
Status, and System (click the "+" beside each topic).
Alternative: You can also click Trouble on the status
toolbar.
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
84
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System Equipment
-Panel (bottom of the form): This is
where you select a desired panel (for
systems with more than one).
Alternative: You can also set the 'tree' to
list status topics on a panel-by-panel basis.
For details, refer to "Other Desktop
Choices".
- (top of screen): Status of various
items pertaining to a specific account
or site.
- Fuse: Whether any of the fuses on
this system panel has failed.
- Reporting (Alarm
Communications): Status of
communications links (phone and
high-security HSC line), and whether
or not this has affected an alarm transmission.
- System Configuration: Panel programming
issues/errors.
- Module Status: Items pertaining to an
expansion module (door controller, point
expansion module, etc.).
- [Detail Module Status]: Jumps to the
module/POD status window (grid-view), so you
can quickly locate the device that is in trouble.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
85
Checking Power Levels (V4.4)
System Power Status
Working with This Screen
The power status screen allows you to check
the status of various items pertaining to mains
input voltage, battery life remaining, etc.
When the status screen appears, use scroll
bar at the bottom to view all items listed.
Note: Some features are supported only by xL panels.
Unsupported items will be shown as zero (0).
Also See: Control & Status, Panel Control & Status,
System, Equipment
 Checking the Status of Panels (Equipment)
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Form/Grid Views: This screen uses a custom grid view,
and the Form/Grid button will be disabled.
Multi-Panel Systems: Select the desired panel at the
bottom of the form (if not shown/selected in the 'tree').
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the available status
information.
Tip: Be sure to dispatch someone to deal with any
conditions that require attention.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (<<).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Power from
the MyTools bar, or select Power under
"Control & Status: System" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, Panel Control &
Status, and System (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
"Control & Status" (and configuration) topics can be set
to display either as a single list, or on a panel-by-panel
basis.
(To change the view: Right-click "Control & Status",
and select or deselect Logical Tree View). For more
information, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (<<).
86
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System Power
Screen Reference
-Panel (bottom of the form): This is
where you select a desired panel (for
systems with more than one).
Tip: "Control & Status" (and configuration)
topics can be set to display either as a
single list, or on a panel-by-panel basis.
(To change the view: Right-click "Control &
Status", and select or deselect Logical Tree
View). For more information, refer to
"Other Desktop Choices".
On This Screen
Power Status
- [Refresh Power Status]: Click this to refresh
the data onscreen.
- (Columns of Data): This screen shows the
status of various items pertaining to mains input
voltage, battery life remaining, etc.
Note: Some features are supported only by xL panels.
Unsupported items will be shown as zero (0).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
87
Checking the Status of Modules
Grid View: All modules in a list.
Module Status
The module status screen shows the status of
various items pertaining to each system
module (keypad, door controller, etc.).
Also See (Related Topics):
+ Checking the Status of Panels (Equipment)
+ Checking Power Levels
Initiate a Connection, and Access this
Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Select a desired module in the list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select a module at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
st
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the available status
information.
Tip: Any alarm conditions that are in effect will be
shown in color. Be sure to dispatch someone to deal
with any conditions that require attention.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Modules from
the MyTools bar, or select Modules in the
'tree' under "Control & Status: System:
Equipment".
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and then open these branches by clicking the "+"
beside each topic:  Control & Status,  Panel
Control & Status,  System,  Equipment.
Alternative: You can also select [Detail Module
Status] in the equipment status screen.
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Working with This Screen
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one module at a time;
88
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Screen Reference
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System Equipment Modules
- Module (bottom of the form): This is
where you select a module to view its
status. This area shows a reference
number assigned by the system, plus
the name/description of the module as
defined under 'Configuration'.
- Module Information: Information
pertaining to the selected module
(version number, maximum and
present baud rate, etc.).
- Module Status: Various status topics
for the selected module.
- Communication Statistics: This
shows information pertaining to the
module bus communications success rate with
this device over a period of time.
- [Refresh Communication Statistics]: This
updates the screen (i.e., rechecks
communications statistics).
- [Reset Communication Statistics]: This
restarts the counters ('i.e., resets the statistics
values to zero).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
89
Suite Security System Messaging
The 'Suite Messaging' screen allows sending
messages to the LCD Suite units (all or
selected units). A message text can be up to
30 characters long.
Note: (Director V4.80 and LCD Suite 1.3). The ISM
Panel does not support this enhancement.
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
Suite Security Suite Messaging
- Send message to: This is where you can select
suite security keypads or you can use “All Suites”.
- Date/Time stamp: It is possible to add date and
time stamp at the beginning of message (“Add to
start of message”) or at the end (“Add to end of
message”). It is also possible to send message
without date and time (“No Date/Time Stamp”).
- Message to send: This is where you type
message text – maximum length is 30
characters.
- Suite message status: This is where you see
delivery status of all messages.
90
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status or Controlling a Suite Security System
Status of an Apartment/Suite or Facility
The 'Suite Security' status screen shows the
status of various items pertaining to each
apartment or facility associated with a suitesecurity keypad, and allows silencing a suite
keypad alarm, or changing a suite/facility
arming level (V4.31).
Note: Since each keypad typically pertains to a
separate, privately-owned dwelling, any arming
changes should typically be coordinated with the
occupant.
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Working with These Screens
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one suite/facility at a time;
Grid View: All defined suites in a list.
Select a desired suite-security keypad in the
list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select a suite-security
keypad at the bottom of the form, or use the 'Find' and
'Find Next' buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or
1st few characters--e.g., nam*)
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the status topics for the
desired suite(s).
Tip: Active status items and available buttons are
displayed in color. Be sure to dispatch someone to
deal with any conditions that require attention.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Suite
Security from the MyTools bar, or select Suite
Security under "Control & Status" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Diagnostics Screen: A second screen is available as
Control & Status - Suite Security Diagnostics in the
MyTools bar, or Diagnostics under "Suite Security " in
the 'tree'.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
91
Screen Reference
- Security Suite State ( [Off], [Stay],
and [On] ): These buttons show (and
allow changing) the arming level of the
suite/facility: Off (Disarmed); Stay:
(Perimeter Armed); or ON (Fully
armed).
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
Control Security
& StatusDiagnostics
Panel Control & Status
Suite
Suite Security
Notes: Since each keypad typically
pertains to a separate, privately-owned
dwelling, any arming changes should
typically be coordinated with the occupant.
Prior to v4.31, these buttons were 'displayonly'. This feature requires panel firmware
4.25, and 'Panel Control & Status'
operator permission.
- Alarms: This area shows any alarms
for the suite/facility (fire, tripped
sensors, or someone tampering with
the keypad). The "Siren Type" is
indicated as well (None, Sonalert,
Siren, or Fire).
------------------------- [Silence] (V4.31): This allows silencing an
alarm for a selected keypad/suite.
------------------------- Input Points: This area lists the suite security
keypad's input points, and shows the status of
each one (i.e., whether or not each sensor has
been 'tripped').
Note: The number of input points supported depends
on the type of suit security keypad installed.
- Panic Keys: This area lists the suite security
keypad's panic keys, and shows the status of
each one (i.e., whether or not any panic keys
have been pressed).
Note: The number of panic keys supported depends
on the type of suit security keypad installed. For
example, 2-zone keypads support panic key #1 only
(triggered by pressing  and *).
- Output Points: This area lists the suite security
keypad's outputs, and shows the status of each
one (i.e., whether or not any of the outputs have
been fired).
- Security Suite (bottom of form): This is where
you select a suite security keypad to view
diagnostic information. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the system, plus
the name/description of the suite/facility as
defined under 'Configuration'.
- Security Suite Information: Information
pertaining to the selected suite (version number,
maximum and present baud rate, etc.).
- Security Suite Status: Various status topics for
the selected keypad.
- Communication Statistics: This shows
information pertaining to the module bus
communications success rate with this device
over a period of time.
- [Refresh Communication Statistics]: This
updates the screen (i.e., rechecks
communications statistics).
- [Reset Communication Statistics]: This
restarts the counters ('i.e., resets the statistics
values to zero).
Note: The number of programmable output points
supported depends on the type of suit security keypad
installed.
-----------------------------------------------------------
92
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status or Controlling Items by Area
"Area Users" Screen: A second screen is available as
Control & Status - Area Users in the MyTools bar, or
Area Users under "Areas " in the 'tree'. This pertains to
the presence of user activity, the number of users in an
area (user count), and resetting APB tracking for an
area. Related Topic: Area Users (to follow).
Control & Status by Area
The area status screen shows the status of
items associated with each system 'Area', and
allows controlling many things (arm or disarm
an area, unlock doors, etc.)
Permissions/Authorities: This feature can be used by
operators with "Control and Status" permission, when
they log into 'Control & Status' as a user with the
authority to perform the specific tasks.
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Areas from
the MyTools bar, or select Areas under
"Control & Status" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Controlling Items", previous).
Viewing the Status of an Area
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode ('forms' view is
recommended here).
Select a desired Area in the list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select an item at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1st few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the status topics for items
in the desired area.
Silencing Alarms: You can use the [Silence] button
to silence an alarm that is presently in effect (if you
have this authority).
Tip: Active status items and available buttons are
displayed in color, and door and input-point alarms are
shown in red at the bottom of the form. Be sure to
dispatch someone to deal with any conditions that
require attention.
Arming or Disarming an Area
While 'in' the area status screen, you can
change the 'arming level' of a desired area by:
 Selecting the desired area, and;
 Clicking [Off], [Stay], or [On], as applicable
(and wait briefly for the change to occur).
Arming Wizard: If the area has an open door, or input
point that is 'in alarm', you will be prompted to deal with
this before finishing the area arming-change.
Bypassing a Sensor: For details on bypassing a sensor
(input-point), refer to "Checking Status or Bypassing
Input Points (Sensors)".
Areas can be set to disarm to either 'Off' or 'Stay'
automatically when a user/entrant is granted access at
a door in that area. This is set up jointly under "Areas
and Related Settings", and "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
Extending / Suspending an Area
Schedule
You can suspend an area's schedule, or
set/delay the closing time (Worklate) when
necessary.
To suspend or resume the
schedule, select the desired Area, and click
[Suspend] or [Resume] as applicable. To
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
93
adjust the closing time, click [Worklate], set
the closing time as desired, and click OK.
Tip: To adjust the time in 30 min. increments, use '<'
or '>' respectively. For 1 hour adjustments, use '<<' or
'>>'.
For more permanent changes, you can adjust the
schedule itself, and/or change assignments for the
specific area.
For details, refer to "Schedules for User Access and
Area Automation", and "Areas and Related settings".
Controlling all Doors in a Specific Area
Tip: Reader commands pertain to the readers that
allow entering the selected area.
 Ensure you are in the 'Forms' view (click
Form on the toolbar);
 Select the desired area (bottom of window);
 Use one of the four buttons in the centre of
the screen to select your desired action.
 Ensure you are in the 'Forms' view (click
Form on the toolbar);
 Select the desired area (bottom of window),
and locate the specific input-point in the list;
 Click the small button on the right of the
input-point status, and select from the list
that appears. (Wait briefly for the change to
take effect).
If the button is not present, this means either that the
input-point is not of a 'bypassable' type, or you do not
the authority to bypass input-points.
A user's authorities can be set to automatically remove
any 'bypasses' that are in effect when they enter an
area (to help ensure that any faulty sensors are not
forgotten). For details, refer to the "Auto Remove
Bypass" setting under "Authorities for Users/Entrants".
Refer to the selection-descriptions if you'd like
more information. (And wait while the changes
take effect).
Elevator Readers: These commands do not apply to
readers in elevator (lift) cabs. To control an elevator
and/or its associated reader, refer to "Checking Status
or Controlling Elevators".
Controlling a Door in a Specific Area
 Ensure you are in the 'Forms' view (click Form
on the toolbar);
 Select the desired "Area" (bottom of window),
and locate the specific door in the list;
 Find your desired door in the list near the
bottom left corner of the screen. Then, click
the small button in the 'state' column for the
door, and select from the list that appears.
(Wait briefly for any changes to take effect).
If the button is not present, this means you do not have
'Door Control' authority. If card-access is presently
'locked-out', you may need to use an 'area-wide'
command to reinstate card-access before the door can
be unlocked. Locking-out cards automatically causes
the door to lock.
Doors can be set to unlock and re-lock at certain times
and/or in-sync with the arming state for the associated
area. For details, refer to "Areas and Related Settings",
and "Doors, Readers, and Related Settings".
Bypassing an Input Point in a Specific
Area
To bypass an input point in a specific area,
allowing the area to be armed, or remove a
'bypass', allowing the sensor to be monitored:
94
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Screen Reference
Control & Status Panel Control & Status Areas
- Area (bottom of form): This is
where you select an area to
view its status or control items.
This shows a reference number
assigned by the system, plus
the name/description of the
area as defined under
'Configuration'.
- [Off], [Stay], and [On]: These
buttons indicate the present
arming-level of the area, and
allow arming/disarming an area as desired (if
you have this authority). Note: If an item is in
'alarm' or 'trouble', this should be corrected
before you proceed. (The system will typically
prompt you to deal with the situation).
- Fire / Alarm: Whether or not any fire-type inputs
and/or other inputs in the area have been
'tripped'.
[Silence]: This allows silencing alarms that are in
effect as desired—if you have this authority.
- Ready, etc.: Various misc. status aspects for
the specific area (if the area is ready to be
armed, or if doors are open, etc.).
- Schedule-Related Items (visible only for a
scheduled area): This shows schedule-related
status topics, and provides buttons to set/delay
the closing time [Work Late], or [Suspend] (or
Resume) the schedule (if you have the
authority).
- Door Reader Commands for all Doors of the
Area (3 buttons across the middle): Allows
controlling all doors in the selected area (if you
have the authority).
[Lock All Doors]: This locks / re-locks all doors
pertaining to the selected area (i.e., all doors with one
of its readers set to this area);
[Unlock All Doors]: This unlocks all doors pertaining
to the selected area (i.e., all doors with one of its
readers set to this area);
[Advanced]: This button provides access to
additional reader/door commands. Selections include
unlock/relock the doors, lockout or reinstate card
access, and/or change various modes at the doors.
"Momentary" pertains to the defined "Unlock Duration"
(such as when a person uses their access card), and
"Pending" means the command will be held until after
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
one valid user gains entry at the door.
Reader commands pertain to all readers that allow
entering (or remaining within) the specific area.
Readers that allow exiting from the area will be set to
either a different area, or "outside".
For details on the various reader modes, card modes,
and class map settings, refer to "Doors, Readers, and
Related Settings".
Elevator Readers: These commands do not apply to
readers in elevator (lift) cabs. To control an elevator
and/or its associated reader, refer to "Checking Status
or Controlling Elevators".
- Door List: Shows the status of doors in the
area, and provides selections for unlocking or
relocking individual doors (if you have the
authority).
Pending Unlock: This is an "unlock" that waits until
someone gains entry at the specific door.
- Input Point List: Shows the status of input
points (sensors) in the area, and allows
bypassing individual sensors in each area (for
points that support this, and if you have the
authority).
The Door-List and Input-Point List are available only in
'forms' view (click Form on the toolbar to switch to
'forms' view).
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
95
Area Users (Activity, User Count, and APB-Reset)
Control & Status - Area Users
The "Area Users" screen shows / allows:
 Whether or not activity has occurred in the
area.
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
Areas Area Users
(This is based on users entering or leaving the
area, and/or a custom 'Activity Monitor' input point
being tripped.)
 The number of users presently in the area;
 Whether or not the area is full (i.e., contains
the 'allowed' number of persons/vehicles).
 Allows resetting the 'user-count' as desired
(to min/empty, max. allowed, or any custom
value);
 Allows resetting the antipassback (APB)
status for all users in an area (see next
section).
Note: To be available here, the 'user-counting' and
'activity tracking' features must have been set up for the
specific area(s).
Ref: "Configuration Areas" (Counting; Activity).
Working with this Screen
 Ensure you are connected with the specific
panel(s) as described previously.
 Open the Area Users screen:
MyTools Bar: Control & Status - Area Users
Tree: Control & Status, Panel Control & Status,
Areas, Area Users
 Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode;
 Refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the status topics for
items in the desired area.
Screen Reference
- Area (bottom of form): This is where you select
an area to view its status or control items. This
shows a reference number assigned by the
system, plus the name/description of the area as
defined under 'Configuration'.
Status
- Activity in Area: Whether or activity has
occurred in the specific area. (This is based on
users entering or leaving the area, and/or a
custom 'Activity Monitor' input point being
tripped.)
- User Count: This is the number of users (or
vehicles) in the area (based on access granted
96
in to and out of the area).
Full: Whether or not the area contains the allowed
number of users/vehicles.
- [ Reset User Count ]: This allows resetting this
area's user-count as desired. (Details to follow /
below.)
Anti-Passback
- [ APB Reset ]: This allows resetting the
antipassback status pertaining to the selected
area, for all users. (Details to follow / below.)
Confirm/Unconfirm Alarm
(UK/ACPO Panel Mode)
- Confirmed Alarm: This indicates if there are
any confirmed alarms in the selected area;
- Unconfirmed Alarm: This indicates if there are
any uncomfirmed alarms in the selected area;
- [ Reset Confirmed Alarm ]: This allows
resetting all confirmed alarms in the selected
area.
Notice: The UK ACPO standard includes strict
requirements regarding confirmed vs. unconfirmed
alarms, and resetting alarms. Interested parties are
expected to be familiar with such details. Installation
requirements can be found in a UK/ACPO appendix of
the advanced installation guide for your specific
panel(s).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Resetting the User-Count for an Area
For areas set to 'count' the number of users
that are present, you may need to reset the
'user-count' on a periodic basis (e.g., to correct
for things such as users entering and/or exiting
when someone else opens the door).
Control & Status Panel Control &
Status Areas Area Users
[ Reset User Count ]
Related Topic: "Configuration Areas Counting.
To reset the 'user-count' for an area:
 Ensure you are connected with the specific
panel(s) as described previously.
 Open the Area Users screen:
MyTools Bar: Control & Status - Area Users
Tree: Control & Status, Panel Control & Status,
Areas, Area Users
 Access the "Reset User Count" feature for
an area:
Forms View: Select the desired area
at the bottom of window, and then click
[ Reset User Count ].
Grid View: Locate your desired area in the list, and
click [...] under "User Count".
 Refer to the item-descriptions for this screen
while making your selection.
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
- Reset Count to Zero: This resets the area
user-count to zero (regardless of what the
present 'minimum' value is);
- Reset Count to Minimum: This resets the area
user-count to the present 'minimum' value (as
shown in blue). This is the maximum number of
users that can be in the area for it to still be
considered 'empty';
- Reset Count to Maximum: This resets the
area user-count to the present 'maximum' value
(as shown in blue). This is the number of users
needed for the area to be considered 'full';
- Reset Count to: This allows resetting the usercount to any value between the 'minimum' and
'maximum' values shown in blue.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
97
Resetting the Antipassback Status for
Users in a Specific Area
From time-to-time, persons may be unable to
enter an area due to an antipassback violation
(such as if they entered or exited when the
system unlocked a door for someone else).
This can be corrected by resetting the
antipassback status for a specific area.
 Ensure you are connected with the specific
panel(s) as described previously.
 Open the Area Users screen:
MyTools Bar: Control & Status - Area Users
Tree: Control & Status, Panel Control & Status,
Areas, Area Users
 Access the "APB Reset" feature for an area:
Forms View: Select the desired area
at the bottom of window, and then click
[ APB Reset ].
Grid View: Locate your desired area in the list, and
click [...] under "Anti-Passback Reset".
 Respond to any additional messages that
appear.
Control & Status Panel Control &
Status Areas Area Users
[ APB Reset ]
Antipassback (APB): A feature that blocks individual
cards from being used to:
+ Re-enter the same area, or;
+ Re-enter the facility from 'outside', and/or;
+ (Optional): Enter other areas;
…Unless they are recorded as exiting first--i.e., each
person must use their card/token at every reader they
encounter (that is set to "Detect Antipassback"). Tip:
This helps to protect against unauthorized card usage.
Resetting APB Status for an Individual and/or SystemWide: You can also reset the antipassback status for
an individual and/or for all areas associated with
selected panel(s). For details, refer to "Resetting Users'
A`Status" (previous).
Enabling the Antipassback Feature: To enable
antipassback tracking for specific areas and doors, refer
to the "Antipassback" selections under "Areas and
Related Settings", and the "Detect Antipassback"
selection under "Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a Door".
Screen Reference
98
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking User In/Out Status
User In/Out Status
Beginning with v4.2, VEREX Director can
show the In/Out status for all users in an
account.
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
This feature operates in 'real-time', showing the new
area and time whenever a person is granted access (for
panels that are presently communicating with the
VEREX Director software).
Note: This feature requires entry and exit readers
on all doors used to enter and exit from the facility,
and every person must use their access card/token
when entering or leaving the building.
Persons last reported as 'In', but with no card
activity for 24 hours will be set as 'Out'.
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - User In/Out
Status from the MyTools bar, or click your
site/account button in the tree, 'open' Control
& Status (click the "+"), and select User
In/Out Status .
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and double-click the desired account.
Note: This feature uses a custom 'view', with the
Form/Grid toggle feature disabled.
Working with This Screen
Refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the available status
information.
Tip: To sort the list by name, area, or time,
click the desired column name.
Note: Especially with area or time, be sure to sort the
list fairly often to update the sort-order. (The data is
live, the sorting is not.)
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
99
Control & Status User In/Out Status
Screen Reference
In/Out Status Tracking: This feature
requires "User In/Out Status Tracking" to be
enabled.
Related Setting: YourAccount, Account
Information, Setup (tab), "Enable User
In/Out Status for this Account"
Notes: This feature operates in 'real-time',
updating each time a person uses their
card to gain entry through a door or gate.
The screen may take a little while to
activate/update.
- (List of Users): Once enabled, the
main part of this screen shows a list of
the users for this account that are inside the
facility. The list will include each person's first
name, last name, the last area they entered, and
the time of entry.
Tip: To sort the list by name, area, or time, click the
desired column name. Especially with area or time, be
sure to sort the list fairly often to update the sort-order.
(The data is live, the sorting is not.)
100
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status or Controlling Individual Doors
Door Status and Control
The door status screen shows the status of
doors in the system, and allows controlling
various parameters for each door (unlock a
door, change operating characteristics, etc.)
Elevator Readers: Door control does not apply to
readers in elevator (lift) cabs. To control an elevator
and/or its associated reader, refer to "Checking Status
or Controlling Elevators".
Permissions/Authorities: This feature can be used by
operators with "Control and Status" permission, when
they log into 'Control & Status' as a user with the
authority to control the specific items.
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Doors from
the MyTools bar, or select Doors under
"Control & Status" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
Welcome
Report
Viewing the Status of Specific Doors
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one door at a time;
Grid View: All defined doors in a list.
Now, select a desired door in the list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select an item at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1st few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the status topics for the
desired door(s).
Tip: Active status items, and available buttons are
displayed in color. Be sure to dispatch someone to
deal with any conditions that require attention.
Controlling a Specific Reader or Door
To unlock or re-lock a door, or change one of
its operating parameters:
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
21-0381E v4.9.1
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Control
 Select the desired door (forms view: bottom
of the window);
 Then select the desired command from one
of the drop-down lists on the screen.
In 'Grid' view, use the small button to the right of your
desired topic to select a command.
If button(s) are not available, this means you do not
have 'Door Control' authority. If cards are presently
'locked-out', you'll need to reinstate card-access before
unlocking the door. Locking-out cards automatically
causes the door to lock.
Doors can be set to unlock and relock at certain times
and/or in-sync with the arming state for the associated
area. For details, refer to "Areas and Related Settings",
and "Doors, Readers, and Related Settings".
Screen Reference
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
101
Control & Status Panel Control & Status Doors
- Door (bottom of form): This is where
you select a door to view its status or
issue commands. This shows a
reference number assigned by the
system, plus the name/description of
the door as defined under
'Configuration'.
If some Door numbers are missing:
Elevator and door numbering is shared (1 32), but the elevators will not be listed here.
- Door Command: Shows the status of
the selected door, and provides
selections for unlocking/relocking it (if
you have the authority).
If cards are presently 'locked-out', you'll
need to reinstate card-access before unlocking the
door. (Set the "Reader State" as "Normal".)
Tip: "Momentary" pertains to the defined "Unlock
Duration" (such as when a person uses their access
card), and "Pending" means the command will be held
until after one valid user gains entry at the door.
- Door Status, Door Alarm, and "Wandering
Patient": The present status of the door, and
whether or not this is considered to be an 'alarm'
(i.e., 'not OK'), plus whether or not the
"wandering Patient" feature is in effect for this
door.
- Tamper: Whether or not tampering has been
detected for the RTE (REX) circuit, the main
reader, or the auxiliary reader.
- Reader 1 / Reader 2 In Area X: Status/control
topics for the selected reader and its associated
area, plus selections for controlling each reader
(if you have the authority). Selections include
lockout or reinstate card access, and/or change
various operating characteristics.
Reader Mode, 'Toggle Lock' and 'Toggle Lock
Authorized': Cards granted access at the reader will
cause the door to toggle between lockedunlocked.
'Authorized' means this will work only for users with
'Door Command' authority.
Note: Locking-out cards automatically causes the
door to lock.
For details on the various modes and commands:
 In the section on using maps and cameras, see:
"Controlling an Area or Device" (look for "Door
Commands");
 In the configuration chapter, see: "Doors, Readers,
and Related Settings".
'Momentary Unlocking', and log that card/user
as being granted entry.
 Cards can be denied due to being expired, locked
out, wrong time, wrong door class, etc. -- as long as
they are defined in the system.
 This feature will be unavailable if someone else is
granted entry, or after 5 minutes from the time the
person was denied access (although they can
simply present their card/token again).
 This may be used in conjunction with an eventtriggered camera-view for the door (so a remote
attendant can see the person). Related Topics:
"Initial Set Up of: Views, Maps, Cameras" (step 3b).
 This can also be used in conjunction with the popup "Photo-Verification" feature (if it is set to trigger
on 'Access Denied' events).
Related Topics: "Visually Verifying Users (PhotoVerification)"
 This cannot be used (or does not apply) with:
- Cards being enrolled or disabled at a reader set
to do this (although it will apply for cards denied
due to wrong area/time, etc.);
- Access being denied due to door interlock
violations or area/disarm authority issues.
- Grant Last User: If the last user at this reader
was denied access, this selection will issue a
102
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status or Controlling Elevators
Elevator (Lift) Status and Control
The elevator status screen shows the status of
elevators in the system, and allows changing
the operating characteristics for elevator
readers. Selections are also provided to apply
or remove access-control for all floors or
individual floors--as accessed from a specific
elevator (lift) cab.
Permissions/Authorities: This feature can be used by
operators with "Control and Status" permission, when
logged into 'Control & Status' as a user who has "door
command" authority, and will affect only the floors they
have the authority to access.
Tip: You can also secure or desecure floors as
accessed from all elevator (lift) cabs. For details, refer
to "Viewing Status or Controlling Floors".
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
Status/Command Reference:
Secure (controlled access): Access to the floor (or all
floors from this cab) is controlled (i.e., the floor callbutton(s) are initially de-activated). To access the
floor(s), persons with appropriate authority must
present their access card and/or enter their PIN.
Desecure (free access): Access to the floor (or all
floors from this cab) is NOT controlled (floor callbutton(s) are activated).
Partially De/secured: Floors that presently have free
access through some elevator (lift) cabs, while access
is controlled though some other cabs (and/or where
some floor relays are offline, and the status isn't
known).
Return to Auto: This re-applies any defined
scheduling for the elevator and its associated flooraccess.
Offline: This indicates a relay board that is unable to
communicate with the elevator controller.
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Elevators
from the MyTools bar, or select Elevators
under "Control & Status" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Viewing the Status of Specific Elevators
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode. (Forms view is
recommended here.)
Now, select a desired elevator in the list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select an item at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1st few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the status topics for the
desired elevator(s).
Tip: Active status items, and available buttons are
displayed in color. Be sure to dispatch someone to
deal with any conditions that require attention.
Secure/Desecure Floors, or Control
Access Requirements for an Elevator
(Lift) Cab
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode. (Forms view is
recommended here.)
Select the desired elevator (forms view:
bottom of the window).
Refer to the item-descriptions for this screen
while selecting your desired command:
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
103
 To apply or remove access-control
for all floors from this elevator cab,
refer to the "Elevator Command"
selections.
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
Elevators
 To change the reader access
requirements or operating
characteristics, refer to the "Reader 1
in Area X" selections.
 To apply or remove access-control
(secure or desecure) for an individual
floor--as accessed from a specific
cab, refer to the "Elevator Floor
Status" selections.
In 'Grid' view, use the small button to the
right of your desired topic to select a
command.
If commands or button(s) are not available,
this means you do not have the authority to
control elevators.
Elevators and/or specific floors can be set to
desecure and resecure in-sync with a
desired schedule. For details, refer to the
configuration topic for elevators and/or floors.
Screen Reference
- Elevator (bottom of form): This is where you
select an elevator to view its status or issue
commands. This shows a reference number
assigned by the system, plus the
name/description of the elevator as defined
under 'Configuration'.
If some Elevator numbers are missing: Elevator and
door numbering is shared (1 - 32), but the doors will
not be listed here.
- Elevator Command: Shows the status of the
selected elevator, and provides selections to
secure or de-secure all floors as accessed from
this elevator cab only (via appropriate authority).
- Elevator Status, and Elevator Bypass: These
areas show the basic status of the selected
elevator (lift) cab, and whether or not the manual
override (bypass) input has been tripped.
Manual Override (bypass) Input: Triggering the
manual override (bypass) input on the elevator
controller (typically connected through a key-switch)
will desecure all floors as accessed from this cab (this
is the same as selecting "desecure" for the elevator
command).
controller, plus whether or not the relay boards
are communicating (on-line).
Fire Bypass: This indicates if a fire has been detected
(i.e., whether or not the fire input has been tripped).
Panic: This pertains to an "emergency" call-button in
the elevator (lift) cab.
- Reader 1 in Area X: This shows status topics
for the selected elevator reader, and provides
selections for controlling it (if you have the
authority). Selections include lockout or
reinstate card access, and/or change various
operating characteristics.
For details on the various reader modes, card modes,
and class map settings, refer to the elevator
configuration topic.
- Elevator Floor Status: This area shows a list of
the controlled floors that can be accessed
through this elevator (lift) cab, plus the status of
each floor, and provides selections to secure or
desecure each floor (as accessed from this
elevator / lift cab).
RBA and Relay: This identifies the elevator controller
relay associated with the specific floor (Relay Board
Address 0 - 15, and Relay 1 - 8).
- Relay Board Online: This lists the floor-relay
board(s) for your selected elevator (lift) cab, and
indicates any that are offline.
- Alarms: This area shows the status of various
alarm conditions (inputs) for the specific elevator
104
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status or Controlling Floors
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Floor Status and Control
The floor status screen shows the status of
access-controlled floors in the system, and
allows applying or removing access-control for
specific floor(s)--as accessed from all elevator
(lift) cabs in the system.
Permissions/Authorities: This feature can be used by
operators with "Control and Status" permission, when
logged into 'Control & Status' as a user who has "door
command" authority, and the ability to access the
specific floors.
Tip: You can also secure or desecure all floors as
accessed from a specific elevator (lift) cab. For details,
refer to "Viewing Status or Controlling Elevators".
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
Status/Command Reference:
Secure (controlled access): Access to the floor is
controlled (i.e., elevator floor call-button(s) are initially
de-activated). To access the floor, persons with
appropriate authority must present their access card
and/or enter their PIN.
Desecure (free access): Access to the floor is NOT
controlled (elevator floor call-buttons are activated).
Partially De/secured: Floors that presently have free
access through some elevator (lift) cabs, while access
is controlled though some other cabs (and/or where
some floor relays are offline, and the status isn't
known).
Return to Auto: This re-applies any defined
scheduling for the specific floor (as accessed from all
elevator cabs).
Offline: This indicates that a relay board is unable to
communicate with the elevator controller (or the
elevator controller module has lost communications
with the panel).
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Floors from
the MyTools bar, or select Floors under
"Control & Status" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Note: Grid view does not apply to this topic.
Viewing the Status of Controlled Floors
Access the "Floor" status topic as described
previously/above.
Then, visually skim through the list of floors to
find your desired one(s). (For details on the
displayed information, refer to the selectiondescriptions for this screen.)
Tip: If floor relays are off-line, be sure to dispatch
someone to correct the problem.
Secure/Desecure Floors (Remove or
Apply Access-Control to Floor(s)
Access the "Floor" status topic as described
previously/above.
Then, refer to the item-descriptions for this
screen while selecting your desired command:
 To apply or remove access-control for all
floors as accessed from all elevator (lift)
cabs, refer to the "Floor Command for All
Floors and All Elevators" selections.
 To apply or remove access-control for (i.e.,
secure or desecure) an individual floor--as
accessed from all elevator (lift) cabs, refer to
the "Floor and Elevator Status" selections.
If commands or button(s) are not available, this means
you do not have the authority to control elevators.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
105
Elevators and/or specific floors can be set to
desecure and resecure in-sync with a
desired schedule. For details, refer to the
configuration topic for elevators and/or
floors.
Control & Status Panel Control & Status Floors
Screen Reference
- Floor Command for All Floors and All
Elevators: This allows applying or removing
access-control for all floors and all elevators at
the same time (requires appropriate authority).
- Legend: This shows what the various colors
can mean pertaining to floor and elevator status.
No C&S: This means that no status information is
available because you are not connected to the
specific panel (i.e., a different panel within a multipanel account).
- Floor and Elevator Status: This area shows a
list of all controlled floors in the system, plus the
status of each floor, and provides selections to
secure or desecure each floor (as accessed
from all elevator / lift cabs in the system).
Elevator (lift) numbers (1 - 32): These columns
indicate the status of the associated floor selection
relay for each individual elevator (lift) cab.
Tip: If floor relays are off-line, be sure to dispatch
someone to correct the problem.
106
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status or Bypassing Input Points (Sensors)
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
Status of Monitored Sensors
(Input Points)
The 'point' status screen shows the status of
monitored sensors, and lets you bypass a
faulty sensor to allow arming an area.
Permissions/Authorities: This feature can be used by
operators with "Control and Status" permission, when
they log into 'Control & Status' as a user with the
authority to bypass input points.
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Viewing the Status of a Specific Sensor
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one sensor at a time;
Grid View: All defined sensors in a list.
Select a desired sensor (input-point) in the list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select an item at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1st few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the status topics for the
desired input point(s).
Tip: Active status items, and available button(s) are
displayed in color. Be sure to dispatch someone to
deal with any conditions that require attention.
Bypassing a Specific Input-Point
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Points from
the MyTools bar, or select Points under
"Control & Status" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
To bypass a specific input-point, allowing its
area to be armed, or remove a 'bypass',
allowing the sensor to be monitored:
 Select the desired input-point (bottom of the
'forms' window);
 Click [Bypass] or [Remove Bypass] as
applicable;
If the button is not present, this means either that the
input-point is not of a 'bypassable' type, or you do not
the authority to bypass input-points.
A user's authorities can be set to automatically remove
any 'bypasses' that are in effect when they enter an
area (to help ensure that any faulty sensors are not
forgotten). For details, refer to the "Auto Remove
Bypass" setting under "Authorities for Users/Entrants".
Screen Reference
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
107
Control & Status Panel Control & Status Points
- Point (bottom of form): This is where
you select an input-point to 'bypass', or
view its status. This shows a
reference number assigned by the
system, plus the name/description of
the input-point as defined under
'Configuration'.
- Point Status: The present status of
this sensor (input-point).
- [Bypass] or [Remove Bypass]:
Allows bypassing this input-point (to
allow its area to be armed), or
removing the bypass (to allow this
sensor to be monitored). This is
allowed only if you have the
appropriate authority, and if the input-point is
'bypassable'.
- Point Type: The type of the input-point (as
selected under 'Configuration').
- Area (and Related Information): The area
associated with this input-point, and various
status topics pertaining to that area.
- Point Circuit and [Refresh Point Circuit]:
Status pertaining to the input point circuit. Click
[Refresh Point Circuit] to update the on-screen
data.
108
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Status or Controlling Outputs
(Electronically switched Devices)
The 'Outputs' Control & Status Screen
Viewing the Status of a Specific Output
Outputs allow turning a self-powered electronic
device on or off. The outputs control & status
screen allows viewing the status of
programmable outputs, and lets you control
them manually when necessary.
Use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to select
your preferred view-mode.
Permissions/Authorities: This feature can be used by
any operator with "Control and Status - Door"
permission.
Also See ( V4.0):
+ Visual Status and Control (Maps and Cameras)
+ To connect: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
Initiate a Connection, and Access
this Topic
See if you're already connected with the
panel(s) by checking the status bar at the
bottom of the monitoring window.
Forms view: Details for one output at a time;
Grid View: All defined sensors in a list.
Select a desired output in the list (i.e., horn
circuit or controlled device).
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select an item at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'Find' and 'Find Next'
buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1st few
characters--e.g., nam*).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing the status topics for the
desired output(s).
Tip: Active status items, and available button(s) are
displayed in color. Be sure to dispatch someone to
deal with any conditions that require attention.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
If not presently connected, initiate a connection
with the desired panel(s).
For details, refer to "Connecting to the Associated
Panel(s), An Overview" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
-------------------------
Then, select Control & Status - Outputs from
the MyTools bar, or select Outputs under
"Control & Status" in the 'tree'.
Using the Tree: Click your site/account button in the
tree, and open Control & Status, and Panel Control &
Status (click the "+" beside each topic).
Login with your user ID and PIN if prompted for
this.
Panel Groups and Panels: Open your specific panel
group and panel if these are listed in the 'tree'. Tip:
The 'tree' can be set to show Control & Status topics in
a single list (logical tree view), or on a panel-by-panel
basis. For details, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
If the status screen is blank or inactive (or if you'd like
more information), refer to "Accessing the Control and
Status Topics for a Panel" (under "Checking Status &
Controlling Items", previous).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
109
Control & Status Panel Control &
Status Outputs[Manual Control]
Screen Reference
- Output (bottom of form): This is where
you select an output to control
manually, or view its status. This
shows a reference number assigned
by the system, plus the
name/description of the output as
defined under 'Configuration'.
- Status: "Error" will appear in color for
things such as:
Control & Status Panel Control & Status
Outputs
 Output programming done incorrectly at
a keypad;
 An output equation that is not supported
by the panel version;
 An output equation that is referencing undefined or
non-supported devices (e.g., incompatible featureset value).
- State: This shows whether or not the output is
triggered;
- Manual Mode: This shows what type of manual
control the output is under (if any);
- [Manual Control]: Allows manually controlling
the output.
Details to follow / below.
- Timer: This shows the remaining duration for a
timed output function that is presently in effect;
- Equation: This area shows details on the
programmed function / equation for the output.
Controlling an Output Manually
Access the "Outputs" control & status topic as
described previously, and use the Grid / Form
toolbar-button to select your preferred 'view'.
Forms view: Details for one item at a time;
Grid View: All items in a list.
Select the desired output (bottom of the 'forms'
window), and click [Manual Control] near the
upper-right corner of the form;
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while making your selection(s).
Screen Reference
110
Tip: Additional parameters appear when applicable
(duration, etc.).
- Normal: No manual control (i.e., return to
normal operation);
- Always: Allows setting the output as On or Off
continuously (until manual control is removed);
- Momentary: Allows setting the output to
pulse/toggle once. Additional selections will
appear for:  Whether it is to be triggered On
(high), or Off (Low);  The state it will be left in
afterwards (Off, On, or Normal);  How long the
relay will remain triggered (1 second to 1 week).
- Duty Cycle (1 sec. On/1 sec. off): The output
will be pulsed on and off continuously for a
selected duration (1 second to 1 week).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Panel Communications and Updates
Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use the
Communications Wizard to set up and initiate
communications with a panel. For more information,
refer to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
The initial topics in this section provide general
information on panel communications.
For an overview of the steps required to connect with a
panel, refer to the installation topic "Panel Connection
Overview".
To go directly to the steps required to start a panel
communications session, browse forward to the
heading entitled "Connecting with a Panel...".
Panel Communications
About Panel Communications
Panel communications allows transmitting
changes to panel(s), plus maintaining a
connection to allow:
 Updating the monitoring window;
 Tracking a guard-tour;
 Checking the status of items, and/or
controlling items in a specific location.
Am I Connected? (Check Status)
Account Connection Status:
A panel communications session can be
initiated right away, scheduled for some time in
the future, or set to a rotating schedule (hourly,
daily, or weekly). In a single-PC system,
communications can also to set to start
automatically (details appear in a following
section).
Panelsoftware updates can be:
 Normal (bi-directional / synchronize);
 Send to Panel (downloads VEREX Director
settings to the specific panels);
 Get from Panel (uploads settings from the
panel into VEREX Director).
In each case the connection can either be
dropped at the end of the session, or the
software can "Stay Connected" for on-going
data synchronization, event transmission,
and/or checking status or controlling items.
If a connection is maintained (Stay Connected), any
ongoing admin. & configuration changes are synchronized automatically when you save your changes, or
move to a different screen.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
This also allows the software to reconnect with the
panel(s) whenever communication services are
restarted (i.e., manually, or if prompted for this during
start-up).
For a failed communication session that is set to "Stay
Connected", the software will continue trying to initiate
a connection, and list the results for each new attempt.
Software vs. Panel Conflicts (esp. large systems):
Differences between the software database and
settings entered locally through an LCD keypad can be
identified by selecting "Check Database for Conflicts"
from the Tools menu. For details, search for that topic
in the index.
As well, partial panel updates are indicated in the user
list (grid view) with special colors: Yellow: Partial
updates pending (some panels have not been
updated); Green: Data for the user has been changed
while partial updates were pending (the user's settings
at the panels will be overwritten on next update). For
details on the "user" screen, refer to the topic on Users.
Control
The status bar at the extreme bottom of the
screen continually shows the connection status
for your selected account, and whether or not
specific updates are in progress.
So, to check the communications status of an
account, simply check the status at the bottom
of the screen.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Status of a Current Communications Session:
For more information on an active communications
session, refer to "Checking the Status of your
Connection...", to follow.
Status of a Previous (or failed) Session:
To check the status of a previous communications
session or attempt (for example to see if it was
successful, or failed), refer to "Viewing the Status of
Previous Communications Sessions", to follow.
The Panel-to-PC Link
Each panel connects through an IP
connection, a physical cable, or via dial up
access using standard modems.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
111
Any workstation associated with your VEREX
Director system can be used for panel
communications. This requires:
 A proper physical connection (cable or
modems);
 Settings as required for MS Windows and
this software;
 The VEREX Director communications
component being installed (and running) on
each applicable PC.
Note: With smaller sites (Single-panel / 300 users),
remote management is also supported through the
built-in dialler (Bell 103, 300 baud modem) on each
panel.
Ensure the Communications Software is
Running on the Specific PC(s)
At each PC associated with the specific panel
connection(s),
check
to
ensure
the
communications service is running:
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start the
communications service by right-clicking the icon, and
selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
Note: If you are prompted for something you are not
familiar with, or if an error message appears, refer to
"Serial Port / Modem Setup (Communications
Software)".
IP Connections:
With IP connections ( v3.3 software), a
"Panel Group" can include any 1-30 panels
within an account--whether they share the
same connection or not. In this case, panel
groups will typically be set up based on
geographic location, or network characteristics.
The VEREX Director software will be able to
communicate with any number of panels within
the group using only one port (IP Device) on
the specific PC.
Setting up an IP Connection: This is documented
separately. For details, refer to the installation guide
provided with the IP interface (may also be in PDF
format on your Director CD).
Settings Required for Panel
Communications
Various items must be set correctly to allow
panel communications (including the panel
version). To set up an initial panel connection,
refer to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!", or
"Panel Connection Overview".
The Communications Software
All panel communications are handled through
the communications software that is included
with VEREX Director. Beginning with v4.7, the
communications software is installed as a
service--that starts automatically when the PC
and Windows operating system is started up.
112
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Activating Communications and Transferring Panel Settings
Panel Communications Sessions
The Communications Pending/Online screen
shows details on panel communications
sessions (panel updates) that are either
presently active, or scheduled for some time in
the future.
For communications / update sessions that have
completed successfully, plus any attempts that may
have failed, see "Viewing the Status of Previous
Communications Sessions", to follow.
7) Check that the connection is made, and
watch for the panel updates to occur.
(Click the 'Panel Group', and look for the status on
the right side of the screen.)
Note: If minor conflicts exist during a communications
session, you will be prompted to correct them. If major
conflicts exist, the update will fail (for details, see
"Correcting Errors..." to follow).
Also See (Related Topics):
+ "New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
+ "Panel Connection Overview"
Multi-Account systems: Ensure your desired
account is selected (click [Account Folders]
in the tree, and then double-click the specific
account).
2) If not connected, check to ensure the
communication software is running
on the specific PCs.
Checking the Status of your Connection
(Communications Session)
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the
Windows taskbar is black-and-white (color =
running), start the communications service by
right-clicking the icon, and selecting "Start
Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
(Select Communications from your MyTools bar, or
click [Communications] in the 'tree', and select
Pending/OnLine.)
If the desired communication session is not
presently on-screen, select it from the list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select a session at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'browse' buttons to move
through the list.
3) Select Communications from your
MyTools bar, or click
[Communications] in the 'tree', and
select Pending/OnLine.
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one communications
session at a time; Grid View: All current sessions
in a list.
4) Click the [+] at the bottom of the form,
or right-click the form, and select Add
New from the pop-up menu.
You can also select a blank/new item from the list
(Forms view: bottom of the window), and then click
[Edit].
5) Then, select (double-click) the desired
panel(s) on the left side of the form.
Similarly, you can double-click again to deselect a
Welcome
Report
6) When the next screen appears (Edit
Communications), refer to the
selection-descriptions for it while
making additional selections. (Click
OK when finished.)
Connecting with a Panel (Setting up a
Panel Communications Session)
1) See if you're already connected by
checking the status bar at the bottom
of the monitoring window.
21-0381E v4.9.1
panel.
Multi-Account Systems: If the desired account is
not listed (that you have permissions for), open the
account in the tree (click [Account Folders], then
double-click the account). Then, return to
"Communications", and "Pending/Online" in the tree
(and perform step 5).
Control
Select the specific 'panel group' in the 'tree'
near the centre of your screen. Then, check
the 'status' and 'results' areas on the right.
You should either see updates being
processed, or "Connected" and "Idle State".
If the desired communications session is not listed, this
means that it has either completed successfully, or
failed (and/or was not set to "Stay Connected").
Tip: To view the status of any completed
communications session (or attempt), see "Viewing the
Status of Previous Communications Sessions", to
follow.
If status listed as "Pending" for a long time:
 Try powering down and restarting the PC (and/or
modem), and recheck your connection status.
 Check to ensure that the 'Communication Pool' being
used for the connection is properly set up. For
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
113
details, refer to "Communication Pools for System
Panels".
Update Requests Initiated from a Panel
Update requests can be initiated from a
remote/dial-up panel ( V2.0). This can be for
a new panel that has not been programmed
(known as being in 'cold boot' state). A service
technician at a system keypad can also
request a remote synchronization at any time.
For details on initiating a remote update request from a
keypad at a remote site, refer to the commissioning or
installation guide for your system.
For a new system: The software must be fully set up
with the desired settings, and a scheduled
communications session must be set up for the account
with the Schedule "Type" set to "On Next Call".
To set up an initial panel connection, refer to "New
Installation? Try the Wizard!", or "Panel Connection
Overview".
Cancelling / Dropping a Connection
Click [Communications] in the 'tree', and
select Pending/Online. Then, use the Grid /
Form toolbar-button to select your preferred
view-mode.
Select the desired communications session in
the list. Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select a
session at the bottom of the form, or use the
'browse' buttons to move through the list.
Check to ensure that associated panels are
not presently being updated: Find / select the
'panel group' near the centre of the screen,
and check the "Results" on the right.
Note: Disconnecting is NOT recommended while
panel(s) are being updated.
Now, right-click the session/form, and select
Disconnect. If prompted to confirm, select
Yes.
cannot edit a communications session while connected
with the associated panel(s). (Clicking [Edit] will
produce a "Transaction Locked" message.)
For a session that is either scheduled for some
time in the future, or that is off-line due to a
disconnection, you can check and/or change
the present date/time and other settings as
desired:
Click [Communications] in the 'tree', and
select Pending/Online. Then, use the Grid /
Form toolbar-button to select your preferred
view-mode.
Select the desired communications session in
the list. Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select a
session at the bottom of the form, or use the
'browse' buttons to move through the list.
Details for the selected session will be shown
at the top of the screen.
If the desired communications session is not listed, this
means that it has either completed successfully, or
failed (and/or was not set to "Stay Connected").
Tip: To view the status of a completed
communications session (or attempt), see "Viewing the
Status of Previous Communications Sessions", to
follow.
To change a scheduled time, or other settings
for a communications session, click [Edit], and
refer
to
the
details
for
the
"Edit
Communications" screen while viewing and/or
changing settings as desired. (Click OK when
finished.)
Tip: To select or deselect a panel, locate and doubleclick the specific panel (under the applicable account).
To select or deselect all panels for an account, rightclick the account, and select "Add Account" or "Remove
Account" as desired.
Screen Reference
Viewing or Changing Settings for a
Communications Session that is Not
Presently On-Line
If Presently Connected (Transaction Locked): You
114
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
-Transaction Time (bottom of the
form): This area allows selecting a
communications session that is either
presently in effect, or scheduled to
occur sometime in the future.
Communications Pending/Online
Tip: Completed sessions (and failed
attempts) can be viewed under
"Completed" in the tree (see "Viewing the
Status of Previous Communications
Sessions", to follow.).
-Transaction Information: The top of
this screen shows the type of
connection, and scheduling
information for your selected / current
communications session.
-Account / Panel Group 'Tree': The
left side of this form (centre of your
screen) shows the account(s) and
panel group(s) associated with the
selected communications session. Tip:
Selecting a 'panel group' allows viewing the
connection status and other information (see
the next two items).
-Panel Group Information: This area shows
the connection status and other information
for a panel group that you select in the tree.
-Panel List: The lower-right portion of the
screen shows all panels in a 'panel group'
(after you select one).
communications session, or editing settings
for a scheduled session.
If Presently Connected (Transaction Locked): You
cannot edit a communications session while connected
with the associated panel(s). To disconnect: Rightclick the session/form, and select Disconnect. If
prompted to confirm, select Yes or No as desired.
Attention: Disconnecting is NOT recommended while
panel(s) are being updated. (Find / select the panel
group near the centre of the screen, and check the
"Results" on the right.)
Tip: Panels associated with the communications
session will have colored icons beside them.
(Buttons)
- [Edit]: This allows setting up a panel
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
115
Communications Pending/Online  [ Edit ]
-Account / Panel / Group 'Tree' : The left
side of this form shows the panel group(s)
and panels to be associated with a
communications session (find the desired
panel, and then double-click to select it).
(Communications Session Details)
Note: This area lists only the panels that are not
presently connected or otherwise associated with a
current communications session.
Action
- Normal: The software will automatically
attempt to synchronize settings stored in the
software, and at the panel(s).
Tip: This is commonly used when connecting only
to update the monitoring window, or check status
or control items.
(This setting cannot be used after installing a panel
upgrade, or if you change the "Feature-Set" value
for a panel.)
- Send to Panel: Settings stored in the
software will be downloaded to the panel(s),
overwriting any previous settings stored
there. (This is normally used for new panels,
or after making a large number of changes in
the system.)
This selection is also required if you changed the
'Feature-Set' value for a panel. For details on the
feature-set parameter, refer to "Account-Wide Panel
Settings".
For details on updating / synchronizing the clock (date
and time) for a panel, refer to "Set the Date/Time for a
Panel, or Reset APB Status for Users".
- Get from Panel: Settings at the panel(s) will
be updated into the software. (This is useful
when adding VEREX Director to a system that
was programmed by other means, or in the
event of the VEREX Director (software)
database being accidentally cleared —with no
'backup' copy available.)
For a multi-panel account, settings that are accountwide (e.g., Users, schedules, etc.) are taken from one
panel set as the "Master Panel". This panel must
therefore be available during the transfer.
Local user admin. (via keypad) is supported in all
systems, while local system configuration is supported
only in single panel systems set to "Feature Set" 1, 2,
3, or 4.
The "Service PIN" can be changed only through the
VEREX Director software (the value at the panel is
ignored / over-written).
For details on "Master Panel", "Feature-Set", or
"Service PIN", refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
116
Schedule
- Type: Whether the connection / update is to
occur only once, or as per a rotating schedule
(hourly, daily, or weekly).
On next Call: This pertains to the next time a
connection is initiated. Tip: This can be set up ahead
of time, allowing a technician at a new site to request
a 'remote update' once the installation is complete.
- Start Date: The date that the communications
session is to occur. (The default is 'today').
- Start Time: The time that the session is to
occur. (The default is 'now/immediate'.)
Client/server Systems: The date and time are as per
the VEREX Director server PC. If this is different
relative to your workstation, you may to need to
compensate. Director-Server PC: This is the PC that
includes "...Director-Server.exe".
- Quick Update (V4.5): This sets scheduled
updates to trigger 'right-away' (once
communications is available) whenever
changes are pending for users and/or
authorities—rather than waiting until the
scheduled time.
Frequency
- Stay Connected: VEREX Director will
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
maintain a 'Normal' connection after
transferring or synchronizing settings, to allow
for real-time monitoring (through the
monitoring window), and checking status of
items, or controlling items (through "Control &
Status" in the tree).
Viewing the Status of Previous
Communications Sessions
Tip: The most common reason for a failed
communications session is a faulty physical connection,
or incorrect communications settings. For details on
initially setting up a panel connection, refer to "New
Installation? Try the Wizard!", or "Panel Connection
Overview".
Completed Communications Sessions
The "Communications Completed" screen
shows details on previous (and/or failed) panel
communications sessions (panel updates).
This allows you to check which connections or
update sessions were successful, and/or look
into why a session may have failed.
through the list. The status details and other
information will be shown for your selected
communications record.
Each communications session produces multiple
log entries. (Click "  " to browse through the
previous few entries to see all information for each
communications session.)
Multi-Account Systems: In forms view, sessions are
listed in order--regardless of which account they pertain
to. To find a session for a specific account, switch to
Grid view, and locate/select the session (and return to
Forms view if desired).
Note: Session #1 is the most recent, while the highest
numbered session is the oldest.
If the desired communications session is not listed, this
means that it has not yet started (i.e., scheduled for
some time in the future). Tip: For details on
communications / update sessions that are either
presently active, or scheduled for some time in the
future, see "Activating Communications and
Transferring Panel Settings", previous.
For details on communications / update sessions that
are either presently active, or scheduled for some time
in the future, see "Activating Communications and
Transferring Panel Settings", previous.
Also See (V4.4): Another place you can check the
status of a prior communications session is through the
Account Status feature.
Details: Account Status, Status 
 Checking Account Status
Event Message: A single "Comms Panel Fail"
message will be generated if a panel connection is
dropped, or at the beginning of a block of consecutive
failed connection attempts.
Viewing Details on a Previous Update
Session or Attempt
Select Communications from your MyTools
bar, or click [Communications] in the 'tree',
and select Completed).
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one communications session at
a time; Grid View: All current sessions in a list.
Select the desired communications session in
the list.
Tip: In 'forms' view, you can select a session at the
bottom of the form, or use the 'browse' buttons to move
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
117
Screen Reference
Communications Completed
- Comms Log (bottom of the form):
This is a relative number for each
update session, plus the date and time
that each one occurred. Note:
Session #1 is the most recent, while
the highest numbered session is the
oldest.
- Log Date/Time: The date and time
when the session finished.
- Transaction Issue Date/Time: The
date and time when the
communication session was set up.
- Account: The account/site associated
with the panel(s) being updated.
- Panel Group: The panel group
associated with the panels being
updated.
- DeviceID: The communications device-pool
associated with the panel(s) being updated.
- Origin: Whether the session was requested
through the VEREX Director software, or from
a panel.
- Action: The type of session ('Normal', 'Get
from Panel', or 'Send to Panel').
- Status: Whether or not the session completed
successfully (or if it is still in progress).
- Results: A brief description on an action that
occurred, and/or what may have caused it to
fail (details to follow).
Note: For a failed communication session that is set
to "Stay Connected", the software will continue trying
to initiate a connection, and list the results for each
new connection attempt.
118
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Correcting Communication/Update Errors
Tip: The most common reason for a failed
communications session is a faulty physical connection,
or incorrect communications settings. To set up an
initial panel connection, refer to "New Installation? Try
the Wizard!", or "Panel Connection Overview".
Panel Version Mismatch: If you get an error due to a
"Panel Version Mismatch", ensure your panel version is
set correctly under:
AccountName Account Information
(Standard tab) "Panel Version".
Data Conflicts--Users: Changes made through the
software will take precedence over changes for the
same user entered through a keypad. V4.7: User
conflicts that cannot be resolved in this way (e.g., the
same value given to different users) will be shown in
grid view, with only the rows in conflict displayed. To
return to showing all users, right-click, and select
"Return From Conflict View".
About Communication Errors
Sometimes, the VEREX Director software will
be unable to start communications with the
panel, or unable to synchronize the data
between the software and the panel. This can
be due to:
Critical / Failure Errors:
 A serial cable / modem wiring or connection
problem;
 An incorrect serial port selection, or incorrect
serial communications settings;
 A 'TAPI' communications error;
 A 'referential' data error (assignments to
certain items that don't exist either at the
panel or in the software);
Non-Critical
Errors
during
Communications
(You'll be Asked to Correct These):
a
'Normal'
Session
 The same value being assigned to two
different items
(e.g., two users with the same card number);
 Different settings for a single item (e.g., the
software says user 8 has card number 1234,
and the panel says user 8 has a different
card number).
Welcome
Report
To find out why a communications session
may have failed, view the details for the
specific session as described under "Viewing
the Status of Previous Communications
Sessions", previous.
Software vs. Panel Conflicts (esp. large systems):
Differences between the software database and
settings entered locally through an LCD keypad can
be identified by selecting "Check Database for
Conflicts" from the Tools menu. For details, search
for that topic in the index.
As well, partial panel updates are indicated in the
user list (grid view) with special colors:
Yellow: Partial updates pending (some panels have
not been updated);
Green: Data for the user has been changed while
partial updates were pending (the user's settings at
the panels will be overwritten on next update). For
details on the "user" screen, refer to the topic on
Users.
Correcting a 'Data Reception' Error
A "reception", "not responding", or "failed to
communicate" error can occur if the system
panel (or modem) has been powered down, or
if there is a problem with the serial cable, or
the serial/COM port selection or settings.
Troubleshooting Tip: If the status is listed as "Pending"
for an extended period of time, this may mean:
 The communications service was stopped on the PC
associated with the panel or modem.
 The serial port on the specific PC is not responding.
In this case, try shutting down and restarting the PC.
Then, recheck your connection.
For a new system: Ensure the panel connection is
properly set up. For details, refer to "New
Installation? Try the Wizard!", or "Panel Connection
Overview".
If you are Prompted to Fix a Data
Conflict
Notes: These types of errors are typically caused by
the same item being edited through the software and by
a local admin. person at a system keypad. Beginning
with Director v4.6, for conflicts pertaining to the same
person or object, the data entered through the software
will take precedence and be downloaded to the panel
automatically.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Getting Details on an Update Error
Control
If a non-critical data conflict occurs during a
'normal' communications session, you'll be
asked to correct the error the first time you
select that topic (such as "Users"). In general,
you'll be asked to:
 Choose between using a setting from
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
119
VEREX Director, or a conflicting one
at the panel, or;
 Edit a value right-away to correct a
conflict.
Same Unique Value Assigned to two Different Users
Sometimes, you can choose to [Decide
Later] on what data to use. In this case, the
software data is retained, and the item (user,
etc.) will appear with that setting highlighted
in a different color. Tip: To correct any
conflicts that had been selected as "Decide
Later", simply select the applicable area in
the tree (such as User), and follow the
'Conflicting Data...' screens that appear.
(Click Refresh or press F5 if required.)
Correcting a 'Referential' Data
Error
Note: Updates done at a system panel (through an LCD keypad) while
conflicts are being resolved will be ignored.
If, for example, authority 'ABC' is
deleted in the software, yet User 'Zig' is still
assigned to that authority level at the panel, a
'normal' communications session will produce
an error, and the update will not occur.
To correct this you can either:
 Find and correct the error, or;
 Issue a "Send to Panel" to overwrite the
panel's settings with those at the software.
To determine what is causing a 'referential' conflict:
 Find out what was changed at the panel by
contacting the (keypad) user/admin. person, and/or;
 Refer to "Viewing the Status..." (previous), to
determine the type of items that are in conflict, and
then access the panel to locate and correct the
discrepancy (e.g., assign a valid 'authority' to the
specific user, etc.).
Correcting a 'TAPI' Error
A 'TAPI' error can normally be corrected by
shutting down the VEREX Director software,
and restarting the computer.
With a new installation, a 'TAPI' error can also
indicate
that
the
'Direct/Serial
Cable
Connection' or modem was not been properly
set up under MS Windows.
For details on setting up windows serial
communications, refer to "Direct-Cable Connection
Setup" or "Windows Modem Setup", as appropriate.
Screen Reference
120
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Checking Account Status (V4.4)
Related: Flash Firmware  (>>)
YourAccount Account Status Status 
Account Status
The account status screen shows
some status aspects for all panels in
your selected account. The listed
status
elements
pertain
to
communications
sessions,
panel
firmware updates, and configuration
errors.
This is useful after a panel update session,
and also to help troubleshoot problems with
regular communications sessions.
Related: [Communications], Pending/Online, [Edit]
 Activating Communications and Transferring Panel
Settings
On This Form
- Panel: This lists all panels for the account your
are presently 'in', listed by 'panel group'.
Tip: To show or hide panels in a panel group, click the
small "+/-" square on the left.
- Status: This shows the status for the last
communications or firmware update session.
- Details: If present, click the small square ( [...] )
to view additional details (such as the reason
that a firmware update didn't occur.)
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Account Status
In the Tree: YourAccount, Account Status,
Status
Note: This feature uses a custom view. (The
Form/Grid toolbar-button will not be available.)
Note: This screen is generally updated/refreshed only
by each new communications session.
Viewing Account Status
To show or hide panels in a panel group, click
the small "+/-" square on the left. Then, refer
to the item-description for this screen.
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
121
Panel Firmware Files, and Updating Panel Firmware (V4.4)
Activating Panel Firmware
Files
[Management] Panel Firmware Files
Panel Firmware Files
This screen allows you to 'activate'
firmware update files (.FMW)—that
is—to make them available to the
VEREX Director software.
Tip: Firmware update files (.FMW) can be
obtained from your support representative or
website. Be sure to keep your source files in
a folder that is outside of the Director
installation as backups.
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Panel Firmware Files
In the Tree: [Management],
Panel Firmware Files
Note: This feature uses a custom view. (The
Form/Grid toolbar-button will not be available.)
Things You Can Do
 Add a File to the List: Select [Add File],
locate and select the desired file, and click
[Open].
 Remove a File from the List: Select the
file, click [Remove File], and respond to any
prompts that appear.
Director software.
Note: Once 'Added', the files will appear in the
"...Director\Flash" subfolder on your PC.
- [Remove File]: This allows removing an
unneeded file from the list. Respond
appropriately when prompted to confirm.
Note: Removing a file here will also delete it from the
"...Director\Flash" subfolder on your PC.
Note: Removing a file here will also delete it from the
"...Director\Flash" subfolder on your PC.
For more information, refer to the itemdescriptions for this screen.
Screen Reference
Current Flash Files
- File Name: This shows the firmware files that
have been made available (i.e., added) to the
Director software.
Tip: Firmware files will be grouped by high-level'
version number (such as "v4.40 or Greater".
- Description: This shows specific details on the
firmware update file (based on a proprietary file
naming convention);
- [Add File]: This allows adding a new firmware
update file (.FMW) to make it available to the
122
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Updating Panel
Firmware
Your Account Account Status Flash Firmware

Flash Firmware
This screen allows you to
update panel firmware from
any
VEREX
Director
workstation.
Note: In general, a panel firmware
update does not affect configuration
data stored at the panel.
Before You Begin
 You and the workstation must have
permission for this feature;
 The software must be set/able to
communicate with the panel;
 "...Director Communications.exe" must be
running—but with no connection to the panel
yet.
6)
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start the
communications service by right-clicking the icon, and
selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Account Status, then select the
"Flash Firmware" tab.
In the Tree: YourAccount, Account Status
Flash Firmware 
Note: This feature uses a custom view. (The
Form/Grid toolbar-button will not be available.)
Steps
1)
2)
Obtain the latest/desired firmware update file
(.FMW) from your support representative or
website.
Ensure this software has been made aware
of your new file.
(This is described previously.)
3)
4)
[Start Download], and [Change File] to
finish your selections and start the update
process.
Watch for status details on-screen as the
update progresses.
Tip: If you run into a problem, you can switch to
the 'Status' tab to see details on what happened.
Related: Status 
 Checking Account Status
Screen Reference
On This Form
- 1st Column (arrow pointing down): This is
what you click to select a panel in the list.
- Panel: This is what you click to select a panel in
the list.
Tip: To show or hide panels in a panel group, click the
small "+/-" square on the left.
- Version: This shows the firmware revision of
the panel—as checked during the last
communications session.
- Information: This area shows status
information while the panel update is in
progress.
- [Start Download]: This opens another screen
to allow selecting a firmware update file, and
starting the update process.
Go to: "YourAccount, Account Status", and
select the "Flash Firmware" tab.
Locate the desired panel, click the small box
on the left to select that panel, and then click
[Start Download].
Tip: To show or hide panels in a panel group, click the
small "+/-" square on the left.
5)
Refer to the screen details for
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
123
..., [Start Download]
On This Form
- Panel: This shows the panel that is to be
updated;
- Current Version: This shows the firmware
revision of the panel—as checked during the
last communications session.
- [Change File]: Allows selecting or changing
the file to use for the panel firmware update.
Tip: For files to be listed here, they must have
been previously added to the Director software.
Details previous/above.
- [Override / Cancel Override]: This sets
whether or not the panel update will continue
in the presence of some basic system alarm
conditions.
- [Continue]: Click this to start the panel
firmware update;
- [Cancel]: Click this to abort the panel
firmware update;
..., [Change File]
On This Form
- File Name: This shows the firmware
files that have been made available
(i.e., added) to the Director software.
Tip: Firmware files will be grouped by highlevel' version number (such as "v4.40 or
Greater".
- Description: This shows specific
details on the firmware update file
(based on a proprietary file naming
convention);
- [OK]: Confirms your file selection,
and returns you to the previous
screen;
- {Cancel]: Aborts your file
change/selection, and returns you to
the previous screen (i.e., without doing
anything).
124
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Administration
and Maintenance
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
125
Operators (People Who Can Use This Software)
Operators
An operator is a person who has been
given the authority to use the VEREX
Director software. Each operator is
given a 'login' name and password
that provide access to specific items
and features.
Management Operator Operator
The permission-set assigned to each
operator determines what features they can
use, and which items will be shown on the
desktop.
Also See: "Operator Permissions" (to
follow).
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Operator
In the Tree: [Management],
Operator, Operator
st
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows
selecting your preferred view-mode.
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Things You Can Do
Screen Reference
 Add a New Operator: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for an Operator: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete an Operator: Right-click a blank
area on the form (If grid view: Right-click the
item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Cannot Delete while Operator Logged In: Operators
cannot be deleted if they are presently logged in
(e.g., through a client PC or Director Web Browser
connection). From the Tools menu, you can check
for “Who is Logged In”. Also, ensure the web
browser (server) service is not running. (Look for its
icon on the right-hand end of the Windows taskbar.)
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
126
Pick-List (bottom of the form)
- Operator: This is where you select an operator
to view or edit. This area shows the name of
each operator, once defined;
On This Form
- Name: The name to be used when this person
'logs' into the VEREX Director software.
- Password [ ... ]: Allows setting or changing the
password that this operator will have to enter
during login. This must be at least 4 chars/digits
(e.g., go4it).
Tips: You must set a password initially (if you leave it
blank, the operator will be unable to log in). Be sure to
select a memorable password, and/or have the
operator change it right away to something they will
remember.
- Language: The language to be used in menus,
screens, and reports while this operator is
logged in. (Languages are determined during
installation--based on availability.)
This setting also determines which language-version
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
of the help file will normally appear, although this can
be changed if desired (for the current work-session).
For details, look for the Language selection from the
Help menu in the "Desktop Reference".
- Permissions: This is a (previously defined)
permission-set to be associated with this
operator. This determines the features that will
be displayed and/or available when this person
is logged in.
Also See: "Operator Permissions" (to follow).
- Lockout Time (min.): This sets the duration
that the keyboard can remain untouched before
the system will automatically lock-out operator
access. (This helps to protect against
unauthorized access to the system).
Note: A selection of zero (0) will disable this feature.
Lockout Mode Details: Refer to "Exiting, Logging
Out, or Changing Operators" in the Welcome section.
- Scheduled Event Filter: This allows optionally
selecting a "scheduled event filter" (defined
previously) for this operator--to determine the
types of messages they will be able to see on
specific weekdays and time-of-day.
Related Topic(s): Scheduled Event Filtering for
Operators
------------------------- Show MyTools / Tree / Event Window: These
set the desktop portions that will appear initially
when this operator logs in.
Auto-Login to Control and Status
- Account [ ... ]: When "Control and Status" is
selected in the tree for a specific account, the
operator is normally required to 'login' with a
user ID and PIN. If an account is selected here,
this operator will be automatically logged in as
the user selected below when they open
"Control & Status" for this specific account.
Tip: For a system with only one account, this
selection is automatically set for you. Note: This
selection is not supported with the default highestlevel operator ("Operator").
- User: The auto-login feature will log the
operator into "Control & Status" as the user
selected here. (Select the user-record
pertaining to this specific operator.)
Account Monitoring for Status Toolbar
- Monitor Account [ ... ]: This sets the account to
be monitored by the status toolbar when this
specific operator is logged in.
This selection can also be changed at any time
through the [Monitor] button on the toolbar. Tip: For
a system with only one account, this selection is
automatically set for you.
For details on the status toolbar, refer to "Using the
Status Toolbar".
Each operator can change this (after logging in) by
selecting the desired items on the main toolbar.
The operator who is logged in can save any such
desktop changes by opening the View menu,
selecting Desktop Settings, and then Save.
- Show Alarm Window: This splits the
monitoring window into two 'panes', with
unacknowledged alarms appearing separately in
the top 'pane'.
Tip: This is available only after selecting “Show Event
Window”.
Related Topic: "Monitoring System Activity"
Account Options
- Prompt to Apply Authority Changes to All
Matching Areas: If selected, this operator will
be given the opportunity to have authority
changes apply to all areas with the same
settings (within the authority being edited) each
time they begin making changes. Otherwise,
changes will apply only to selected areas.
Related Topic: "Authorities for Users/Entrants".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
127
Setting or Changing an Operator's Password
Quickly Changing Your Password
Open the File menu, and select Change
Password. Then, enter the new password,
press Tab, enter the password a second time,
and press Enter (or click OK).
Changing the Password for any
Operator
Select Operator from your MyTools bar, or
click [Management] in the 'tree', open the
Operator branch, and select Operator.
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
In 'Forms' view, select the desired operator at
the bottom of the window. Tip: You can also use
the 'Find' and 'Find Next' buttons (binoculars) to search
st
by name (or 1 few characters--e.g., nam*).
(In Grid view, locate the desired operator in the list.)
Now, click the [ ... ] next to "Password". When
the next screen appears, enter the new
password, press Tab, enter the password
again, and press Enter (or click OK).
If the desired operator is not listed, this means you do
not have the authority to change their password.
Screen Reference
- Password: The desired/new password for the
operator.
- Re-enter Password: Enter the same password
again (this helps protect against typing errors).
- [Ok]: Confirms the new password.
- [Cancel]: Aborts the password-change (keeps
the previous one).
Be sure to select a memorable password, and/or have
the operator change it again to something they will
remember.
128
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Operator Settings (v4.6)
Operator Login Message Screen
[Management], Operator, Operator Settings,
An image and/or text message can Login 
be set to appear each time any
operator logs in.
This can be
set/changed when desired by other
operator(s)
with
the
required
permission. This provides an easy
way for authorized operators to leave
messages for operators arriving for
the next shift or day. As well, the
message can be set to display for a
certain length of time, or remain until
each specific operator acknowledges
the message screen.
Screen Reference
This screen allows entering a text message
and/or assigning an image file to appear as a
login message the next time each operator
logs in.
File Types Supported: Common types of
image files are supported including BMP,
JPEG, and WMF. Click [Load Image] for
details.
Notes: For a multi-server login, this feature
will operate only for the first server listed
during login. This feature requires “Operator
Options” permission.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
129
Enhanced Operator Password
Security
[Management], Operator, Operator Settings,
Security 
Operator password security has been
enhanced
through
allowed
characters, optional requirement to
change the password periodically,
and a configurable lockout feature
has been added.
Also See (Not to be Confused With): “The
Auto-Lockout Feature” in the “Welcome”
section of the Director online help or User’s
Guide.
Screen Reference
This screen allows configuring various items
pertaining to password security.
Note: Requires “Operator Options” permission (for the
operator, and the workstation).
- Minimum length: The shortest length (number
of characters) allowed for an operator password;
- Lockout duration: Can be set to “Never”
(Disables the lockout feature), one hour, or
“Permanent” (operator will remain locked out
until their password is changed by an operator
with “Operator Edit” permission);
Note: The lockout feature blocks access to an
operator after 3 incorrect login attempts in a row (i.e.,
wrong password).
- Renewal time: How long before operators will
be prompted to change their password. (Never,
or every 30/60/90 days);
- Renewal expiry: How long before their present
password expires after the renewal time is
reached.
(Never, or after another 30/60/90 days);
Note: If an operator’s password expires, that operator
will be locked out until an operator with “Operator Edit”
permission logs in and changes the specific operator’s
password (same as permanent lockout).
- Enforce complexity: If selected (), operator
passwords:  must include letters and numbers;
 are upper/lower case sensitive;  cannot
include 3 consecutive letters or numbers (e.g.,
abc or 123);  cannot match the login name
(any upper/lower case);  cannot match the
previous (present) password.
130
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Operator Permissions
Muti-Account Systems: Operator permissions are
associated with account folders--allowing different types
of permissions to be assigned to groups of accounts.
Accounts and account folders need to have been
set up appropriately. For details, refer to "Working
with Accounts and Folders" (near the beginning of the
Configuration section). Client/Server Systems:
Permissions can also be assigned for each specific
client workstation. In this case, each operator will be
able to use only the features that are assigned to them
AND allowed for their workstation.
See: "Client/Server Access and Permissions".
In the same way that user authorities
determine what users can do, "operator
permissions" determine the items and features
that groups of operators will be able to use.
For each specific item, click once to assign
view permission (magnifying glass), or click
again to assign view and edit permission
(pencil). If you click a 3rd time, this will clear
the selection.
 Search for a Permission-Set: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete a Permission-Set: Right-click a
blank area on the form (If grid view: Right-click
the item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Before Deleting: Only unused permission-sets can
be deleted. (Go to the Operator screen, select grid
view, and check for the specific permission-set.)
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Right-click Menus
"Right-Click" means using the mouse button farthest
from your body (unless you left-handed, but using a
right-handed mouse).
Tip: Some suitable 'templates' (permission types) are
provided to give you a quick starting-point.
Permission to Use the Wizards: To use the
configuration and communications Wizards (Tools
menu), your operator permissions must grant
"Permission Type: All permissions" for the specific
account folder.
Related Topics: "New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
Technical Note: An operator cannot edit their own
permissions, or assign settings they don't have to
another operator. Items that are not available will either
be not displayed, or grey in color.
- Cut Permission: Copies the folder's
permission settings into memory, and reverts
the folder to its parent folder's settings (i.e., for a
folder marked with a green square).
- Copy Permission: Copies the folder's
permission settings into memory.
How to Get Here
- Paste Permission: Applies previously cut or
copied permissions to the specific folder. (See
"Attention", to follow).
MyTools Bar: Operator Permissions
In the Tree: [Management],
Operator, Operator Permissions
Right-clicking near the top of the Form
Note: The "Cut", "Copy", and "Paste" functions do
NOT use the Windows clipboard.
Tip: The copy and paste functions allow transferring
settings between operator permission-sets.
Attention: Pasting permissions for ANY folder with
NO green square will affect ALL folders in that
permission-inheritance family (including the parent).
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
- Delete Permission: Reverts the folder to its
parent folder's permission settings (i.e., for a
folder marked with a green square).
Things You Can Do
 Add a New Permission-Set: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
Right-clicking An Account Folder (2nd tab)
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
- Cut all Permissions: Copies permission
settings for all account folders into memory, and
then deletes the whole permission-set.
Tip: You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
131
- Copy all Permissions: Copies into
memory the permission settings for all
account folders within a permissionset.
- Paste all Permissions: Applies
previously cut or copied permissions to
all folders within a permission-set.
- Add New all Permissions: Creates a
new (blank) permission-set. (Same as
clicking [+], or selecting "New
Permissions" at the bottom of the
form).
- Delete all Permissions: Deletes the
whole permission-set.
Management Operator Operator Permissions
Tip: You will be prompted to confirm the
deletion.
- Find and Find Next: Allows searching
for a permission-set by name (same as
the 'binocular' symbols at the bottom.
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the
form)
- Operator Permissions: This is where
you select a permission-set to view or
edit. This area shows the name of
each permission-set, once defined;
Legend/Reminder:
Magnifying Glass: Permission to view the item.
Edit Only (question mark with pencil): Permission to make a
draft/pending edit that will not take effect until approved by another
operator with “Approve and Save” permission.
Approve and Save (): Permission to approve and save changes
made by someone with “Edit Only” permission.
Pencil: Permission to view and add/delete/edit the item.
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name/description for this
operator permission group (such as "Daily
Admin")
 Common Permissions 
- These are permissions pertaining to the entire
system (such as editing operators, backing up
the database, etc.);
Multi-Account Systems: These selections are always
present—regardless of which account folders are
selected in the next tab.
Operator Permissions: This pertains to working with
operator permissions and scheduled event filters (both
under "Operator" in the tree).
Shared Account Permissions: These pertain to users
and/or holidays to be shared across multiple accounts.
Related Topic: Users and Holidays Shared Across
Multiple Accounts
 Specific Permissions for
Selected Folder 
Settings on this tab pertain to the specific account folder
selected.
Tip: Use your mouse to 'scroll' through the settings.
(Multi-Account Systems) Account Folder Selection
Area: For a multi-account system, the left side of this
form allows selecting a folder (parent or individual) to be
associated with permissions that you select thereafter.
If nested account folders have been set up, subfolders
start out with the same permissions as the 'parent'
folder, and can be changed manually, as desired (a
green square indicates changes have been made).
Inherited settings for subfolders (NO green square) will
be changed automatically by changing settings for the
parent folder.
Pale/Faded-Looking Folder: This means no
permissions are selected.
-------------------------
Permission Type (Sample Templates)
- Name: This provides sample permission
'templates' as a starting point for common types
of operators.
Tip: Make your selection here first. Then use your
132
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
mouse to scroll within the form (to see all items), and
make any changes as desired. (Your permission
template name will change to 'Custom' when you start
making changes.)
To Give Permission to use the Wizards (Tools menu):
Select "All Permissions" (and [Save] without making
any changes).
- Global Account Permissions: Management
tasks such as editing users, schedules,
holidays, etc., plus working with guard tours.
Edit Accounts/Account Folders: For systems with
multi-account licensing, this setting determines
whether or not the specific operators will be able to
edit the account folders and account names in the
tree. Tip: To hide the account-folders portion of the
'tree' for operators with permission for only one
account, ensure this is NOT selected.
USER permissions (various): These pertain to
individual tabs on the "Users" screen. "User Custom
Field 1-5" (etc.) allows viewing or editing those specific
fields. "Custom Fields" permission (only) is needed to
initially define any of the custom user fields.
- Panel Configuration Permissions: Selections
pertaining to setting up areas, and the physical
items in a system (sensors, doors, etc.)
- Control and Status: Selections pertaining to
viewing status or controlling various items, plus
filtering the monitoring window, and monitoring
guard-tours.
Note (v4.80): The “Panel Control and Status”
checkbox has been replaced by group of
checkboxes to allow assign more flexible
permissions for operator (System / Area / Input
Point / Output Point / Door / Elevator / Suite
Security / Floor).
- Reports: Issuing the various types of reports:
Activity reports, viewing or printing programmed
settings (panel config.), etc.
Panel Config. Reports: This requires the specific
panel configuration permissions as well.
- Communications: Selections pertaining to
panel communications, monitoring,
status/control, and "Visual Director" (maps and
cameras) -- V4.0 software.
Control and Status: Controlling items also requires
the specific device control authorities associated with
the user you log in as when opening the "Control &
Status" feature. For details, refer to "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
Notes (v4.6):
A ‘draft/pending edit can be changed only by the same
operator, and will be visible/displayed only for that
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
operator plus any operators with applicable “Approve
and Save” permission.
Operators with “Approve and Save” permission will be
given the option to approve or cancel any applicable
draft user and operator edits when they view those
screen(s)—in either forms view or grid view. These
operators cannot add or edit operator or user data
themselves though.
Permission classes can be selected for User topics only
as follows:  If any are “Approve and Save”, then all
tabs must be set to this;  If any are “Edit Only”, other
allowed choices are “View Only”, and “Unauthorized”.
Operators with “Edit and Save” permissions can assign
any permission ‘class’, while “Edit Only” operators can
only add or edit operators with the same permission,
“View Only”, or “Unauthorized”. Similar restrictions
apply to any operator editing operator permissions.
Changes made by an operator with full “Edit and Save”
authority will overwrite any draft/pending edits
pertaining to the same operator or user ID number.
The operator will not be aware of this since the
draft/pending edits will not be shown to them. As such,
“Approvals” versus “Full Edit” administrative sessions
should be managed accordingly.
Scheduled Event Filtering
for Operators
Introduction
Scheduled event filtering allows setting the
types of messages each operator will be able
to see during vs. outside of specific times.
Notes:  Operators with "Events Filter" permission will
be able to temporarily override the scheduled filter
settings;  Setting up this feature requires "Operator
Permissions" permission;  You can set up any number
of scheduled event filters (i.e., up to one for each
operator, if desired);  When scheduled event filtering
is in effect for the present operator, a clock symbol will
appear on the [ Filter ] button at the bottom of the
monitoring window.
Related Topic(s):  Limiting the Window to Show Only
Specific Messages (Sorting and Filtering);  Operator
Permissions
Setting up Scheduled Event Filters
1)
Select [Management] in the tree.
2)
Open the Operator branch (click the [+], or
double-click "Operator"), and select
Scheduled Event Filter.
3)
Refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while making your selections.
Note: 'Grid' view does not apply to this screen.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
133
Assigning Scheduled Event
Filters to Operators
Management Operator Scheduled Event Filter
Once the "Scheduled Event Filters"
have been set up, go to the Operator
screen, and ensure one is assigned
to each operator, as desired.
Related Topic(s): See the section on
"Operators", previous.
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the form)
- Scheduled Event Filter: This is
where you select a "Scheduled Event
Filter" to view or edit. This area shows
the name of each filter/profile, once
defined.
Top of the Form
- Name: Enter a suitable name/description for
the scheduled filter profile here.
- Account: This is the account that this event
filter will be used with (allows the software to
display the correct device names, etc. in the
selections that follow). Click [...] to change this
setting.
Note: Scheduled event filters are intended for use
with individual accounts. If the operator logs into a
different account, filtering selections that pertain to
specific items (areas, doors, etc.) will apply to the
items at the same ID number in that account.
In Window Filter 
This pertains to event filtering for associated operators
during the times set under Schedule.
- Sort Order By: This allows listing messages in
order by date/time only, or showing 'unresolved'
(and higher priority) events first.
------------------------- [Clear Filter]: Removes all filters--i.e., returns
to the factory settings (and closes the 'filter'
window).
- Filter on Resolution: This lets you have the list
include events depending on whether or not
they have been 'resolved' (i.e., dealt-with).
All: This shows all events--including ones not
associated with the comment/resolution feature (i.e.,
not set as 'resolvable').
- Filter on Priority: This allows limiting the
window to show only events of a desired priority
134
value (or range).
- Filter on Custom Filter: This allows limiting the
window to show only events of a desired
'custom-filter' value (or range).
Also See: To assign priorities, 'Custom Filter' values,
and other parameters, refer to the configuration topic:
"Customizing How Events are Displayed".
- Filter on Area, Door, etc: For events pertaining
to a specific person or door, etc., select the
desired item(s) here.
Out of Window Filter 
This pertains to event filtering for associated operators
outside of the times set under Schedule.
For details on the various selections, refer to
Scheduled Filter, previous/above.
Schedule 
- Days of the Week (with Associated TimeIntervals): The days of the week showing the
time intervals for each day. (To add an
interval, right-click the specific day. To adjust
an interval, drag the interval and/or its endpoints to the desired position.)
Tips: You can copy and paste (or delete) time
intervals using the right-click menu. Up to 6 unique
time-intervals can be applied as desired throughout
the weekdays in the schedule for each filter profile.
Work Shift that Spans Midnight: In this case, each
day will need two intervals to cover the times before
and after midnight.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
- On Holidays: This allows you to set how
scheduled event filtering will operate on
defined holidays. (Scheduled as usual, or
have one of the filter 'tabs' in effect for the
entire day.)
Related Topic(s): Holidays and Time-Change Dates
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
135
Schedules for User-Access and Area Automation
Schedules
Schedules are customizable time-windows for
an account that can:
 Allow areas to 'open' (disarm), and 'close'
(arm) automatically;
 Set times when authorized entrants will be
able to enter assigned areas;
 Allow doors to unlock & relock, and/or
change their operating criteria
automatically.
On defined holidays, schedules can be blocked, or
customized to meet your specific needs. If custom
times are desired, additional schedule(s) must be set
up. (See the "Holiday Schedules" description for
details.)
User authorities can be set to allow 24-hr access
(including holidays) without the need to set up a "24-hr"
schedule). Related Topic: "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Schedules
In the Tree: YourAccount, Schedules
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Things You Can Do
 Add a New Schedule: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can copy all settings for a schedule, and
st
paste them into another one: Right-click the 1 one
(near the bottom if in 'Forms' view), and select Copy.
Then, select a blank/new schedule from the list, rightclick again, and select Paste. After 'pasting', change
the name and any settings as desired.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a Schedule: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete a Schedule: Right-click a blank area
on the form (If grid view: Right-click the item in
the list), and select "Delete". When prompted
to confirm, select Yes.
Before Deleting: Only unused schedules can be
deleted. (Issue reports, OR go to the screens for
'Areas', 'Doors', 'Authorities', and 'Schedules',
select grid view, and check for the specific schedule.)
Related Topic(s):
 Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc.;
 Working with the Report Viewer
Working in the Forms View
In forms view, the schedule is shown graphically, for Sunday through Saturday. Add a
new time-interval by right-clicking a specific
day, and selecting Create New Time Interval.
Then, drag the interval and/or its end-points to
the desired location. Tip: Copying, pasting,
and deleting is also allowed when you rightclick a specific time-interval.
Repeat this process until the desired times are
set up for all days in the schedule. (You can
use up to 6 unique time intervals throughout
each schedule.)
136
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Working in the 'Grid' View
In 'Grid' view, the focus is on the separate
time-intervals, and the days each one is used.
For each required time interval, enter the start
and end time, and then select the days it will
be used (tab & space-bar, or mouse-click).
Tip: Times can be entered as 0010-2350 (the
colon and leading zeros are inserted
automatically for your convenience).
Repeat this process until all required time
intervals have been set up.
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the form)
 Holiday Schedules 
- Start of Holiday: This allows selecting
whether holiday operation will begin at
midnight, or not until this schedule expires
(i.e., for time-intervals that span midnight).
- Schedule on Type 1/2/3 Holidays: How the
schedule will treat each type of holiday (No
access / as regular weekday / 24 hr access,
or as per the times in another schedule).
Tip: Pause the mouse cursor over a Schedule in the
list to view the associated times.
For details on setting up holidays, refer to "Holidays
and Time-Change Dates).
Note: For schedules assigned only within other
schedules (for use on holidays), this setting will be
ignored.
- Schedule (bottom of form): This is where you
select a schedule to view or edit. This area
shows a reference number assigned by the
system, and the name of the selected schedule,
once defined;
Schedules (Forms View)
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name/description for
the schedule, or its intended use;
 Intervals 
- Days of the Week (with Associated
Time-Intervals): The days of the week
showing the time intervals for each day.
(To add an interval, right-click the
specific day. To adjust an interval, drag
the interval and/or its end-points to the
desired position.)
Tips: You can copy and paste (or delete)
time intervals using the right-click menu. Up
to 6 unique time-intervals can be used as
desired throughout the weekdays in each schedule.
Split Shift: Be sure to include an interval for after a
meal break—assuming the break is not part of the
'required attendance' times.
Work Shift that Spans Midnight: It's simplest to use grid
view, entering the start and stop times in the order they
occur (e.g., Start time: 23:00, Stop time: 07:00), and
select the weekdays pertaining to the start time.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
137
Grid View
Schedules (Grid View)
- Schedule: A reference number
assigned by the system;
- Name: A suitable name/description for
the schedule, or its intended use;
- Interval: A reference number for the
unique time interval (1-6);
- Start and Stop: The time that the
specific time-interval begins or ends
(the interval is 'active' between these
times). Times are entered as 00102350 (the colon and leading zeros are
inserted automatically for your convenience);
Split Shift: Be sure to include an interval for after a
meal break—assuming the break is not part of the
'required attendance' times.
Work Shift that Spans Midnight: It's simplest to use
grid view, entering the start and stop times in the order
they occur (e.g., Start time: 23:00, Stop time: 07:00),
and select the weekdays pertaining to the start time.
- Start of Holiday: This allows selecting
whether holiday operation will begin at
midnight, or not until this schedule expires
(i.e., for time-intervals that span midnight).
- Days of the Week: The weekdays during
which the time interval will take effect. (Use
space-bar to toggle; Tab to select next.)
- Holiday 1/2/3 Schedule: How the schedule will
treat each type of holiday (No access / as
regular weekday / 24 hr access, or as per the
times in another schedule).
Tip: Pause the mouse cursor over a Schedule in the
list to view the associated times.
For details on setting up holidays, refer to "Holidays
and Time-Change Dates).
Note: For schedules assigned only within other
schedules (for use on holidays), the times set for the
applicable weekday will be used (nested holidayschedule settings will be ignored).
138
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Holidays and Time-Change Dates
Holidays (and/or time-change dates) Shared Across
Multiple Accounts: Beginning with Director V4.20,
groups of holidays can be set up once, and then applied
to multiple accounts. For a shared holiday, changes
made here will affect multiple accounts. To set up or
change a 'shared holiday', refer to "Users and Holidays
Shared Across Multiple Accounts".
Holidays
Holidays are defined dates for an account that:
 Automatically change the system time
between Daylight Savings Time and
Standard Time on the applicable days, or;
 Allow blocking or setting different times for
scheduled features on these dates (area
openings, user access to doors, and
automated door unlockings).
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
st
Related Topic: "Users and Holidays Shared Across
Multiple Accounts".
 Delete a Holiday: Right-click a blank area
on the form (If grid view: Right-click the item in
the list), and select "Delete". When prompted
to confirm, select Yes.
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Daylight-Savings/Standard Time
Daylight Savings: Holiday 1;
Standard Time: Holiday 2.
If not listed, click Filter on the toolbar.
Note: You must also ensure the time is correct for your
PC/Windows and panel(s). Related Topic: "Set the
Panel Date/Time…"
To cancel the Daylight-Savings / Standard-Time
changes, delete Holiday #1 or #2, or set one of them as
"Disabled".
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Holiday/Daylight Savings
In the Tree: YourAccount,
Holiday/Daylight Savings
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Report
Tip: Also see "Daylight-Savings/Standard Time", to
follow/below.
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
In Grid View, Small 1st Column with Blue Boxes:
Blue rectangles indicate holidays that apply to
multiple accounts (shared holidays).
Welcome
 Add a New Holiday: Click [+] at the bottom
of the form, or right-click the form and select
Add New from the pop-up menu.
 Search for a Holiday: Click the 'binoculars'
symbol. Then, enter the name and click
[Find].
Exception: Users with "24-hr" access and 'disarm'
authority for the specific area can gain entry on
holidays. For details, refer to "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
Holiday Deployment: See the "Holiday Type" selection
for details on system operation during holidays.
st
VEREX Director supports 32 'holidays', with the 1 two
reserved as the dates to switch between 'DaylightSavings' and 'Standard Time' (optional).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Things You Can Do
Control
Screen Reference
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
139
Holiday/Daylight Savings
Pick-List (bottom of the
form)
- Holiday/Daylight Savings (bottom of
form): This is where you select a
holiday to view or edit. This area
shows a reference number assigned
by the system, and the holiday name,
once defined;
Date
On This Form
- Name: A name or suitable description for the
holiday or time-change date. (The description
for holidays 1 & 2 are fixed as "Daylight Savings
Time" and "Standard Time").
Daylight-Savings / Standard Time: For holidays 1
and 2, this lets you enable or disable the daylightsavings feature.
- Month: The month for the holiday or time
change.
- Day: The day for the holiday or time-change.
For holidays 1 and 2 (i.e., the dates to switch between
standard-time and daylight-savings time), this changes
to an "Xth weekday" selection.
- Shared Group: For holidays that apply to
multiple accounts (shared holidays), the name of
the shared-holiday group appears here;
Related Topic: "Users and Holidays Shared Across
Multiple Accounts".
- Holiday Type: This can be set as "No Access",
or type 1, 2, or 3. This allows, for example,
access to be blocked (and areas to be fully
'armed') on certain holidays, with access being
allowed during limited times on other holidays,
as per your requirements.
The 'Holiday Type' setting does not appear for holiday
1 & 2 (i.e., the dates to switch between standard-time
and daylight-savings time).
No Access: Blocks user-access and all scheduled
features during the holiday (as if all schedules have no
valid times on that day). Exception: This setting does
not affect scheduled event-filtering for operators.
(Holiday operation is defined separately for event
filters.)
Ref: [Management], Operator, Scheduled Event
Filter  Scheduled Event Filtering for Operators
Type 1, 2, or 3: How these days are handled is
determined by the holiday settings within each
schedule. Ref: (My Account) Schedules
 Schedules for User Access and Area Automation
(previous).
140
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Authority Groups to Manage Large Numbers of
Authorities (v4.6)
Steps:
YourAccount, Authorities, Authority
Groups
1) Set up the “Authority Group” folders and
This allows setting up a ‘tree’ or ‘folder’
structure for managing authorities.
This
feature is especially useful if you have a lot of
Authorities, or can simply be ignored if you
don’t.
This feature uses forms view only (grid view does not
apply).
subfolders as desired;
Tip: When creating (Adding) an authority group,
right-click the folder/group you wish to place the
new one into, and select “Add Authority Group”.
For other actions (delete, rename, etc.), right-click
the specific authority group itself.
2) Set up authorities and/or assign existing
3)
ones to the desired location/group in the
“Authority Group” structure;
Thereafter, for Users, when assigning an
authority to each user (“System Authority” or
“authority plus”), the authorities will be listed
within the defined “Authority Group” structure
to make it easier to find a desired one.
Tip: Authorities are shown in the root/parent
Authority Group first, followed by
children/subfolders, with folders on each level
shown in alphabetical order. (So, renaming the
parent Authority Group will not change its position
in the ‘tree’, but renaming any child Authority
Group WILL change its location in the tree based
on alphabetical sorting with other Authority Groups
at the same ‘Level’ in the ‘tree’.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
141
YourAccount, Authorities and
YourAccount, Users
If you have an authority group
tree/structure set up, it will be available
to the Authority screen (when assigning
an Authority Group), and the Users
screen (when selecting the “Master
Authority” on the Standard tab, or
“Authority Plus” on the Validation tab).
Simply click on the “+” or “-“ to the left of
a desired Authority Group folder to view
or hide each folder’s contents, and make
your selection.
142
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Authorities for Users/Entrants (V4.4)
Attention: Beginning with V4.4, area selection has
been redesigned, and clicking an area in the tiny
leftmost column causes settings to be copied to match
the area(s) already selected. See "Selecting Areas"
before you proceed.
Users Shared Across Multiple Accounts: Beginning
with Director V4.20, groups of users can be set up
once, and then applied to multiple accounts. This
involves reserving blocks of authorities for shared
users, assigning authority ID#s to specific shared users,
and defining appropriate authorities (at the correct ID#s)
for each account. For details, refer to "Users and
Holidays Shared Across Multiple Accounts".
User-Authorities for an Account
Authorities determine:
 When and where blocks of users will be able
to enter controlled areas, and;
 Which tasks they will be able to perform:
+ At system keypads, and;
+ In the "Control & Status" screens, and;
+ Per items on maps (Visual Director) V4.0.
For an operator to control items through this software,
they must also have "Control and Status" permission.
Related Topic: "Operator Permissions".
Reference Notes:
Authorities are defined here, and then assigned to
individuals through the Users screen.
Related Topic: "Users (Entrants / Panel Users)"
Authorities also determine which Control & Status
selections will be accessible to each operator (since
'Control & Status' requires entering a valid user
ID+PIN).
Suite-Security Keypad authorities are selected in the
screen for each specific user. For details, refer to the
section on "Users".
Additional authorities (and users) would typically need
to be set up for a 'Panic Token' application. For details,
see "Panic Token" under " Access ", to follow.
Default Authorities (V4.4)
Five default authorities are provided as a starting point
(associated with the default area).
Master:
Intrusion: Emergency Off, Isolate, Bypass, Auto-lift
Bypass, Service Test, Test, Silence Alarm, Status,
History, Function key, Work Late, Suspend Schedule,
Arm/disarm to On/Off/Stay, Token disarm (to Off, all
areas);
Access: Access when Area is Off/On/Stay, Master
Override, Reset Door Alarm, Door command, Class A,
Class B, Class C.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Supervisor:
Intrusion: Emergency Off, Isolate, Bypass, Auto-lift
Bypass, Test, Silence Alarm, Status, History, Function
key, Work Late, Suspend Schedule, Arm/disarm to
On/Off/Stay, Token disarm (to Off, all areas);
Access: Access when Area is Off/On/Stay, Escort,
Reset Door Alarm, Door command, Class A, Class B,
Class C.
Employee:
Intrusion: Silence Alarm, Status, Work Late, Arm/disarm
to On/Off/Stay;
Access: Access when Area is Off/On/Stay, Door
command, Class A, Class B, Class C.
Worker:
Intrusion: Status, Arm to On;
Access: Access when Area is Off/On/Stay, Class A,
Class B, Class C.
Cleaner:
Intrusion: Silence Alarm, Status, Work Late,
Arm/disarm to On/Off/Stay;
Access: Access when Area is Off/On/Stay, Class A,
Class B, Class C.
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Authorities
In the Tree: YourAccount, Authorities
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode. (Here, grid view is for
viewing purposes only.)
Things You Can Do
 Add a New Authority: Click [+] at the bottom
of the form, or right-click the blank area near
the top of the form and select "Add New" from
the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the form.
 Search for an Authority: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name and
click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete an Authority: Right-click the blank
area near the top of the form, and select
"Delete". When prompted to confirm, select
Yes.
Before Deleting: Only unused authorities can be
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
143
deleted. (Go to the Users screen, select grid view,
and check for the specific authority.)
Related Topic: "Users (Entrants / Panel Users)".
Working in Grid View: Here, grid view is for viewing
purposes only. You can:  Use the scroll bar at the
bottom to view additional items;  Click a column
heading to sort on that column;  Click again to reverse
the sort-order.
Working in the Authority Screen
 Add or select an authority as described
previously;
 Select area(s) on the left (details to follow),
and then select your desired items in the
tabs on the right to apply to your selected
area(s).
Elevator Readers: Be sure to consider areas
associated with elevator readers is well (if
applicable).
 Repeat for other groups of area(s) for which
different authorities are to apply.
st
Note: Selecting in the tiny 1 column on the left allows
selecting multiple areas, and also copies present
settings (if any) from your presently selected area(s)
into each additional area you select. Exception: If the
newly-selected area already contains selections, you
will be prompted to confirm (or abort) the operation.
Similarly, changes may be applied automatically to
other areas with the same authority selections—with or
without an optional confirmation prompt on the first
edit—which is selectable for each operator.
This prompting can be turned off if desired.
Related: [Management, Operator, Operator
 Operators (People Who Can Use This Software)
Indications:
 Blue square: An area with some items
selected in the authority you are working in.
 Grey square: An area with no items selected
in the authority you are working in.
 An "=" in the tiny first column: Areas with the
same authority selections as your presently
selected one(s);
area you select. Exception: If the newly-selected
area already contains selections, you will be
prompted to confirm (or abort) the operation.
Similarly, changes may be applied automatically to
other areas with the same authority selections—with
or without an optional confirmation prompt on the first
edit—which is selectable for each operator.
This prompting can be turned off if desired.
Related: [Management, Operator, Operator
 Operators (People Who Can Use This Software).
Using the 2nd column ("Area Select"):
This is the column within the area section window that
includes the name of each area.
 Selects one area at a time;
 Allows seeing which other areas have the
same authority selections ("=").
 A button will appear at the bottom allowing
you to "Select All Matching Areas" (when
applicable).
Tip: This also provides a way to 'shift focus' from one
block of areas to another (i.e., select the first one for the
st
new grouping here, and then go back to the small 1
column to select the rest of the desired areas).
Other things You can Do
 Select, clear, or 'invert' all settings within a
tab on the right:
Details: With the desired tab selected on the right,
right-click a blank area therein, and then select from
the pop-up menu.
 Copy all settings from one area to another
(within the same authority):
st
In the Area selection window: In the tiny 1
column on the left, select the source area, then the
'target' area, and select [Yes] if asked to confirm.
From within a tabbed form: Right-click a blank
area within the desired tab of the source area, and
nd
select "Copy Area"; Use the 2 column (Area
Select) to select the 'target' area, and then select the
desired tab; Right-click a blank area and select
"Paste Area".
 Copy all areas and selections from one
authority to another as a starting point:
Selecting Areas
Using the tiny 1st Column on the Left:
Look carefully at the top of the area selection window,
and you'll see a tiny first column on the left.
 This lets you select multiple areas, and then
make authority selections for groups of areas
at the same time;
Note: This also copies present settings (if any) from
your presently selected area(s) into each additional
144
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
st
Details: Right-click the 1
one (a blank area above
the 'tabs' in 'Forms' view),
and select Copy. Then,
select a blank/new
authority from the list (or
other desired authority),
right-click near the top as
before, and select Paste.
After 'pasting', change the
name and any settings as
desired.
Authorities (for users)
Screen
Reference
Pick-List (bottom
of the Form)
- Authority: This is where you select a userauthority to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the system, and
the name of the selected authority, once
defined;
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name or description for the
authority (e.g., Managers);
- Accept Duress PIN: If the Account Information
-> Setup -> Allow PIN Duress checkbox is
checked, the global PIN Duress functionality is
on. By using the “Accept Duress PIN” checkbox
it is possible to allow/deny the functionality for
certain Authorities. If the global duress
functionality is disabled, the “Accept Duress
PIN” checkbox is grayed out.
 Area Attributes 
Area Selection Window on the Left
- Right-click within the Area-selection
Window: Right-clicking within the area window
allows selecting:
+ Physical View (): Areas listed on a panel-bypanel basis;
+ Physical View (NOT selected): All areas shown in
a single list;
+ View Panel Information: When NOT in "Physical
View", this allows showing or hiding the panel group
and panel name for each area in the list.
+ Remove Area: When you right-click a specific area
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
in the list, selecting "Remove Area" removes all
authority selections for that area, thereby removing
that area from present consideration within your
present user-authority.
- Small "+/-" symbol in Physical View: Click
this to show or hide the areas for each panel.
- Tiny 1st Column (far left): Look carefully at the
top of the area selection window, and you'll see
a tiny first column on the left. This allows
selecting multiple areas, so you can then make
selections for groups of areas at the same time.
Caution: This also copies present settings (if any)
from your presently selected area(s) into each
additional area you select. Exception: If the newlyselected area already contains selections, you will be
prompted to confirm (or abort) the operation.
Similarly, changes may be applied automatically to
other areas with the same authority selections—with
or without an optional confirmation prompt on the first
edit—which is selectable for each operator.
This prompting can be turned off if desired.
Related: [Management, Operator, Operator
 Operators (People Who Can Use This Software).
To 'Unselect' an Area: To clear all authority selections
for an area selected accidentally, right-click the area,
and select "Remove Area" from the pop-up menu.
- 2nd column ("Area Select"): Selecting an area
within the column that includes the area name
allows selecting one area at a time to view or
edit. For any other areas that presently have
the same settings, you'll see a small "=" in the
first column.
Tip: This also provides a way to 'shift focus' from one
block of areas to another (i.e., select the first one for
the new grouping here, and then go back to the small
st
1 column to select the rest of the desired areas).
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
145
------------------------------------------------------- Intrusion 
- Silence Alarm: Acknowledging an alarm at a
panel.
- Status: View status for the system and points in
the area(s);
- History: View the event history for the
applicable area(s);
- Service Test: When a user with this authority
views the system status at an LCD keypad, they
can use the “Verify User” option to clear alarms.
If selected for ALL areas, this also provides the
ability to edit the panel date and time through an
LCD keypad (similar to the ‘service user’).
- Test: Perform a system test from an LCD
keypad;
- Function Key: The ability to use the
programmed hot-keys (function keys) 6, 7, 8, 9,
or 0 for an area that requires this authority
(function keys 1-5 are available for all
users/areas);
Whether or not an area will "Require Function Key
PIN" is set under "Areas and Related Settings".
What each function key does is set up under
"Programmable Outputs".
- Work Late: Ability to delay a 'scheduled close'
time for the selected area(s). (This is done in ½
hour increments.)
- Bypass Points: Telling the panel to
ignore/bypass specific points in the applicable
areas (and/or remove the 'bypass' later). This
allows arming an area with a faulty sensor,
broken window, etc.
Note: A bypass will remain in effect only until the area
is disarmed. (Also see "Isolate", to follow.)
Some types of input points cannot be bypassed. For
details, refer to the configuration topics regarding
'Input Points'.
- Auto-Remove Bypass: Automatically removes
any 'bypasses' that are in effect when an
associated user is granted entry. This helps to
ensure that any faulty sensors are not forgotten;
- Suspend Schedule: Indefinitely suspend
schedule(s) for the applicable area(s).
- Emergency Off (V4.4): The ability to disarm
the selected areas after-hours (i.e., outside of
the area's schedule) including holidays;
Notes: To enter an area that is armed during their
assigned times, users must also have the applicable
146
'Disarm' authority for the specific area (see Arming,
to follow). "Emergency Off" authority is not needed for
areas set to "Allow out of schedule opens".
Details: Configuration, Areas, Scheduling.
 Areas and Related Settings
- Isolate (V4.4): The ability to isolate input points
(sensors/zones). This is similar to bypassing
an input point, except an 'isolation' remains in
effect until it is removed manually.
(Also see 'Bypass', previous.)
------------------------------------------------------- Arming 
Note: Any three defined schedules can be assigned
throughout each authority (plus "Always" or "Never").
Per a Schedule or 'Always': Pertaining to disarming
(to Stay or Off), the area's schedule must also be in
effect unless either "Emergency Off" authority is also
provided (previous), or the area is set to "Allow Out of
Schedule Opens".
Never: Blocks the applicable arm/disarm ability. Note:
Inability to disarm also blocks the ability to enter an
armed area.
Tip: In the selections, "In Schedule" means during the
selected schedule, and "Out of Schedule" means afterhours (i.e., outside of the selected schedule).
To define a schedule, refer to "Schedules for User
Access and Area Automation".
- Schedule ON: Determines if and when
associated users will be able to arm applicable
areas (to ON);
On: All sensors monitored (including interior motion
detection).
- Schedule OFF: Determines if and when
associated users will be able to disarm
applicable areas (to OFF);
Off:
Only 24-hr and life/safety sensors monitored;
- Schedule STAY: Determines if and when
associated users will be able to arm or disarm
applicable areas (to STAY);
Stay:
Perimeter doors / sensors monitored (plus 24
hr / life-safety);
------------------------------------------------------- Access 
- Area access is permitted: The area arming
levels for which the assigned users will be able
to enter the selected areas. (i.e., when the area
is Off, armed to Stay, and/or fully armed to ON).
- Master Override: This allows a person such as
a security officer to enter at any door that would
normally deny access.
Items Overridden: 'Wrong time' (and door class
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
settings), 'cards locked-out', APB (if NOT set for strict
enforcement), readers in 'dual-custody' or 'escort'
mode (and allows the person to act as an escort).
Items NOT Overridden: 'Wrong area or floor',
card/PIN mode, 'strict APB', door 'interlock' issues,
and 'disarm' authorities.
- Escort: Whether or not users assigned to this
authority will be considered as "Escorts" (for use
with "Escort-Required Visitors" (to follow), and
the "Escort" reader mode for doors in the
selected areas).
Related Setting: "Reader Mode" in the door
configuration section.
- Visitor (Escort Required): With this selection,
the person is tracked as they 'badge' throughout
the facility, but access is not granted until a valid
escort's card is also presented.
To Block a Visitor from Using LCD Keypads: Locate
them in the 'Users' screen, and ensure their PIN is
blank.
Type of Cards that can Escort Visitors: This can be
changed as desired (the present setting is shown onscreen in blue). Related Topics: Under "AccountWide Panel Settings", look for "Setup", then
"Escort-Required Mode".
Turnstile set for Antipassback: To allow the escort to
badge again to gain entry, the reader must be set for
'turnstile' operation. Related Setting: Under "Reader
1 & 2 Settings for a Door", look for  Special , then
Turnstile.
Escort/Dual-Custody for Readers: Escort mode is
also supported for all cards at specific readers.
"Visitor" cards are denied access at readers set for
"Dual Custody". Related Topics: Look for "Reader
Mode" in the reader configuration section for doors
and/or elevators (lifts).
Misc: The 'visitor' setting is not available for escorts
(and vice-versa). As well, do not select "Master
Override" (previous/above)--as this will override the
visitor/escort feature.
- Wandering Patient: Sets associated users to
be tracked as they approach exterior doors, or
other areas of concern.
With this type of 'user', the 'access token' will typically
be a wireless wristband (with appropriate detection in
door frames).
When the patient approaches, an alarm can be
triggered, and the door can optionally lock as they
approach. Related Topic: Under "Doors, Readers,
and Related Settings", look for  Special , then
Detect Wandering Patient.
- Reset Door Alarm: Provides associated staff
members with the authority to cancel a
'Wandering Patient' alarm by presenting their
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
(applicable/compatible) token at the specific
door.
- Panic Token: This designates associated user
'access tokens' as being a panic / duress
indication (instead of an access request).
In this case, the applicable 'access tokens' will
typically be separate wireless (RF) pushbuttons (with
appropriate detectors in the required areas). This is
typically used for areas such as parking garages.
- Group Number and Group Mode: Similar to
'Door Class'. Users can enter only at readers for
which their group number assigned here
supports the one set in each reader's
configuration.
Equality: Associated users will be able to enter at
readers set to the same group number as assigned
here.
Greater than or equal to: Users will be able to enter
if their group number assigned here is greater than
or equal to that as set at each specific reader.
------------------------------------------------------- Access Schedule 
Note: Any three defined schedules can be assigned
throughout each authority (plus "Always" or "Never").
Per a Schedule or 'Always': The area's schedule must
also be in effect unless either "Emergency Off" authority
is also provided (previous), or the area is set to "Allow
Out of Schedule Opens". Never: Blocks the applicable
ability.
Tip: In the selections, "In Schedule" means during the
selected schedule, and "Out of Schedule" means afterhours (i.e., outside of the selected schedule).
To define a schedule, refer to "Schedules for User
Access and Area Automation".
- Token Disarm - Level: Sets the arming-level
(Off or Stay) for an 'Auto-Disarm' when a user
associated with this authority gains entry to this
area. Choices also allow having this depend on
whether the event occurs during vs. outside of a
chosen schedule.
- Token Disarm - Areas: Pertaining to an 'AutoDisarm' (when a user associated with this
authority gains entry to this area), this sets
whether all areas in the authority will be
disarmed, or only the one being entered.
Choices also allow having this depend on
whether the event occurs during vs. outside of a
chosen schedule.
The auto-disarm feature will occur only for areas set to
"Auto Disarm On Valid Token" during certain times.
Details: Configuration, Areas, Scheduling.
 Areas and Related Settings
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
147
- Door Commands: Determines if and when
associated users will be able to command doors
in applicable areas through LCD-keypads or this
software.
Elevators/Lifts and Floors: This selection applies to
elevator (lift) and floor control as well (if applicable).
- Door Class A/B/C Schedule: Determines if
and when applicable users will be able to enter
at readers set to allow access for any of these
door classes during certain times.
Door class restrictions can also be customized for
individual readers. Related Topics: "Enable Class
Checking", and "[Class Map]" in the reader
configuration section for doors and/or elevators (lifts).
Master Override: With 'Master Override' authority
(previous), these scheduled door class settings are
ignored (same as A/B/C – 'Always').
Arm/Disarm Authorities: Inability to disarm also blocks
the ability to enter an armed area. (See " Arming
", previous.)
Elevators (Lifts): This setting pertains to elevators as
well (controlled floor access).
 Floor Map 
(systems with elevators and floors)
- (3D list of floors): Systems with elevator
controllers provide controlled access to system
floors. Select the floors to be allowed for
persons associated with this user-authority.
(Click the floor names, or within the 3D 'stack' of
floors.)
(Ranges of Users and Authorities)
This determines the users and authorities that users
associated with this authority (being edited) will, in turn,
be able to edit through LCD keypads. This allows a
facility with multiple tenants (e.g., row of shops) to be
managed as a single account—with each tenant able to
edit their own range(s) of users and authorities.
ATTENTION: Do NOT leave these blank unless you
wish to block users associated with this authority from
editing any users and/or authorities through LCD
keypads.
- User Ranges: Up to 8 ranges of users to be
accessible/editable through system keypads (by
users associated with this specific authority
being edited).
Steps: 1) Click a range/position in the list; 2) Enter
start and end values in the boxes provided; 3) Click
[Add] or [Update] (as applicable); 4) Repeat for any
additional ranges as applicable.
Tip: If you enter adjacent ranges (e.g. 1-99 and 100199), they will be changed to a single range
automatically (e.g., 1-199).
- Authority Ranges: Up to 8 ranges of user
authorities to be accessible/editable through
system keypads (by users associated with this
specific authority being edited).
Steps and Notes: See the details for 'User Ranges',
previous.
Floor access is also affected by:
+ Other Authority Settings: Selections under
"Access" and "Access Schedule" for the
area associated with the elevator reader;
+ Area Configuration Settings: "Arm/Disarm
schedule", plus whether or not the area will "Allow
out of schedule opens";
+ Elevator/Reader Configuration Settings: "Class
Map" schedule and settings, plus misc. items such
as "Lockout".
Tip: Elevators and/or specific floors can also be set so
anyone can access during certain times regardless of
their authorities (i.e., without using an access
card/token). This can be manually via maps or "control
& status", or through a 'desecure schedule' included in
the set-up for each floor and/or elevator cab.
 LCD 
- LCD Name: A shorter version of the name to be
displayed at LCD keypads. This is assigned
automatically, and can also be changed if
desired (max. 12 chars., plain text).
148
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Custom Information Categories for Users (Custom User Information)
Users Shared Across Multiple Accounts: To implement
shared 'custom-user-fields', these fields must be
defined with the same usage and order for all applicable
accounts, and they must be set as 'single-line edit'
fields. Related Topic: "Set up any Custom User
Fields for Shared Users".
Custom User Fields
Custom user-fields allow creating up to 20
additional
categories
for
users
(e.g.,
Department, Position, etc.).
Note: Custom user information categories pertain to all
users for a specific account.
These allow sorting lists of users by
Department, etc. when working in "Grid" view,
and can also be referenced when issuing time
and attendance or activity reports.
Deleting (Hiding) Custom User Fields
Select Custom Fields from the MyTools bar,
or click your site/account button in the tree,
open Users (+), and select Custom Fields.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Now, select the 'tab' for the item you wish to
have removed from the 'User' screen, and set
the "Field Type" to "None". (See "Field Type"
if you need more information.)
Tip: Your changes will be saved automatically when
you move to a different screen or topic.
Note: Reports cannot be filtered on multi-line fields. Be
sure to make your selection with this in mind.
Viewing or Entering These Settings
Select Custom Fields from the MyTools bar,
or click your site/account button in the tree,
open Users (click the "+"), and select Custom
Fields.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Now, refer to the selection-descriptions while
viewing or entering your desired settings.
Note: Grid view is not supported for this topic.
Tip: Your settings will be saved automatically when
you move to a different screen or topic.
Checking the User Screen for the New
Fields
Select Users from the MyTools bar, or click
your site/account button in the tree and select
Users.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Now, select the Custom tab to view any
defined custom fields.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
149
Users Custom Fields
Screen Reference
Field 1, 2, 3, ...20 (Select the tab for the
new/desired field)
- Field Type: The type of new field to appear
at the bottom of the User screen. (Make your
selection from the list.);
Note: Reports cannot be filtered on multi-line
fields. Be sure to make your selection with this in
mind.
- Field Name: The name to appear next to the
field on the User screen (such as "Position",
"Department", etc.);
(Additional Settings for "Drop-down
Lists" only)
- List of Available Items: Available selections
that have been entered and "Added" (see the
following items);
- Enter a New Item: A selection to be added to
the list of choices. (Enter your text in place of
"Enter a New Item", and click [Add].)
- [Add]: Adds an entered item to the list;
- [Delete]: Deletes a selected item. (Select the
item in the list, and then click [Delete].)
150
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Users (Entrants / Panel Users)
Users Shared Across Multiple Accounts: Beginning
with Director V4.20, groups of users can be set up
once, and then given access to multiple accounts. For
a shared user, changes made here will affect multiple
accounts. To set up shared users, refer to "Users and
Holidays Shared Across Multiple Accounts".
Data Conflicts--Users: Changes made through the
software will take precedence over changes for the
same user entered through a keypad. V4.7: User
conflicts that cannot be resolved in this way (e.g., the
same value given to different users) will be shown in
grid view, with only the rows in conflict displayed. To
return to showing all users, right-click, and select
"Return From Conflict View".
Suite-Security Keypad Users
Users to be associated with a suite-security
keypad (monitored apartment or facility) are
assigned in a special way. Blocks of 8 users
are reserved for each keypad when adding
and setting up the keypads.
These users must be defined within the
appropriate user-ID range associated with their
suite security keypad.
To check (or set) the user-ID range for a specific suitesecurity keypad refer to "Suite-Security Keypads and
Related Settings".
Users
Multi-Tenant Facilities
Users are the persons authorized to use
system keypads and/or gain entry to controlled
areas. Each user can have unique authorities,
keypad language, etc.
The user topic includes information pertaining
to each user, and provides access to the
optional card-badging feature.
A facility with multiple tenants (such as a row
of shops) can be managed as a single
account. This requires that blocks of user-IDs
and authorities be reserved for the users in
each tenant facility.
The authority to edit specific blocks of users
and user-authorities is set within each user's
authority. This allows persons within each
facility to use an LCD keypad to edit their own
users, without allowing them to edit users in
other facilities.
 The number of users to be supported depends on
your software version and licensing. For details, refer
to "Software Activation and Licensing", and "System
Capacities".  Additional users (and authorities) would
typically need to be set up for a 'Panic Token'
application. For details, see the "Special Attributes"
selections under "Authorities for Users / Entrants".
UK / ACPO Systems: A service login will require a
second ID & PIN via user 001. This user's default PIN
(7793) can be changed as desired.
Visitor-Related Features
A number of features are provided for handling
visitors in your facility:
 Authority parameters can be set up to
determine the doors and features the visitors
will be able to access;
 Each card can be assigned an activation and
expiry date and time;
 Cards can be set as "Escort Required" to allow
tracking them without providing access to
controlled areas on their own;
 You can leave a visitor's PIN blank to block
access to LCD keypads;
 Reader(s) can be set to disable different types
of cards when presented.
For details, refer to "Authorities for Users / Entrants".
Users who can Enter During
Communications-Failure'
Up to 10 users can be set up for door-access
in the event of any door control module(s)
being unable to communicate with the system
panel. If using this feature, be sure to make a
list of the No./ID the system assigns to these
users as you go along.
For details, refer to "Door Fall-back Mode" under
"System Card-Access Settings", and the section on
"Fall-Back Users".
Elevator (Lift) Cabs: This feature is also supported for
individual elevator (lift) cabs. To enable "Fallback
Mode" for an elevator, refer to "Elevators (Lifts) and
Associated Readers".
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Users
In the Tree: YourAccount, Users
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
151
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Things You Can Do
 Add a New User: Click [+] at the bottom of
the form, or right-click the form and select
Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a User: Click the 'binoculars'
symbol to open the ‘Find’ screen. Then,
enter the desired criteria to search for, and
click [Find].
Tip: For the first and last name, you can search by
st
name or the 1 few characters--e.g., nam*.
Note: The ability to search on criteria other than first
and last name is a V4.5 feature.
 Delete a User: Right-click a blank area on
the form (If grid view: Right-click the item in the
list), and select "Delete". When prompted to
confirm, select Yes.
Before Deleting: If a user is assigned as a fallback
user, you must break this assignment before you can
delete the user.
Related Topic: "Fall-Back Users (Can Enter During
Comms Failure)"
Viewing and Sorting a List of Users
If the screen shows only one user (forms
view), click Grid on the toolbar to see a full
listing of the users (Grid view). If any column
headings are red, right-click within that column
and select Remove Column Filter. Now, you
can:
 Click one of the column headings to sort the list
by that item (user name, etc.);
 Scroll through the list as desired;
 Select an individual user and click the Form
toolbar-button to access that user's form;
 Limit the list to show an individual user, or
groups of users (details to follow).
Across Multiple Accounts".
Green or Yellow Rows in Grid View: Partial panel
updates are indicated in the user list with special
colors: Yellow: Partial updates pending (some panels
have not been updated); Green: Data for the user
has been changed while partial updates were pending
(the user's settings at the panels will be overwritten on
next update).
Checking for Database Conflicts (esp. large
systems):
Differences between the software
database and settings entered locally through an LCD
keypad can be identified by selecting "Check
Database for Conflicts" from the Tools menu. For
details, search for that topic in the index.
Limiting the List to Show Specific User(s)
Access the user-list (Grid view) as described
above.
Then, right-click within a specific
column (such as "Name"), and select "Filter
on Column" from the pop-up menu. Now,
enter or select the desired criteria, and press
Enter.
Tip: You can search for user names that begin with
certain letter(s) by entering the letter(s) and an asterisk
(e.g., " s* ").
Tip: You can do this for multiple columns if desired.
V4.7 (users-only): The column title(s) selected for
filtering will initially appear blue, and turn to red when
you activate the selected filtering by right-clicking any
column, and selecting "Run Filter". You must select
"Run Filter".
To return the listing to include all users /
entrants, click Refresh from the toolbar, or
right-click within any column(s) that are red,
and select Remove Column Filter.
Screen Reference
Forms View or Grid View?
Grid view is best for viewing a list of users, and/or
searching for users with a specific assigned value.
Forms view is best for adding a new user, or viewing
or changing settings for one user at a time.
Tip: You can use the scroll-bar at the bottom of the
window to view additional columns to the right.
Small 1st Column with Blue Boxes: Blue rectangles
indicate users that apply to multiple accounts (shared
users). Related Topic: "Users and Holidays Shared
152
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Users (Grid View / User-List)
Pick-List (bottom of the
Form)
- User: This is where you select a user
to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number (ID) assigned by the
system, and the user's name, once
defined;
The user ID number is required to gain
access at a system keypad, and to use any
"status & control" features of this software.
(The user's PIN number is also required.
See "Change PIN", to follow.);
Filtering and Sorting: Beginning with V4.7,
any filtering and sorting performed in 'grid'
view will be retained here--as indicated at
the very top of the user screen. To revert
this list to show ALL users (in the default
sort order), right-click a blank area on the
form, and select "Remove Filter/Sort".
Users (Forms View / Individual User Forms)
Top of the Form
- First Name: The user's first name
(given name), or a description of the
card/token;
- Last Name: The user's last name
(family name);
------------------------- Shared Group: For users that apply
to multiple accounts (shared users),
the name of the "shared-user group"
appears here;
Related Topic: "Users and Holidays Shared
Across Multiple Accounts".
 Standard 
- System Authority: The 'authority' to
be assigned to the user. This
determines what keypad features the
person will be able to use, and/or
when and where they can gain entry.
Tip: Pause the mouse cursor over an 'Authority' in the
list to view the associated settings. For details on
setting up authorities, refer to "Authorities for Users /
Entrants".
Note: Permanent users associated with individual
accounts (i.e., not shared users) can also be assigned
an additional (temporary) authority to apply for a
specific date/time range. For details, refer to
 Validation , to follow/below.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
- Shared Authority: For users that apply to
multiple accounts (shared users), the name of
the "shared-authority group" appears here;
Note: Authorities themselves are not shared. The
'shared authority group' determines which authority
(ID#) in the account will be used.
Related Topic: "Users and Holidays Shared Across
Multiple Accounts".
- [Change PIN]: Allows setting or changing the
Personal Identification Number which allows the
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
153
user to perform tasks at a system keypad,
and/or enter at a controlled door (4 or 5 digits).
The last two digits of each PIN must be different
numbers. (This allows users to indicate they are being
forced to enter at a reader, or login at a keypad (i.e.,
duress) by reversing the last two digits of their PIN.)
To Block a Visitor from Using LCD Keypads: Leave
their PIN blank.
User PINs pertaining to a single suite-security
keypad must be unique (different).
For details on setting whether PINs are to be 4 or 5
digits, and whether or not duress signalling is to be
supported, refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
- Language: The language for user prompts at
LCD keypads when accessed by this user;
Languages are determined during installation—based
on availability.
Card Number: The card ID number embedded
within this user's access card or token
(1 - 4 294 967 295).
Logon via Card Number: The system can be set for
keypad and door access using this number (typically
where the card number matches a fixed health
number or employee number).
Related Topics: Under "Account-Wide Panel
Settings", look for " Setup ", then
"User Logon Mode".
Firmware revisions needed for card IDs with more
than 7 digits:  V3.2 panel firmware, and  V1.5
door/elevator controller firmware.
: V3.2 panels: MaxID=999999999;
V3.31 Panels: MaxID=As above.
- [Card Lost]: This provides an easy way to
identify a lost card to the system. All relevant
user data will be copied to the "Lost Cards"
screen, and the card number will be set to 0.
Tip: Go ahead and enter the new card number once it
is known.
Shared Users: This feature is not supported for users
shared across multiple accounts. In this case, enter
the new card number (previous/above), and then go to
the "Lost Cards" screen to add the old card number to
the list.
Related: Users, Lost Cards
 Cards that have been Lost
Reporting on Lost Cards: The "User Access" report
can be used to view or print a list of cards that have
been identified as 'lost'.
Related: [Reports], User Access
 Reporting on User Access Authorities.
- Card Version: This is the version number for
this user's card;
This optional field allows fixed-ID cards to be re-issued
154
if lost or stolen. For more information (or to enable
this feature), refer to "System Card-Access Settings".
(Tip: Look for "AutoUpdate Card Version", and "Card
Version".)
This feature requires  V3.2 panel firmware, and 
V1.5 door/elevator controller firmware.
- Extended Delay/Challenged: Whether or not
the 'extended' door unlock (and 'held-open')
settings should apply when this user is granted
access at a controlled door.
- LCD Name: A condensed version of the name
to be displayed at LCD keypads. This is
assigned automatically, and can also be
changed if desired (max. 12 chars., plain text).
Exception: For panel memory-configurations
(feature-sets) that do not support user names, the
LCD name will appear as "U00xx" as per the user-ID.
To view or change the panel "Feature-Set", refer to
"Account-Wide Panel Settings".
- Email, Phone number, Carrier domain
(V4.9.1): User’s email, phone number and
carrier domain are needed for email/SMS
functionality. The Carrier domain field contains a
domain name for the email2sms service specific
to the particular phone service provider.
Void User
- [Void User] / [Reinstate User]: This provides
an easy way to disable (or reinstate) a card
without removing it from the database. This also
blocks (or allows) the user from logging in at
system keypads.
Tip: After reinstating a user/card, be sure to recheck
and set the desired Validation parameters (to
follow/below).
------------------------- (Cardholder Photo and Related Settings):
Items pertaining to cardholder photos and the
photo-badging option are covered separately (to
follow).
 Validation 
"User is Currently Void": Voided users can be
reinstated through a button near the bottom of the
Standard tab (previous/above).
Note: The settings that follow appear only where
applicable/supported.
Valid User Period
Tip: These settings determine when a user/card will be
valid, and also allow assigning an optional second
authority to apply during a specific date/time range.
This pertains to permanent users associated with an
individual account (i.e., not shared users).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
- Type: This sets the basic type (i.e., validation
method) for card.
No User Access: The card/token and user PIN will be
unusable.
Pending Enrolment: The card/token and user PIN will
be unusable until the card is accepted at a reader that
is set for "Card Enrolment".
Related Settings:
 Account Information, Setup,
Card Action (Ignore Pending Enrolment).
See: Account-Wide Panel Settings.
 Configuration, Doors, In Reader, [Card
Action]. See: Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a Door.
By Date Time: This allows setting a user/card to
activate on a specific date and time and/or deactivate
on a specific date and time.
Permanent User: This sets a user/card to activate
right away with no expiry date/time.
Authority Plus: For a permanent user, this allows
assigning an optional second authority to apply during
a specific date/time range. This pertains to users
associated with an individual account (i.e., not shared
users).
- Authority Plus: This sets an additional /
temporary 'authority' profile to apply to the user
during the selected date/time range.
Notice: During the selected date/time range, the user
will have authorities as provided through their "System
Authority" (previous), AND as provided through the
temporary authority selected here. When this second
authority expires, the user/card will revert to
'permanent' with authorities as per the "System
Authority" only.
For details on setting up authorities, refer to
"Authorities for Users / Entrants".
- Valid On: The beginning date/time that this
user's card, and ID/PIN can be used (or "Now /
Immediate").
Tip: You can change the dates manually, or click the
arrow to select from a pop-up calendar. To set the
times (hours), click within the 'hours' setting, and use
the up/down arrow keys to adjust.
Note: Time values (hours) apply only with specified
validation and invalidation dates for periods of less
than 6 months.
- Invalid On: The expiry date/time for this user's
card, and ID/PIN (or "Forever / Permanent").
(Also see the preceding 'tip'.)
 Custom xx 
(systems with custom user-fields)
Welcome
Report
These items can be used when sorting or filtering lists
of users (In Grid View), and can also be referenced by
various types of Time & Attendance reports. For
details on setting up these custom user fields, refer to
"Custom Information Categories for Users".
 Suite 
(systems w/suite-security keypads)
Authority Level Settings
Notes: User 'authorities' (as selected elsewhere) do not
affect suite security keypads. (All suite-security
permissions for users are selected here). Support for
suite-security keypads is optional (enabled through the
license-manager software). This feature also requires
selecting "feature-set" 5 or higher and "suite security"
under "Account Information" in the tree. As well, this
'tab' will appear only if at least one suite security
keypad is defined.
Related Topics:
+ "Software Activation and Licensing".
+ "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
- Belongs to Suite: This is the
apartment/keypad associated this user (if
applicable). For more information, refer to
"Suite-Security Keypad Users" near the
beginning of this section.
- Authority Level: Pre-set suite-security keypad
user types:
+ System Authority Only: No access to the suitesecurity system;
+ Suite-Security Unassigned: This is for a
pending/reserved user. (No keypad access, but
can be changed by a person with "Suite-Security
Master" authority.)
+ Other selections: As per the authority settings
shown on-screen.
- Authority Settings: This shows the authorities
associated with the "Authority Level" selected
above. These pertain to the tasks that each
user will be able to perform at the keypad in
their unit.
Allow Suite Security Control
- This allows setting the manual control
arming/tasks that this user will be able to
perform through this software (via maps, or
through the 'Suite Security' control & status
screen).
Operator Permissions: This 'tab' will be available only
for operators with "Users – Suite" operator permission.
Blocks of 5 additional (optional / custom) user
21-0381E v4.9.1
information categories as defined through the
"Custom Fields" screen (these may include
Position, Department, vehicle license, etc.).
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
155
The Photo-Badging Option
With the photo-badging feature, personnel
photos (and signatures) can be captured and
included on the screen for each user.
Selections are also provided for printing
photos and other information on cards, as well
as designing the layout for the information and
graphics to appear on sets of cards.
The ability to capture or link images is a standard
feature, while designing and printing cards is optional-subject to your software licensing.
This feature works with many common types of capture
devices and card printers (as discussed in the computer
requirements section).
Note: To allow using the photo-badging option, the
card printer and any capture devices must be installed
as per the manufacturer's instructions (download the
latest drivers if you have access to the internet).
Licensing is managed through the small 'activation key'
plugged onto the PC that contains the software
database--in conjunction with the license manager
software included with VEREX Director. For details on
upgrading, refer to "Software Activation and Licensing".
Capturing a person's Photo:
Tip: The following steps can also be used to
photograph a person's pre-written signature (select
[Capture Signature Image] instead of [Capture
Image] ).
 Find the user form for the specific person as
described previously/above;
 Click the 1st button (face symbol) under the
photo area on the right side of the screen;
 With the person in front of the camera, click
[Capture Image]. Adjust the camera (or
person) as needed, and click Capture Image
when ready.
 In the next screen, make any desired
adjustments, and click OK when finished.
For more information, refer to the [Capture Image]
item-description.
Linking to Existing Image Files
(such as photos taken with a digital camera):
Tip: The following steps can also be used to link the
photo of a person's signature (select [Capture
Signature Image] instead of [Capture Image] ).
Photo-images that are already available on
your PC can be linked to each applicable user
as desired.
File Types Supported: Most common types of image
files are supported--including BMP, PCX, JPG, etc.
Exception: "LZW"-style TIFF files are not supported
(due to licensing issues).
For reasonable results, the image files should be 100kb
or larger. Note: To improve performance, image
resolution is adjusted when each file is imported.
Steps:
 Find the user form for the specific person as
described previously/above;
 Click the 1st button (face symbol) under the
photo area on the right side of the screen;
 Click Select Capture Profile;
 Ensure "Load Image from File" is selected as
your capture-device, and click [OK];
 Now, click [Capture Image], and locate and
select your desired photo-image;
 Click [Open]. When the next screen appears,
make any desired adjustments, and click OK
when finished.
For more information, refer to the [Capture Image]
item-description.
Creating a Signature Image:
Tip: This can be done using a writing tablet
(recommended), or your mouse.
 Find the user form for the specific person as
described previously/above;
 Click the 1st button (face symbol) under the
photo area on the right side of the screen;
 With the specific person seated in front of the
PC, select [Sign Signature].
 Have them sign their name using the writing
tablet or mouse.
For more information, refer to the [Sign Signature]
item-description.
Screen Reference
156
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Standard Photo-Badging
Selections
Right-Hand side of the User Form
- (person's photo-image): The
captured image of the specific person
(this can be captured directly, or linked
from a file);
- (person's signature-image): The
person's captured signature image
(this can be captured directly, or linked
from a file);
- [1st button] (face symbol): This opens
a form with a number of selections for
capturing user photos and/or
signatures;
Printer, and Tools buttons: See "Optional
Features..." to follow/below.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
157
When You Click the 1st Button (face symbol)
Image
- Current Capture Device: This shows your
presently-selected image-capture device (or
"load image from file");
- (image area): This shows your tentativelyselected user photo;
- [Select Capture Profile]: This allows
selecting a different image capture device (or
"load image from file");
- [Capture Image]: This allows capturing the
person's photo, or linking to an image file (e.g.,
from a handheld digital camera);
If prompted to select a capture profile: Select your
image-capture device (or "Load Image from File")
and click OK.
Settings Details: For information on the settings in
this screen, press F1. Tip: You can drag the dotted
border to reframe your image.
- [Clear Image]: This removes any image from
the image area (e.g., to remove a person's
image from the user screen);
- [Image Setup]: Allows you to set the 'aspect
ratio' (height-to-width ratio) of the captured and
printed images. (In general, leave other settings
as-is.)
Tip: Click Image Setup, select "Photograph" and click
[Edit] ).
Signature
Current Capture Device: This shows your
presently-selected image-capture device (or
"load image from file");
- (image area): This shows your tentativelyselected signature;
- [Select Capture Profile]: This allows selecting
a different image capture device (or "load image
from file");
- [Capture Signature Image]: This allows
photographing the person's signature, or linking
to an image file (e.g., from a handheld digital
camera);
If prompted to select a capture profile: Select your
image-capture device (or "Load Image from File") and
click OK.
Settings Details: For information on the settings in this
screen, press F1. Tip: You can drag the dotted
border to reframe your image.
158
- [Sign Signature]: This allows using a writing
tablet (recommended), or your mouse to enter
your signature.
(signature area): This shows your signature as you
enter it. Tip: It is best to watch the screen while
signing (may take a little practise).
[Clear]: Click this to clear the screen and try signing
your name again;
[Cancel]: Click this to abort the task, leaving the
presently assigned signature in place (if present);
[Done]: Click this to insert your new signature onto
the user form.
- [Clear Signature]: This removes any image
from the signature area (e.g., to remove a
person's signature from the user screen);
- [Image Setup]: Allows you to change various
technical aspects of the specific image file. This
can be used to set the 'aspect ratio' (height-towidth ratio) of the captured and printed images.
(In general, leave other settings as-is.)
Tip: Click Image Setup, select "Signature" and click
[Edit] ).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Right-Hand side of the User Form
Optional Features
(Photo-Badging Option)
Printing a Card
(Requires the Photo-Badging Option)
 Find the user form for the specific
person as described
previously/above;
 Ensure the displayed image and
other settings are correct;
 Click [Print Badge] (printer symbol) -bottom-right portion of the user
screen. Then, locate and doubleclick your previously saved card
design template (.gdr file).
 In the next screen, select your printer
(plus any desired properties) and
click OK.
 In the print preview window, magnify and/or
view your sample as desired. To print the
card, click Print on the toolbar (printer symbol).
For more information, refer to the [Print Badge]
item-description.
- [Print Badge] (printer symbol): This allows
selecting a card-layout file, and printing the
person's photo and data onto an access card;
Tip: The printer set-up button in the print-preview
window provides access to additional settings (after
you select a printer and click OK).
- [Card Printer Encoder Setup] (colored bands
symbol): This provides additional settings for a
card printer encoder.
Designing Cards
Tip: Additional information is provided separately.
(Click the button, and then press F1 for help.)
- [Create Badge] (tools symbol): This allows
(Requires the Photo-Badging Option)
 Open the User screen with any user showing
on-screen;
 Click [Create Badge] (tools symbol) -- bottomright portion of the user screen, and design
your new card layout as desired, or open a
previous one to edit. When finished, be sure to
save your settings (File, Save).
For more information, look for "[Create Badge] (tools
symbol)" in the item-descriptions.
Screen Reference
designing card templates (i.e., setting up the
layout and data to appear on sets of cards).
Tips:  This launches as a separate program. For
details on using this software, refer to its on-line help
and/or printed manual (as applicable).
 You can create a new layout, or open an existing
one to edit.
 Look to the right of K O near the right-hand end of
the toolbar. This field allows inserting (or
converting) common user-data fields instead of
plain text via the T button.
 For multiple items printed as one field: You must
first set up an 'expression'.  Edit, Define
Expression.  Select a field and click the "Up
Arrows" button.  Type a "+" before each additional
item, and enclose any additional text in doublequotes. Example: Last Name+", "+First Name
 *Card Number*: Whenever you see 'Card Number'
enclosed in asterisks (*), this pertains to magstripe
encoding for use as access cards. For other card
uses (or to print the card number), select 'Card
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
159
Number' without the asterisks.
 Magstripe Encoding (card-access vs. other uses):
1) Refer to [Card Printer Encoder Setup],
previous/above;
2) Go to Edit Card Encoding;
3) Select the 'track' (Track 2 is typical/common);
4) Select the desired item:
 For magstripe access cards: *Card Number*
(with asterisks);
 For other uses: Desired item
(e.g., 'Card Number');
5) [Add Field],
[OK].
Card-Badging Update for Language Support
(v4.62)
Previously, cards could only be printed by an operator
of the same language as the one who created the
badge layout. This has been fixed in Director v4.62 by
adding numeric references to the end of field names
as used by the card badging software.
Any existing card layouts will still print in the original
language (see notes).
If you want operators of different languages to be able
to print cards, you will need to:
 Upgrade to Director v4.62 (see notes);
 Update all card layouts (or create new ones) using
ONLY the new-style field names.
Notes: This feature is partially supported in Director
v4.61. If using custom user fields, you'll need v4.62.
To allow printing for any language, card layouts
containing custom user fields with an underscore "_" in
the field name must be updated using the new-style
field names.
160
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Things You Can Do
Cards that Have Been Lost
Attention: Cards can also be set as lost in the screen
for the specific user. That approach is typically
preferred since the user data will be transferred to here
automatically (incl. user name and ID), and a card
number cannot be added here while still assigned to a
user.
Related: YourAccount, Users;
 Users (Entrants / Panel Users)
Lost Cards
Cards that have been lost can be identified as
such to ensure they cannot be used in the
future, and to ensure that lost card numbers
are not accidentally re-issued.
 Add/Identify a Lost Card: Enter the card
number in the space provided (upper-right),
and click [Add].
 Find an Existing One: Look for the desired
card number in the list. Alternatively, you
can try [Add]ing the card number, and
watching to see if you get an error.
Tip: Lost cards are sorted numerically from lowest to
highest, although any leading zeros are dropped.
 Remove a Card from the List: Locate and
select the desired card number in the list,
and click [Card Found].
Tips:  The permission required to access this feature
is the same as for the parent folder (Users);  The
"User Access" report can be used to view or print a list
of lost cards.
Related: [Reports], User Access
 Reporting on User Access Authorities ...
Lost cards:
 Will be denied access if presented at a
reader;
 Cannot be added/identified here if presently
assigned to a user (including shared users);
 Cannot be assigned to users if already
[Add]ed here.
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Lost Cards
In the Tree: YourAccount, Users,
Lost Cards
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
Grid/Form View: This feature uses 'Form' view only.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
161
Users Lost Cards
Screen Reference
On This Form
- Lost Card Numbers: The area on the
left of the form shows a list of cards
that have been identified as being
'lost'.
Tips: User names and IDs will be included
in the list only for cards that were identified
as lost through the "Users" screen. To sort
the list by card number, user name, etc.,
click the desired column heading. If sorting
by card numbers, notice that any leading
zeros are dropped.
Related: YourAccount, Users
 Users (Entrants / Panel Users)
------------------------- Enter Lost Card Number: This area on the
upper-right is where you enter a card number to
be identified as 'lost'.
- [Add]: After entering a card number, click [Add]
to add it to the list of lost cards.
Note: Cards that are assigned to a user cannot be
added/identified here. (You must first assign a
different card number to the user.)
Alternative: You can also set the user as "Lost" from
within the user screen. That approach is typically
preferred since the user data will be transferred to
here automatically (incl. user name and ID).
Related: YourAccount, Users
 Users (Entrants / Panel Users)
- [Card Found]: This removes a presentlyselected card from the list. (Click within the 'row'
for the desired card, and select [Card Found].
Tip: This will make the card number available for use
in the system. (i.e., it can be assigned to a user if
desired).
162
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Fall-Back Users (Can Enter During Comms Failure)
Fall-Back Users for a Panel
At each panel, various card-access
modes are supported for use in the
event of a communications failure
(i.e. a door or elevator controller
module being unable to communicate
with the system panel). This feature
(door fallback mode), includes a
selection for letting up to 10 specific
users gain entry during the 'comms
failure'. These users are known as
"Fall-Back Users".
Configuration System Access Special 
Elevator (Lift) Cabs: This feature is also
supported for individual elevator (lift) cabs.
See: Elevators (Lifts) and Associated
Readers
- Door Fallback Mode: Cards to be granted
access if the door controller module is unable
to communicate with the main panel. (Set this
to "10 Fallback Users").
Ensure 'Fall-Back User' Mode is
Enabled
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools
Bar:
System
Access
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
System, Access (Under the specific panel
group and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Steps:
Ensure you are in "Forms" view (click the Form
/ Grid toolbar-button if needed).
Select the "Special" tab, and then ensure
Door Fallback mode is set as "10 fallback
users". When finished, click [Save].
"Fallback User" will now appear at the bottom of the
'Configuration' area of the tree (for the specific panel).
To set the "Fallback Mode" for an elevator (lift) cab,
refer to "Elevators (Lifts) and Associated Readers".
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
163
Viewing or Assigning
Fallback Users
Configuration Fallback Users
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select
[Account Folders] in the 'tree', and locate
and double-click the desired account.
MyTools Bar: Fallback Users
In the Tree: Configuration (click the
"+"), Fallback Users (Under the
specific panel group and panel--if listed in
the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Things You Can Do
 Assign a Fallback User: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a Fallback User: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete a Fallback User Assignment:
Right-click a blank area on the form (If grid
view: Right-click the item in the list), and select
"Delete". When prompted to confirm, select
Yes.
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Pick-List (bottom of the form)
- FallBack User: This is where you select a
fallback user to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the system (110), plus the user No./ID once the user has
been assigned.
On This Form
- User Number: The user No. / ID as assigned by
the system when the specific user was set up.
Tip: After entering the user ID, click elsewhere
on the form to see the details on that user.
Exception: For a "User Logon Mode" set to "Card #",
this field will be asking you to enter the Card Number
instead.
Related Topics: Under "Account-Wide Panel
Settings", look for
" Setup ", then "User Logon Mode".
Remaining Settings
- The rest of this form contains details on the
specific user (as 'read-in' from the Users
screen).
For details on setting up Users, refer to "Users
(Entrants / Panel Users)".
Screen Reference
164
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
System Maintenance Tasks
Password and Personal ID Number (PIN) Issues
Default Password
Default Service PIN
This software includes a default operator
password that should be changed right away
to ensure only authorized persons will be able
to access the system.
Default Operator Name & Password: Operator, 1234
Similarly, each account will have a default
service PIN that allows a service technician to
perform various tasks through a system
keypad. This should be changed for each
account, and updated to the specific panels.
Changing the default operator
password
Changing the Default Service PIN for an
Account
 Log in as the default operator;
 Open the File menu, and select Change
Password;
 Enter the new password, press Tab, and
enter the password again.
 When finished, press Enter once again (or
click Ok).
 Log in as the default operator (or anyone
with permission to change the service PIN);
 Select Account Information from the
MyTools bar, or click your site/account
button in the tree, and select Account
Information.
 Select the "Service PIN" tab.
Be sure to select a password that will be easy for you to
remember.
Multi-Account Systems: First select
[Account Folders] in the 'tree', and
double-click the desired account.
 Click [Change Service PIN] on the form.
 Enter the new service PIN, press Tab, and
enter the PIN again.
 When finished, press Enter once again (or
click Ok).
Tip: Select a service PIN that will be easy for you to
remember, and be sure to make any service
technicians for the specific accounts aware of this
change.
For details on updating the panel(s) with the
new
service
PIN,
refer
to
"Panel
Communications and Updates".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
165
The File Menu
Screen Reference
- Password: The desired/new
password for the operator.
- Re-enter Password: Enter the new
password again (this helps protect
against typing errors).
- [Ok]: Confirms (sets) the new
password.
- [Cancel]: Aborts the passwordchange (keeps the previous one).
File Change Password
Be sure to select a password that will be
easy for you to remember.
Tip: Be sure to stress the importance of
keeping passwords a secret to all operators.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- PIN: The desired/new service PIN.
- Re-enter PIN: Enter the new PIN
again (this helps protect against typing
errors).
- [Ok]: Confirms (sets) the new service
PIN.
- [Cancel]: Aborts the PIN-change
(keeps the previous one).
Account Information Service PIN 
Tip: Select a service PIN that will be easy
for you to remember, and make any service
technicians for the specific accounts aware
of this change. As well, be sure to remind all
users about the importance of keeping their
PIN a secret (especially service technicians).
Note: Local configuration through an LCD
keypad is supported in single-panel systems
set to "Feature-Set" 1 – 4 (up to 1000 users).
The service PIN, however, can be changed
only through the software (any changes
done locally will be ignored / overwritten).
For details on the "Feature-Set" parameter,
refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings",
and/or "System Capacities".
[Change Service PIN]
166
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Large Systems--Checking for Software vs. Panel Differences / Conflicts
transferring or synchronizing data, refer to "Panel
Communications and Updates".
Differences between the Database and
Individual Panels
Especially with large systems that may
communicate infrequently with the individual
sites, panels can become out of sync with the
software database as time goes on.
Checking for Database Conflicts
To check for database vs. panel conflicts, open
the Tools menu, and select Check Database
for Conflicts.
Then, refer to the itemdescriptions for this screen while viewing the
list.
If logged into Multiple Servers: This feature pertains to
one server at a time. (Go to [Servers] in the 'tree',
and double-click your desired server or an associated
account.)
Finding an Account (by ID), and
Correcting Conflicts
To locate an account by ID-number, select
[Account Folders] in the 'tree'.
If you have multiple Account Folders: Right-click a
blank area in the right-hand side of the screen, and
ensure "Show All Accounts Under this Node" is
selected. Tip: To sort by account IDs, click the column
heading.
[Account Folders] (in the 'tree')
Then, locate (and double-click) the account in
the list on the right-hand side of the screen.
To correct a conflict, select the specific topic
through the 'tree' or MyTools bar (such as
"User"), and follow the conflict resolution
screen(s) that appear.
For details on responding to an individual conflict
resolution screen, click the specific screen and then
press F1 (or check the index for a topic on correcting
conflicts).
Updating/Synchronizing Panels: For details on
setting up a communications session with a panel, and
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
167
Screen Reference
This screen shows a list of conflicts
between the software database, and
settings stored at the individual
sites/panels.
- Form name, Account ID: Listed
items pertain to the topic/form that
contains a conflict, and the ID number
of the specific account (NOT the
item/user ID).
Tools (Menu) Check Database for Conflicts
Panel vs. software conflicts should be
corrected before you proceed with any
additional database maintenance steps.
168
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Client/Server Systems:
Checking to See Who Else is Logged onto the Database
To check/repair the system database, all Tools (Menu) Who Is Logged In
'copies' of the VEREX Director software, and
panel communications software must be shut
down (i.e., on all VEREX Director PCs).
You can check to see if any other operators
are presently logged onto the central
database by opening the Tools menu, and
selecting Who is Logged In).
If logged into Multiple Servers: This feature also
works with a multi-server login (the list will show
operators logged into each server).
Tip: Details on shutting down the VEREX Director
software, and 'backing up', restoring, or repairing the
database are included in the topics that follow
Screen Reference
- This screen shows a list of all operators who are
presently logged onto the central VEREX
Director database (including yourself).
All 'copies' of the VEREX Director software and panel
communications software must be shut down to run
the database repair utility.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
169
Checking / Repairing the VEREX Director Database Tables
The Database Check/Repair Utility
In the event of power failure, or improper shut
down, etc., the VEREX Director database can
become damaged, resulting in unusual or
cryptic error messages.
The database table repair utility provided with
VEREX Director can check the database for
errors, and can usually correct any problems
that it finds. As well, this utility compresses the
database so it takes up less space.
Tip: If a database cannot be repaired, you can also
revert to a previous copy (i.e., restore a backup). This
is described in a following section.
In a client-server VEREX Director system, the
database/table repair utility is available only
through the server PC.
Director-Server PC: This is the PC that includes
"...Director-Server.exe", and typically contains the
database as well.
Before checking/repairing the VEREX Director
database, first:
1) Client-server systems: Ensure that no copies
of the VEREX Director (or communications)
software are logged into the database (Tools
menu, "Who is logged In"--see previous topic
for details).
2) Shut down Your VEREX Director (and
communications) software (details follow).
 Check for a telephone/communication
symbol on the right-hand side;
 If present, right-click this symbol, and select
Exit from the pop-up menu.
 Select Yes when asked to confirm.
Checking / Repairing the VEREX
Director Database
Ensure that all copies of the VEREX Director software
(and associated server and communications
components) are shut down.
At your VEREX Director workstation (server
PC if client-server) open the Windows Start
menu, and select Programs, VEREX Director
V4, and VEREX Director-Repair.
-------------------------
Under Repair Database , click [Repair
Database], and wait until the 'success'
confirmation screen appears. Then, click [OK]
to close the confirmation screen, and click the
[x] in the upper-right corner of the 'DirectorRepair' screen to close the database
check/repair utility.
Tip: For details on copying the database (backup), or
reverting to a previous copy (restoring), refer to the next
section / below.
Note: The communications software pertains to PCs
that connect with system panels--via cable, modem, or
IP-LAN/WAN (V3.3).
Shutting Down the VEREX Director
Software
At the VEREX Director server, and each client
PC (that uses this main database):
 Open the File menu;
 Select Exit;
 Select Yes when asked to confirm.
Shutting Down Communication
Modules
At each PC that connects to system panels or
modems:
 Open the task bar (move your mouse to the
bottom-right of the screen);
170
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
VEREX Director-Repair.exe Repair Database 
Screen Reference
Database Repair
- [Repair Database]: Click here to
check/repair (and compress) the
VEREX Director database file.
Client-Server Systems: In a client-server
VEREX Director system, this utility is
available only at the server PC, and all
associated copies of the VEREX Director
software must be shut down to repair or
restore the database. (To check if anyone
else is connected to the database, refer to
the preceding topic / above.)
Director-Server PC: This is the PC that
includes "...Director-Server.exe", and
typically contains the database as well.
- [x]: When finished, click this symbol in
the top-right corner of the form to exit
from the database check/repair utility.
- Backup/Restore  : For details on copying the
database (backup), or reverting to a previous
copy (restoring), refer to the next section /
below.
Note: 'Backups' can be done directly through the
VEREX Director software, or through the database
repair utility. Repairing the database, or restoring a
previous 'backup' can be done only through the
database repair utility. As well, database 'backups'
(only) can be done on-the-fly, without shutting down
any Director workstations.
------------------------- User Logins  : This feature is documented
separately.
Related Topics: Advanced Database Features
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
171
Backing up or Restoring the Database
Database 'Backups'
Preparation Steps
Backing up the database means making a
copy to protect against data loss or corruption
due to hard drive failure, power loss, etc.
Before making a 'backup' copy of the
database, you should typically:
1) Ensure the software database and panels
are in-sync. (for details, refer to "Panel
Communications and Updates", and/or a
preceding section on checking for panel
differences).
Tip: A database 'backup' is also compressed so it
takes up less space ( v3.30 VEREX Director).
Database back-ups must be done on a
regular basis to protect against hard drive
failure and/or data corruption. (Copies should
be stored on multiple drives/media, and
additional copies should be stored off-site, to
be available in the event of fire, etc.)
Client/Server Systems: Beginning with VEREX Director
v3.30, Database 'backups' can be performed from any
VEREX Director workstation 'on-line'--without being
concerned if client PCs are logged in.
Note: This is true for the database backup feature
only--not repairing the database, or restoring a backup
using the separate database repair utility.
After Upgrading the VEREX Director software: Each
new version of the VEREX Director software will
typically use an updated database format. As such, a
new 'backup' must also be done after the software has
been upgraded (which includes converting the
database for use with the new software).
172
2) Optional: Run the check/repair utility as
described in the preceding topic / above.
Tip: The backup feature will check the
database for errors, and prompt you if you
need to repair it first.
Backing up to a Shared Network Drive: If
you are unable to access a shared network
drive, additional set up may be required. For
details, refer to "Windows 2000/XP
Authorities" (under "PC Issues and Software
Installation").
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Management Database Maintenance Backup 
Making a Database 'Backup'
Using the Director Software
Go to the desired workstation, and
'login' to the VEREX Director
software.
To access the database 'backup'
feature:
 Select Database Maintenance from
your MyTools bar, or;
 Click [Management] in the tree, and select
Database Maintenance.
On the "Backup" tab, ensure the "Backup
Folder" and "Number of Backups to Keep"
values are set as desired.
For details, refer to the item-descriptions for this screen.
Client-server VEREX Director systems: See the notice
for the "Backup Folder" setting.
Then, click [Backup Database Now] on the
form.
Wait for a 'success' confirmation
message, and then click [OK].
Scheduled Backups: To set backups to occur
automatically at a scheduled time, see “Setting
Backups to Occur Automatically” (to follow/below).
Notice: Beginning with V3.3, the 'backup' creates two
files (.BAK and .XDF). Both of these files are needed to
restore the database.
- [Backup Folder]: The folder/location for
database copies to be placed (enter the desired
location, or click the button, and select the
desired one).
Shared/Network Folders: You cannot use ‘mapped’
drive letters. Be sure to enter shared/network folders
in the following format: "\\PcName\ShareName\
MoreFolders" (without the quotes).
Client-server Notice: In a client-server VEREX
Director system, the 'backup' actually occurs at the
VEREX Director server PC. As such, the location
entered here must be as if you were sitting at that
PC. Director Server PC: This is the PC that is
running "...Director-Server.exe".
Backing up to a Shared Network Drive: If you are
unable to access a shared network drive, additional
set up may be required. For details, refer to "Windows
2000/XP Authorities" (under "PC Issues and Software
Installation").
- Number of Backups to Keep: Once this many
'backups' have been created (over time), new
'backups' will start replacing the oldest ones in
the folder. Enter your desired number of files to
be retained (1 - 52).
- [Backup Database Now]: Click here to make a
'backup' copy of the VEREX Director database
file.
Screen Reference
Note: 'Backups' can also be done through the
database repair utility. Database restorals can be
done only through the database repair utility. (server
PC if client-server VEREX Director system).
Tip: For details on reverting to a previous copy of the
database (restoring), refer to a following topic / below.
------------------------- User Import  : This feature is documented
separately.
Related Topics: Advanced Database Features
Automatic Backup
This allows setting backups to occur automatically at a
scheduled time and frequency. This is documented
separately (to follow/below).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
173
VEREX Director-Repair.exe Backup/Restore  [
Backup Database ]
Making a Database 'Backup'
Using the Table Repair Utility
With software V3.30, you can
perform a backup using the Database
Repair utility on your VEREX Director
workstation (server PC if clientserver).
Attention: The "Backup Folder" and "# of
days to Keep" values must be set through
the Director software. To view or change
these settings, refer the preceding topic.
Scheduled Backups: To set backups to
occur automatically at a scheduled time, see
“Setting Backups to Occur Automatically”
(to follow/below).
Client/Server Systems: Beginning with
VEREX Director v3.30, Database 'backups'
can be performed 'on-line'--without being
concerned if client PCs are logged in.
To use this method:
 Open the Windows Start menu, and
select Programs, VEREX Director
V4, and VEREX Director-Repair.
 Under Backup/Restore , click
[Backup Database].
 Wait for a 'success' confirmation message,
and then click [OK].
 Click the [x] in the upper-right corner of the
'Director-Repair' screen to close the
database check/repair utility.
Notice: Beginning with V3.3, the 'backup' creates two
files (.BAK and .XDF). Both of these files are needed to
restore the database.
Screen Reference
Database Backup
- [Backup Database]: Click here to make a copy
of the database (i.e., perform a 'backup').
Attention: The "Backup Folder" and "# of days to
Keep" values must be set through the Director
software. To view or change these settings, refer the
preceding topic.
Tip: Database 'backups' can also be done directly
through the VEREX Director software. As well,
database 'backups' (only) can be done on-the-fly,
without shutting down any Director software.
- [x]: When finished, click this symbol in the topright corner of the form to exit from the database
check/repair utility.
- [Restore Database] and Repair Database :
Details on checking/repairing the database
appear previous/above. For details on reverting
to a previous copy of the database (restoring),
refer to the next topic / below.
Note: Repairing the database, or restoring a backup
copy can be done only through the database repair
utility. Client-server systems: In a client-server
VEREX Director system, this utility is available only at
the Director-server PC. Director-Server PC: This is
the PC that includes "...Director-Server.exe", and
typically contains the database as well.
------------------------- User Logins  : This feature is documented
174
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
separately.
Related Topics: Advanced Database Features
Beginning with Director V4.5, you can set
backups to occur automatically at a scheduled
Setting Backups to Occur Automatically (Scheduled Backups) v4.5
time. Be sure to first do at least one backup
manually to ensure there are no issues with
the target folder, etc.
Attention: The "Backup Folder" and "# of days to
Keep" values must be set through the Director
software. To view or change these settings, refer to
“Making a Database 'Backup' Using the Director
Software” (previous / above).
Steps:
1)
2)
3)
Go to the desired workstation, and 'login' to
the VEREX Director software.
Access the database 'backup' feature:
 Select Database Maintenance from your
MyTools bar, or;
 Click [Management] in the tree, and select
Database Maintenance.
Refer to the item-descriptions for this screen
while making your selections.
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
175
Automatic Backup
Management Database Maintenance Backup 
- Enable Automatic Backup: Select
this to allow setting backups to occur
automatically.
Note: This will not be available until you
select/enter a backup folder.
- Frequency (days): This sets how
often scheduled backups will occur
(i.e., once every X days—per your
selection).
- Start Time: This sets the starting time
for the scheduled backup.
- Next Start Date: This sets the date
for the first/next occurrence of the
scheduled backup.
With Director v4.5 - 4.6x, this feature appeared in the right-click menu
of the Director-Server (folder/keypad icon on the Windows taskbar).
Attention: The "Backup Folder" and "# of
days to Keep" values must be set through
the Director software. To view or change these
settings, refer to “Making a Database 'Backup'
Using the Director Software” (previous / above).
176
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Reverting to (Restoring) a Backup Copy
of the VEREX Director Database
2)
If the VEREX Director database becomes
corrupted (such as due to lightning or power
failure), or lost (such as due to hard drive
failure), you can revert to a copy that was
created previously using the 'backup' feature.
In a client-server VEREX Director system, the
database restore feature is available only
through the server PC.
3)
reliable state.
Reinstall MS Windows, and all of your
software as necessary--plus the VEREX
Director software (new version if applicable).
Perform a database restoral;
(Details previous/above).
4)
If you upgraded the Director software, you
must convert the restored database.
QuickRef: VEREX Director-DB Convert.exe.
Related Topic: See step #6 under "Upgrading
from an Earlier Version of Software".
A database backup can be restored only for the same
version of the Director software that created the
backup (although you can upgrade thereafter if
desired).
-------------------------
Before restoring
database, first:
the
VEREX
Director
1) Optional: Try running the check/repair utility on
your present database as described in a previous
topic / above (you may not need to revert to a
backup-copy).
2) Client-server systems: Ensure that no copies of
the VEREX Director (or communications) software
are logged into the database (Tools menu, "Who is
logged In");
3) Shut down Your VEREX Director (and
communications) software.
More: For details on these tasks, refer to the topic on
checking & repairing the database (previous / above).
Note: The communications software pertains to PCs
that connect with system panels--via cable, modem, or
IP-LAN/WAN (V3.3).
-------------------------
At your VEREX Director workstation (server
PC if client-server) open the Windows Start
menu, and select Programs, VEREX Director
V4, and VEREX Director-Repair.
Under Backup/Restore , click [File], and
locate and select your desired ".BAK" file
(double-click the file, or select it, and click [Open] ).
Then, click [Restore Database]. When the
'success' confirmation screen appears, click
[OK] to close the confirmation screen, and
click the [x] in the upper-right corner of the
'Director-Repair' screen to close the database
check/repair utility.
Restoring an Entire PC
In the event of a hard drive failure or other
'catastrophe', you'll need to:
1)
Have the computer repaired back into a
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
177
VEREX Director-Repair.exe
Backup/Restore  [ Restore Database ]
Screen Reference
- [File]: Click here to locate and select
your desired 'backup' file (i.e., a BAK
file that was created previously). Tip:
Double-click the file, or select the file
and click [Open].
- [Restore Database]: Click here to
revert to your selected database file.
(You'll be informed when the restoral is
finished.)
Reminder: In a client-server VEREX
Director system, this utility is available only
at the server PC, and all associated copies
of the VEREX Director software must be
shut down to repair or restore the database.
(To check if anyone else is connected
(logged in) to the database, refer to a
preceding topic / above.)
- [x]: When finished, click this symbol in
the top-right corner of the form to exit
from the database check/repair utility.
- [Backup Database] and Repair Database :
For details on these features, refer to the
preceding topics/above.
Note: 'Backups' can be done directly through the
VEREX Director software, or through the database
repair utility. Repairing the database, or restoring a
previous 'backup' can be done only through the
database repair utility.
------------------------- User Logins  : This feature is documented
separately.
Related Topics: Advanced Database Features
178
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Exporting or Importing Activity or Audit Logs (Archive)
What is Archiving?
Archiving Messages (Import or Export)
The archive feature allows moving message
logs out of the main database (to improve
performance), or re-importing them for use
with activity and audit reports.
To access the 'Archive' screen:
Read Me: Archiving or purging on a regular basis is
highly recommended since the system can become
slow and/or unstable if database files become very
large.
Note: Archiving pertains to activity messages and/or
panel communications and database-update logs (from
all defined accounts). V4.1x software also supports /
converts v4.0x archives as well.
 Select Database Maintenance from your
MyTools bar, or;
 Click [Management] in the tree, and select
Database Maintenance.
Then, select Archive , and refer to the itemdescriptions for this screen while making your
selections.
Tip: For message logs that will NOT be needed for
future reports, use the purge feature instead (to
follow).
Also See: "Reporting on System & Personnel
Activity", and "Reporting on Operator Audits or Panel
Communications Logs"
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
179
Management Database Maintenance Archive 
Screen Reference
- [Archive Folder]: This is the location where
the archived data will be stored.
Client-server Notice: In a client-server VEREX
Director system, the archiving actually occurs at
the VEREX Director server PC. As such, the
location entered here must be as if you were
sitting at that PC. Director-Server PC: This is the
PC that includes "...Director-Server.exe".
- [Clear Operator Log Archive]: This clears
any operator logs that had been previously
re-imported from an archive (does not affect
the external archive data);
Note: This will include the detailed user and
operator audits that are logged if that feature is
enabled under “[Management], Reporting”.
Details: Detailed Operator and User Audit Trail
(V4.6)
- [Clear Events Archive]: This clears any event
messages that had been previously re-imported
from an archive (does not affect the external
archive data);
- [Clear Communication Log Archive]: This
clears any communication logs that had been
previously re-imported from an archive (does not
affect the external archive data);
Archive Action
- Export: Select this to have messages/logs
moved from the database to the external archive
file (improves system performance);
- Import: Select this to have messages/logs
moved from the external archive file back into
the database (for inclusion in activity or audit
reports);
Data to Archive
- Operator Log: Messages pertaining to
changes made by operators;
Note: This will include the detailed user and operator
audits that are logged if that feature is enabled under
“[Management], Reporting”.
Details: Detailed Operator and User Audit Trail
(V4.6)
(If you are Exporting Data)
- Data Date Range: Date range of all
messages/logs in the database (not including
any imported archive data);
- Archive Data Before This Date: Select the
date for the oldest messages/logs that are to be
retained in the database. (All older ones will be
moved to the external archive file.)
Pop-up Calendar: Click the [] beside the date to
access a calendar.
- Archive File Name: The filename is set
automatically (to indicate the date-range of the
data being archived). You can change this if
desired.
Note: An archive-type reference will be added to the
end of the filename.
- [Export]: After re-confirming your selections,
click this to export the data.
(If you are Importing Data)
- [Archive File Name]: Select this to browse for
the desired archive file. (Locate/select the file,
and click [OK].)
- [Import]: After re-confirming your selections,
click this to re-import all messages/logs from the
chosen file.
- Events: Messages pertaining to activity that
occurred in the facility (access granted/denied,
sensor tripped, etc.);
- Communication Log: Logs pertaining to panel
communications/update sessions.
180
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Removing old Activity or Audit Logs (Purge)
What is Purging?
"Purging" refers to deleting old
records from the message
logs, to free up additional harddrive space, and allow reports
to run faster.
Management Database Maintenance Purge 
Read Me: Archiving or purging on a
regular basis is highly recommended
since the system can become slow
and/or unstable if database files
become very large.
Purging can be done manually, and can also
be set to occur automatically.
Note: Purging pertains to activity messages and/or
panel communications and database-update logs (from
all defined accounts).
Tip: To have the data available for running reports in
the future, use the archive feature instead (previous /
above).
Purging (Deleting) Messages, or Setting
up Automatic Purging
After AutoPurge
Alarm /
event
messages
1,000,000
20,000,000
Minus 5%
Communica
tions logs
50,000
50,000
Minus 10%
Operator
logs
240,000
240,000
Minus 10%
- Operator Log: Messages pertaining to
changes made by operators;
 Click [Management] in the tree, and select
Database Maintenance.
Then, select Purge , and refer to the itemdescriptions for this screen while making your
selections.
Screen Reference
Enable Automatic Purging
- Select the type of messages to be deleted.
Automatic purging automatically deletes older
activity/audit messages (in stages). This occurs when
the event log reaches its capacity.
Message Log Capacity (V4.7x): The following
number of messages are supported:
Report
SQL Server
Inst.
Option
Manual purging allows you to manually delete
messages older than a specified date. Select the type
of messages to delete.
 Select Database Maintenance from your
MyTools bar, or;
Welcome
Typical
(SQL
Server
Express)
Manual Purging / Data to Purge
To access the 'Purge' selections:
21-0381E v4.9.1
Message
Type
Control
Note: This will include the detailed user and operator
audits that are logged if that feature is enabled under
“[Management], Reporting”.
Details: Detailed Operator and User Audit Trail
(V4.6)
- Events: Messages pertaining to activity that
occurred in the facility (access granted/denied,
sensor tripped, etc.);
- Communication Log: Logs pertaining to panel
communications/update sessions.
- [Purge Data Before This Date]: Click the []
beside the date to access a pop-up calendar.
Select the date for the oldest messages/logs
that are to be retained in the database.
(All older ones will be permanently deleted.).
After re-confirming your selections, click [Purge
Data Before This Date] to delete the older
messages/logs.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
181
Operating System Maintenance
The Microsoft Windows operating system has been in development and general use for many
years. Microsoft is finding existing 'issues', and releasing "Service Packs" or other types of updates
on an on-going basis to ensure Windows users have a more-or-less trouble-free experience.
It is important to keep your Windows operating system up-to-date in this regard.
Windows Version
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Recommended Updates
Check for the
latest service pack
Reference
http://support.microsoft.
com
Windows 2003 Server
Other versions of
MS Windows
n/a (not supported)
Director Server PC: For optimal performance, we recommend running the Director (server) software on a
dedicated PC.
Component
Microsoft SQL Server
Express
Microsoft SQL Server 2000
or 2005
Recommended Updates
Check for the
latest service pack
Reference
http://support.microsoft
.com
Note: Microsoft SQL Server Express pertains to a typical installation.
SQL Server 2000 or 2005 pertains to a Director installation being managed under SQL server.
182
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
183
System
Configuration
Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use
the Configuration Wizard to set up a new system.
For more information, refer to "New Installation? Try
the Wizard!".
184
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Working with Accounts and Folders (Multi-Account Systems)
Account Folders, and account-selection issues pertain only for systems with multi-account licensing (or operators with
the authority to edit account folders). Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use the Configuration Wizard to
set up a new system. For more information, refer to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!".
Visual Quick-Start
You can view accounts folder-by-folder, or sort a full listing by name, address, etc.
Adjusting the Width of a Column: Drag the boundary between two column headings.
Sorting on Multiple Items: See "Advanced Sorting" (to follow/below).
If Multi-Server Login: See "After a Multi-Server Login" (to follow/below).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------For systems that support multiple accounts that
Accounts and Account Folders
presently have only one defined, the "Edit Accounts /
An account represents a site, or collection of
Account Folders" authority determines whether or not
[Account Folders] will appear in the tree. For details,
sites that will share a common set of users,
refer to "Operator Permissions".
authorities, schedules, etc. In general, this will
Panels per Account: Each account can include a total
typically be a single company or customer.
of up to 60 system panels.
Account folders, on the other hand, provide
a method for organizing accounts.
Setting Accounts to Appear in the Tree
Multi-Server Login: To allow working with (or in)
account folders, ensure the desired server is selected
under [Server] in the 'tree'. (Double-click a server to
access its account folders.)
Your desired account must be 'opened' in
the tree (double-click) to provide access to
account-specific tasks.
Multi-Server Alternative: For a multi-server login,
servers and accounts will (also) appear under [server]
in the 'tree'.
Tip: Account folders are referenced by "operator
permissions"--allowing different types of permissions
to be assigned to groups of accounts. Be sure keep
this in mind when deciding where to put each
account.
Single Account Systems/Licensing: With singleaccount licensing, the account/folders 'tree' will NOT
appear.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Under [Account Folders], account folders
appear in the 'tree' (left side of your screen),
while accounts are listed in the centre portion
of the screen, and can optionally be set to
appear in the tree as well.
To set accounts to appear in the 'tree', click
[Account Folders] in the 'tree'. Then, rightclick within the 'Account Folder' portion of
the tree, and ensure that Show Accounts in
Tree is selected.
Tip: This selection is also available in the View
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
185
menu when you are 'in' the Account Folders portion
of the tree.
Opening an Account, or Switching to a
Different Account (for Monitoring, Status
& Control, User Admin., etc.)
Click [Account Folders] in the 'tree'. Then,
browse through any account folders, and
double-click the desired account (either in the
tree, or the centre portion of the screen).
Multi-Server Alternative: For a multi-server login, you
can also view and select accounts under [server] in
the 'tree'.
Your selected account will remain 'open' (e.g., for the
event monitoring window) until you select [Account
Folders] or [Management] in the 'tree'.
Single-account license: In this case, account folders
are not shown in the 'tree'. (To access your account,
simply click your site/account button in the tree.)
Renaming an Account Folder
Let's suppose you'd like to rename the default
account folder as "All Accounts":
Click
[Account Folders] in the 'tree', right-click the
desired folder, and select Rename. Then,
type the new name as desired, and press
Enter.
Renaming an Account
Accounts can be renamed either in the 'tree' (if
set to display accounts), or in the "Account
Information" screen for the account.
Multi-Server Login: You cannot rename an account
when under [Server] in the 'tree'. (You must first
double-click a server or account to exit from that
screen.)
Renaming an account using the tree: Click
[Account Folders] in the 'tree'. Then, locate
and right-click the specific account in the tree,
and select Rename. Now, type the new name
as desired, and press Enter.
Renaming an account through the Account
Information screen : Click [Account Folders]
in the 'tree'. Then, locate and double-click the
specific account using the 'tree' and/or main
window.
Exception (Single-account licensing):
Click [Your Account] in the tree.)
When the Account Information screen
appears, change the name as desired.
Tip: Your settings will be saved automatically when
186
you select a different screen or topic.
Adding an Account Folder
Let's suppose you want to add an account
folder called "Remote Sites" under "All
Accounts".
Click [Account Folders] in the 'tree', rightclick the desired location for the new folder,
and select Add Account Folder. Then, type
the desired name, and press Enter.
Adding a New Account
Let's suppose you want to add a new
account "Site ABC" in a folder called
"Remote Sites".
Click [Account Folders] in the 'tree', rightclick the desired folder for the new account,
and select Add Account. Then, respond to
the small wizard screens that appear—
selecting a few basic operating parameters
and clicking [Next] or [Finish] as needed.
Note: When a new account is set up in this way, some
default items/values are set up automatically. If you
need to change the panel operating mode (e.g. North
America vs. UK-ACPO), and wish to obtain suitable
default values, it is best to set up a new account and
delete the old one.
Tip: There are numerous items that can be set up
for each account. For a suggested procedure, refer
to "Setting up a New System (Commissioning)".
Moving an Account (or Folder) Into a
Different Location
Accounts and account folders can be moved
as desired using the familiar drag-and-drop
approach: Click [Account Folders] in the
'tree'. Then, locate the desired account or
folder, and use your mouse to drag the item
into the desired location.
Note: The target folder may not be highlighted. Simply
'drop' the item when the mouse cursor is on top of the
desired folder.
If you need to Delete an Account (or
Account Folder)
Before deleting an account, first check to
ensure that it is not assigned to any operators:
Select [Management] in the tree, open the
Operator branch, and select Operator. Then,
use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to switch to
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
'grid' view, and scroll through the operator list,
checking the "Account" and "Monitor Account"
columns for the specific one. Be sure to reset
any as needed as you go along (click [...] ).
Note: To allow deleting an account folder, you must
ensure that it is not assigned within any operatorpermissions screens. See: Operator Permissions
-------------------------
Then, click [Account Folders] in the 'tree',
and locate your desired account (or folder).
Now, right-click the account or folder and
select Delete. When asked to confirm, read
the warning message. Choose Yes only if you
are certain you are not deleting an active
account.
Screen Reference
Note: When an account is added in this way, some
default items/values are set up automatically. If you
need to change the panel operating mode (e.g. North
America vs. UK-ACPO), and wish to obtain suitable
default values, it is best to set up a new account and
delete the old one.
- Show Accounts in Tree: Shows (  ) or hides
accounts in the tree window.
- Expand All Branches: Shows all account
folders in the tree.
- Collapse All Branches: Hides / closes all
account folders in the tree (except for the
highest-level / root folder).
After Right-Clicking within the Account
List (Middle of your Screen)
[Account Folders] (in the 'tree')
After Right-Clicking within the 'Account
Folder' Portion of the Tree (applicable topics)
- Open: Opens a selected account or folder (i.e.,
the item that you right-clicked).
- Sort: Allows sorting the account list on more
than one item (e.g., by city, then account name,
etc.) See "Advanced Sorting" (to follow/below).
- Show all Accounts under this Node: Shows
all accounts within a selected folder—including
all sub-folders, as if all of these accounts were in
the 'root' of the selected folder.
Note: The desired folder must be select first.
After a Multi-Server Login
You can log into up to 6 server PCs at a time.
This allows listing and selecting accounts
across multiple servers without having to log
out in-between. All servers you are presently
logged into appear under [Server] in the 'tree'.
Related Topic(s): Startup and Logging In
After a multi-server login, you will be directed
to a [Server] node in the 'tree' (or the master
account list if the tree is not displayed). You
can then:
- Add Account Folder: Select this to add a new
folder for organizing your accounts.
- Add Account: Select this to add a new
account.
Tip: Beginning with Director V4.4, a small wizard will
appear--asking you to indicate some basic operating
parameters for the new account.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
 Select the "Servers" node in the 'tree' to list
all accounts across multiple servers, or;
 Select a server to see the accounts for that
server, or;
 Double-click a server to go into the 'Account
Folders' for that server.
Working with the Account List: See the "Visual QuickStart" (previous/above), or look for "Advanced Sorting"
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
187
(to follow/below).
[Server] (if multi-server login)
Screen Reference
Account Folders: Account folders are not shown in this
screen. (Double-click a server to access its account
folders.)
Operator Permissions: Each operator will be able to
view only the accounts associated with their assigned
folders. Related Topic(s): Operator Permissions
Show all Accounts under This Node: This selection
applies only to account folders (it is not needed in the
[Server] portion of the 'tree').
Shared Users: Shared users, etc. pertain to individual
servers (i.e., items cannot be shared across servers).
Related Topic(s): Users and Holidays Shared Across
Multiple Accounts
188
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Right-Click the Account List Sort
Advanced Sorting
In addition to sorting on a single column
heading, the account list can be sorted on
multiple items as desired (e.g., by City, then
account name, etc.).
Steps:
1)
2)
3)
Go to the desired 'node' under [Account
Folders] in the 'tree' (or [Server] if logged
into multiple servers).
Right-click within the account list, and select
"Sort" from the pop-up menu.
Refer to the item-descriptions for this screen
while making your selections.
To Sort Through All Accounts: Before selecting Sort,
select the highest-level (parent) account folder in the
tree. Then, right-click the account list, and select
"Show All Accounts under This Node".
Multi-Server Exception: After a multi-server login, use
the account list under "Server" in the 'tree'. (Select
"Servers" in the 'tree', and then sort the list as desired.)
Related Topic(s): Startup and Logging In
Screen Reference
- [>]: Adds selected item to the sort-order;
- [>>]: Adds all items to the sort-order;
- [<]: Removes selected item from the sort-order;
- [<<]: Clears the "Sort Order" list (for unsorted
accounts, or to set up a new sort order).
------------------------- Ascending: A - Z starting at the top of the
screen (+).
- Descending: Z - A starting at the top of the
screen (-).
Notes:
 Account sorting results are not saved. To sort the
account list again, simply click a column heading, or
make your selections here again;
 When you sort by clicking on a column heading in
the account list, this is also reflected in the Sort
screen (Sort Order);
 Sorting is reflected in the column headings of the
account list: (+) = A-Z, (-) = Z-A, and numbers
indicate the sequence of items within the sort-order
(e.g., sorted by City 1, then account name 2).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
189
Users and Holidays Shared Across Multiple Accounts
Note: Suite-security keypads and "Communities"
(Shared Users) are not supported at the same time.
Introduction
Beginning with Director V4.2, you can set up
users and/or holidays to apply to multiple
accounts.
Once set up, changes can be made to a
shared user or holiday within a specific
account, and the changes will be copied to
other applicable accounts automatically.
Tip: This is also true for changes made to a shared
holiday (or a shared user changing their PIN) at an LCD
keypad associated with any of the applicable accounts.
Multi-Server Login: Shared users, etc. pertain to
individual servers (i.e., you can view accounts across
multiple servers, but items cannot be shared across
servers). Related Topic(s): Working with Accounts and
Folders
Technical Notes
 Beginning with Director V4.7, this feature is
supported with ALL panel feature-set values
higher than 1;
 With Director V4.20 – 4.6x, this feature is
limited to panel feature-set 2, 3, or 4 (1 panel
per account, with up to 1000 users each.);
 With panel firmware V4.2, a user can change
their own PIN at an LCD keypad, but all other
"shared" items and settings can only be edited
through the Director software;
With panel firmware earlier than V4.2:
 All edits made to shared users through an LCD
keypad (including a shared user changing their
own PIN) will be ignored/reset by the software.
 Since authority ID#s are reserved in blocks of
five, and these must be defined within each
account: If one of these is not being used and
is deleted through an LCD keypad, the
software will maintain integrity by sending a "no
areas, no times" version of the authority back
to the panel.
accounts, while maintaining data integrity for
authorities and other site-specific settings.
Required Permissions
As with all features, applicable permissions are
required to use this feature (for each operator,
and any client PCs).
Notes: Editing a shared user within an account
requires 'edit' permission for 'users' and 'shared
users'. (The same approach applies to holiday
permissions.)
Editing shared items elsewhere requires 'edit'
permission for the applicable type of shared item only.
(Pertains to: "[Management] Community Groups"
and/or
"Account Folders Shared Groups Shared Item".)
Assigning groups to accounts requires permission to
access the specific account folder(s).
Related Topics:
"Operator Permissions"
"Client/Server Access and Permissions"
Overview of Steps (Details follow)
 (This assumes your accounts have already
been set up for areas, devices, and
schedules.)
Related Topics:
+ "New Installation? Try the Wizard !", or
+ "Setting Up a New System (Commissioning)"
 Phase 1: Account-Specific Data
(Account Info., Custom User fields, Authorities);
 Phase 2: Set Up Community Groups
 Phase 3: Set up Shared Users and Holidays
 Phase 4: Assign Shared Items to Accounts
If You wish to Delete a Shared Item
(Phase 2)
If you delete a shared user or holiday (under
Shared Groups in the tree, or within a specific
account), the deletion will affect all accounts
associated with the shared item.
Community Groups, however, cannot be
deleted if presently assigned anywhere.
Community Groups (V4.7)
(To remove an account assignment: See step 4A.)
--was "Shared Groups"
Then, right-click within the 'row' for the specific
item, and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
When asked to confirm, select Yes.
-------------------------
Community Groups allow setting up groups of
users and/or holidays to apply to multiple
190
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Phase 1: Account-Specific Data
Account Folders Account Name
Users Custom Fields
1A: Misc. Account Settings
Feature Set:
"Shared Users" are supported only for specific
panel "Feature Set" values:
 Beginning with V4.7: Feature set 2 or
higher.
 Director V4.2 - 4.6x: Feature-set 2, 3, or 4.
To enable the required screens, go into the
"Account Information" screen for each
account, and change the "Feature Set" value if
needed (also see the "Technical Notes").
Related Setting: AccountName Account Information
Related Setting: AccountName Account Information
1B: Set up any Custom User Fields for Shared Users
Standard See: "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
Setup See: "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
"PIN Mode" and "User Logon Mode":
Shared users can only apply to accounts set
for the same "PIN Mode" and "User Logon
Mode". Ensure these are set appropriately for
each account that is to support shared users.
"Detect Duplicate Cards" (≥V4.80):
For more information on this option, please
see “Additional Information section > Detect
Duplicate Cards”.
user-field' data will be ignored.
Shared users can have up to 20 custom
information categories (user fields) as usual
(such as: position, department, vehicle
plate, etc.). However, for shared users,
these fields can be "single-line edit" only
(i.e., values are typed in instead of being
selected from a list).
Screen Reference
Steps / Detail
Custom-user-fields for shared users are
initially configured separately for each account.
To implement shared 'custom-user-fields',
these fields must be defined with the same
usage and order for all applicable accounts,
and they must be set as 'single-line edit' fields.
How this is implemented:
 If the accounts are defined with 'single-line
edit' user fields, any user-field values for the
shared users will apply to the assigned
accounts.
Related Topic: "Custom Information Categories for
Users...".
Note: In this case, user-field values will also be
updated for all applicable accounts if changed for a
shared user in any one of the accounts.
 For any accounts with some other type of
custom user fields (e.g., multi-line edit, or
drop lists), the custom user-field data is
retained and managed separately within
each account, and any shared 'custom21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
191
1C: Ensure Authorities Have
Been Set up for Each Account
Account Folders Account Name Authorities
In Phase 2, groups of authority ID#s
will be reserved for use with shared
users (5 at a time).
Due to
differences in areas, and security
requirements,
the
authorities
themselves must be set up at each
account as usual (at the same
authority ID# for each account). Be
sure to keep track of the authority ID#
range to ensure the correct ones are
reserved in Phase 2.
Notice: Authorities must be defined for ALL
reserved ID#s (e.g., 1-5, 6-10, etc.).
Viewing or Entering These
Settings
For each account:
 Select [Account Folders] in the 'tree', and
double-click the desired account.
 Select Authorities from the MyTools bar, or
in the 'tree'.
Then, refer to the "Authorities" administration
topic for details on the provided selections.
Screen Reference
192
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
[Management] Community Groups Communities

Phase 2: Community
Groups
2A: Set Up Communities
With shared users, the 'PIN Mode'
and 'User Logon Mode' for each
account is set under "[Management]
Community Groups", and will not be
editable under "Account Information". (This is
required since the length of each user's PIN
and card number is fixed.)
These are defined as "Communities" which will
be assigned in step 2B.
Note: If communities are assigned to accounts without
setting up shared users, this will block the same card
numbers from being used across all accounts for each
community (i.e., each card number can only apply to
one account for each specific community).
How to Get Here (Locator)
Select Community Groups from the MyTools
bar, or select [Management] in the tree, and
Community Groups, followed by the
Communities tab.
Things You Can Do
 To add a new community to the list, click the
[+] near the bottom of the screen (or rightclick the screen, and select "Add New" from
the pop-up menu.
 To delete an unused community, right-click it
in the list, and select "Delete".
Note: You cannot delete a community from the list if
it is presently being used (i.e., assigned to usergroups).
 To enter or change settings for a community,
refer to the item-descriptions for this screen.
Note: 'Grid' view does not apply to this feature.
Screen Reference
- Community Name: Click here and type a
suitable name (such as "4dPIN-5dCard
Accounts").
- PIN Mode: Click the small button here, and
select the PIN length (4 or 5 digits);
- User Logon Mode: Click the small button
here, and select the logon mode (ID-only, or
number of digits in the card numbers);
Note: PIN Mode and User Logon Mode pertain to
logging in at LCD keypads, or gaining entry at a
reader that is set for "ID+PIN mode.
- Detect Duplicate Cards (≥V4.80) – click the
small button here and select duplicate cards
detection mode:
 Across All Accounts In This
Community – if selected, Accounts that
have that same “Community” enabled
will NOT allow duplicate card numbers
to be added to non-shared Users – and
does check for duplicate cards in other
Accounts with the same Community
selected. (This option is more
restrictive.)
 Within Each Account Only – if
selected, Accounts that have that same
“Community” enabled will allow
duplicate card numbers to be added to
non-shared Users – and doesn’t check
for duplicate cards in other Accounts
with the same Community selected.
(This option is less restrictive.)
Note: No two Users within the same
Account (regardless of the settings above)
can have duplicate card numbers assigned.
2B: Reserve User ID#s
(Shared User-Groups)
"Shared User Groups" allow setting up shared
users in blocks based on common authorities,
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
193
plus the 'PIN Mode' and 'User Logon [Management] Community Groups Users 
Mode' for the accounts to be
associated with these users. This
includes reserving ranges of user
ID#s for groups of shared users.
Tip: This is done in blocks of ten (whether
they all will be defined or not).
Note: For multiple groups of shared users to
apply to the same account, ensure the ID
ranges do not overlap.
How to Get Here (Locator)
Select Community Groups from the MyTools
bar, or select [Management] in the tree, and
Community Groups, followed by the Users
tab. Then, select your desired community near
the top of the screen.
Tip: This screen shows the "Shared User Groups" for
one community at a time. The selected "Community"
will be assigned by default, but you can change this if
desired.
Things You Can Do
 To add a new "Shared User Group" to the
list, click the [+] near the bottom of the
screen (or right-click the screen, and select
"Add New" from the pop-up menu.
 To delete an unused "Shared User Group",
right-click it in the list, and select "Delete".
Note: You cannot delete a "Shared User Group"
from the list if it is presently being used (i.e.,
assigned to any accounts).
 To enter or change settings for a "Shared
User Group", refer to the item-descriptions
for this screen.
Note: 'Grid' view does not apply to this feature.
Screen Reference
Note: Since user 'authorities' are tied to 'areas' (and
since security requirements may differ between sites),
the authorities themselves cannot be shared across
multiple accounts. Instead, they are set up as usual
for each account as discussed in step 1C.
- Community Name: When you right-click and
select "Add New", the new "Shared User
Group" is assigned to the present
"Community" by default. If it is not presently
being used, you can change its community
here.
Notice: If you change this value, the "Shared User
Group" will no longer appear here--unless you select
its new "Community" at the top of the screen.
- Assigned Accounts: For "Shared User
Groups" that have been assigned to
account(s), a small button will appear here to
allow viewing the associated accounts.
Authority Name
- Community Name: This allows selecting one
"Community" for which "Shared User Groups"
can be viewed, edited, or added.
- Group Name: Each row represents one
"Shared User Group". Select the existing
name, and type to change it to something
more suitable (e.g., "North Users", "Divisional
Managers", etc.).
- Start and End: Use the arrows to select the
start and end value for your desired range of
shared user ID#s (blocks of 10).
- Authority Range: This sets a range of
194
authority ID#s to be reserved for associated
shared users. This is done in blocks of five
(whether they all will be used or not). Click
the small button here, and then use the
arrows in the small screen to select the start
and end value for your desired range of
authority ID#s (e.g., 1-5, 11-20, etc.). When
finished, click [OK].
- Authority: This shows each reserved
authority ID number for the selected "Shared
User Group" row (select the desired row
above first).
Note: When you first add a "Shared User Group", its
authority information will not be available here until
you either click the "Save" button, or go to another
screen, and then return to this one.
- Name: This is a reference description that will
appear when assigning authorities to groups
of shared users.
It is useful to set these to indicate the reserved ID#
(such as: "1st ID--CEO & Directors", "2nd ID-Division Managers", etc.).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
[Management] Community Groups Holidays
2C: Reserve Holiday ID#s
(Shared Holiday Groups)
Holidays (and time-change dates)
can be shared across multiple
accounts if desired. This includes
reserving ranges of holiday ID#s for
use with each group of shared
holidays. This is done in blocks of
three or more.
Note: Holiday #1 & #2 are reserved for the dates to
switch between Daylight Savings and Standard Time.
How to Get Here (Locator)
Select Community Groups from the MyTools
bar, or select [Management] in the tree, and
Community Groups, followed by the
Holidays tab.
Things You Can Do
 To add a new "Shared Holiday Group" to the
list, click the [+] near the bottom of the
screen (or right-click the screen, and select
"Add New" from the pop-up menu.
 To delete an unused "Shared Holiday
Group", right-click it in the list, and select
"Delete".
Note: You cannot delete a "Shared Holiday Group"
from the list if it is presently being used (i.e.,
assigned to any accounts).
 To enter or change settings for a "Shared
Holiday Group", refer to the item-descriptions
for this screen.
Note: 'Grid' view does not apply to this feature.
Screen Reference
- Group Name: Each row represents one
"Shared Holiday Group". Click here and type
a suitable name (such as "DST and xmas",
"CommonHols2", "4th to 6th Hol.", etc.).
- Start and End: Use the arrows to select the
start and end value for your desire~d range of
holiday ID#s (blocks of 3 or more).
Notes: For multiple groups of shared holidays to
apply to the same account, ensure the ID ranges do
not overlap.
When setting up each block of shared holidays, only
the reserved ID#s will be available.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
195
Phase 3: Shared Users and Holidays
3A: Setting up Shared Users
Account Folders Shared Groups Shared Users
Once
the
related
"Community
Groups"
have
been
set
up
(previous/above), you can set up
shared users the same as for
individual accounts, with the following
exceptions:
 Shared users are initially defined
under "[ Account Folders ] Shared
Groups";
(NOT under "Users" for a specific
account.)
 Shared users are grouped in the tree
by their "Shared User Group" (defined
previously);
(e.g., North Users, Division Managers,
etc.)
 Shared users will occupy the same
user ID# within each account (from
the ID# range within each 'Shared
User Group').
 Each group of shared users is limited to the
reserved authority ID# range as was
assigned to each specific group.
(e.g., 1st - 5th authorities, 6th - 10th, etc.)
Notes: After initial set up, changes made to a shared
user under any individual account will be automatically
copied to the other applicable accounts (and the
"Shared Users" screen).
If desired, you can even assign groups to accounts 1st
(step 4A), and then define the users either here, or at
the applicable user ID# in any of the applicable
accounts.
account.
Note: The shared user screen does not include settings
for suite-security keypads. In the unlikely event of a
shared user being associated with one, the keypad
settings must be made through the Users screen for
any applicable account(s).
Viewing or Entering These Settings
Select Shared Users from the MyTools bar, or
select [Account Folders] in the tree, and then
'open' Shared Groups, and Shared Users
(click the "+" beside each topic).
Screen Reference
The Shared User screen is virtually identical
to the Users screen. Please refer to the
"Users" administration topic for details on the
provided selections.
Tip: While referring to the 'Users' topic, you can
generally ignore screen location references, as they
pertain only when 'in' the Users screen for a specific
196
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
3B: Setting up Shared Holidays
(and/or Time-Change Dates)
Account Folders Shared Groups Shared Holiday
Once
the
related
"Community
Groups"
have
been
set
up
(previous/above), you can set up
shared holidays the same as for
individual accounts, with the following
exceptions:
 Shared holidays are initially defined
under "[ Account Folders ] Shared
Groups";
The Shared Holiday screen is identical to the
Holiday/Daylight Savings screen.
Please refer to the "Holiday" administration
topic for details on the provided selections.
(NOT under "Holidays" for a specific account.)
 Shared holidays are grouped in the tree by
their "Shared Holiday Group" (defined
previously);
Tip: While referring to the 'Holiday' topic, you can
generally ignore screen location references, as they
pertain only when 'in' the Users screen for a specific
account.
(DST and xmas; CommonHols2, etc.)
 Shared holidays pertain to the same holiday
ID# within each account (from the ID# range
within each 'Shared Holiday Group').
 Each group of shared holidays is limited to
the reserved holiday ID# range as was
assigned to each specific group.
(e.g., 1st - 3rd Holiday, 4th - 6th, etc.)
Notes: After initial set up, changes made to a shared
holiday under any individual account will be
automatically copied to other applicable accounts (and
the "Shared Holidays" screen).
If desired, you can even assign groups to accounts 1st
(step 4B), and then define the holidays either here, or at
the applicable holiday ID# in any of the applicable
accounts.
Viewing or Entering These Settings
Select Shared Holidays from the MyTools
bar, or select [Account Folders] in the tree,
and then 'open' Shared Groups, and Shared
Holidays (click the "+" beside each topic).
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
197
Phase 4: Assign Shared Items to Accounts
4A: Assign Groups of Shared
Users to Accounts (Shared User
Management)
Account Folders AccountName
Account Information, Shared Users 
Once
the
related
"Community
Groups"
have
been
set
up
(previous/above), groups of shared
users can be assigned to applicable
accounts.
Notes: Only 'Shared User Groups' with nonoverlapping ID# ranges can be selected for
any specific account.
As groups are assigned to accounts, the
shared user(s) are copied to the
same/applicable user ID# in each account
(from the ID# within each shared group).
If communities are assigned to accounts without setting
up shared users, this will block the same card numbers
from being used across all accounts for each
community (i.e., for each specific community, each card
number can only be used in one account).
Viewing or Entering These Settings
For each specific account:
 Select [Account Folders] in the 'tree', and
double-click the desired account.
 Select Account Information from the
MyTools bar, or in the tree. Then, select the
Shared Users tab.
If these do not match, you must:
+ Select a different 'Community' (here), or;
+ Set up a 'Community' with the required values (1A,
2A, 2B), or;
+ Change these values for the specific account
Ref: Account Information Standard .
- Group: Shows the name of the group of
shared users ("North Users", "Divisional
Managers", etc.).
- User Range: Shows the range of user ID#s
associated with this group of shared users;
- Authority Range: Shows the range of authority
ID#s associated with this group of shared users;
Note: This tab will appear only if "Community Groups"
have been set up.
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing or entering your desired
settings.
Note: 'Grid' view does not apply to this feature.
Screen Reference
- Community Name: This allows selecting a
"Community" (previously-defined)--which will,
in turn, display its set of 'Shared User Groups'
from which you can select the one(s) to apply
to your present account.
- Select: This allows assigning a group of users
to the specific account. (Click this box for
each group to be assigned to the present
account.)
Note: 'Shared User Groups' can only be assigned to
an account that has a user 'PIN Mode' and 'User logon
mode' that match that for the specific 'Community'.
Ref: Steps 1A, 2A, and 2B).
198
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Account Folders AccountName Account
Information Shared Holidays 
4B: Assign Groups of Shared
Holidays to Accounts (Shared
Holiday Management)
Once the related "Shared Holiday
Groups" and "Shared Holidays" have
been set up (previous/above), groups
of shared holidays can be assigned to
applicable accounts.
Notes: Only 'Shared Holiday Groups' with
non-overlapping ID# ranges can be selected
for any specific account. As groups are
assigned to accounts, the shared holiday(s)
are copied to the same/applicable holiday
ID# in each account (from the ID# within
each shared group).
- Select: This allows assigning a group of
holidays to the specific account. (Click this
box for each group to be assigned to the
present account.)
Viewing or Entering These Settings
For each specific account:
Tip: Holiday 1 and 2 pertain to the dates for changing
between Standard Time and Daylight-Savings time.
As such, a group of shared holidays may include
these as well.
 Select [Account Folders] in the 'tree', and
double-click the desired account.
 Select Account Information from the
MyTools bar, or in the tree. Then, select the
Shared Holidays tab.
Note: This tab will appear only if "Shared Holiday
Groups" have been set up (2C).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing or entering your desired
settings.
Note: 'Grid' view does not apply to this feature.
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
- Group: Shows the name of the group of
shared holidays ("DST and xmas",
"CommonHols2", etc.).
- Holiday Range: Shows the range of holiday
ID#s associated with this group of shared
users;
Note: ID#1 pertains to changing to daylight-savings
time, and ID#2 is for changing back to Standard Time.
(Rem: 'Spring' ahead for Daylight-Savings, 'fall' back
for Standard Time.)
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
199
Account-Wide Panel Settings (Feature-Set, Service PIN, etc.)
Account Information: (technical
Account Information
settings)
These screens allow setting the
site/account name (to appear in the
'tree'), plus various technical systemwide parameters. These include the
"Feature Set", which determines the
system capacities for the account.
"Account-type" selections determine
the items (fields) to appear on-screen.
Note: Which 'Feature Sets' are supported
(and associated capacities) is based on the
software licensing, which is managed
through the 'activation key' on the PC that
contains the software database (V4: USB
connector; V3.3.2: Parallel/printer port;
V3.3.3: Either).
Viewing or Entering These Settings
Select Account Information from the MyTools
bar, or click your site/account button in the
tree, and select Account Information.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
Now, refer to the selection-descriptions for
these screens while viewing or entering your
desired settings.
Tip: You can use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred screen format (Forms view is
recommended here).
Screen Reference
 Standard 
- Account Name: A name/description for the
site/account.
Tip: This also appears in the 'tree' area.
Account Type
-Intrusion: Systems with monitored sensors, but
no access-controlled doors;
-Access: Systems with access-controlled doors,
but no monitored sensors or 'Areas';
-Intrusion and Access: Systems with both
access-controlled doors and monitored sensors.
200
-------------------------Central Station: Select this if any panel(s) will
be monitored through a central monitoring
facility;
-Suite Security: Systems that include
apartments / facilities being monitored by suitesecurity keypads (2-zone or 8-zone);
-LCD Keypads: Systems with any LCD keypad
modules;
-Elevator: Systems with access-controlled
elevators (lifts) and floors.
Panel Mode Information
- Panel Operating Mode: This sets the basic
operating parameters and/or default settings for
the panel (allowing one firmware build to be
used world-wide).
UK/ACPO (DD243): With UK/ACPO operation, the
modem/dialler may not be available (i.e., older style
main board with built-in bell 103 modem).
Additional Regions: These selections typically apply
suitable default settings for the specific region.
Changing the Operating Mode: With Director v4.4,
the panel operating mode is set initially through the
new account wizard. At that time, some default
items/values are set up automatically. If you need to
change the panel operating mode, and wish to obtain
suitable default values, it is best to set up a new
account and delete the old one.
- Language Set: Future Use. This determines
the languages to be supported at LCD keypads.
(The languages will be listed on-screen.)
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Feature Set Information
- Panel Version: Set this to match the actual
panel (firmware) revision level for panels
associated with this account (all panels for each
account must be at the same firmware revision
level).
Notes: With VEREX Director v4.4, panel firmware
versions to be supported within an account is set
through the new account wizard. If the panel version
is set incorrectly, you will be unable to communicate
with the panel(s). Panel firmware information can be
found on the system (general) configuration screen
st
after the 1 communication attempt.
Related Topics:  "System Settings for each Panel"
(in a following section).  "Panel Communications and
Updates" (in a previous section).
Note: Some features may be supported only after
upgrading to the latest firmware revision (typically to
match the software revision).
- Feature Set: (formerly "Memory Model") The
memory configuration to use with all panels
associated with this site/account. This
determines the system capacities for this
account (see "Columns...", to follow).
Suites, Elevators: Support for suite-security keypads
and/or elevator controllers requires a 'feature set'
selection of 5 or higher (via Enterprise software
licensing).
Bell 103 Connections: For panels that will connect
through their built-in dialler (Bell 103 300 baud
modem), the feature-set must be 1-3 (single panel
system, up to 300 users). This also requires a USR
Sportster 56K modem at the PC (for compatibility with
the initialization string).
-(Columns of items): This shows the system
capacities associated with your selected
"Feature Set".
Related Topic: "System Capacities".
If you cannot select a specific 'feature set', this means
that it is not supported by your software licensing.
Related Topic: "Software Activation and Licensing".
Panel Memory: For some feature sets, panels require
additional memory (as indicated at the top of each
column).
 Setup 
- [Change Master Panel]: For a multi-panel
account, this identifies one panel to be
referenced for common panel settings (users,
etc.) during a "Get From Panel" database
update.
Welcome
Report
Global Account Options
-Allow PIN Duress: Whether or not users will
have the option (at system keypads, and
readers set for card / UID +PIN entry) to indicate
they are being forced to enter by reversing the
last two digits of their PIN. This will be logged
as a duress alarm.
- Panic Token Sends Duress (V4.4): This sets
detection of panic tokens to be transmitted as a
duress alarm. (Otherwise, it will be logged
locally, but not transmitted. (Also see next
item.)
Tip: Whether or not a card/token will be treated as a
'panic token' is set in the authorities assigned to the
specific user (card/token).
------------------------- Display Card Number: This shows the card
number for each user (and/or hides user-ID
references) in event messages, reports, and
other locations (e.g., fallback users screen);
- Synchronize panel time daily (V4.5): Each
panel keeps track of time independently.
Beginning with V4.5, a selection is provided that
synchronizes all panel time clocks in an account
with the Director server PC. This occurs
overnight around 3:00 am.
For sites that include camera(s) associated with doors
and/or sensors (for "Video Events"), this 'time sync'
feature is selected automatically--and cannot be
unselected. This ensures time-stamps associated
with camera images will be synched correctly across
all cameras.
- Enable User In/Out Status for this Account:
This turns user In/Out status tracking on and off.
(Default = Enabled.) If this feature is not
needed, you can unselect it to free up Director
server resources.
Note: This selection is needed for the following
features:
+ User In/Out status tracking (in Control & Status);
+ Time & Attendance Reports;
+ Roll Call (and Instant Roll Call) reports.
- PIN Mode: Whether user-PINs (for use at
reader keypads, and system (LCD/LED)
keypads will be four or five digits long;
Master Panel
21-0381E v4.9.1
For details on transferring settings, refer to "Panel
Communications and Updates".
Notice -- "Shared Users": With users assigned
across multiple accounts ("Shared Users"; V4.2
Director), the PIN Mode and User Logon Mode will be
locked here. Related Settings:
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
201
 [Management], Community Groups,
Communities.
(See the previous topic on "Community Groups").
- User Logon Mode: This determines whether
users must enter their ID number or card
number when logging onto LCD keypads, and/or
gaining entry at doors (e.g., ID + PIN mode).
User-number selections include the number of
digits--which should be set to support the largest
card number used at the site.
-Escort Required Mode: The type of cards/users
who will be able to escort "Visitor (EscortRequired)" users throughout the facility.
Escort User: Valid users/cards with "Escort Privilege"
authority; Permanent User: Valid users/cards that do
not have an expiry date; Any User: Any valid
users/cards--either permanent or temporary.
Note: In each case, escorts CANNOT be set as
"Visitor (Escort-Required)" themselves.
Related Settings:
 Users, Validation, Invalid On.
See: Users (Entrants/Panel Users).
 Authorities, Profile 1-4, Access,
Escort Privilege, and
Visitor (Escort Required)
See: Authorities for Users / Entrants.
- Point Reset Time (V4.4): This sets a
duration for which all sensors (input points)
that are tripped momentarily will be treated as
'in alarm' (i.e., after this time, they will be reset
to 'OK').
- Dealer ID (V4.4): Enter your dealer code here
(1-65,535). This value is used with "6-digit PIN
of the day" service PIN mode.
Related: YourAccount, Account Information,
Service PIN, "Service PIN Mode"
 Account-Wide Panel Settings
- Keypad Lock Code (V4.4): Future Use.
- Arm/Disarm and Tones (V4.4): Sets
whether or not disarming will be supported
through keypads and the general operation of
the keypad sonalert/buzzer.
Related: “Keypad Tone Reference”.
Card Action
- Ignore Pending Enrolment: This sets cardenrolment readers to work on expired/disabled
cards whether set for "pending enrolment" or
not. If not selected, card-enrolment readers will
affect only cards set as "pending enrolment".
Application Tip: Cards can be set as 'Pending
Enrolment' manually (e.g., when first issued), or when
202
accepted at a reader set to do this. 'Expired' cards
also includes cards that had been previously enabled
for a set period of time by a reader set to do this.
Related Settings:
 Users, Validation, Pending Enrolment.
See: Users (Entrants/Panel Users).
 Configuration, Doors, In Reader (or out...),
[Card Action].
See: Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a Door.
 Bad Card/PIN 
( V4.20)
These selections pertain to how the system will respond
to repetitive invalid cards and/or invalid PINs at a reader
or LCD keypad (i.e., an unauthorized person trying to
gain entry).
Related:  Control & Status Panel Control & Status
System [Clear User Lockout]
Invalid User Detection
- Maximum Bad PINs: The number of invalid
PINs that can be entered before that person will
be locked out.
- User Lockout Duration: The duration that
users will be locked out in response to repetitive
invalid access attempts. (This pertains to
individual users, as well as 'global lockouts'.)
Tip: Long duration and/or permanent 'lockouts' can be
removed through:  Control & Status;  Visual
Director;  A 'Command Point' custom input.
- Maximum Lockouts Before Global Lockout:
The number of individual users that can be
locked out for an account before triggering a
'Global Lockout' condition. This:  Will generate
a local alarm message;  Can be transmitted to
a monitoring facility (setting to follow);  Can be
set to block access to all users on an area by
area basis.
Related: Configuration Areas Access "Bad
Card Action"
Tip: A global lockout can be removed through:
 Control & Status;
 Visual Director, and/or:  A 'Command Point' custom
input.
- Reset Timeout: The minimum duration
between invalid cards/PINs for which the
counter will not be incremented.
(The counters reset to 0 if not incremented
during this time.)
- Invalid Card Detection: Allows turning invalid
card detection on or off, and setting the type of
invalid cards to be counted.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
 Invalid Cards: Cards denied access due to:
 Not in database;  Wrong site number;
 Wrong version number;
 High Risk: Cards denied access due to:  Card
expired;  Schedule expired;  Interlock violation;
 Reader locked out;  Wrong area.
 Service PIN 
- Maximum Invalid Cards: The number of times
an invalid card can be presented before that
card will be locked out (for the 'User Lockout
Duration');
- Transmit Global Lockout Alarm: For a
centrally-monitored facility, this determines if
'global lockouts' are to be transmitted to the
monitoring station.
 Site Address and Mailing
Address 
- Name: The name/description for the
site/account (as set through the "Standard" tab).
- Address: The address/location of the
site/account.
- [Copy Site Address to Mailing Address]: This
sets the "Mailing Address" to match the present
"Site Address".
 Contact 
- Phone: The voice/contact phone number for the
person who looks after the system.
- Contact: The on-site contact person for the
site/account.
- Comments: Additional information pertaining to
this site / account (optional).
This pertains to the service user/login (000) with access
to all features including configuration menus, service
test authority, and the ability to change the time and
date.
- Service PIN Mode (V4.4): This sets the
operating characteristics of the service PIN.
Permanent: The service PIN entered under [Change
Service PIN] will remain in effect until changed
manually.
Six digit PIN of the day: This is a special calculated
PIN based on the date, your dealer code/ID, and other
factors. Contact your central monitoring facility to
obtain the required service PIN for the present day.
Note: [Change Service PIN] will not function while
this mode is in effect.
Related: YourAccount, Account Information,
Setup, "Dealer ID"
 Account-Wide Panel Settings
- [Change Service PIN]: Allows changing the
PIN required for a service person (user 00) to
access the panels in this account.
After changing the Service PIN, ensure the panel is
updated right away. For details, refer to "Panel
Communications and Updates".
Configuring a panel through an LCD keypad is
supported only in single-panel accounts set to "Feature
Set" 1-4 (see previous). Exception: Programming of
modules that require keypad programming (HSC/printer
module, RF module, & Smart-PODs, plus associated
I/O set-up) is supported in all systems.
 Shared Users and Shared
Holidays 
These tabs appear if you have shared users
and/or holidays set up.
Related Topic: "Users and Holidays Shared Across
Multiple Accounts" ("Phase 4: Assign Shared Items to
Accounts")
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
203
Event Responses for Acknowledging Alarms
Event responses
Sample event responses can be set up ahead Account Information Event Response
of time to make things easier for operators
when they are acknowledging alarms.
Related Topic: "Dealing with Alarms (Comment /
Resolve)". Tip: Click the Coloured Box for an Alarm
Message
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Event Response
In the Tree: YourAccount, Account
Information (click the "+"), Event Response
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Things You Can Do
 Enter a New Event Response: Click [+] at
the bottom of the form, or right-click the form
and select Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for an Event Response: Click [+]
at the bottom of the form, or right-click the
form and select Add New from the pop-up
menu.
Tip: When acknowledging an alarm, the sample
responses defined here will be identified in a list based
on the first few words of the first line. As such, it is
best to set this portion of the text to uniquely identify
each response.
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete an Event Response: Right-click a
blank area on the form (If grid view: Right-click
the item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the Form)
- Response: This is where you select a sample
event response to view or edit. This area shows
a reference number assigned by the system,
and the first few words of the text, once defined.
On This Form
- Response: The text to be available to operators
when they are acknowledging an alarm.
204
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Alarm / Event Instructions
Introducing Event Instructions
Event
instructions
are
text Account Information Event Instruction
instructions that can be set to appear
in the comment/resolution window
when an operator is acknowledging
an alarm (pertaining to specific types
of messages, or those from a specific
sensor / input-point).
Also See: To assign instructions to alarm
messages (or specific input points), refer to
"Customizing How Events are Displayed
(Event Priority)" and/or "Input Points—
Monitored Sensors"
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar:
Event Instruction
In the Tree:
YourAccount,
Account Information (click the "+"),
Event Instruction
Multi-Account Systems: First select
[Account Folders] in the 'tree', and locate
and double-click the desired account.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows
selecting your preferred view-mode.
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Things You Can Do
 Add an Event Instruction: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
Screen Reference
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for an Event Instruction: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
Pick-List (bottom of the Form)
- Instruction: This is where you select an event
instruction to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the system, and
the name of the instruction, once defined;
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete an Event Instruction: Right-click a
blank area on the form (If grid view: Right-click
the item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
On This Form
- Name: A suitable name for the event instruction
(e.g., "Fire Instructions");
- Instruction: The text to appear in the
comment/resolution screen for alarms
associated with this instruction;
Before Deleting: Only unused instructions can be
deleted. (Go to the Event Priority screen, and
check to ensure the specific instruction is not being
used.)
Related Topic: "Customizing How Events are
Displayed (Event Priority)".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
205
Management Sound
Enabling Sounds (to be associated with event/alarm messages)
Sounds to be Associated with
Specific Events and Alarms
Sounds can be associated with
specific alarms and events. Before a
custom sound can be associated with
an event, it must be activated here.
Note: By default, your PC's "exclamation"
sound will be associated with alarms that
require resolution. This is set through the
Windows control-panel.
Sound Duration: Sounds to be associated
with specific alarms are played in a repeating
pattern. As such, any sounds lasting longer than 2
seconds will be truncated (i.e., the first two seconds will
be repeated).
File Format: VEREX Director supports standard
Windows sound (WAV) files. Up to 20 different sounds
can be used (system-wide / for all accounts).
Also See: To assign sounds to alarm messages, refer
to "Customizing How Events are Displayed (Event
Priority)".
How to Get Here
MyTools Bar: Sound
In the Tree: [Management], Sound
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Things You Can Do
 Activate a New Sound: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a Sound: Click the 'binoculars'
symbol. Then, enter the name and click
[Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Deactivate a Sound: Right-click a blank
area on the form (If grid view: Right-click the
item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Before Deleting: Only unused sounds can be
deleted. (Go to the Event Priority screen, and
check to ensure the specific sound is not being
used.)
Related Topic: "Customizing How Events are
Displayed (Event Priority)".
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the Form)
- Sound: This is where you select a sound to
206
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
rename, or associate with a different WAV file.
This area shows a reference number assigned
by the system, and the name of the sound, once
defined;
On This Form
- Name: A suitable name for the sound (e.g., "Fire
Alert");
- File: This is the location (path) and filename of
the sound file (.WAV). Tip: Click [...] to
browse for the file, Then, select the file and click
[Open].
- [  ]: Select this to listen to a sample of your
selected sound.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
207
Customizing How Events are Displayed (Event Priority)
Account Information Event Priority
Introducing Event Priorities
You can customize how specific events and
alarms will be displayed, and assign custom
colors, and sounds. These selections can be
system-wide, or for events occurring in a
specific area.
Now, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing or entering your desired
settings.
Tip: This feature uses a special view style (the Grid /
Form button will be disabled).
Screen Reference
Customizing Events
Select Event Priority from the MyTools bar, or
click your site/account button in the tree, open
Account Information (click the "+"), and
select Event Priority.
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account
Folders] in the 'tree', and double-click the desired
account.
208
Top of the Form
- View: The type of events you are viewing
(global and/or custom events associated with
specific areas;
- Event Types: This allows limiting your event
priority screen to specific event/alarm topics
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
only;
Buttons at the Bottom of the Form
- [Add]: When viewing custom events (i.e., "By
Area"), this creates a blank 'row' to allow setting
up a new custom event;
- [Delete]: This allows deleting a custom event
(when viewing "By Area");
- [Customize for Area]: When viewing "System
Wide" events, this allows quickly creating a
custom (area-specific) version of a selected
event;
Ref: [Management] Sound
 Enabling Sounds (to be associated with
event/alarm messages).
By default, your PC's "exclamation" sound will be
associated with alarms that require resolution. This is
set through the Windows control-panel.
Sound Duration: Sounds to be associated with
specific alarms are played in a repeating pattern. As
such, any sounds lasting longer than 2 seconds will be
truncated (i.e., the first two seconds will be repeated).
- Serial Reporting (v4.4): This allows selecting
specific alarms and events to be transmitted
through the serial reporting feature.
Related Settings: [Management], Serial Reporting.
 Software-Based Text Paging (Serial Reporting)
Columns (Event Criteria)
- Area: This is the area associated with the
specific event (either "All Areas", or a specific
area);
- Custom Filter: This field can be used by
specific operators to limit the messages they will
see in the monitoring window (i.e., only
messages set to specific 'custom filter' values);
- Priority: This affects the sort order in the
monitoring window, and can also be used by
operators to limit the messages they will see in
the monitoring window;
- Resolution Allowed: This determines whether
or not the comment/resolution screen will be
available for each specific event (when working
in the event/monitoring window);
- Instruction: This allows assigning instruction
text to appear in the comment/resolution screen
when an operator is acknowledging a specific
alarm;
- Messaging (v4.9.1): In the Event Priority
window, the new “Messaging” column has been
added. The operator can use this column to
assign to the event a user group to whom emails
or SMS messages will be sent.
Note: To be available here, instructions must be
defined first:
Ref: Account Information Event Instruction
 Alarm / Event Instructions
Instructions Associated with Specific Sensors: An
instruction can also be associated with specific
sensors (input points)--which will take precedence
over any instruction selected here.
Ref: Configuration Input Points
 Input Points—Monitored Sensors
- Media: This allows assigning a color and a
sound to each event/alarm message. Click [...]
to assign a sound and/or color to an event. (In
the next screen, you can click [  ] to hear your
selected sound.)
Notes: To be available here, custom sounds
st
(WAV files) must be activated 1 :
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
209
Detailed Operator and User Audit Trail (V4.6)
"Detailed auditing" records changes
made to operators and users. When
you enable this feature, the “before” and
“after” details for changes will be logged,
available to the archive and purge
functions, and available through Audit
Reports.
Exception: Changes made through a
keypad will show ID numbers only rather
than full names.
[Management], Reporting
To enable this feature, go to:
“[Management], Reporting”, and select
“Record Detailed Logs” ().
Note: Detailed audit recording will not begin
until the Director server has been restarted
once. (Shut down and re-start the Director
software (and log in), or if only the Director
server is running, shut down and restart it
(keypad/folder symbol near the right-hand
end of the Windows taskbar).
Director-Server Language
Some of the detailed audit text comes
from the Director software, and some
comes through the Director-server. The
Director-server typically shows text in
the language of the last operator who
was logged in. If you are finding that
some of the text is not appearing in the
same language as the Director software,
you can force the Director server to use
a specific language.
(Right-click
the
Director-Server
keypad/folder icon near the right-hand
end of the Windows taskbar, and make
your selection under “Language”. )
[Management], Database Maintenance,
Archive  and
[Management], Database Maintenance,
Purge 
In these screens, an “Operator Log”
selection has been added. This pertains
to the detailed user and operator audits
that are logged if this feature is enabled
under “[Management], Reporting”.
[Reports], Audit Reports
For an audit report, if you select: “Log
Type:
Operator”,
and
“Show
Transaction Details (), changes to
operators and users will be detailed in
the report showing field settings “before”
and “after” each change was made.
This is supported only if enabled under:
“[Management], Reporting”.
210
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Setting up Video Events (V4.5)
About Video Events
Video events are specific events pertaining to
input points and doors that have been
associated with recordings from one or two
specific camera(s).
These appear with a
camera symbol on the left in the event
monitoring window.
DVR Types: Supported video servers include:
NetVision (V2.1 or V2.2 and newer)
Yes (via "Visual Director")
password that has been given the authority
to play videos from the specific camera(s).
 Time Delays: Recorded video files will not
be available while they are being recorded.
The maximum length of individual video file
depends on the video device.
Steps:
1)
2)
March R4 & R5
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.7).
VeDVR / NVe (embedded)
Optional via licensing (beginning with V4.71).
Locator (Director PC): Control & Status, Panel
Control & Status, Visual Director, Customize
Views, Cameras. Details: “Initial Setup of:
Views, Maps, Cameras”, Step 1b: Define
Cameras
TVN20, TVN40, TVR10, TVR30, TVR31, TVR40,
TVR60
Available in Director >= 4.90.
TVR11, TVR41
Available in Director >= 4.91.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for
March R4 DVRs.
Related: “Working with Video Events”, under
“Monitoring System Activity”.
Also See:
+ Maps and Video (Visual Monitoring & Status/Control)
+ Camera Status/Control and Adjustments
Requirements
Ensure the items discussed under
“Requirements” have been dealt with
(previous/above).
Ensure the camera(s) have been set up in
VEREX Director. (You will need the
NetVision remote user name and
password for this.)
3)
Associate the desired camera with the
specific events at each applicable door.
Locator (Director PC): Configuration, Doors,
Video Events.
Details: “Doors, Readers, and Related Settings”
4)
Associate the desired camera with each
applicable input point.
Locator (Director PC): Configuration, Input
Points, Video Events.
Details: “Input Points—Monitored Sensors”
 Video Device: The video device must be
present and available on your network.
 Port: The network communication port
configured on the video device must be
available for use on your network.
 Recording Files: The video device must
have a recording for that camera at the time
of the event. This typically means either
recording continuously, or setting up prealarm recording and either using a common
input device to trigger the Director videoevent and the video device camera, or using
a Director output to trigger the video device
camera.
Tip: For details on setting up camera recordings at
the video device, please refer to the video device
online help or User Guide.
 Remote User: To allow defining the
camera(s) in VEREX Director you will need a
valid video device remote user name and
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
211
Software-Based Text Paging (Serial Reporting) v4.4
About Serial Reporting
Setting up Serial Reporting
In addition to the numeric paging that is
supported through the main panels, the serial
reporting feature allows selected alarm/event
messages
to
be transmitted
to
an
alphanumeric pager.
This is done through a serial paging interface
that includes software for configuring its
communication parameters, and pager phone
number, etc.
How to Get Here:
Events to be Transmitted: Only events that have been
selected for serial reporting will be transmitted in this
way.
Related Settings: YourAccount, Account Information,
Event Priority.
 Customizing How Events are Displayed (Event
Priority)
Communication Requirement: As this is a feature of
this software, only messages that have been received
by the software will be available to be transmitted. This
can be via settings for "Panel Communications to
Director":
Related: Configuration, System, Communication,
Configuration
 Monitoring, Numeric Paging, & Remote Mgt.
Settings
...or while the software is actively communicating with
the panel (communications session):
Related: [Communications], Pending/Online, [Edit]
 Activating Communications and Transferring Panel
Settings
Tip: With proper wiring and set-up you can also
typically use this feature to send messages to a serial
printer or a computer running a terminal program such
as HyperTerminal (both presently untested).
212
MyTools Bar: Serial Reporting
In the Tree: [Management],
Serial Reporting
Now, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing or entering your desired
settings.
Also see (similar feature):
Panel-Based Numeric Paging: Locator:
Configuration, System, Communication,
Paging.
See: Paging , under "Monitoring, Paging & Remote
Mgt. Settings".
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Screen Reference
[Management] Serial Reporting
On This Screen
- Enable Serial Reporting: This
activates the serial reporting feature;
- Serial Port: This sets the serial
communications port to be used for
serial reporting (typically COM1);
- Baud Rate: This sets the transmission
speed for alarm messages transmitted
via serial reporting (e.g., 9600).
- Field Delimiter: This sets the character to be
inserted between the segments of each
message (e.g., user name, door name, etc.).
Space: Fields will be separated with spaces. This
typically allows more text to fit on each pager screen.
Tab: Fields will be separated with tabs. This typically
makes the pager screens easier to read.
Note: You must also set the individual alarms
and events to be transmitted.
Related Settings: YourAccount, Account Information,
Event Priority.
 Customizing How Events are Displayed (Event
Priority)
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
213
Panels, Panel Groups, and Connection Settings
Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use the Configuration Wizard to set up a new system. For details, refer
to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
Panel Groups and Connection Settings
Panel Groups
 Pertain to individual panels, or groups of
panels sharing a connection (up to 30 panels
per group/connection). Tip: Each connection
pertains to a physical cable, or a dial-up modem
and phone number.
IP Exception:
With IP connections ( V3.3
software), a "Panel Group" can include any 1-30
panels within an account communicating through
the same PC and port (IP device). In this case,
panel groups will typically be set up based on
geographic location, or network characteristics.
The Director software can communicate with any
number of panels within the group during a single
communications session. More: "IP Connectivity"
 Identify the 'communication pool' to be used
to manage communications to and from the
panel(s).
Reference Notes:
Panels per Account: Each account can include a total
of up to 60 system panels.
A panel group must be set up for each directconnection and (remote) modem, even where only one
panel is using the connection. Tip: A panel group is
set up automatically for your first (or only) system panel.
Multi-panel support depends on your software
licensing. For details, refer to "Software Activation and
Licensing".
Dial-up panels with their own dedicated external
modem (or IP interface--if  v3.3 software) can be set to
automatically dial-in to the VEREX DIRECTOR system
and transmit either alarms, or blocks of 256 events.
This would require setting up each panel with its own
'Panel Group' (one panel per group). Otherwise, the
VEREX Director system is updated whenever a
connection is initiated with the panel(s).
To set a dial-up panel to automatically transfer alarms
or blocks of activity messages, refer to "Monitoring,
Paging, & Remote Mgt. Settings".
The transmission of messages to a central monitoring
station is not related to panel groups, or the
connections used to communicate with the VEREX
Director system.
Monitoring Station Connection: Central monitoring is
supported through:
214
 The panel's built-in dialler ('Bell 103', 300 baud
modem), and/or;
 An "IP" connection (LAN/WAN--if  v3.3 panel &
software), or;
 A high-security Mark 7 / DVACS connection
(Canada).
How to Get Here
Click your site/account button in the tree.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Open Configuration in the 'tree' (click the "+"),
and ensure "Logical Tree View" is not in effect.
st
If "System" is the 1 item under "Configuration", rightclick Configuration, and de-select Logical Tree View.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode. (Although forms view is
generally recommended here).
Things You Can Do
 Add a New Panel Group: Right-click
"Configuration" in the 'tree', and select Add
Panel Group from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select the
desired panel group in the tree.
Exception: While in 'logical tree view' (with a
configuration topic selected), you can set panels and
panel groups to be displayed (and be selectable) at
the bottom of the form. (QuickTip: View (menu),
Panel Information, Show...).
 Delete a Panel Group: Right-click the
specific panel group, and select "Delete".
When prompted to confirm, select "Yes".
Before Deleting: Ensure the panel group does NOT
contain any panels and related devices that you wish
to retain. A deleted panel (and associated devices)
can be recovered only if a current database 'backup'
is available.
Tip: You can use the right-click menu to copy and
paste panels and related settings from one panel
group to another.
Screen Reference
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
When You Select a Panel Group (under Configuration)
 Location 
Settings pertaining to the location of
the panel(s), plus the local time zone
for the specific location. Tip: The
Time Zone setting causes any panel
clock updates to be adjusted
accordingly.
 Connection 
These settings pertain to panel
communications sessions that are initiated
by the software.
Quick Tip: "Logical tree View" must not be in effect.
- Communication Pool: The serial
cable or modem(s) that can be used
when communicating with specific panel(s) from
the PC. For details on setting up
communication pools, refer to "Communication
Pools for System Panels".
- PC Connection Type: The type of PC-to-panel
connection:
This is the phone number to dial when initiating
a communications session with the specific
panel(s).
This phone number can include numeric digits only,
plus commas--to insert brief pauses if necessary.
+ Direct Cable Connection: A direct connection (RS232 or RS-485);
+ Regular Modem: A 56K modem installed at the PC
and panel(s);
+ Bell 103: A 56K modem installed at the PC,
connecting through the built-in dialler (300 baud
modem).
Note: Due to speed considerations, the "Bell 103"
setting (300 baud) is supported only in smaller
systems ("Feature Set" 1, 2, or 3: Single-panel
account, with up to 300 users). Setting the 'Feature
Set' parameter: Account-Wide Panel Settings
(Feature-Set, Service PIN, etc.)
+ IP Connections: Secure and regular IP
connections are also supported.
More: "IP Connectivity"
+ World-Wide Modems: Modular plug-in modems
where supported by the main panel. These
modems are 2400 baud, with support for various
world-wide standards. Note: for proper operation,
the panel location must be identified correctly. Tip:
Go to: "System, Communication,
Configuration", and ensure the 'On-board Modem'
and 'Country ID' are set correctly.
Related: Configuration, System,
Communication, Configuration
- Speed (for a direct-cable connection): This is
the speed at which the system will attempt to
communicate with the panel(s).
- Telephone Number (for a modem connection):
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
215
System Panels and Displayed
Item-Numbers
Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use
the Configuration Wizard to set up a new system.
For details, refer to "New Installation? Try the
Wizard!"
System Panels
Things You Can Do
 Add a New Panel: Under Configuration in
the 'tree', locate and right-click the panelgroup for the new panel, and select Add
Panel.
System panels, the core of each installation,
provide data storage, communication, and
other functions for all associated expansion
modules and related peripherals (doors,
sensors, etc.). An installation may pertain to a
single panel, or multiple panels in various
locations.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select the
desired panel in the tree (under the specific
panel group).
Reference Notes:
Panels per Account: Each account can include a total
of up to 60 system panels.
Multi-panel support depends on your software
licensing. For details, refer to "Software Activation and
Licensing".
There are numerous items that are set up for each
panel (in addition to the settings in this section). For
details, refer to the "Configuration" chapter in the table
of contents (at the front of this guide). The system
identifies each panel based on its serial number. This
is set in the "System Communication" screen. For
details, refer to Monitoring, Paging, & Remote Mgt.
Settings
 Delete a Panel: Right-click the specific
panel, and select "Delete". When prompted
to confirm, select "Yes".
How to Get Here
Click your site/account button in the tree.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Open Configuration in the 'tree' (click the "+"),
and ensure "Logical Tree View" is not in effect.
st
If "System" is the 1 item under "Configuration", rightclick Configuration, and de-select Logical Tree View.
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
216
Exception: While in 'logical tree view' (with a
configuration topic selected), you can set panels and
panel groups to be displayed (and be selectable) at
the bottom of the form. (QuickTip: View (menu),
Panel Information, Show...).
Before Deleting: Ensure the panel does NOT contain
any related devices that you wish to retain. A
deleted panel (and associated devices) can be
recovered only if a current database 'backup' is
available.
Tip: You can use the right-click menu to copy and
paste panels and related settings from one panel
group to another.
If a System Panel is Replaced
If a defective or damaged panel is replaced, be
sure to identify the new panel "Serial
Number" to the software.
For details, refer to "Monitoring, Paging, & Remote Mgt.
Settings".
-------------------------
Then, issue a "Send to Panel" communications
session to transfer all settings to the new
panel.
For details, refer to "Panel Communications and
Updates".
Screen Reference
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
When You Select a Panel (under Configuration)
- Location: A suitable name or location
for the specific system main panel;
- Display Offsets (Repeating vs.
Unique Item-Numbers): With the
default setting of "1", the areas, doors,
etc. for each panel will be numbered
the same (e.g., 1st Panel, Area 1, 2,
3,… 2nd Panel, Area 1, 2, 3,… etc.).
This allows for accounts that span
multiple buildings. Setting the 'offsets'
allows item-numbers to be unique /
sequential (e.g., Area 1, 2, 3, ...17, 18,
etc.)—which is useful for multiple
panels in the same building.
Quick Tip: "Logical tree View" must not be in effect.
Elevators: Door and elevator numbering is shared (1 32). As such, the 'Door' offset applies to elevators as
well. Floors: Floors are identified by name only. As
such, 'offsets' do not apply.
Setting Item-Numbers to Be Sequential: For each
item (area, door, etc.), check the item-range
from the preceding panel, and then set the
'offset' for the panel to the lowest available*
number.
* To allow for Future Expansion: You can set the
'offsets' as if each panel had all items defined (areas,
doors, etc.). Tip: Be sure to add "1", to obtain the
next available number. Refer to the system capacities
for the number of items supported per panel.
- Panel Display Offsets: This shows the 'Display
Offsets' for all panels pertaining to an account,
plus the resulting item-range for each panel
based on the present "Display Offsets".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
217
System Settings for each Panel (V4.4)
General System Settings for a Panel
The System (General) Screen
Configuration, System, (Standard )
The System screen provides access
to various security settings pertaining
to a specific panel.
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select
[Account Folders] in the 'tree', and locate and
double-click the desired account.
MyTools Bar: System
In the Tree: Configuration (click the
"+"), System (Under the specific panel
group and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop
Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows
selecting your preferred view-mode (forms
view is recommended here).
Things You Can Do
View or change settings as desired
for the specific panel (see the
selection-descriptions).
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the form)
-Panel: If the tree is not set to show items on a
panel-by-panel basis, you will be able to
select a panel here (for systems that have
more than one).
A "Panel Group" reference may also be shown here,
or you can set the 'tree' to list configuration topics
separately for each panel. For more information, refer
to "Other Desktop Choices".
Standard 
- (Panel Type – Photos of mainboards): Select
the (radio-button for the) photo that looks like
your panel mainboard;
- Panel (firmware) and File Versions: Revision
information for the panel (which is read-in during
each communication attempt);
218
To allow panel communications, the panel version
must be set correctly through the "Account
Information" screen.
Account Information: See the section entitled
"Account-Wide Panel Settings" (previous).
Panel Communications: See the section entitled
"Panel Communications and Updates" (previous).
Note: Some features may be supported only after
upgrading to the latest firmware revision (typically to
match the software revision).
- Module Baud Rate: This is the speed this main
panel communicates with the modules
connected to it.
The higher speed (38400) is recommended in all
systems (especially with door and/or elevator
controllers). Note: Trouble-free communications
requires proper (shielded) cabling, and adherence to
wiring guidelines covered in the Commissioning or
Installation Guide for your system.
- Siren Time: This is the duration for any siren
activations for the entire system/panel.
Pre-Alarm Warming: To allow a pre-alarm warning to
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
occur, the siren time must be greater than 30 seconds.
The Siren Feature: This pertains to monitored sensors
(input points), system/equipment conditions, and/or
panic/emergency keys that have been set to trigger a
siren condition—as signalled by a programmable
output set to activate on a system or area "siren"
condition.
Related Topics:
 Equipment Settings
(Pseudo / Internal Inputs)
 Input Points—Monitored Sensors.
Tip: "Emergency keys" pertains to 1st 3 inputs on
an LCD keypad.
Note: Numeric paging is not supported with UK/ACPO
operation.
 Input Points—Pre-Defined Sensor Types
 Input Points—Custom Point Types
 Programmable Outputs
(Signalling & Device-Switching)
- AC Synchronization: Frequency of AC source
to sync with for panel time display accuracy.
Note: With an unstable AC service, select "No
Sync--AC Power Detection" (AC failure will be
reported if the frequency drops below 12.5 Hz);
- AC brown-out mode (xL Panels): This sets
whether or not reduced AC voltage will cause an
alarm or be transmitted;
- AC reference voltage - V (xL Panels): This is
the voltage level coming in on the AC mains to
be considered a 'brown-out' (such as 100);
- Battery size - Ah (xL Panels): This is the amphour rating for the main panel's backup battery
(such as 7.0). This must be set by (or confirmed
with) an on-site technician;
- Enable wall tamper (xL Panels): This sets
whether or not the tamper switch on the back of
the panel main board will be monitored.
LCD Keypad Only
- System Message: A greeting of up to 16
characters to appear at LCD displays (alternates
with the time, and alarm conditions).
Also See: Configuration, Modules, Keypad ,
"Default Display Mode"
 Expansion Modules
I/O Mapping 
(V4.4)
- Panel on-board Inputs: The number of input
points (zones/sensors) supported by the main
panel itself.
- Panel on-board Outputs: The number of
programmable outputs (electronically-switched
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
devices) supported by the main panel itself—
plus any VBUS and STU outputs.
- Paging Output base: The number of the first
programmable output to be reserved for use
with the numeric paging feature supported by
the main panel (i.e., the first one in the reserved
range).
- Paging Outputs: The total number of
programmable output numbers to be reserved
for use with the main panel's numeric paging
feature (up to 16).
Control
- VBUS Output base: The number of the first
programmable output to be reserved for use
with the VBUS feature supported by the main
panel (i.e., the first one in the reserved range).
- VBUS Outputs: The total number of
programmable output numbers to be reserved
for use with the VBUS feature supported by the
main panel (up to 32).
VBUS: This pertains to communications between
intelligent power supplies in a master/slave
configuration. To be supported by xL panels.
- Parallel STU Output base: The number of the
first programmable output to be reserved for use
with a parallel STU (i.e., the first one in the
reserved range).
- Parallel STU Outputs: The total number of
programmable output numbers to be reserved
for use with a parallel STU (up to 8).
STU: This pertains to an internal (modular) interface
to a subscriber terminal unit (such as REDCARE)
which is used for reporting purposes. To be supported
by xL panels set for UK/ACPO operation.
Related: Configuration, Output Points
 Programmable Outputs (Signalling & DeviceSwitching)
VBUS Outputs and Parallel STU Outputs
(xL Panels)
xL panels support one 8-output STU
(w/configurable base value), plus three 8output VBUS boards (with contiguous output
numbers starting at a single programmable
base value). A total of four VBUS boards are
supported if a parallel STU is not present.
In addition to the settings pertaining to VBUS
and parallel STU outputs, the "Panel onboard
outputs" value must include the number of
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
219
STU and VBUS outputs--plus the two on the
panel itself for a grand total.
This is selectable as multiples of 4 only (4, 8,
12, etc), so select the next higher value if
necessary.
Attention: VBUS and STU outputs will NOT
be recognized if the panel onboard outputs
value does not account for all of these outputs
as described here.
Intrusion Settings for a Panel (V4.4)
The System Intrusion screen
This screen provides access to various
intrusion settings that pertain to a specific
panel.
Tip: You can also use the Configuration Wizard to set
up a new system. (Look in the Tools menu).
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: System – Intrusion
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
System, Intrusion (Under the specific panel
group and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.) Related
Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
View or change settings as desired for the
specific panel (see the selection-descriptions).
220
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Configuration, System, Intrusion
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the
form)
- Panel: If the tree is not set to show
items on a panel-by-panel basis, you
will be able to select a panel here (for
systems that have more than one).
A "Panel Group" reference may also be
shown here, or you can set the 'tree' to list
configuration topics separately for each panel. For
more information, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
 ACPO 
Note: This tab appears only for panels set for UK
(ACPO) operating mode. For a new system, this is set
through a small wizard screen when the account is
created.
 Standard 
- Input Point Fast Restore: Whether or not a
point restoral (return to normal) is to be sent
within 1 minute (versus only at siren time-out);
- Maximum number of alarms per point:
This allows limiting the number of consecutive
alarms from an input point (sensor/zone) that
the system will monitor. For a selection of 1,
2, or 3, any additional consecutive alarms will
be ignored.
Note: This typically pertains to UK/European
installations.
- Multi-tenant system (UK/ACPO): Future use.
- Area group mode (V4.4): This determines
whether or not arming and disarming of
groups of areas will be supported through
LCD keypads associated with this panel.
Group or Area: This will prompt LCD keypad users to
select an area group, or an individual area.
Remote Area or Group (V4.5): Allows
simultaneously arming or disarming like-named
groups of areas across multiple panels from a single
keypad for users with applicable authority.
Related: Configuration, Areas, Area Group
 Area Groups and Multi-Panel Arm/Disarm
- Confirm alarm timeout: This is the allowed
duration/time during which an alarm can be
confirmed;
- Confirmed reset service: Whether or not a
confirmed alarm can be reset locally using the
service PIN;
- Confirmed reset master: Whether or not a
user with master authority can reset a confirmed
alarm locally;
- Confirmed reset managed: Whether or not
any valid user can reset a confirmed by entering
a PIN obtained by calling the central monitoring
facility/station;
- Confirmed reset remote: Whether or not
confirmed alarms can be reset remotely through
a software utility running at the central
monitoring facility/station;
- Unconfirmed Reset Mode: Future use.
- Prompt for Entry Delay on LCD Keypad:
Whether or not the user will be asked if they
want the optional entry delay each time any area
is set to STAY. (An entry delay provides time
for an authorized entrant to disarm the area.)
- Ring Back Required on Arming: Whether or
not the monitoring station will cause a keypad
tone and short siren squawk to confirm each
time an area is armed--as required for UL-listed
systems.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
221
Monitoring, Numeric Paging, & Remote Mgt. Settings
The System Communication screen
This screen provides access to monitoring,
numeric paging, and communications settings
for a specific panel.
Tip: Beginning with VEREX Director V4.0, you can use
Wizards to set up a new system, and initiate
communications with panels. (Look in the Tools
menu).
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
Now, refer to the descriptions under
" Configuration ", being sure to select
the following items:
 Applicable communications device under
"Callback to Director" ();
 "Director Phone Number" or "Interface
IP..." settings, as applicable, and;
 Your desired "Reporting Mode".
IP Connections: Secure and regular IP connections
are also supported. More: "IP Connectivity"
MyTools Bar: System Communication
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
System, Communication (Under the specific
panel group and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.) Related
Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
View or change settings as desired for the
specific panel (see the selection-descriptions).
Setting a Panel to Automatically Dial-In
and Transmit Messages to VEREX
Director
Panels with their own dedicated external
modem (or IP interface--if  V3.3 Director) can
be set to automatically dial-in and transmit
messages to the VEREX Director system.
(In other configurations, the messages are transmitted
when a connection is made with the specific
panel/account—either manually by an operator, or
through a scheduled/repeating communications session
that was set up previously.)
First, check that the "Panel Groups" for each
applicable panel contain no other panels (one
panel per 'Panel Group').
For details, refer to "Panel Groups and Connection
Settings".
-------------------------
Then, access "Configuration System
Communication" for the specific panel as
described previously.
222
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
another PC running the VEREX Director
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the form)
Configuration System Communication
-Panel: If the tree is not set to show
items on a panel-by-panel basis, you
will be able to select a panel here (for
systems that have more than one).
A "Panel Group" reference may also be
shown here, or you can set the 'tree' to list
configuration topics separately for each
panel. For more information, refer to "Other
Desktop Choices".
 Configuration 
(PC/Panel ID, Host Reporting)
Note: Some of the following settings will be
hidden depending on the "PC Connection
Type" selected for the 'panel group'
associated with this panel. For details, refer
to "Panels, Panel Groups, and Related Settings".
- Serial Number (also known as "Host Address"):
software).
For a new panel, this can be set as desired. To
upload data from an existing panel, this setting must
match the one stored at the panel.
Enter the serial number of the specific panel
(this allows the software to identify each
panel).
Panel Communications to Director
Tip: The serial number is typically hand-written (5
digits) on a small sticker on the circuit board.
- Panel Code (also known as Account UID): This is a
reference number to identify the panel, site, or
account.
For a new panel, this can be any non-zero number,
and can be the same for all panels per site or per
account if desired. For settings to be uploaded from
an existing panel (i.e., a "Get from Panel" communications session), the panel itself must have a non-zero
"Panel Code" set up by an authorized service person,
and that number must also be entered here.
Note: In the unlikely event of two panels having the
same serial number, the "Panel Code" numbers would
have to be unique.
Paging Feature: The Panel Code number is used with
the numeric paging feature (see "Paging ", to
follow/below). For the paging feature to be used in a
multi-panel account, Panel Code numbers must be
unique, or sequential / offset output-numbers must be
set up.
To set up sequential output numbers for a multi-panel
account, refer to the "Display Offsets" values under
"System Panels and Displayed Item-Numbers".
- Third Party Password: This is a security
‘key’ used by the software to block an
unauthorized connection to the panel (e.g.,
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
These items pertain to panel-initiated communications
to the Director PC.
- Callback to Director: This sets whether or not
panel-initiated communications will be available,
and the type of device that the panel will be
using to make the connection.
Note: This is supported when each panel has its own
dedicated (external) modem--via 8 wire serial
connection (or IP-interface--if  V3.3 Director
software). Alarms and events will be transmitted as
per the "Reporting Mode" (to follow), plus each time a
connection is initiated to update/sync panel settings.
Tip: The basic connection type is set for the "Panel
Group" associated with this panel. For details, go to
"Panels, Panel Groups, and Related Settings", and
look for "PC Connection Type".
- Director Phone Number (modem connections
only): The phone number to be used whenever
this panel initiates a connection with the
computer—to transmit alarms, and for a
'Forced Configuration Callback' (details to
follow);
- Reporting Mode: With "Callback to Director" set
as your applicable modem/device (prev.), you
can set how the panel will transmit messages to
the VEREX Director software (None, blocks of
256 events, or individual alarms as they occur).
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
223
Exception: For a Bell 103 connection (small systems,
max. 300 users), the reporting mode is not supported.
Tip: Reporting to a central monitoring facility is set
through  SIA/CID  or  SIP/HSC  (to
follow / below).
- Interface IP Address and Interface IP Port (IP
connections only): These settings pertain to an IP
(LAN/WAN) or secure/encrypted IP connection
to a panel.
Tip: This can be an IP address, or a name (FQDN).
Contact your IT rep. for assistance if needed. For
remote access (different PC) with certificate
authentication, this value must be as supported by the
certificate.
IP Type
Port Number (typical)
Secure / HSC-IP
443
Basic IP / older
24822
More: "IP Connectivity"
------------------------- Number of Rings (built-in Bell 103 modem): The
number of rings before this panel answers the
phone when a connection attempt is initiated
from a remote PC.
An external modem is set up using physical switches
and/or terminal communications software. For details,
refer to the installation topic: "Windows Modem
Setup".
- Answering Machine Defeat (built-in Bell 103,
or W.W. modem): When calling to update the
panel, if the remote PC rings 1-2 times,
hangs-up, and then calls again, the panel will
pick up immediately on the 2nd call (within 1
minute);
- Force Configuration Callback (built-in Bell
103, or W.W. modem): When a connection
attempt is issued from a remote PC, the panel
will hang-up and redial to connect with the
computer at the expected location (phone #).
Note: A Bell 103 connection is supported only in
smaller systems ('Feature Set' 1, 2, or 3, one panel
per account, up to 300 users). To set the 'Feature
Set', refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
On Board Modem Type
- Modem Type: The type of internal or modular
modem associated with the main panel.
- Country ID (world-wide modems): This pertains
to the country associated with the main panel.
- Modem init string (world-wide modems): Future
Use. An optional modem command string that
will be sent to the modem before attempting to
dial-out to a central monitoring facility.
224
- Do not Allow Blind Dial: This sets the panel to
dial out to make a connection ONLY if it 'hears'
and recognizes the required dial tones, etc. on
the phone line.
 SIA/CID 
(Central Monitoring Facility)
- Digital Account ID: This is a number used by
the receiver at the monitoring station to
identify this panel (0-9999).
Note: If the 'Format' is set as 'SIA', this value
can be 0-999999. (See "Format", to follow.)
- Format: The format of messages transmitted
to the monitoring station (SIA, Contact ID, or
SIA plus descriptive text).
Messages to be reported for each area: Refer to
"Central Station", "Reporting" under “Areas and
Related Settings", Intrusion .
- Phone Number: This is the typical number
that this panel will use to transmit messages
to the monitoring station.
- Backup Phone Number: This is an
alternative line that the panel will use if it is
unable to get through on the primary phone
number.
Pertaining to phone numbers, these characters can be
included: T=Tone; P=Pulse (default); D=Pause 2
sec.; A=Star key, #=Pound key, W=Wait for second
dial-tone (A & # only via Tone).
- Call Sequence: This is the dialling sequence
for the primary and backup numbers ('ULC',
'UL', 'Long', or 'Fx Standard').
(In Canada, select ULC or FX Standard.)
If you need more information, look for "S001:00" in the
Commissioning Guide or Advanced Programming
Guide for your system.
- Prioritized Reporting (V4.4): Allows
transmitting alarms in a prioritized manner
(instead of all events in the order they occur).
- Alarm Report Mode: The operation of a
Bell-103 connection to a central monitoring
facility (built-in 300 baud modem/dialler):
+ None: Bell 103 reporting disabled;
+ Primary/Dual: Built-in modem/dialler enabled for
transmitting alarms to a central monitoring facility
(simultaneous with HSC/SIP, if applicable);
+ Backup: Bell 103 used only as backup if HSC (or
IP) failure.
(IP Connection--if  V3.3 panel and software): IP
connections (SIP reporting) are documented separately.
More: Refer to the installation guide provided with the
IP interface (may also be in PDF format on your
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Director CD).
(HSC): An HSC connection requires a high-security
communications module, and Mark-7 / DVACS service
(Canada). HSC modules require some set-up locally
through an LCD keypad (for details, refer to the
commissioning or hardware guide for your system).
 SIA / CID Test 
- Frequency (and Time/Day Settings): The
length of time between (and time of
occurrence for) automated trials on the
reporting channels (HSC and/or dialler--as per
the "Report Mode" above).
Messages to be reported for each area: Refer to
"Central Station", "Reporting" under “Areas and
Related Settings", Intrusion .
- HSC timeout: The duration for an
unsuccessful communication attempt through
a high-security module (Canada) before it will
be considered an HSC comms failure.
- HSC SIP Autoset: Future Use.
This allows 'staggering' the communications test times
for multiple panels. With "Automatic", the time will be
random from 1:00 - 4:00 AM.
UL Listed Systems: This must occur at least daily.
- Backup Frequency: Future use.
 SIP / HSC  (Central Monitoring
Facility)
- SIP Mode and SIP Account (V4.4): These
settings pertain to reporting to a central
monitoring facility through an IP (LAN/WAN)
connection or an HSC module (Canada).
SIP Account (IP only): This is obtained from your
central station rep.
SIP / HSC-IP reporting: IP-based reporting can be
through a standard IP connection, or via HSC-IP for
secure communications. The use of HSC-IP protocol
is determined by the panel firmware, IP module
type/firmware, and the IP module setup.
More: "IP Connectivity"
A Bell 103 (300 baud) connection can be used as
backup if desired (see "Mode" under SIA/CID ;
previous/above). With SIP reporting, an HSC/printer
module can be used only for printer functions.
SIP Reporting and Auto-Dial-Out to VEREX Director:
With SIP reporting to a central monitoring facility, the
"Reporting Mode" (see previous/above) is supported
only through an "IP" connection. With a modem
connection to a Director PC, alarms / events will be
transmitted each time a connection is initiated through
this software.
- SIP baud rate: The communications speed
for reporting to a central monitoring facility via
IP (SIP reporting).
- Full report by area: Reporting will be limited
to "Alarms Only" for areas set for this.
Otherwise, the "Reporting" setting for each
area will be ignored, and reporting will include
"All Events" for all areas.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
225
 Paging 
(Signal a Numeric Pager)
UK/ACPO: This feature is not supported with
UK/ACPO operation.
- Paging Mode: Future Use. This allows
enabling or disabling numeric paging, and
selecting the format/protocol to be used.
None: Numeric paging disabled.
Numeric semadigit w/handshake: North America with
handshaking.
Blind SemaDigit: North America without handshaking.
SemaPhone: Common for Europe.
- Pager Phone Number: This is the phone
number of the (numeric) pager to be notified
when any of the paging outputs are triggered.
Notes / Related Topics:
Select Outputs: Configuration, System, I/O
Mapping 
 I/O Mapping  (under "General System
Settings...", previous).
The specific events to trigger the pager are defined
under "Configuration, Output Points" (i.e., the
settings for the outputs that have been reserved for
numeric paging). For details, refer to "Programmable
Outputs".
The message to be sent to the pager will be the
"Panel Code" (or "Account UID"), and an outputst
reference number (1= 1 one in selected range; 2 =
nd
2 one in selected range; etc.).
It is very useful to print out a small alarm/output
reference (wallet or pager-size), for each system that
has numeric paging set-up.
Also See: [Management], Serial Reporting.
 Software-Based Text Paging (Serial Reporting)
 STU  (xL Panels;
UK/ACPO only)
This pertains to an internal (modular) interface to a
subscriber terminal unit.
- Enable line fault input: Whether or not the
STU has an output to indicate a 'line fail' to the
STU interface.
- Line fail polarity: Positive Fail
(Low=Normal), or Negative Fail
(High=Normal).
Facilities that include Door Control modules
provide integrated access-control (who can go
where and when) as a seamless adjunct to
security and monitoring features. The System
Access screen contains card-format settings,
and other card-access settings for a panel.
Two card types can be set up, allowing either Wiegand
/ Prox and Magstripe/barcode, or two types of Wiegand
/ Prox cards to be used with each specific panel.
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: System Access
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
System, Access (Under the specific panel
group and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.) Related
Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
View or change settings as desired for the
specific panel (see the selection-descriptions).
Settings Needed for C2000 Units (UK)





Token Type: Wiegand;
Card ID--Position and Length: Ignored;
Card ID--Bits per Card: 32;
Odd parity--Position/Start/Length: 32/14/18;
Even parity--Position/Start/Length: 1/2/18.
Disabling Odd or Even Parity-Checking
If odd or even parity-checking is not desired, or
the position and start values are not known:
 Ensure 'position' and 'start' are set to any
non-zero value (1-40);
 Set the length to 0 (zero).
Screen Reference
System Card-Access Settings
The System Access Screen
226
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Pick-List (bottom of the
form)
Configuration System Access
-Panel (optional): If the tree is not set to
show items on a panel-by-panel basis,
you will be able to select a panel here
(for systems that have more than one).
A "Panel Group" reference may also be
shown here, or you can set the 'tree' to list
configuration topics separately for each
panel. For more information, refer to "Other
Desktop Choices".
 Standard  and 
Alternate 
st
nd
(for 1 & 2 card formats to be used at the
same time)
Note: For a system set for intrusion-only (under Account Information),
the "Access" tab will appear as "Token Format".
Two card types can be set up, allowing either
Wiegand / Prox and Magstripe/barcode, or two types of
Wiegand / Prox cards to be used with each specific
panel.
All length values refer to number of characters for
magnetic stripe cards (MS), or number of bits for
Wiegand technology (W).
- Token Format: This allows defining
parameters for the basic card/token types (as
selected for each specific reader).
"Wiegand" pertains to cards/tokens for readers with
Wiegand data-format (Wiegand, Proximity, etc.).
Similarly, "Magstripe" pertains to cards for readers
with magstripe output (magstripe, bar-code, etc.).
------------------------- [Wiegand 26]: This automatically sets the cardformat values for the standard 26-bit Type-A
Wiegand format.
- [Wiegand 36]: This automatically sets the cardformat values for the proprietary 36-bit Wiegand
format.
Card Site (Site/System Code)
- Site Required: This enables/disables site code
checking. If selected, cards without one of the
specified site codes will be denied access.
- Site Code 1, 2, 3: If site-code checking is
enabled, only cards encoded with one of these
site codes will be allowed access at this site
(e.g., 0004, 1234, 9999).
- Position: The start position of the site code
(1-40);
- Length: The length of the site code (MS: 1-4;
W: 1-16).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Card Version (Version-Number)
This feature requires  V3.2 panel firmware and  V1.5
door/elevator controller module firmware. For an
additional setting, refer to "AutoUpdate Card Version",
under  Special  (to follow).
- Version Required: This enables/disables
version number checking (allows fixed-ID cards
to be re-issued if lost or stolen).
- Position: The starting position of the version
number (1-40).
- Length: The length of the version number (MS:
1-2; W: 1-8).
Card ID
- Position: The starting position of card ID
number (1-40);
- Length: The length of card ID number (MS: 4-9;
W: 1-32).
32-Bit Cards: Supported with panel firmware  V3.2,
and door/elevator controller module firmware  V1.5
(prev. 20 bit / 6 digits).
V3.2 panels: MaxID=999999999; V3.31 Panels:
MaxID=4 294 967 295.
- Bits per Card: The length of the card data in
bits (Wiegand), or characters (magnetic stripe).
This can be up to 40.
- Bits per Character (magstripe only): The number
of bits used to identify each character of data on
a magstripe card (future use; fixed as 4).
Odd Parity
These settings pertain to odd-parity checking, which
helps to identify card 'misreads'.
- Position: The position of the odd-parity
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
227
'checksum' (1-40);
- Start: The starting position of the data being
checked for odd-parity (1-40);
- Length: The number of digits being checked for
odd-parity (1-40).
Even Parity
These settings pertain to even-parity checking, which
helps to identify card 'misreads'.
- Position: The position of the even-parity
'checksum' (1-40);
- Start: The starting position of the data being
checked for even-parity (1-40);
- Length: The number of digits being checked for
even-parity (1-40).
 Special  (Miscellaneous Items)
- Door Fallback Mode: Cards to be granted
access if the door controller module is unable
to communicate with the main panel
database:
 None: No cards/tokens accepted;
 Valid Token Format: All readable
cards/tokens accepted;
 Valid Site Code: All cards/tokens with the
correct site code will be granted access;
 10 Fall-back Users: Only the users who are
assigned as 'FallBack Users'. For details,
refer to "Fall-Back Users...".
- Unlock All Doors On Fire Alarm: If selected,
all doors in all areas associated with this
panel will automatically unlock when a fire
alarm is detected by this panel.
- AutoUpdate Card Version: For fixed-ID
cards with a version number, this sets how reissued cards are to be handled.
 = Grant access to a card with higher version
number, and update the version number for the
specific user automatically;
 = Only cards that match the version number for
each user will be granted access (must update
manually when a card is re-issued).
To set the initial/actual version number for specific
card(s), refer to the section on "Users".
For additional related settings, refer to "Card Version"
(previous). Panel Version: This feature requires  V3.2
panel firmware.
228
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Equipment Settings (Pseudo / Internal Inputs)
Equipment Settings for a Panel
The Equipment screen includes monitoring /
signalling settings pertaining to various events
associated with a specific panel (and/or
expansion modules).
These can also be
thought of as 'pseudo' or 'internal' input points.
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: System Equipment
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
System, Equipment (Under the specific panel
group and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Things You Can Do
 View/Change an Equipment Selection
(Monitored Condition ): Select one from
the pop-up list at the bottom of the form.
Tip: You can also use the 'browse' buttons to quickly
scan through the defined items.
 Blocking an Item from being monitored
by the system: Select the specific item,
and then set its 'preprocess' to 'disabled'.
Grid View: Scan the list as desired. Tip: You can
resize or maximize the window as desired, or use the
bottom scroll-bar to view additional columns.
For a list of the specific events, refer to the Equipment
screen in the VEREX Director software.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
229
Configuration System Equipment
Screen Reference
Pick-Lists (bottom of the form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional): This is
where you select a specific panel-group and panel
in a multi-panel system where the 'tree' is not set to
show items on a panel-by-panel basis. For more
information on this feature, refer to "Other Desktop
Choices".
- Equipment: This is where you select an
internally monitored item to view or edit. This
area shows a reference number assigned by
the system, plus a description of the item;
On This Form
- Name: The event / alarm condition being
configured (these names are set by the
system, and cannot be changed).
- Preprocess: The duration that the condition
must remain in effect before an alarm will be
audited.
Transmit
- Off / Stay / On: The (applicable area’s) arming
levels for which a message of the event will be
transmitted to the monitoring station;
Sonalert
- Off / Stay / On: The (applicable area’s) arming
levels for which keypad sonalerts will be
sounded for 1 second when the alarm occurs;
Siren
- Off / Stay / On: The (applicable area’s) arming
levels for which siren outputs will be sounded
when the alarm occurs. (The “Siren Time” is set
through the System screen.) For details, refer
to "System Security Settings for a Panel".
230
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Areas and Related Settings
If you change any value for an area, this will cause that
area to be reset to its default / scheduled state and
arming level (this allows configuration updates to be
managed properly). To check or re-set status aspects,
refer to the "Area" status/control topic.
Areas and Related Settings
Areas allow setting up monitoring and
operating characteristics for all sensors and/or
readers in a common location (associated with
a specific panel). Dividing a system into
"areas" also allows user-authorities to be set
up on an area-by-area basis.
Elevators and Floors: It is best to set up unique area(s)
for use with elevators and the associated access
hallways. This allows the authority to control elevators
and floors to be separated from other features, and also
helps to identify activity/alarm messages pertaining to
elevator readers. (The authority to control elevators
and floors pertains to the "Door Control" authority
selection for the specific area.)
Area scheduling can:
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Areas
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
Areas (Under the specific panel group and panel--if
listed in the 'tree'.) Related Topic: "Other
Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
Report
 Add a New Area: Click [+] at the bottom of
the form, or right-click the form and select
"Add New" from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can copy all settings for an Area, and paste
st
them into another one: Right-click the 1 one (a
blank portion if in 'Forms' view), and select Copy.
Then, select a blank/new Area from the list, rightclick again, and select Paste. After 'pasting', change
the name and any settings as desired.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for an Area: Click the 'binoculars'
symbol. Then, enter the name and click
[Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
st
For details on setting up schedules, refer to "Schedules
for User Access and Area Automation".
Welcome
Things You Can Do
 Delete an Area: Right-click a blank area on
the form (If grid view: Right-click the item in the
list), and select "Delete". When prompted to
confirm, select Yes.
 Cause areas to arm and disarm
automatically at the desired times;
 Have user's reminded to arm the area,
and/or have an alarm transmitted to the
monitoring station if users fail to do so.
 Provide automatic Stay-to-Off, and
Off-to-Stay arming at scheduled times.
21-0381E v4.9.1
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Control
Note: The 1 area for each panel cannot be deleted
(i.e., each panel must have at least one area set up).
Before Deleting: Only unused areas can be deleted.
(Issue reports, OR go to the screens for Modules,
suite-security keypads, Input Points, Output
Points, and Doors, select grid view, and check for
the specific area.)
Related Topic(s):
 Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc.;
 Working with the Report Viewer
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Screen Reference
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
231
Pick-Lists (bottom of the Form)
Configuration Areas
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional): This is
where you select a specific panel-group and panel
in a multi-panel system where the 'tree' is not set to
show items on a panel-by-panel basis. For more
information on this feature, refer to "Other Desktop
Choices".
- Area: This is where you select an area to
view or edit. This shows a reference number
assigned by the system, and the name of the
selected area, once defined;
"Offset" values for each panel determine whether
multi-panel sites will have consecutive versus
repeating area numbers. For details, refer to the
"Display Offsets" value under "System Panels and
Displayed Item-Numbers".
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name for the area (e.g.,
"Warehouse").
 Intrusion  (systems with monitored sensors)
Exit Settings
Delay Times
- Entry: The duration that the monitoring of 'Entry'
points will be held/delayed to allow an
authorized entrant to disarm the area;
- Exit: The duration that the monitoring of 'Exit'
points will be held/delayed to allow the user to
exit after arming the area.
UL-Listed Systems: These must be 45 seconds or
less for residential installations, and 60 seconds or
less for commercial installations.
------------------------- Pre-Alarm: This is the duration that the system
will wait before transmitting alarms from this
area to the central monitoring station. During
the delay, keypad sonalert(s) will be sounded,
giving an authorized user time to "Silence" the
alarm at a keypad. (Selecting "Verify User" will
cancel the alarm transmission.)
This setting works only with sensors (input-points) that
support "Pre-Alarm Warning". For details, refer to
"Input Points—Custom Point Types".
Siren Time: To allow a pre-alarm warning to occur,
the siren time for the panel must be greater than 30
seconds. (Siren Time appears under:
Configuration, System, Standard )
To assign an area to be monitored by a specific
keypad, refer to "Expansion Modules".
- Extended: The duration that the monitoring of
'Extended' points will be held/delayed to allow
an authorized entrant to disarm the area;
232
This pertains to a sensor that is set as a 'Custom Point
Type' with the 'pre-process' defined as "Extended".
Related Topics: "Input Points--Monitored Sensors",
and "Input Points--Custom Point Types".
- Fail to Exit Mode (V4.4): This sets whether a
door closure and/or tripping an exit confirmation
button will be considered as someone exiting
the area (after it was armed manually). If an
'Exit' is not detected, the area(s) will NOT be
armed.
Notes: Selecting "None" disables all features
pertaining to "on fail to exit" for the specific area.
Selections containing an 'exit button' here pertain to a
'Custom Point Type' with its 'Preprocess' set as
"Command Point", and the input point itself set with its
command as "Terminate Exit Delay" for the desired
area (or "All"). Some locales include this by default.
- Stay on Fail to Exit: The area will automatically
switch to 'Stay' mode if an 'Exit' is not detected
after the area was armed manually. This cannot
be used in conjunction with 'Auto Arm on Fail to
Close' (under "Scheduling", to follow);
- Alarm on Fail to Exit: An alarm will be
triggered if an 'Exit' is not detected after the area
was armed manually;
Note: This alarm CANNOT be silenced like other
alarms. (Although, users with arm/disarm authority
can silence it through a "Reset" option.)
------------------------- Terminate Exit Delay: The 'exit delay' will be
truncated when the door closes after the user
arms the area and exits.
This is typically for smaller facilities where you can
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
easily determine if others are still present. For a larger
site, area scheduling is recommended (see
"Scheduling", to follow/below).
- Extend Delay on Fail to Exit (V4.4): In the
event of a "Fail to Exit" (as per the "Fail to Exit
Mode", previous/above), the exit delay will be
extended by two minutes.
Exit Confirmation Button: This will also cause "Fail-toExit-Mode selections" that indicate an 'exit button' to
log an event if the button is not pressed before the
original exit delay expires.
Other Settings
- Arm Warning Mode (V4.4): How the system
will 'behave' when arming while some input
points in the area are 'not OK' (i.e., open or
tampered).
Standard: No warning tones during the exit delay, and
users will not be prompted to bypass the inputs.
Warning Tones during exit delay: Warning tone until
end of the exit delay.
Warning Tones continuous: Continuous warning tone
(until silenced).
Warning Tones continuous & blocked arming:
Continuous warning tone (until silenced), and the area
will not arm.
Scheduled vs. Manual Arming: After an autoarming, E/E doors and E/E Routes that are 'not okay'
will trigger an alarm--since these inputs are not autobypassable. To stop this from happening, select "…&
blocked arming". As well, persons will not be allowed
to arm manually where either a non-bypassable point
is "not okay", or they don't have 'bypass' authority.
- Siren Squawk On Arming: Sets whether or
not 'siren' outputs for this area will be pulsed
briefly when the area is armed and/or if no one
arms the area at a scheduled closing time
(V4.4);
Note: The concept of 'fail to arm' applies only for
scheduled areas. (See Scheduling, to
follow/below.)
- Dual Custody: Disarming this area will require
two authorized user's to enter their ID and/or
PIN (only one needed for arming).
Central Station
- Reporting: Whether only alarms are to be
reported to the monitoring station, or all activity
(incl. area arm/disarm, etc.).
HSC: This setting does not affect HSC
communications unless it has been set to check for
this. Related: Configuration, System,
Communication, SIP / HSC 
 Monitoring, Numeric Paging, & Remote Mgt.
Settings
Director Software: This setting does NOT limit events
to appear in the monitoring window or to be available
for activity reporting.)
Arming-Levels: The area arming-levels for which
detected activity at individual sensors will be
transmitted is based on the input-point 'type' (or
Equipment settings for 'pseudo' points). How the
messages are transmitted is based on selections in
the System Communications screen. Related
Topics: nput Points—Monitored Sensors",
"Equipment Settings (Pseudo / Internal Inputs)", and
"Monitoring, Paging, & Remote Mgt. Settings".
Arm/Disarm Common Areas (V4.4)
Notes: At least 2 areas must be defined for these
selections to appear. Any areas not selected here will
be unaffected by these settings.
- Common to Areas, Arming Rules, Disarming
Rules: Allows setting up a relationship between
a common area (e.g., reception) and other areas
that share it (e.g., offices) such that arming or
disarming one or all associated areas will arm or
disarm the shared/common area, or arming or
disarming the common area will arm or disarm
all associated areas.
Arming/Disarming Priority (V4.4)
Notes: At least 2 areas must be defined for these
selections to appear. Any areas not selected here will
be unaffected by these settings.
- Priority with Areas, Arming Priority,
Disarming Priority: Allows assigning ‘priority’
values for specific areas such that each area
can only be armed or disarmed in the order of
their set priority value (1, 2, 3, ..., 15).
------------------------- Disarm Interlock Group: Sets this as an
interlocked area. Of all areas with this selected,
only one can be disarmed at a time (except by a
service technician).
Tips: Areas set to the same priority value can be
armed and/or disarmed in any order relative to each
other. Area arm/disarm relationships can be set to
work in one direction only if desired. (e.g., In Area 1,
select for priority with Area 2—but in Area 2, do not
select for priority with Area 1.) Exception: Such
area(s) must be selected for priority arming/disarming
with at least one other area.
No Priority Checking: Removes an area from
consideration under priority-based arming/disarming.
Typically for temporary use.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Admin
Visitor cards set to require an escort cannot be used
with Dual Custody. Dual custody is also supported
pertaining to gaining entry at individual readers.
Details: Go to "Doors, Readers, and Related
Settings", and look for "Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a
Door", followed by "Reader Mode".
Welcome
Report
Control
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
233
 Access 
(systems with access-controlled doors)
- Auto Disarm on Valid Token (V4.3): The area
will automatically disarm when a person with
disarm authority (Off or Stay as applicable) is
granted entry to this area. This feature can be
customized for groups of users as per their
assigned authorities.
Details: YourAccount, Authorities, (Area
Attributes), Access Schedule
 Authorities for Users/Entrants
V4.4: With Director V4.4, a scheduled version of this
feature appears under Scheduling, to follow/below.
Bad Card Action
- Block access to all users: Determines whether
or not all users will be denied access to this area
whenever a 'Global Lockout' condition is in
effect (per 'bad card/PIN' detection).
Related:  Account Information Bad Card/PIN
For details, refer to "Input Points—Monitored
Sensors", "Equipment Settings (Pseudo / Internal
Inputs)", and/or "Monitoring, Paging, & Remote Mgt.
Settings".
Antipassback
Antipassback (APB): A feature that blocks individual
cards from being used to:
+ Re-enter the same area, or;
+ Re-enter the facility from 'outside', and/or;
+ (Optional): Enter other areas;
…Unless they are recorded as exiting first--i.e., each
person must use their card/token at every reader they
encounter (that is set to "Detect Antipassback"). Tip:
This helps to protect against unauthorized card usage.
Note: Antipassback-controlled areas typically require
'Exit' readers on the inside (at each door).
- Strict Entry/Exit Enforcement: This enables
antipassback checking between areas.
This setting is used with high-security areas--such as
a cash room. With this setting, persons who do not
'badge out' of the area will be denied access to all
areas--even at readers not set for antipassback.
Without "Strict APB", persons who do not 'badge out'
of APB-controlled areas will only be blocked against
re-entering their last known area, or re-entering the
facility from 'outside' (see next setting).
- Ignore Outside to Inside Area Check: This
setting causes readers (that are set to "Detect
Antipassback") to allow entry from outside for
persons who did not 'badge out' of the facility.
Tip: This is typically for a parking garage 'area'
without an exit reader.
This does not override other APB conditions. The
234
area being entered cannot be their last known area
("APB auto-reset" will override this--see next setting),
and they must still 'badge out' of any areas that are set
for "Strict APB Enforcement" (see previous setting).
- Auto-Reset: This allows selecting whether APB
checking will be on-going, or for a set duration
only (see details).
None: Antipassback restrictions will be enforced on a
continual basis;
xx Min/Hrs: The antipassback restriction will be
limited to a fixed period of time after each person is
granted access to a specific area. (Each user's APB
status will be reset, avoiding undesired 'APB
violations'.)
APB Auto-Reset (especially of short duration) is not
recommended with Time and Attendance reporting
applications (including "Roll-Call").
Antipassback must also be enabled for each specific
reader. To do this, refer to "Reader 1 & 2 Settings for
a Door" ("Detect Antipassback" selection).
The antipassback status can be reset for a specific
user, or for all users in a specific area (to allow their
next entry or exit regardless of their previous APB
status). For details, refer to "Resetting Users'
Antipassback Status", and/or "Resetting the
Antipassback Status for Users in a Specific Area" in
the Control & Status Chapter.
 Scheduling 
Arm/Disarm Scheduling
- Schedule: The open/close schedule to be
associated with this area (or ‘none’). At the
scheduled 'closing' time, area keypads will beep
to remind staff to either arm the area and exit, or
delay the closing time (worklate). If neither of
these actions occur, an alarm can be
transmitted, and/or the area can be armed
automatically (as per settings to follow).
Tip: Pause the mouse cursor over a schedule in the
list to see the settings for that schedule.
To define a schedule, refer to "Schedules for User
Access and Area Automation".
A programmable output can be set to signal when the
area closing time is approaching. For details, refer to
"Programmable Outputs".
- In Schedule: The length of time before the area
will automatically 're-close' after being disarmed
inside of the schedule. This allows limiting the
time that authorized users can remain in the
area during the schedule (e.g., cash machines,
vaults, etc.).
- Out of Schedule: The length of time before the
area will automatically 're-close' after an
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
'emergency off' is performed
(i.e., being disarmed outside of the schedule).
This limits the time that an "Emergency Off" can
remain in effect.
- Work Late Input: When someone presses a
work-late button in this area (during the 'pre-arm
cycle), the scheduled closing time with be set as
{value selected here} from the present time.
Note: A worklate button is a custom input point with
its 'pre-process' set as "Worklate". To define a 'work
late' input-point, refer to "Input Points—Custom Point
Types", and "Input Points—Monitored Sensors".
- Limit Work Late to Midnight: User's ability to
'Work Late' (i.e., override the scheduled 'Close'
time) for this area will be limited to not extend
beyond midnight.
- Auto Arm on Fail to Close: The area will autoarm at the scheduled closing time. This cannot
be used in conjunction with 'Stay on Fail to Exit'
(described above).
- Transmit Fail to Close: Transmit a "Fail-toClose" to the monitoring station if the area has
not been armed at the scheduled closing time.
------------------------- Always auto disarm to Off (Blind) (V4.4):
When the area's schedule becomes active (e.g.,
start of workday), the area will fully disarm to Off
automatically. If not selected, the area will
remain armed until it is disarmed either
manually, or when someone is granted entry
(auto-disarm on valid token).
Split-Shift: If the area's schedule contains two or more
separate time intervals, the area will disarm at the
beginning of each time interval.
Also See: See the two previous fields and related
notes pertaining to "Auto-disarm on valid token..." (on
this screen/tab).
- Allow Out of Schedule Opens: Whether or not
users without 'Emergency Off' authority will be
able to gain entry and/or disarm this area
outside of its open/close schedule, and/or adjust
the area closing time (i.e., 'worklate') after their
schedule has expired. (For a non- scheduled
area, this concept does not apply, since only
'Disarm' authority would be required.)
or 'Off' or 'Stay' regardless of the user
authorities);
Note: This pertains to the area disarming
automatically when an authorized person is granted
entry.
Unscheduled Areas: For an unscheduled area, the 'In
Schedule' selection will remain in effect 24/7 (same as
a schedule that's always active).
- Out of Schedule: Sets whether or not autodisarming will occur for this area (see note,
previous) after-hours (i.e., outside of the
schedule), and what arming state will be applied
(per user authorities, or 'Off' or 'Stay' regardless
of the user authorities);
Tip: The 'auto-disarm' feature can be customized for
groups of users as per their assigned 'authority'
profile.
Details: YourAccount, Authorities, (Area
Attributes), Access Schedule
 Authorities for Users/Entrants
Stay-Off-Stay Scheduling
- Schedule: A schedule to be associated with
automated stay/off/stay arming in this area (also
see next setting).
Tip: Pause the mouse cursor over a schedule in the
list to see the settings for that schedule.
- Auto Stay Mode: Specifies that the area will
automatically switch from 'Stay' to 'Off', and then
'Off' to 'Stay', in-sync with schedule chosen
above. This will not occur if the area is fully
armed (ON) at the applicable times.
+ None: Disables this feature (same as selecting
"None" for the schedule.
+ Non secure Disarm to Off: The area will disarm
(e.g., at the start of the day) if it is in 'stay' mode at
the specific time;
+ Secure Disarm to Off: For the area to be
disarmed (to off) at the scheduled time, the area
must be armed to 'Stay', and it must have been fully
armed once since the last cycle (ensures someone
was in the facility to arm the area at some time);
+ Disarm to Off Pending First Valid User: The area
will disarm to off if it is in 'stay' mode at the
scheduled time, but the change will not occur until a
valid user is granted access into the area.
Related Topic: "Authorities for Users/Entrants".
Auto Disarm on Valid Token Mode (V4.4)
- In Schedule: Sets whether or not autodisarming will occur for this area (see note)
while the area schedule is active, and what
arming state will be applied (per user authorities,
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
235
 Counting 
( V4.20)
These selections pertain to monitoring the number of
people (or vehicles, etc.) in an area at any one time (per
access-granted), and whether or not the area can be
armed with persons still listed as being in the area.
User Counter
- Maximum: (0 - 16383) The maximum number
of users/vehicles allowed in an area before its
status will be "full".
Tip: This can be used to trigger an output (e.g.,
"Parking Lot Full" sign).
Minimum: (0 - 15) The number of users that
can be present with the area still being
considered 'empty'';
Count Mode: The method for counting users in
the area.
Normal: Area entering = +1, area leaving = -1.
Special (APB-based): Area entering = +1, last known
area = -1.
(Exception: Same as 'Normal' for "Timed APB" once
the timer expires.)
Blind Count: Counts each time a card/token is
accepted—even if you end up 'badging' more than
once.
Warning Level on Arm: Whether a person
trying to arm this area when it isn't listed as
"Empty" will only be warned, or whether arming
will be blocked altogether (manually vs. any
method);
User Counter Reset
These settings allow the user-count for a scheduled
area to be reset (to zero) automatically under certain
conditions.
Reset before 'in schedule': This resets the
area user-count automatically at a relative time
of day (a specified number of hours before the
beginning of the area's schedule);
Reset on Disarm to OFF: Whether or not the
area user-count will be reset automatically
whenever the area is disarmed to "Off";
Reset on arm to ON: Whether or not the area
user-count will be reset automatically whenever
the area is armed to "On".
Activity Monitoring and AutoArming
General Operation
Activity monitoring can be set to transmit an
alarm and/or arm areas automatically when
activity is not detected for a specific length of
time. Per the operator's selections, this
automated arming can:
+ Be triggered by "No Activity", and/or; "User
Count  a preset minimum value" remaining in
effect for a set duration (timeout value).
+ Pertain to inputs set as "Activity Monitor"
custom points, sensors on the entry/exit route,
and/or door openings.
+ Arm to ON or Stay
+ Occur with or without an optional configurable
delay time before arming
(to allow users additional time to either trigger
activity, or leave the area)
+ Can operate either any time, or only outside of
an Arm/Disarm schedule selected on the
"Scheduling" tab for the specific area (if
applicable).
Tip: The arming level(s) for which an Activity
Monitor input point will monitor activity is
determined by the "Level" setting for the
Custom Point Type (Off, Off/Stay, or "Always").
(The rest of the time, the point(s) will be treated
as a standard point (Burg., supervisory, etc.-per selections for the custom point type).
Locator: Config., Custom Point Types,
("Preprocess: Activity Monitor"), "Level"
and "Class".
Related:  Configuration Doors Extended
"Entry Detect";  Configuration Output Points
Event (counter reaches min/max);  Control &
Status Panel Control & Status Area Area Users.
236
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
 Auto Arm 
Steps
1)
2)
3)
( V4.20)
These settings allow having an area arm automatically:
 When a/the door closes;  When there is 'No Activity',
and/or;  When no one is present (user-count 
'minimum'). Auto-arming based on 'activity' and 'usercount' can also be tied to the arm/disarm schedule for
each area.
Define a "Custom Point Type", being sure
to select: "Preprocess: Activity Monitor",
and other settings as desired. Locator:
Configuration, Custom Point Types.
Set up any activity monitoring input
points, being sure to assign your custom
point type to each one.
Locator: Configuration, Input Points.
For each applicable area, make
selections as desired for the "Activity"
and "Auto Arm" screens.
Locator: Configuration, Areas,
"Activity " and "Auto Arm ".
Special
- Auto Arm on Door Close: The area will arm
automatically when any 'door' point in this area
closes (typ. used with bank vaults).
Extended Auto Arm
- Mode: Selections to have the area arm
automatically when there is no activity detected
(before the 15 min. closing 'window') and/or
when no one is present (user-count 
'minimum');
Screen Reference
Note: Disarm manually if needed.
 Activity 
( V4.20)
These settings allow enabling and configuring 'activity'
detection for each area. This:  Pertains to custom
'Activity Monitor' input points;  Can include persons
gaining entry at doors/gates;  Can include detection
via input points on the "Entry/Exit Route". More:
"Related", & "Auto Arm".
- Timeout: This allows disabling 'activity'
detection for each area, or setting the maximum
duration between activity-detections for it to still
be considered 'in effect'. (The status is reset if
activity is not detected for this duration.)
Notes: Immediate = 1 second. Short durations are
not recommended. This is the only method for
resetting 'activity' status.
- Include EE Route: Whether or not inputs on the
entry/exit route for this area will be monitored as
well as 'Activity Monitor' inputs;
- Include Doors: Whether or not persons
entering and leaving the area will trigger the
'activity' status as well (i.e., door openings).
- Alarm on No Activity (V4.4): This causes an
alarm to be generated if a timeout occurs
without activity being detected.
Related Settings / Features:
 Configuration Custom Point Type
"Preprocess = Activity Monitor";  Configuration
Output Points Event "Activity detected" (or 'not);
 Control & Status Panel Control & Status Area
Area Users.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
- Arming delay: Select a value here to have the
preceding auto-arm (mode) selection delayed
(not occur) for a set period of time;
- Arming level: This sets the arming level for
activity or user-count based auto-arming (arm to
'Stay', or fully arm to 'On');
Stay: Only perimeter sensors monitored;
ON: All sensors monitored.
- Arm if 'out of schedule': This determines
whether or not the 'activity' / 'user-count' autoarming will be limited to only outside of the
arming schedule () versus any time ().
Notes: The arm/disarm schedule is shown in blue text
on the right. This setting does not affect the
monitoring of activity. When enabled, activity
monitoring occurs all the time (for the arming levels
configured for the custom-point-type) and is available
for other applications (such as "alarm on no activity",
and output equations).
Related: Configuration Doors Extended
"Entry Detect".
More Tabs
 LCD 
- LCD Name: A shorter version of the name to be
displayed at LCD keypads. This is assigned
automatically, and can also be changed if
desired (max. 12 chars., plain text).
- Require Function Key PIN: Whether or not the
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
237
programmable hot-keys 6-9 & 0 will require a
user with "Function Key" authority to be logged
in. (Function keys 1-5 do not require ID/PIN
entry, except at a portable/wireless arming
keypad).
Tip: This setting is recommended to help protect
against false alarms.
For details on using the function keys on a system
LCD keypad, refer to the xL (panel/keypad) User's
Guide.
What each function key does is set up under
"Programmable Outputs".
To enable function-key authority for a user, refer to the
"Function Keys" setting under "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
238
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Area Groups (V4.4) and Multi-panel Arm/Disarm
Setting up Area Groups
(V4.5)
Configuration, Areas, Area Group
About Area Groups
Area groups provide an easy way to
arm and disarm named groups of
areas through an LCD keypad. You
can define up to 16 of these area
groups. Area groups of the same
name can be armed (On) and
disarmed (Off) across multiple panels
through a keypad connected to any one of the
panels. (Details appear at the end of this
topic.)
Enable/Configure: This feature can be enabled or
disabled through the “Area Group Mode” setting for
each specific panel. Related: Configuration, System,
Intrusion, Standard
 Intrusion Settings for a Panel
User Authorities: Only areas in the group for which the
user issuing the command has the required arm/disarm
authority will be affected. Ensure user authorities are
set appropriately.
Related Topic: "Authorities for Users/Entrants".
Areas Assigned to the Keypad: Similarly, each LCD
keypad can affect only the areas assigned to it.
For details, refer to "Expansion Modules".
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam* 
Alternative: You can also switch to grid view to see
all area group names on one screen.
 Delete an Area Group: Right-click a blank
area on the form (If grid view: Right-click the
item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column;  Click
[...] in the "Areas" column to view or assign areas for a
group.
Screen Reference
Pick-Lists (bottom of the Form)
- Panel Group & Panel references (optional):
panel--if listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one item at a time;
Grid View: All defined items in a list.
This is where you select a specific panelgroup and panel in a multi-panel system
where the 'tree' is not set to show items on a
panel-by-panel basis. For more information,
refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
- Group: This is where you select an area group
to view or edit. This shows a reference number
assigned by the system, and the name of the
selected group, once defined;
Things You Can Do
On this Form
MyTools Bar: Area Group
In the Tree: Configuration (+), Areas (+),
Area Group (Under the specific panel group and
 Add an Area Group: Click [+] at the bottom
of the form, or right-click the form and select
"Add New" from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for an Area Group: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Areas
- A list of the defined areas is shown on the left
side of the screen. Click the check-box to select
or deselect desired areas;
------------------------- Area Group Name: A suitable name for the
group of areas (e.g., FL2OFFICES).
Note: Since this will appear on keypad LCD screens,
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
239
Panels can be hardwired together, or
Setting up Multi-Panel Arm/Disarm (V4.5)
this can be 1 - 12 letters (all caps) and/or numbers.
Area groups of the same name can be armed
(On) and disarmed (Off) across multiple panels
through a keypad connected to any one of the
panels. This will apply only to areas for which
the specific user has the required authority.
Steps:
Tip: These steps can either be done by finishing all
steps for one panel at a time, or by doing each step for
all panels before moving on the next step each time.
1)
Ensure the “Feature Set” for the account is
set to “5” or higher.
Ref: Account Information, Standard,
”Feature Set”
2)
Set the panel’s “Area Group Mode” to
“Remote Area or Group”.
Ref: Configuration, System, Intrusion,
Standard, ”Area Group Mode:
Remote Area or Group”.
3)
4)
5)
communicate with the PC ‘via IP’ across a
network.
Related: “Panel Groups and Connection Settings”
For details on wiring, refer to the technical manual(s)
for your panels. To set up an IP connection, refer to
your IP Connectivity Guide. Tip: Manuals can also
typically be found in PDF format on your Director
software CD.
 Panels must have firmware version 4.42 or
greater.
 If an area is set to “Forced Arming” for a
panel that has an insecure sensor, the area
will arm, and then immediately go into alarm.
This also applies if “Bypass” is used where
any non-bypassable points are not secure.
These false alarms can be prevented by
setting the area’s “Arm warning mode” to
“Warning tones continuous and blocked
arming”, although any such areas would not
be armed in this event.
Set up the desired “Area Groups” using
precisely the same names for each panel.
For details, see previous/above.
Ensure a suitable user authority has been
set up that includes “On” and “Off” arming
authority for all applicable areas.
 The feature will function only if the panels
are presently in communication with the
Director software (“Stay Connected”).
Tip: Only the areas for which the user has the
applicable authority will be affected during a multipanel Arm/Disarm session.
Ref: AccountName, Authorities.
Related Topic: “Authorities for Users/Entrants”
 When arming through a keypad, the user
must select “Site”. (Selecting “Local” will
affect only the panel that the keypad is
connected to).
 Each panel will require at least one keypad
to view status and deal with all possible
alarm situations that may arise.
Assign the authority to the specific users
who will be using this feature.
Ref: AccountName, Users, Standard,
“System Authority”.
6)
When this feature is to be available, ensure
a communication session with the panels is
running that is set to “Stay Connected”.
Ref: [Communications], (Pending/Online),
Select the panels, [Edit].
Related Topic: “Activating Communications and
Transferring Panel Settings” (under “Panel
Communications and Updates”).
Requirements and Limitations
 This is supported for up to 30 panels at a
time that are all in the same “Panel Group”.
240
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Expansion Modules
Expansion Modules and Related
Settings
Things You Can Do
Expansion modules are devices that provide
support for additional inputs, outputs, and/or
special features. Some examples include:
 System LCD keypads (different types—some
with built-in reader);
 Door Controllers (typically supporting
2 doors / 4 readers);
 Elevator / Lift Controller (2 cabs, with one
reader per cab; max. 124 floors);
 Point Expander (8 or 16 input points;
and 4 programmable outputs);
 RF / Wireless Point Expansion (32 inputs);
 Fire Supervision module;
 Map/Graphic Annunciator;
 High-security comms / printer module
(uses Mark7 / DVACS service in Canada).
 Power supply: Intelligent monitorable power
supplies;
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete a Module: Right-click a blank area
on the form (If grid view: Right-click the item in
the list), and select "Delete". When prompted
to confirm, select Yes.
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Modules
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
Modules (Under the specific panel group and
Report
Before Deleting: If a module is deleted, or changed
with respect to the number of points or outputs, the
I/O range adjusts accordingly. As such, all
points/outputs pertaining to this expansion-module
number and higher will need to be reconfigured.
As well, only modules NOT presently associated with
any doors can be deleted. (Issue a report, OR go to
the Door configuration topic, select Grid view, and
look for the specific module.)
Related Topic(s):
 Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc.;
 Working with the Report Viewer
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
If a Module is Replaced
If a defective or damaged module is replaced,
be sure to identify the new module's "Serial
Number" to the software. (See the "Serial
Number" description for details.)
-------------------------
panel--if listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices".
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Welcome
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a Module: Click the 'binoculars'
symbol. Then, enter the name and click
[Find].
For each panel, up to 24 modules can be set up (or up
to 60 suite-security keypads), including support for up
to 32 doors.
Converted TDC/PDC Door Controller Modules: Up to
10 (combined) per system panel.
Note: To initially set up a system module, you will need
to know its serial number. This is typically hand-written
on a small sticker on the circuit board).
Attention: Some modules (HSC/printer module,
RF/wireless module, and Smart POD) require additional
programming locally, through a system keypad. For
details, refer to the commissioning or hardware guide
for your system.
21-0381E v4.9.1
 Add a Module: Click [+] at the bottom of the
form, or right-click the form and select Add
New from the pop-up menu.
Control
Then, issue a "Send to Panel" communications
session to transfer all settings to the
associated panel.
For details, refer to "Panel Communications and
Updates".
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
241
Configuration Modules
Screen Reference
Pick-Lists (bottom of the Form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional): This is
where you select a specific panel-group and panel
in a multi-panel system where the 'tree' is not set to
show items on a panel-by-panel basis. For more
information on this feature, refer to "Other Desktop
Choices".
- Module: This is where you select a module to
view or edit. This area shows a reference
number assigned by the system, and the name
of the selected module, once defined;
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name / location for the module
(up to 30 characters).
 Standard 
- Serial Number: The actual serial number of the
expansion module. Tip: The serial number is
typically hand-written (5 digits) on a small sticker
on the circuit board.
Converted TDC/PDC Door Controllers: Enter the
'address' of the door controller (as set via jumpers or
switches on the board).
- Family: Select the basic type for the module
you are setting up;
Tip: You can 'hover' your mouse cursor over a symbol
to see a description of what that button represents /
selects.
- Type: Select the specific type/subtype of
module here (where applicable);
- Monitor Communications and Tamper
Sensors: Whether or not module
communications, and the module housing
tamper sensor are to be monitored
(recommended);
- Module type when last communicated:
During each communications session with the
panel, the module types are checked and
displayed here;
242
 I/O (for modules that support inputs and
outputs) 
- Inputs: The number of input points (monitored
sensors) supported by this module;
Note: The first 3 inputs on a system LCD keypad
pertain to the built-in emergency keys rather than
external sensors.
Director V4.4: Input points associated with newerstyle modules use custom input circuits. (Related
links follow).
 Configuration, Input Points, Custom Circuit
 Custom Circuit-Types for Input Points
 Configuration, Input Points
 Input Points—Monitored Sensors
- Outputs: The number of outputs
(programmable electronic switches) on the
device;
Note: Outputs on a "Map" module pertain to firing the
LEDs on the module itself rather than triggering
external devices.
------------------------- Input Range: The input point numbers to be
associated with this expansion module.
- Output Range: The range of programmable
output-point numbers to be associated with this
expansion module.
Input and Output Range: The Number-Range for inputs
& outputs is based on the number of inputs and outputs
supported by each module, and the order the modules
are installed--plus the "Display Offset" settings for the
specific panel. For details on the "Display Offset"
value, refer to "System Panels and Displayed ItemNumbers".
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
 Keypad
(settings for LCD Keypads)

- Assigned to Area: The 'area' that this keypad is
associated with;
- Exit Delay When Arming: Whether or not an
exit delay is to be in effect when arming the
keypad's area to 'Stay' and/or 'On'. (Arming any
other areas from this keypad will be immediate).
'Stay' pertains to 'perimeter' sensors being monitored,
and 'On' pertains to all sensors in the area being
monitored.
- Entry and Exit Tones on Stay Mode: Whether
or not Entry/Exit tones are to be sounded at this
keypad while the associated area is set to the
STAY arming level.
- Annunciation (1st bar of Areas): The area(s)
to be monitored by this keypad (i.e., the areas
for which any alarms will be signalled at the
sonalert built into this keypad).
Tip: As you move across the 'bar' of area symbols,
the name of each area will be shown on the right—
allowing you to pick the correct ones. Alternatively,
click the pencil symbol and then select desired areas
from the small screen that appears.
- Arming/Disarming (2nd bar of Areas --V4.4):
The area(s) that can be armed and disarmed
from this keypad (by users with appropriate
authority); Also See: 'Tip', previous/above.
Note: This pertains to individual areas, as well as
specific areas within defined 'Area Groups'.
- Exit Delay (3rd bar of Areas --V4.4): The
area(s) for which the exit delay is to be signalled
at this keypad;
Also See: 'Tip', previous/above.
- Default Display Mode (V4.4): This sets what
is normally displayed on this keypad's display
(i.e., date only, or alternate between the date
and the presently defined "System Message".
Related: Configuration, System, Standard 
 General System Settings for a Panel
- Armed LED Display (V4.4): Whether arming
state will always be indicated via LEDs, or only
for a pre-set duration;
- Arming Tone Mode (V4.4): This sets whether
entry and/or exit tones will be signalled at this
keypad;
- Auto Silence Disarm Mode (V4.4): Allows
setting the keypad to auto-silence and/or have
all of the user's authorized areas disarm
automatically when someone logs into this
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
keypad;
- Verify User Mode (V4.4): Enables and
configures the 'verify user' mode/operation (i.e.,
whether or not users will have to enter their PIN
after silencing an alarm);
 Badge  (V4.4)
User Badging Mode
- Schedule: Select a schedule here to allow card
badging features to be different during a
schedule vs. after-hours.
- Single in Schedule: Selects an action to occur
automatically (arm, disarm, etc.) when a card is
accepted at the reader while the selected
schedule is in effect.
- Single out of Schedule: Selects an action to
occur automatically (arm, disarm, etc.) when a
card is accepted at the reader after-hours (i.e.,
outside of the selected schedule).
- Hold Time: Select a duration to identify a
prolonged card badging (badge-hold). (Pertains
to the items that follow.)
- Hold in Schedule: Selects an action to occur
automatically (arm, disarm, etc.) when a card is
accepted and 'held' in place at the reader while
the selected schedule is in effect.
- Hold out of Schedule: Selects an action to
occur automatically (arm, disarm, etc.) when a
card is accepted and 'held' in place at the reader
after-hours (i.e., outside of the selected
schedule).
- Hold PIN Prompt: This sets whether or not the
user will be prompted to enter their PIN while
using the badge-hold feature;
- Disable Single on Badge-Hold: This
determines whether or not the action defined
under 'single' (in or out of schedule) will also
occur on a badge-hold action.
- Disarm requires PIN: This determines whether
or not a selected 'disarm' action will require the
user to enter their PIN.
User Badging Mode for Keypad Modules with an
External Reader
LCD keypads supporting an external reader do not
allow for badge-hold functionality directly, so a double
(or triple) badging method is supported instead.
Note: This feature requires panel firmware v4.43 or
higher.
- Triple/double badge gap: This sets the minimum
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
243
duration you must wait after presenting (and
removing) the card/token each time to be treated as a
double or triple badging.
- Triple badge mode: If selected () this feature
requires a triple-badging, versus only a doublebadging if not selected.
Note: All other fields and available selections are the
same as for badge-hold mode as supported beginning
with Director v4.4.
 Access  (V4.4)
Access Mode
- Access Control: This identifies that the reader
is to be associated with an access-controlled
door. (Selection to follow).
- Access to Area: This is the area associated
with this reader
(as per the selected door number to
follow/below).
- Type of Reader: This identifies if this reader will
be used as an 'In Reader' or an 'Exit Reader'.
- Door Number: With "Access Control" selected
(previous), this identifies the door that this
reader is to be associated with.
Miscellaneous
- In/Out Station: This applies to a reader being
used to log cardholder arrivals and departures
(e.g., a time-clock application).
With this feature, the reader will not be associated with
an access-controlled door (so do NOT select "Access
Control" above).
244
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Suite-Security Keypads and Related Settings
If you change any value for a suite-security keypad,
this will cause that unit to be reset to its default /
scheduled state and arming level (this allows
configuration updates to be managed properly). As
such, configuration changes to active units should be
done only by arrangement with the occupant.
Related: Control & Status, Panel Control & Status,
Suite Security
 Checking Status or Controlling a Suite Security
System
Notice: Suite-security keypads are NOT associated
with any system 'Areas' or related schedules or
settings. As well, these units are NOT associated
with the module screen. All settings that affect suitesecurity-keypad operation are defined here. As well,
suite/keypad alarms are monitored only through the
Director software.
Note: Suite-security keypads and "Communities"
(Shared Users) are not supported at the same time.
Suite-Security Keypads
Suite-security
keypad
modules
provide
security and monitoring features for individual
apartments or offices (up to 60 per main
panel).
There are different types of suite-security
keypads:
 Newer models (V4.4): These keypads support 4
monitored sensors (zones/inputs), one
programmable output, and 3 'panic keys'. Uses
custom input circuit types. Future: A reader may
be built-in, or supported externally.
 8-zone: This version supports 8 monitored
sensors (inputs), 2 programmable outputs, and 3
'panic keys'.
 2-zone: The more affordable 2-zone units support
2 monitored sensors/inputs, one panic key, and
one programmable output.
Welcome
Report
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Suite Security
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"), Suite
Security (Under the specific panel group and panel--if
listed in the 'tree'.) Related Topic: "Other
Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
 Add a Suite/Keypad: Click [+] at the bottom
of the form, or right-click the form and select
Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a Suite/Keypad: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete a Suite/Keypad: Right-click a blank
area on the form (If grid view: Right-click the
item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Two-zone units require panel firmware V3.2 or higher.
With 8-zone units, panel firmware v2.7 or V3.2 (or
higher) is recommended.
Suite-security keypads can be mixed with other
modules if desired (the suite capacity is reduced by 5
for each system LCD keypad, and each other
expansion / application module added.
Support for suite-security keypads requires a 'featureset' selection of 5 or higher (via Enterprise software
licensing).
Related Topics: Account-Wide Panel Settings", and
"Software Activation and Licensing".
21-0381E v4.9.1
How to Get Here
Control
Before Deleting: If a suite-security keypad is deleted,
the 'user offsets' pertaining to this suite/facility
number and higher may need to be reconfigured.
(See the description for "First User Access" for
details.)
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
If a Suite-Security Keypad is Replaced
If a defective or damaged unit is replaced, be
sure to identify the new keypad's "Serial
Number" to the software. (See the "Serial
Number" description for details.)
------------------------Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
245
Then, issue a "Send to Panel" Configuration Suite Security
communications session to transfer
all settings to the associated panel.
For details, refer to "Panel Communications
and Updates".
Screen Reference
Pick-Lists (bottom of the Form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional):
This is where you select a specific panelgroup and panel in a multi-panel system
where the 'tree' is not set to show items on
a panel-by-panel basis. For more
information on this feature, refer to "Other
Desktop Choices".
- Suite: This is where you select a suitesecurity keypad to view or edit. This
area shows a reference number assigned by the
system, and the name of the 'suite' or keypad,
once defined;
"Offset" values for each panel determine whether
multi-panel sites will have consecutive versus
repeating keypad ID-numbers. For details, refer to the
"Display Offsets" value under "System Panels and
Displayed Item-Numbers".
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name/location to be
associated with the suite or keypad (such as the
suite number and/or occupant);
 Standard 
- Serial Number: The actual serial number of the
suite-security keypad. Tip: The serial number
is typically hand-written (5 digits) on a small
sticker on the circuit board.
- Keypad Type: Two-zone (compact) versus 8zone (full-featured);
Director V4.4: Newer suite keypad models support 4
monitored sensors (inputs), one programmable output,
and 3 'panic keys'. Uses custom input circuit types.
Future: A reader may be built-in, or supported
externally.
- First User Access: Users with access to suite
keypads are reserved in blocks of 8 (such as 1st
suite: users 1-8, 2nd suite: users 9-16, etc.).
This value is the lowest user-ID to pertain to this
suite/keypad. This number must be a multiple of
8, plus 1.
246
To set up the person associated with each user-ID,
refer to "Users (Entrants / Panel Users)".
Tip: If desired, you can automatically reset the users
for all defined keypads (or up to a desired one) to the
default of consecutive blocks of 8: Select the highest
numbered keypad to be affected. Then, right-click
anywhere on its form, and select Auto Fill User
Offset. When asked to confirm, select Yes.
------------------------- Last Communicated: During each
communications session, the software will check
the keypad type, and display it here.
- User Access Range: This shows the range of
user ID numbers to pertain to this suite/keypad,
based on the 'First User Access' value (prev.).
------------------------- Floor: The is the floor associated with the
suite/facility (or the lower of two for suites that can be
accessed from two floors).
- Additional Floor: Select this if the suite/facility
can be accessed from two floors.
- LCD Name: A shorter version of the name to be
displayed at LCD keypads. This is assigned
automatically, and can also be changed if
desired (max. 12 chars., plain text).
- Digital Account ID: Future Use. For central
monitoring.
- Report Mode: Future Use. For central
monitoring.
 Extended 
- Entry Delay: The duration that the monitoring of
'Entry' points will be held/delayed to allow an
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
authorized entrant to disarm the suite-security
system;
- Exit delay: The duration that the monitoring of
'Exit' points will be held/delayed to allow the
user to exit after arming the keypad.
- Extended Point Delay: The duration that the
monitoring of 'Extended-Delay' points will be
held/delayed to allow an authorized entrant to
disarm the keypad.
- Siren Time: This sets the duration for siren
activations for this suite-security keypad.
The Siren Feature: This pertains to keypad inputs
(and panic keys) set to trigger a siren condition—as
signalled by output #1 (must be set to one of the
"Area: Siren Fire" selections--which also sets the
'cadence').
Also see: Inputs , Outputs , and Panic
(to follow), and: "Input Points—Custom Point Types"
- Stay on Fail to Exit: The suite-security
system will be automatically switched to 'Stay'
mode if the user fails to exit after arming (i.e.,
if a door opening is not detected).
- Terminate Exit Delay: The 'exit delay' will be
truncated when the door closes after the user
arms the keypad and exits.
- Require Function Key PIN: Whether or not use
of the keypad function-keys will require a valid
keypad user to be logged in.
Tip: This setting is recommended to help protect
against false alarms.
For details on using the function keys (special
commands) on a suite-security keypad, refer to the
user's guide for the keypad.
To enable function-key authority for a suite occupant,
refer to the "Function Keys" setting under "Authorities
for Users/Entrants".
- Enable Quick Arming: If this is NOT
selected, keypad arming functions will require
entering your PIN (person with appropriate
authority). If this IS selected, the keypad
arming functions will NOT require PIN entry;
- Allow Forced Arm: Whether or not the suitesecurity system can be armed while any
sensors are tripped (i.e., Not OK).
- Auto Arm on Door Close: The keypad will arm
automatically when the door is closed. This
would be used only for a separate keypad that
is monitoring a safe/vault or 'valuables' locker.
------------------------- Allow Remote Silence: Determines whether or
not authorized operators will be able to silence
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
this suite keypad using the software (control &
status).
- Allow Remote Arm: Determines whether or
not authorized operators will be able to arm this
suite keypad using the software (control &
status).
- Allow Remote Disarm: Determines whether or
not authorized operators will be able to disarm
this suite keypad using the software (control &
status).
- Backlight Mode (V4.4): Future Use.
- Superintendent (V4.4): Causes
system/hardware-related alarms to be indicated
at this suite keypad.
 Activity 
( V4.4)
These settings allow enabling and configuring 'activity'
detection for each suite/keypad. This:  Pertains to
custom 'Activity Monitor' input points;  Can include
persons gaining entry at doors/gates;  Can include
detection via input points on the "Entry/Exit Route".
- Timeout: This allows disabling 'activity'
detection for each suite/keypad, or setting the
maximum duration between activity-detections
for it to still be considered 'in effect'. (The status
is reset if activity is not detected for this
duration.)
Notes: Immediate = 1 second. Short durations are
not recommended. This is the only method for
resetting 'activity' status.
- Include EE Route: Whether or not inputs on the
entry/exit route for this suite will be monitored as
well as 'Activity Monitor' inputs;
- Include Doors: Whether or not persons
entering and leaving the area will trigger the
'activity' status as well (i.e., door openings).
- Alarm on No Activity: This causes an alarm to
be generated if a timeout occurs without activity
being detected.
Related Settings / Features:
 Configuration Custom Point Type
"Preprocess = Activity Monitor";  Configuration
Output Points Event "Activity detected" (or 'not).
 Card Processing 
(Future Use.)
- Single Badge Mode: Future Use. Selects an
action to occur automatically (arm, disarm, etc.)
when a card is accepted at a reader associated
with the suite/keypad.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
247
- Hold Badge Mode: Future Use. Selects an
action to occur automatically (arm, disarm, etc.)
when a card is accepted and 'held' in place at a
reader associated with the suite/keypad.
- Hold Time: Future Use. Select a duration to
identify a prolonged card badging (badge-hold).
(Pertains to all items regarding "hold".)
- Hold Badge Requires PIN: Future Use. This
sets whether or not the badge-hold feature will
require the user to enter their PIN.
- Display Hold Badge Prompt: Future Use.
This sets whether or not the user PIN prompt
will be displayed for the badge-hold feature.
- Auto Silence: Future Use.
- Disarm PIN Required: Future Use. This sets
whether or not a user PIN will need to be
entered in order to disarm a suite/keypad.
- Limited Power RF: Future Use.
 Inputs 
- Point Type: The type of sensor/monitoring to be
used with each input connection (E/E door, PIR,
etc.), and whether or not the sensor is on the
perimeter of the suite/facility.
Tip: Pause the mouse cursor over a point-type in the
list to view its characteristics. Note: Use the
'Entry/Exit Door' input-point type for doors (door
sensors / contacts) on the perimeter of the
suite/facility.
Note: Suite/keypad alarms are monitored only
through the Director software.
Custom Point Types can be set up for special
applications (including extended delay). For details,
refer to "Input Points--Custom Point Types".
- Circuit Type: The type of circuit/wiring used
with the input point / sensor;
Two-Zone Keypads: These units support the first
panic key only (triggered by pressing * and .
- Audible Alarm: Whether or not an audible
alarm is to be sounded when a panic key is
pressed.
 Outputs 
- Type: The general type of event that will trigger
the output. These include "Area" (suite),
'"Point", or "Function Key";
Two-Zone Keypads: These units support output #1
only.
Function keys: Rem: 8-zone keypad: +1 or +2;
Two-zone: *+5. These can be assigned as positive or
negative—indicating whether the output will be set to
+12V (positive) or 0V/Gnd (negative) when the
function keys are pressed. Exception: 2-zone = Neg.
(0V/Gnd) only.
Area (Suite) Siren Applications: Use output #1 for
this.
'Toggle' Function: To have a function key 'toggle' the
state of output #1 (only), use the following settings:
Type
Function
Delay
Function Key (Positive Logic) Function Key 1 (or 2) None
- Point No. (for 'point' type functions): A specific
point to be monitored for the "Function" selected
below.
- Function: The specific event/action that will
trigger the output;
- Delay (for function keys): Function keys can be
set to either ‘toggle’ the state of the output
(activate/deactivate), or to trigger the output for
a set period of time (from 1 second to 1 week).
The maximum number of delayed function keys that
can be set up for each panel is 35 (i.e., that are not set
to ‘toggle’ or ‘1 second’).
Director V4.4: Inputs associated with newer-style
suite keypads use custom input circuits. (Related
links follow).
 Configuration, Input Points, Custom Circuit
 Custom Circuit-Types for Input Points
 Keypad Panic 
- Point Type: The type of alarm to be generated
(E/E door, PIR, etc.) when someone presses
each of the three panic-key pairs on the suitesecurity keypad. Tip: Pause the mouse cursor
over a point-type in the list to view its
characteristics.
248
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Doors, Readers, and Related Settings
If you change any value for a reader/door, this will
cause that device to be reset to its default /
scheduled state (this allows configuration updates to
be managed properly). To check or re-set status
aspects, refer to the "Door" status/control topic.
Introduction to Access-Controlled
Doors
"Access-control" (who can go where and
when) can be easily integrated into the system
using door-control modules. This controlled
access can be added for up to 32 doors per
panel (with 1 or 2 readers per door).
Door capacity and type(s) of door controllers supported
depends on your software licensing agreement, which
is managed through the 'activation key' on the parallel
(or USB) port of the server (or only) PC (and the
licensing software provided).
Elevators: The door capacity is shared with elevators
(max. 32 combined). Elevators also share the door
numbering (and panel memory space), and will be
listed along with the doors (editable under "Elevator"
only). Tip: You can define elevators at the end of the
list, or click [Filter] on the toolbar to show only the
numbers associated with doors.
Also See: Elevators (Lifts) and Associated Readers.
The entry-requirements for each reader / door
can be configured to meet your specific
requirements. As well, many items can be set
to a rotating schedule, allowing different
parameters to be in effect after-hours.
Two card types can be set up, allowing either Wiegand
/ Prox and Magstripe / barcode, or two types of
Wiegand / Prox cards to be supported (at the same
time) at each specific panel. For details on setting up
the card/token format, refer to "System Card-Access
Settings".
Wiegand-output reader keypads are supported for
Card+PIN (and PIN-Only) entry modes and signalling
duress. Matrix-style keypads (i.e., that require
additional connections) are supported only via
converted TDC and PDC door controllers.
To set up monitoring for an Entry/Exit door that is NOT
electronically controlled for personnel access, refer to
"Inputs—Monitored Sensors".
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Doors
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
Doors (Under the specific panel group and panel--if
listed in the 'tree'.) Related Topic: "Other
Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
 Add a Door: Click [+] at the bottom of the
form, or right-click the form and select Add
New from the pop-up menu.
Note: The door controller module must be already
defined. For details, refer to "Expansion Modules".
Tips: Check the 'Standard' and 'Reader' tabs for
basic settings. (Additional tabs contain optional
features.) You can copy all settings for a Door, and
st
paste them into another one: Right-click the 1 one
(a blank area if in 'Forms' view), and select Copy.
Then, select a blank/new door from the list, right-click
again, and select Paste. After 'pasting', change the
name and any settings as desired.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a Door: Click the 'binoculars'
symbol. Then, enter the name and click
[Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete a Door: Right-click a blank area on
the form (If grid view: Right-click the item in the
list), and select "Delete". When prompted to
confirm, select Yes.
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Screen Reference
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
249
Configuration Doors (First Tab Shown)
Pick-Lists (bottom of the form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional):
This is where you select a specific panelgroup and panel in a multi-panel system
where the 'tree' is not set to show items on
a panel-by-panel basis. For more
information on this feature, refer to "Other
Desktop Choices".
- Door: This is where you select a door
to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the
system, and the name of the selected
door, once defined;
If the Name is Shown as "Elevator" (and the
form is blank): These screens are
placeholders for elevators (click [Filter] on
the toolbar to hide elevator references).
"Offset" values for each panel determine whether
multi-panel sites will have consecutive versus
repeating door numbers. For details, refer to the
"Display Offsets" value under "System Panels and
Displayed Item-Numbers".
Top of The Form
- Name: A suitable name/location for the door;
 Standard 
- Module: The number (from the MODULE
screen) for the door controller module
associated with the specific reader/door.
- Port Number: Whether this is the 1st or 2nd
door on the selected door-controller module;
- Type of Readers: This identifies whether there
are one or two readers associated with this door
("In Only" vs. "In and Out");
Exception: For any door between two monitored
areas, select "IN and Out" here, and set the area for
nd
the 2 reader (even if it is not present).
(Provides an 'entry delay' in both directions when the
area(s) are armed.)
- Token Format: The card/token format
associated with this door. Up to two
card/token formats are supported for each
panel, as defined through the System Access
screen.
"Wiegand" pertains to cards/tokens for readers with
Wiegand data-format (Wiegand, Proximity, etc.).
Similarly, "Magstripe" pertains to cards for readers
250
with magstripe output (magstripe, bar-code, etc.).
For details on setting up the card/token format, refer to
"System Card-Access Settings".
- LCD Name: A shorter version of the name to be
displayed at LCD keypads. This is assigned
automatically, and can also be changed if
desired (max. 12 chars., plain text).
- Controls Access to Area, and; Out Reader
Controls Access to Area: This shows the
area(s) associated with this door--as selected on
the tab for each reader (to follow/below);
 Extended 
Unlock Time
- Standard: This is the duration that the door will
unlock when access is granted for a typical
entrant/user.
- Challenged/Extended: This is the duration that
the door will unlock when access is granted for a
user who is set for "Extended
Delay/Challenged".
Auto Unlock
- Schedule / "In Schedule" / "Out of
Schedule": The schedule and conditions
required for the door to unlock automatically
based on a schedule.
If a schedule is selected, the times 'Outside' of the
schedule are treated in a similar manner to 'Inside' of
the schedule. (For example: You can have the door
unlocked inside of the active schedule, and also
unlocked after-hours, but only if/when the area is also
disarmed.)
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
To have the door simply re-lock at the closing time, set
the "In Schedule" value as desired, and set the "Out of
Schedule" value to "Locked".
To have the door unlocking follow the area armingstate only, set the schedule to "None", and "In
Schedule" to either "Area is Off", or "Area is
Stay/Off", as desired.
If you do not want the door to unlock automatically
based on a schedule and/or the area arming-state, set
the "Schedule" to "None", and the 'In Schedule' value
to "Locked".
v4.80) Select this to disable arming all areas in
readers assigned to chosen doors.
Note: The XL Panel ≥ 4.58g is required.
Circuit
With converted TDC/PDC door controllers, this setting
does not apply.
- Reader Tamper Circuit: This is the type of
circuit/wiring used with the reader tamper circuit
for this door.
Not Required: This disables the reader tamper input
(i.e., the tamper input will not be monitored).
Converted TDC/PDC Door Controllers: These units
do not support dedicated/separate reader tamper
monitoring.
- Door Circuit: This is the type of circuit/wiring
used with the door contact for this door.
------------------------- Process Reader Tamper as Input Point:
Future use.
Other
- Door Arming Level: The area arming levels
for which the door is to be monitored.
Tip: You may wish to use "Stay and On" with doors
used to enter the facility, and "On Only" for all doors
within the facility.
- Bi-Colour LED Mode: Select this if the reader
at this door has a single bi-color LED (instead of
the two separate LEDs). This setting must also
be used if an 'arming station' is present.
Note: Arming-station wiring differs from other readers
(ensure the proper installation instructions have been
followed).
- Entry Detect: If selected (), persons will not
be considered "In" the new area if they are
granted entry, but do not open the door.
Tip: This affects the in/out status of applicable users,
and allows them to badge again to gain entry with
antipassback turned on (see "Detect Antipassback", to
follow / below).
Related: Configuration Areas
Counting and Auto Arm.
Note: This does NOT affect 'Activity' detection
(Cfg.Areas Activity).
- Disable *30 – Arm All Areas: (Director ≥
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
251
Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a Door
Defining a ‘Required Attendance’ Zone
For time and attendance reporting, a ‘required
attendance zone must be defined by setting
the "Area" as "Outside" for all readers used to
exit from this zone.
See the "Area" description for more information.
Note: For proper time and attendance tracking, there
must be no other way to exit from the requiredattendance area (all exit doors must have a reader).
Screen Reference
 In Reader 
(and 'Out Reader'--if applicable)
st
Note: "In Reader" pertains to the 1 (or only) reader
nd
for this door. "Out Reader" pertains to the 2 reader
for this door (if applicable).
The second reader, and In/Out processing is NOT
supported on the older (2-reader) version of the door
controller module.
- Access to Area: This is the area associated
with this reader (i.e., the area being entered
when using this reader).
Time and attendance reporting requires that all
readers used to exit from the "required attendance
zone" be set as "Outside".
This will typically pertain to the interior readers on the
perimeter of the facility, and may also include
additional readers (such as that allow entry to a
cafeteria or fitness room).
Card Mode
- Schedule, and In / Out of schedule: These
settings specify the basic method that
entrants will have to use to gain entry at this
door—i.e., via access token with or without
keying-in a PIN at the reader. If scheduled,
different entry requirements can be selected
for when the schedule is active versus outside
of the chosen schedule.
UID vs. Card Number: The system can be set to
require a full card number instead of the user-ID
number. (Wherever you see "UID", a card number
would have to be entered instead.)
Related Topic: Account-Wide Panel Settings (look for
"Setup", and then "User Logon Mode").
Card/PIN: "Card or PIN" means "Card-Only, or UserID+PIN". With "Card+PIN", the card must be
presented (does not allow UID+PIN).
252
Manual Disarming: For an armed area that is NOT set
to 'Auto Disarm on Valid Token', the user will also
have to access the alarm system and disarm the area.
For details on the "Auto-Disarm" feature, refer to
"Areas and Related Settings".
Reader Mode
- Schedule, and In / Out of schedule: These
settings specify whether one user can enter,
or if a second valid user (or designated
'escort') will be required to enter their
Card/PIN as well. If scheduled, different entry
requirements can be selected for when the
schedule is active versus outside of the
chosen schedule.
Toggle Lock/Unlock (all vs. authorized) V4.4:
Causes the door to toggle from locked to unlocked (or
vice-versa) when a card is accepted at this reader.
"All" means it will work for any valid card. "Authorized"
means this will work only for users with 'Door Control'
authority.
With "Dual Custody", two different users must present
their card and/or PIN (and neither of them can be set
as "Visitor--Escort Required").
When set to "Escort", a valid 'escort' can also enter on
their own by presenting their card/PIN twice. If visitor
cards (set to require an escort) are presented, visitor
escort processing will take over (e.g., with visitor
processing, you can set the type of cards escorts can
use). Users are defined as escorts (escort privilege)
through their authority assignments.
Related Topics:
 Authorities, Profile 1-4, Access, Escort
Privilege, and
Visitor (Escort Required). See: Authorities for
Users / Entrants.
 Type of Cards that can Escort Visitors: Under
"Account-Wide Panel Settings", look for "Setup",
then "Escort-Required Mode".
 Dual custody is also supported pertaining to the
disarming of an area. For details, refer to "Areas
and Related Settings".
Lockout
- Schedule / Mode: These settings specify
whether all users are to be denied entry either
while a selected schedule is active, or outside
of the chosen schedule. Tip: To disable this
feature, select "None" for the schedule.
Users with 'Master Override' authority can enter while
a 'lockout' is in effect. For details refer to the "Master
Override" setting under "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
Miscellaneous
- Arming Station: Select this to identify an
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
"arming station".
An arming station includes a Wiegand reader with
keypad, and supports additional functions for arming
and disarming areas, adjusting the area closing time
(worklate), etc. For details, refer to the User's Guide
for your xL system (panel/LCD keypad).
Note: Arming-station wiring differs from other readers
(ensure the proper installation instructions have been
followed).
- Enable Class Checking:
Selected (): This selection is required if useraccess to this reader is to be controlled based on time
of day and/or door class. See [Class Map] to
follow/below. Not Selected: Provides 24-hr
access/egress to all valid cards regardless of the
users' assigned schedule and door class authorities.
[Class Map]
To block after-hours access to this reader, select "Out
of Schedule" None. To remove class restrictions at
this reader (without bypassing each user's assigned
schedule), select A, B, C for both "In Schedule"
and "Out of Schedule".
Related Settings:
 User's door-class authorities and scheduling are set
under: Authorities, Profile 1-4, Door
Class. See: Authorities for Users / Entrants.
- Group Number: Similar to 'Door Class'.
Each reader can be assigned a value here.
Users can enter only if their assigned
authority supports this group number.
------------------------- Log APB Violation Only: This will cause
APB violations to be recorded, while allowing
the person to enter.
- Detect Antipassback: This enables /
disables the Antipassback feature for this
reader.
Report
Blue Text: With a card-enrolment reader (i.e., "Enable
Cards"), you can set whether expired and/or
"Enrolment Pending" cards will be affected (Also see:
'Related Settings', after "Option"--to follow / below).
The present selection for this will be shown in blue
text. Application Tip: 'Expired' cards also includes
cards that had been previously enabled for a set
period of time.
Access vs. Card Action vs. Denied: Valid cards that
are not affected by the 'Card Action' will simply be
granted access (i.e., the reader will operate like any
other reader). This includes cards that are already
valid (enrolment reader), and cards other than the
selected 'Card Type'. Cards that are NOT authorized
for this reader at this time (per user authorities), will be
denied access, and the card-action will NOT occur.
- Card Type: The type of cards to be affected by
an 'enable' or 'disable' card-action.
Antipassback (APB): A feature that blocks individual
cards from being used to:
+ Re-enter the same area, or;
+ Re-enter the facility from 'outside', and/or;
+ (Optional): Enter other areas;
…Unless they are recorded as exiting first--i.e., each
Welcome
[Card Action]
- Card Action: This is an optional feature that
sets a reader to enable (enrol) or disable
(invalidate) a selected type of cards when
accepted by the reader. You can select whether
or not the door will also unlock, and other
parameters (to follow.)
- Schedule, In / Out of schedule, and Class
A/B/C: These settings allow restricting
access to only the users with specific doorclass authority, and/or optionally blocking
after-hours access to this specific reader
(except users with 'Master Override'
authority). If scheduled, a different set of
door-class requirements can be selected for
when the schedule is active versus outside of
the chosen schedule.
21-0381E v4.9.1
person must use their card/token at every reader they
encounter (that is set to "Detect Antipassback"). Tip:
This helps to protect against unauthorized card usage.
Note: Antipassback-controlled areas typically require
an exit reader on each door.
Antipassback operation can be customized on an
area-by-area basis. For details, refer to
"Antipassback" under "Areas and Related Settings".
The antipassback status can be reset for a specific
user, or for all users in a specific area (to allow their
next entry or exit regardless of their previous APB
status). For details, refer to "Resetting Users'
Antipassback Status", and/or "Resetting the
Antipassback Status for Users in a Specific Area" in
the Control & Status Chapter.
Control
Never: Normal operation (same as selecting "No
Card Action");
Escort-Required Users: Users with "Visitor (Escort
Required)" authority (although an escort will not be
needed for cards being enabled/disabled);
Tip: To enforce the 'escort' requirement for visitors at
an enrolment station, ensure "Unlock Door..." is NOT
selected. The visitor can 'badge' once to enable the
card initially, and then the visitor and escort can use
their cards to gain entry as usual.
Temporary Users: All cards that are set with an
expiry date;
All Users: All cards presented at this reader (with
authority for its area).
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
253
- Unlock Door on Card Action: Whether or not
the door will unlock (plus the associated 'access
granted' message).
Note: This setting applies only as part of a 'card
action' taking place (i.e., the door always unlocks for
cards simply being granted access).
- Duration: This determines how long the
enabled cards can be used (from the moment
they are activated).
End of Today (Schedule 50): This allows enabling
cards for the present day only--while schedule #50 is
active ("in window"). If schedule #50 has no times set
for the present weekday/date, the action will not occur.
Note: Schedule #50 must be set up:
Ref: (My Account) Schedules
 Schedules for User Access and Area Automation
- Option: For 'disable' commands, "Duration"
changes to "Option":
Permanent: The cards will be disabled, and NOT set
as "Pending Enrolment" (they can be re-enabled only
if the account is set to "Ignore Pending Enrolment".
(See 'Related Settings', to follow / below.
Pending Enrolment: The cards will be set to allow
future re-enrolment.
(Permanent or Pending Enrolment) : Auxiliary
Output: Each time a card is disabled, the auxiliary
relay will be triggered. This can be used for a turnstile
card-capture application. Note: The aux. relay must
be set to "Door Opener" mode. The relay duration is
set in the same screen.
Locator (to follow / below):
Aux In/Out, Auxiliary Output Relay.
Related Settings:
 Account Information, Setup, Card Action
(Ignore Pending Enrolment).
See: Account-Wide Panel Settings.
 Users, Validation, Pending Enrolment, and
Invalid On.
See: Users (Entrants/Panel Users).
 Authorities, Profile 1-4, Access, Visitor
(Escort Required)
See: Authorities for Users / Entrants.
More Tabs
 Request to Exit 
Standard
- Request to Exit Required: Whether or not
the RTE (REX) button on the door-controller
module is being used.
- Log Request to Exit: Whether or not an
activity message is to be recorded each time
the RTE button is pressed.
- Request to Exit Circuit: This is the type of
circuit/wiring used with the RTE (REX) circuit for
this door.
Advanced
- Special Request to Exit Processing on
Panel: This puts the main panel in control of
the RTE processing (instead of the door
controller). This is for 'interlocked' doors
equipped with RTE buttons.
- Do not unlock on Request to Exit (bypass
door circuit only): This is for a monitored
door that does not have to be unlocked to exit
(avoids false "Forced Entry" alarms).
Tip: This can also be used with a motion sensor
instead of an RTE button.
 Alarms 
Door Held/Forced Setup
- Processing Required: Whether or not this
door is to be monitored for forced entry and/or
being held open too long.
- Door Held Open Time: This is the length of
time that the door can be held open (for a typical
entrant/user) before it considered to be an alarm
condition.
- Challenged/Extended Held Open Time: This
is the length of time that the door can be held
open before it considered to be an alarm
condition--after access was granted for a user
who is set for "Extended Delay/Challenged".
- Door Forced/Held Buzzer Time (V4.4): Future
Use. This sets the buzzer duration for door held
open and forced entry alarms.
- Door forced delay (V4.80): This sets the door
forced delay (None = 0 seconds, Immediate =
1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds,
254
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
10 seconds) before it considered to be an alarm
condition. Note: Door Controller (ADP) ≥ 2.5, The XL
Panel & ISM ≥ 4.58g
Held Open Alarm
 Interlock 
- Transmit / Sonalert / Siren: The area arming
levels for which a 'Door Held Open' alarm will
be transmitted, and/or cause a local sonalert
or siren to be sounded.
Forced Open Alarm
- Transmit / Sonalert / Siren: The area arming
levels for which a 'Door Forced Open' alarm will
be transmitted, and/or cause a local sonalert or
siren to be sounded.
- Interlock Required / With / Delay: With
"Interlock Required", all users will be denied
access until all of the (up to 3) other doors
selected here have been closed (and relocked)
for the selected "Delay" time-period.
Tip: This allows limiting the number of persons who
can enter in close proximity, and/or the speed at which
persons can enter a specific area.
 Special 
 Aux In/Out 
Auxiliary Input
- Mode: This specifies how the auxiliary input on
this door-controller module is to be used (none,
monitor mag. lock, or as an Exit/RTE (REX)
button used to trigger a door opener).
Process Panel as Input Point: Future Use. Allows the
auxiliary input for this door to be reserved (at the
module), defined, and configured as a regular system
input point.
Converted PDC door controllers do not support an
auxiliary input.
- Auxiliary Input Circuit: This is the type of
circuit/wiring used with the auxiliary input circuit
for this door.
MagLock Alarm
- Transmit / Sonalert / Siren: The area arming
levels for which a 'Mag Lock Bond Sense'
alarm will be transmitted, and/or cause a local
sonalert or siren to be sounded.
With this application, user 'access tokens' will typically
be a wireless wristband (with appropriate detection in
the door frame).
When a 'wandering patient' approaches, an alarm will
be triggered, and the door can optionally lock as they
approach (see next setting). As well, hospital staff can
be given the authority to cancel the alarm by
presenting their (applicable/compatible) token at this
door.
To assign 'wandering patient' status, or provide the
authority to reset associated door alarms, refer to the
"Special Attributes" selections under "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
notes, and references.)
- Mode: Future Use. This specifies how the aux.
output relay on the door-controller module is to
be used (signal Door Held Open and Forced
Entries, or to trigger an automatic door opener).
Note: The "Door Opener" setting can alternatively be
used with 'Card Disable' applications (e.g., turnstile
card capture).
Locator (previous/above):
In Reader (or out reader),
[Card Action], (Card Action=Disable Cards;
Option=... : Auxiliary Output).
Panel Control: Future Use. Allows the auxiliary
output relay for this door to be reserved (at the
module), defined, and configured as a regular system
output point.
Welcome
- Detect Wandering Patient: Select this for an
exterior door, or other area of concern where
unauthorized (and/or infirm) patients are to be
detected.
- Lock Door on wandering patient Detected:
With the "Detect Wandering Patient" selection,
this causes the door to lock when a 'Wandering
Patient' is detected. (See the preceding setting,
Auxiliary Output Relay
21-0381E v4.9.1
- Time: This is length of time that the auxiliary
relay on the door-controller module will remain
energized each time it is triggered.
Report
Control
- In/Out Station: This applies to a reader being
used to log cardholder arrivals and departures
(e.g., a time-clock application).
With this feature, the reader will not be associated with
an access-controlled door.
- Turnstile: Select this for a turnstile that is being
used with anti-passback and 'escort-required'
users. (APB will be ignored for the escort-allowing them to badge again to gain entry.)
Related:  In Reader "Detect Antipassback",
previous/above;  Account Information Setup
"Escort-Required Mode";  Authorities "Escort
Privilege", and "Visitor (Escort Required)".
- Do not Lock on Door Closure: Future Use.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
255
The door will not relock until the 'momentary
unlock' time expires.
- Force Buzzer Clears on Door Closure: Future
Use.
- Insertion Reader: Future Use.
About Video Events
Video events are specific events pertaining to
input points and doors that have been
associated with recordings from one or two
specific camera(s).
These appear with a
camera symbol on the left in the event
monitoring window.
Clicking the camera symbol allows viewing the
recording for that camera at the time of the
event. If a video that coincides with the event
is available, it will open and start playing
automatically starting at the time of the
triggering event.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for
March R4 DVRs.
 Video Events 
Note: This tab will appear only if at least one camera is
presently defined.
Also See: Setting up Video Events".
First Camera
- Select Camera: This allows selecting the first
(or only) camera to be associated with specific
events from this door.
- Alarm / Granted / Denied / RTE: Allows
selecting the type of events from this door that
will be associated with the selected camera.
Second Camera
- Select Camera: This allows selecting a second
camera to be associated with specific events
from this door. This allows for a second
camera-angle for video-events pertaining to this
door.
- Alarm / Granted / Denied / RTE: Allows
selecting the type of events from this door that
will be associated with the second camera.
Note: RTE is available in the Director ≥ 4.80.
Screen Reference
256
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Elevators (Lifts) and Associated Readers
If you change any value for an elevator/lift, this will
cause that device to be reset to its default / scheduled
state (this allows configuration updates to be managed
properly). To check or re-set status aspects, refer to
the "Elevator" status/control topic.
Introducing Access-Controlled
Elevators
With access-controlled elevators, floor callbuttons are disabled until an authorized person
presents their access card. When the card is
presented, the specific floors for that person
will become available.
Each system can include up to 32 elevators,
and a total of up to 124 access-controlled
floors.
Exception: The elevator capacity is shared with doors
(max. 32 combined). Doors also share the elevator
numbering (and panel memory space), and will be listed
along with the doors (editable under "Door" only).
Tip: You can define elevators at the end of the list, or
click [Filter] on the toolbar to show only the numbers
associated with elevators.
Panel/Firmware Revision: Support for elevators and
controlled floor-access requires V3.0 panel firmware.
Recommended:  V3.2 panel firmware, and  V1.5
elevator controller firmware.
Feature-Set and Licensing: Support for elevators
requires a 'feature-set' selection of 5 or higher (via
Enterprise software licensing).
For details, refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings", and
"Software Activation and Licensing".
Floor Wiring and Set-Up: Floor relays must be wired in
the same relative order for all elevators, and then
defined in the same order (such as lowest to highest).
To define system floors, refer to the floor configuration
topic (to follow).
The access-requirements for each elevator
reader can be configured to meet your specific
requirements. As well, many items can be set
to a rotating schedule, allowing different
parameters to be in effect after-hours.
For details on setting up the card/token format, refer to
"System Card-Access Settings".
Wiegand-output reader keypads are supported for
Card+PIN (and PIN-Only) entry modes and signalling
duress. Matrix-style keypads (i.e., that require
additional connections) are not supported for elevators.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Elevators
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
Elevators (Under the specific panel group and
panel--if listed in the 'tree'.) Related Topic: "Other
Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
 Add an Elevator: Click [+] at the bottom of
the form, or right-click the form and select
Add New from the pop-up menu.
Note: The elevator controller module must be
already defined. For details, refer to "Expansion
Modules".
Tips: Start with the 'Standard' tab, and then view
any additional topics of interest. You can copy all
settings for an elevator, and paste them into another
st
one: Right-click the 1 one (a blank area if in 'Forms'
view), and select Copy. Then, select a blank/new
elevator from the list, right-click again, and select
Paste. After 'pasting', change the name and any
settings as desired.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for an Elevator: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete an Elevator: Right-click a blank area
on the form (If grid view: Right-click the item in
the list), and select "Delete". When prompted
to confirm, select Yes.
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Screen Reference
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
257
Configuration Elevators (1st tab shown)
Pick-Lists (Bottom of the Form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional): This is
where you select a specific panel-group and panel
in a multi-panel system where the 'tree' is not set to
show items on a panel-by-panel basis. For more
information on this feature, refer to "Other Desktop
Choices".
- Elevator: This is where you select an
elevator to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the system,
and the name of the elevator, once defined;
If the Name is Shown as "Door" (and the form is
blank): These screens are placeholders for doors
(click [Filter] on the toolbar to hide door references).
"Offset" values for each panel determine whether
multi-panel sites will have consecutive versus
repeating elevator/door numbers. For details, refer to
the "Display Offsets" value under "System Panels and
Displayed Item-Numbers".
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable name/location for the
elevator (lift) cab;
 Standard 
- Module: The number (from the MODULE
screen) for the elevator controller module
associated with the elevator cab.
- Port Number: Whether this is the 1st or 2nd
elevator on the selected elevator-controller
module;
- Token Format: The card/token format
associated with this elevator (lift) cab. Up to
two card/token formats are supported for each
panel, as defined through the System Access
screen.
"Wiegand" pertains to cards/tokens for readers with
Wiegand data-format (Wiegand, Proximity, etc.).
Similarly, "Magstripe" pertains to cards for readers
with magnetic-stripe output (magstripe, bar-code,
etc.).
For details on setting up the card/token format, refer to
"System Card-Access Settings".
- LCD Name: A shorter version of the name to be
displayed at LCD keypads. This is assigned
automatically, and can also be changed if
desired (max. 12 chars., plain text).
258
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
 Extended 
 Reader 
- Bi-Colour LED Mode: Select this if the reader
at this door has a single bi-color LED (instead of
the two separate LEDs).
(Elevator (Lift) Reader Settings)
Note: Arming-stations are not supported in elevator
cabs.
- Insertion Type Reader: Ensures the access
card is not read more than once when
inserted and removed.
- Floor Button Monitor: Whether or not other
call buttons are to be disabled when a floor is
selected (requires call-button-reporting wiring
between the elevator unit and our floor relay board).
- Floor Button Enabled Time: This is the
duration that the allowed floor call-buttons will
be available after a valid card is presented at the
reader in the elevator (lift) cab.
- Tamper Circuit: The type of circuit/wiring
associated with the reader tamper
input/sensor. ("Not Required" means this
connection is not being used/monitored.)
- In Area: This is the area associated with this
elevator cab.
Time and attendance reporting requires that all
readers used to exit from the "required attendance
zone" be set as "Outside".
This will typically pertain to the interior readers on the
perimeter of the facility, and may also include
additional readers (such as that allow entry to a
cafeteria or fitness room).
Elevator Area: It is best to set up unique area(s) for
use with elevators and the associated access
hallways. This allows the authority to control elevators
and floors to be separated from other features, and
also helps to identify activity/alarm messages
pertaining to elevator readers. (The authority to
control elevators and floors pertains to the "Door
Control" authority selection for the specific area.)
To create a new area, and set up its operating
characteristics, refer to "Areas and Related Settings".
For details on user authorities, refer to "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
Card Mode
- Schedule, and In / Out of schedule: These
settings specify the basic method required to
satisfy the elevator reader—i.e., present
access token and/or enter a PIN at the
keypad. If scheduled, different access
requirements can be selected for when the
schedule is active versus outside of the
chosen schedule.
UID vs. Card Number: The system can be set to
require a full card number instead of the user-ID
number. (Wherever you see "UID", a card number
would have to be entered instead.)
Related Topic: Account-Wide Panel Settings (look for
"Setup", and then "User Logon Mode").
Card/PIN: "Card or PIN" means "Card-Only, or UserID+PIN". With "Card+PIN", the card must be
presented (does not allow UID+PIN).
Manual Disarming: For an armed area that is NOT set
to 'Auto Disarm on Valid Token', the user will also
have to access the alarm system and disarm the area.
For details on the "Auto-Disarm" feature, refer to
"Areas and Related Settings".
Reader Mode
- Schedule, and In / Out of schedule: These
settings specify whether one user can enter,
or if a second valid user (or designated
'escort') will be required to enter their
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
259
Card/PIN as well. If scheduled, different entry
requirements can be selected for when the
schedule is active versus outside of the
chosen schedule.
With "Dual Custody", two different users must present
their card and/or PIN (and neither of them can be set
as "Visitor--Escort Required").
When set to "Escort", a valid 'escort' can also enter on
their own by presenting their card/PIN twice. If visitor
cards (set to require an escort) are presented, visitor
escort processing will take over (e.g., with visitor
processing, you can set the type of cards escorts can
use). Users are defined as escorts (escort privilege)
through their authority assignments.
Related Topics:
 Authorities, Profile 1-4, Access,
Escort Privilege, and Visitor (Escort Required).
See: Authorities for Users / Entrants.
 Type of Cards that can Escort Visitors: Under
"Account-Wide Panel Settings", look for "Setup",
then "Escort-Required Mode".
 Dual custody is also supported pertaining to the
disarming of an area. For details, refer to "Areas
and Related Settings".
Lockout
- Schedule and Mode: These settings specify
whether all users are to be denied access
either while a selected schedule is active, or
outside of the chosen schedule. Tip: To
disable this feature, select "None" for the
schedule.
Users with 'Master Override' authority can access
floors while a 'lockout' is in effect. For details refer to
the "Master Override" setting under "Authorities for
Users/Entrants".
Miscellaneous
- Enable Class Checking:
Selected (): This selection is required if useraccess to this reader is to be controlled based on
time of day and/or door class. See [Class Map] to
follow/below. Not Selected: Provides 24-hr access
to the user's assigned floors (ignores the users'
assigned schedule and door class authorities).
[Class Map]
- Schedule, In / Out of schedule, and Class
A/B/C: These settings allow restricting
access to only the users with specific doorclass authority, and/or optionally blocking
after-hours access to this specific reader
(except users with 'Master Override'
authority). If scheduled, a different set of
door-class requirements can be selected for
260
when the schedule is active versus outside of
the chosen schedule.
To block after-hours access to this reader, select "Out
of Schedule" None. To remove class restrictions at
this reader (without bypassing each user's assigned
schedule), select A, B, C for both "In Schedule"
and "Out of Schedule".
Related Settings:
 User's door-class authorities and scheduling are set
under: Authorities, Profile 1-4, Door
Class. See: Authorities for Users / Entrants.
- Group Number: Similar to 'Door Class'.
Each reader can be assigned a value here.
Users can access floors through this elevator
(lift) cab only if their assigned authority
supports this group number.
------------------------- Log APB Violation Only: This will cause
APB violations to be recorded, while allowing
the person to enter.
- Detect Antipassback: This enables /
disables the Antipassback feature for this
reader.
Antipassback (APB): A feature that blocks individual
cards from being used to:
+ Re-enter the same area, or;
+ Re-enter the facility from 'outside', and/or;
+ (Optional): Enter other areas;
…Unless they are recorded as exiting first--i.e., each
person must use their card/token at every reader they
encounter (that is set to "Detect Antipassback"). Tip:
This helps to protect against unauthorized card usage.
Notice: Antipassback pertaining to elevator
controllers is generally used only in special
applications where the floor relays are used to
control access to a set of doors instead of an
elevator and its associated floor call-buttons.
Note: Antipassback-controlled areas typically require
an exit reader on each door.
Antipassback operation can be customized on an
area-by-area basis. For details, refer to
"Antipassback" under "Areas and Related Settings".
The antipassback status can be reset for a specific
user, or for all users in a specific area (to allow their
next entry or exit regardless of their previous APB
status). For details, refer to "Resetting Users'
Antipassback Status", and/or "Resetting the
Antipassback Status for Users in a Specific Area" in
the Control & Status Chapter.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
cards/tokens accepted;
 Valid Site Code: All cards/tokens with the
correct site code will be granted access;
 10 Fall-back Users: Only the users who are
assigned as 'FallBack Users'. For details,
refer to "Fall-Back Users...".
- Desecure on Comms Fail: Whether or not all
floor call-buttons are to be enabled whenever
the elevator controller or floor relay board has
lost communications.
- Relay Off When Desecure: This sets the
normal physical state of the floor selection
relays.
 Inputs 
- Fire Required and Fire Circuit: Whether or
not the "Fire" input is being used, and the type
of circuit/wiring associated with it.
- Bypass Required and Bypass Circuit:
Whether or not the "Bypass" (manual
override) input is being used, and the type of
circuit/wiring associated with it. (Triggering
the bypass input enables the call button for all
floors for this elevator.)
- Panic Required and Panic Circuit: Whether
or not the "Panic" input is being used, and the
type of circuit/wiring associated with it. This
input triggers a "panic"-type of alarm.
- Floor Button to Enable: This identifies the
action to occur in the event of a fire (enable a
floor call-button, all floors, etc.).
 Floors 
- This screen lists all defined floors in the system.
Under "Control Access To", select the ones that
can be accessed from this elevator (lift) cab.
(i.e., that are physically connected.)
Tip: The floor relay board number/address, and relay
numbers are listed for your convenience.
Attention: Floors need to have been defined in the
same relative order as per the common relay-wiring
order for all elevator cabs (such as from lowest to
highest). To define system floors, refer to the floor
configuration topic (to follow).
 = Relays normally powered (held open), and
powered down only when access to floors is allowed
(and during power failure);
 = Relays normally de-energized (closed), and
energized only when access to floors is allowed. (No
floor access during power failure).
Wiring: Relays will typically be wired differently
based on this setting:
 Requires COM – N/C wiring;
 Requires COM – N/O wiring.
Elevator controller floor selection relays must also be
wired to the floor call buttons in the same relative
order for all elevator (lift) cabs (such as from lowest to
highest accessed). The floors must then be entered in
the same order overall (such as from lowest to
highest). To set up floors, refer to the floor
configuration topic.
 Desecure 
Cab Desecure Schedule
- Schedule: This is a schedule to determine the
times when an access card will be required to
use the floor call-buttons.
To define a schedule, refer to "Schedules for User
Access and Area Automation".
- Mode: Whether free access to floors is to be
provided inside or outside of schedule chosen
above (if applicable).
Communication Fail
- Fallback Mode: Cards to be granted access if
the elevator controller module is unable to
communicate with the main panel database:
 None: No cards/tokens accepted;
 Valid Token Format: All readable
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
261
Floors (Pertaining to Access-Controlled Elevators / Lifts)
If you change the name or other setting for a floor, this
will cause that floor to be reset to its default / scheduled
state (this allows configuration updates to be managed
properly). To check or re-set the floor state (secure vs.
desecure), refer to the "Floor" status/control topic.
Access-Controlled Floors
Systems with elevator controllers can include
up to 124 access-controlled floors. These can
be in a single building, or the total number of
floors between multiple buildings.
Each system supports up to 32 elevator cabs (max. 32
doors plus elevators in total). To set up an elevator and
its associated reader, refer to "Elevators (Lifts) and
Associated Readers".
Panel/Firmware Revision: Support for elevators and
controlled floor-access requires V3.0 panel firmware.
Recommended:  V3.2 panel firmware, and  V1.5
elevator controller firmware.
Feature-Set and Licensing: Support for elevators and
floors requires a 'feature-set' selection of 5 or higher
(via Enterprise software licensing).
For details, refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings", and
"Software Activation and Licensing".
Wiring: Elevator controller floor selection relays must
be wired to the floor call buttons in the same relative
order for all elevator (lift) cabs (such as from lowest to
highest accessed). The floors must then be entered
here in the same order overall (such as from lowest to
highest). For an elevator setting that also affects floor
relay wiring, look for the "Relay Off When Desecure"
setting under "Elevators (Lifts) and Associated
Readers".
262
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Floors
In the Tree: YourAccount, Floors.
Note: This screen uses a custom grid view. (Forms
view does not apply here.)
Things You Can Do
 Add a Floor: Click within the name field for
a blank/grey floor-row in the table, and enter
your desired name.
Attention: Floors must be entered in the same
relative order as per the floor-selection relay wiring
for all elevators (such as from lowest to highest).
 View/Change an Existing One: Scan the
list to view or change settings as desired.
 Delete a Floor: Right-click the item in the
list, and select "Delete". When prompted to
confirm, select Yes.
Before Deleting: Only unused floors can be deleted.
(Issue reports, OR go to the screens for Elevators,
user authorities, and suite-security keypads,
select grid view, and check for the specific floor.)
Related Topic(s):
 Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc.;
 Working with the Report Viewer
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
YourAccount Floors
Screen Reference
- Building Name: A suitable description
for the building or complex;
- Floor: The first column contains a
description for each floor. (Click within
the name field, and type a suitable
name);
To change the name for a floor, select the
present name, and enter the new name.
The top cell in this column does not pertain
to a floor.
Sort Order: To maintain proper order
wherever floors are sorted by name, be
sure to select names accordingly (e.g., "15
Terrace", "14 Acme Offices", ..."01
Parking2").
- Floor Desecure Schedule: This allows
assigning individual schedules to floors (for
finer control than the next field provides).
(Select a schedule here if desired and/or refer
to the next field.)
Note: If more than one schedule is selected for a
floor, free access to the floor will be provided during all
times covered by any (one or more) of the schedules.
- Desecure Schedule 1/2/3: These columns
allow selecting up to three schedules during
which free access will be provided to any floors
selected. (Select a schedule at the top, and
then click each floor to be associated with that
schedule.)
Access to all floors from a specific elevator (lift) cab
can also be scheduled if desired. For details, refer to
"Elevators (Lifts) and Associated Readers".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
263
Input Points—Monitored Sensors
Input Points and Related Settings
Input points are the system’s way of monitoring
devices
that
detect
smoke,
motion,
door/window openings etc. in each area. The
Input Point screen allows fine-tuning basic
monitoring characteristics, identifying the area
the sensor is in, and whether or not it is on the
perimeter of that area.
Input Capacity Detail:
ISM (square mainboard): 128 (120 external to the
main panel). All of these can be wireless if keypads
are set to zero each.
xL (narrow mainboard): 256 (all can be external /
wireless if the main panel and keypads are set to 0
each).
Also See:
- Expansion Modules (I/O tab, then "Inputs:")
- System Settings for each Panel (I/O Mapping tab)
The point reset time is set globally for each account.
Related: Account Information, Setup, "Point
Reset Time"
 Account-Wide Panel Settings
Emergency Keys: The first 3 inputs on system keypads
pertain to the built-in emergency keys rather than
external sensors.
Door Controllers and Suite-Security Keypads: These
devices have built in dedicated inputs that are set up
directly under "Doors" or "Suite Security".
Many pre-defined input point types are
provided, in addition to custom input point
types for fine tuning the monitoring characteristics to meet your specific requirements.
Custom point-types also allow setting up:
 "Command Points"--allowing a button or sensor to
command a device (e.g., area, door) on any/all
panels;
 Extended-delay sensors;
 Vault/Safe input-points;
 Guard-tour points (for guard-tour stations);
 Area arm/disarm keyswitches, and;
 Work-late buttons;
 Battery Fail;
 Mains Fail.
To set up custom input point types, refer to "Input
Points—Custom Point Types".
The system also supports 'Equipment' settings which
can be thought of as 'pseudo' or 'internal' input points.
(For details, refer to the preceding topic.)
264
Note: Input points associated with certain types of
modules (HSC, Smart, and RF / wireless) require
additional programming locally, through a system
keypad. For details, refer to the commissioning or
hardware guide for your system.
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Input Points
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"), Input
Points (Under the specific panel group and panel--if
listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
 Add an Input Point: Click [+] at the bottom
of the form, or right-click the form and select
Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for an Input Point: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete an Input Point: Right-click a blank
area on the form (If grid view: Right-click the
item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Before Deleting: Input points can be deleted only if
NOT referenced by a programmable output. (Issue
an output point report, OR go to the Output Points
configuration screen, select grid view, and check for
the specific input point.)
Related Topic(s):
 Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc.;
 Working with the Report Viewer
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Screen Reference
Configuration Input Points
Pick-Lists (Bottom of the Form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional; bottom
of the form): This is where you select a specific
panel-group and panel in a multi-panel system
where the 'tree' is not set to show items on a panelby-panel basis. For more information on this
feature, refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
- Input Point (bottom of form): This is where you
select an input-point to view or edit. This area
shows a reference number assigned by the
system, and the name of the selected 'input',
once defined;
The input-point numbers are assigned by the system
when a module (POD) that supports input points is set
up. The number assigned to each input-point is based
on the module installation order, and the number of
input-points supported by (reserved for) each module.
Tip: The "Module" and "Range" settings show the
device associated with the input-point, and the range
of input-points for that device.
"Offset" values for each panel determine whether
multi-panel sites will have consecutive versus
repeating input-point-numbers. For details, refer to
the "Display Offsets" value under "System Panels and
Displayed Item-Numbers".
Top of the Form
- Name: A suitable description for the input point
indicating its location and/or usage, etc.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
265
types pertain to an individual panel.
Standard 
- LCD Name: A shorter version of the name to be
displayed at LCD keypads. This is assigned
automatically, and can also be changed if
desired (max. 12 chars., plain text).
Command Points: For input points set as "Point Type:
Custom Type: Command Point", the LCD name will
be replaced with point-command data, and will not be
editable.
- Module: This is "Panel" (a system panel) or the
module/POD associated with the specific input
point number.
------------------------- Range: This is the total range of input point
numbers associated with the specific
module/POD (as defined by the software when
each module is set up).
Tip: The number in brackets, such as "(1)", pertains
to the location of the physical input-point connection
on the specific module.
- Point Type: The type of sensor and/or the type
of monitoring to be used with this point (E/E
door, PIR, etc.), and to identify the input points
that are on the perimeter of an area. The
selections include many pre-defined types, plus
‘custom types 80-99’ that can be set up
manually. Tip: Pause the mouse cursor over a
point-type in the list to view its associated
characteristics.
To set up a garage/extended-delay input, or other
custom type of sensor, refer to "Input Points--Custom
Point Types".
EE Door: This pertains to entry/exit doors that are
monitored by the system, but not electronically
controlled for personnel access. To set up an accesscontrolled door (and its dedicated inputs), refer to
"Doors, Readers, and Related Settings".
FAP Timing: False alarm prevention inputs are
ignored unless triggered continuously for 10 seconds,
or if any (same/other) FAP sensor is tripped within 20
nd
minutes. Note: If the 2 sensor is not FAP, this will
trigger an alarm on its own (at any time).
- Circuit Type: The type of circuit/wiring used
with the input point / sensor;
Director V4.4: Input points associated with newerstyle modules use custom input circuits. (Related
links follow).
 Configuration, Input Points, Custom Circuit
 Custom Circuit-Types for Input Points
Fire Panels with Removable Terminal Blocks: Form C
-- Dual EOL wiring/supervision is required by ULC
(Canada), and recommended for all installations. The
actual wiring must also match the selection here.
- Event Instruction: This allows assigning
instruction text to appear in the
comment/resolution screen when an operator is
acknowledging an alarm from this sensor (input
point);
Note: To be available here, instructions must be
defined first:
Ref: Account Information Event Instruction
 Alarm / Event Instructions
Instructions Associated with Specific Event Messages:
An instruction can also be associated with specific
types of event messages (although the instruction
selected here will take precedence--where applicable).
Ref: Account Information Event Priority
 Customizing How Events are Displayed (Event
Priority)
Area
- Area: The area that this point is associated with
(for doors adjoining two areas, see the next
item);
- Buffer Area (EE Door points): Where a door
adjoins two areas, select the second area here.
The system will apply appropriate entry/exit
delays whenever only one of the two areas is
fully armed (ON).
Battery Fail, Mains Fail: these inputs are design to
support power supply units, which are not fully
integrated - not monitored by the xL system, but have
a "battery/mains fail" outputs. The ouptuts can be
connected to the inputs in order to monitor the state of
the power supply. Preprocess Delay of these points is
taken from the corresponding pseudo points. AC
Failure and Battery trouble outputs follow these inputs.
Note: The XL Panel firmware ≥ 4.58g is required.
Similar to physical items in a system, custom point-
266
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
- Area / Door: For area and door commands,
select the target item here.
Command 
This allows a button or sensor to command an aspect
or device for any (or all) panels in an account. This tab
appears only if the 'Point Type' (previous/above) is a
'custom type' set as a 'command point'.
Related Settings: Configuration, Custom Point
Types.
See: Input Points—Custom Point Type (to follow).
Tip: For additional operating details, refer to "Notes /
Attention" at the end of this section.
- Command Type: Whether the command is to
affect area(s), door(s), or system (panel-wide)
aspects.
Without Multiple Panel Command: This lists areas or
doors for each panel (in the panel-order as shown in
the 'tree').
With Multiple Panel Command: This lists area/door
numbers (or "All"), and will affect all panels in the
account.
- Panel: For a single-panel command, select the
panel here.
-------------------------
Blue Text at the Bottom
This shows a reminder of the your selected
command, and the selected panel (if
applicable).
Tip: Select a command type, and then look under
"Command" to see the available choices.
Tip: If a panel is NOT shown, this means the
command will affect all panels (i.e., a 'multi-panel
command').
- Command: The specific action to occur when
the sensor/input is tripped.
Items separated with a slash (/): This performs a
'toggle' operation between the indicated states each
time the sensor/input is tripped.
(Force and Exit Delays): Exit delays means the
affected areas will get an exit delay warning rather
than arming immediately. Force (short for 'force arm')
means if a point is insecure, the area still arms, and
then the point will be reported as 'In Alarm').
Remote RTE: Momentary unlock using the standard
duration.
Challenged RTE: Momentary unlock using the
extended/challenged duration.
 Pertaining to Bad Card/PIN: Refer to Bad
Card/PIN  under "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
 Pertaining to User Count and Area Activity: Refer
to Counting  and Activity  in the 'Area'
configuration topic.
Various/Other: See the command lists at the end of
"Maps and Video (Visual Monitoring &
Status/Control)".
-------------------------
Notes / Attention:
 Multi-panel and cross-panel commands are routed
through the Director software. As such, the source
and target panels must be communicating with the
Director software when the input/button is tripped.
 Other than issuing the specific action, commandpoints are monitored only for 'Tamper' conditions (re:
Transmit, Sonalert, and Siren).
 Command Points are fixed as 'Supervisory'.
Related Settings: Configuration, Custom Point
Types.
See: Input Points—Custom Point Type (to follow).
- Multiple Panel Command: Whether or not the
command is to affect all panels in the specific
account (versus selecting a specific panel).
Note: For area and door commands, this would
typically be used with the "All" selection. (If you select
a specific door or area number, the command will
affect that area/door number for all panels).
About Video Events
Video events are specific events pertaining to
input points and doors that have been
associated with recordings from one or two
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
267
specific camera(s).
These appear with a
camera symbol on the left in the event
monitoring window.
Clicking the camera symbol allows viewing the
recording for that camera at the time of the
event. If a video that coincides with the event
is available, it will open and start playing
automatically starting at the time of the
triggering event.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for
March R4 DVRs.
Screen Reference
 Video Events 
Note: This tab will appear only if at least one camera is
presently defined.
Also See: Setting up Video Events".
First Camera
- Select Camera: This allows selecting the first
(or only) camera to be associated with alarms
pertaining to this sensor (input point).
- Alarm: Sets whether or not alarms from this
sensor/input point will be associated with the
selected camera.
Second Camera
- Select Camera: This allows selecting a second
camera to be associated with alarms from this
sensor/input point. This allows for a second
camera-angle for video-events pertaining to this
sensor/input point.
- Alarm: Sets whether or not alarms from this
sensor/input point will be associated with the
second camera.
268
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Input Points—Pre-Defined Sensor Types
Burglary Points:
Type
Arming Level
Preprocess
Class
Entry Door
Entry Route
Perimeter
Interior Motion
FAP - Motion
Day Warning
24hr Burglary
Perimtr
12hr
Perimeter
12hr
12hr
24hr
24hr
Door (area 1)
E/E Route
Immed
Immed
FAP
Immed
Immed
Burg
Burg
Burg
Burg
Burg
Burg
Burg
Preprocess
Class
Immediate
15s delay
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Fire-A
Fire
Fire
holdup
Emerg
Preprocess
Class
Immediate
Battery Fail
Mains Fail
Spvsr
Spvsr
Spvsr
Preprocess
Class
By- Chime
pass
-






-
-----
Tx
Off
Tx
Stay
Tx
On
------










Sonlrt Sonlrt Sonlrt Siren Siren Siren
Off Stay On
Off Stay On
-----



--








------

-
---







Life/Safety Points:
Type
Arming Level
Fire - A
Fire
Fire
Hold-up
Aux Alert
24hr
24hr
24hr
24hr
24hr
By- Chime Tx Off Tx Tx On Sonlrt Sonlrt Sonlrt Siren Siren Siren
pass
Stay
Off Stay On
Off Stay On







































Supervisory Points:
Type
Arming Level
Supervisory
Battery Fail
Mains Fail
24hr
24hr
24hr
By- Chime Tx Off Tx Tx On Sonlrt Sonlrt Sonlrt Siren Siren Siren
pass
Stay
Off Stay On
Off Stay On












Tx
Off
Tx
Stay
Tx
On









Local Points:
Type
Arming Level
By- Chime
pass
Local - 24hr
Local-Stay&On
LocalStay2 & ON
Local ON only
24hr
Perimeter
Perimeters
Immed
Immed
Immed
Burg
Burg
Burg





12 hr
Immed
Burg


Sonlrt Sonlrt Sonlrt Siren Siren Siren
Off Stay On
Off Stay On














Legend:
 The 'Class' setting determines the type of alarm message to be transmitted;
 Bypass means whether or not the input point will be bypassable;
 Chime pertains to whether or not the triggering of the input will cause audible tones at keypads in the
area (normally used with Entry points/routes to let you know that someone has entered);
 Tx Off, Stay, and On pertain to the arming levels for which activation of the input point will cause an
alarm to be transmitted to the monitoring station;
 Sonlrt Off, Stay, and On pertain to the arming levels for which activation of the input point will cause
keypad 'sonalerts' in the area to be sounded for one second.
 Siren Off, Stay, and On pertain to the arming levels for which activation of the input point will cause
siren outputs in the area to be sounded.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
269
Input Points—Custom Point Types
Custom Input Point Types
In addition to the extensive list of pre-defined
point types, custom input point types can be
set up to tailor input-point characteristics to
meet your specific needs. Once defined, these
are referred to as Point Types 80-99.
Custom point types allow setting up:
 Garage/extended-delay sensors;  Vault/safe inputs;
 Command Points;  Activity-monitoring inputs; -- plus
special functions including:  Guard tour" checkpoints
(stations);  WorkLate" buttons;  Area arm/disarm
keyswitch;  Battery Fail;  Mains Fail.
As with doors, points, etc., custom point-types pertain
to an individual panel, and must be set up for each
panel requiring the selected input-monitoring
characteristics.
can be deleted. (Issue an input-point report, OR go
to the Input Points configuration screen, select grid
view, and check for the specific custom point-type
(80-99) in the list.)
Related Topic(s):
 Reporting on Users, System/Device Settings, etc.;
 Working with the Report Viewer
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar:
Custom Point Types
In the Tree:
Configuration (click the "+"),
Custom Point Types (Under the specific panel
group and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.) Related
Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
 Add a Custom Point Type: Click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One: Select one
from the pop-up list at the bottom of the
form.
 Search for a Custom Point Type: Click the
'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter the name
and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete a Custom Point Type: Right-click a
blank area on the form (If grid view: Right-click
the item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Before Deleting: Only unused custom point-types
270
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Configuration Custom Point Types
Screen Reference
Pick Lists (bottom of the form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional;
bottom of the form): This is where you
select a specific panel-group and panel in a
multi-panel system where the 'tree' is not
set to show items on a panel-by-panel
basis. For more information on this feature,
refer to "Other Desktop Choices".
- Custom Point Type (bottom of form):
This is where you select a custom
point-type to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the system, and
the description, once defined; Note: Similar to
physical items in a system, each custom point-type
pertains to an individual panel.
On This Form (Standard  )
- Name: A suitable name indicating the operation
or usage for this custom point type;
- Preprocess: Either the duration that the
point must REMAIN triggered before an
alarm will be audited, or the point type /
operation;
Door: The 'Door' selection is normally used with doors
that are monitored, but not electronically controlled for
personnel access. For access-controlled doors, a
dedicated 'Door Contact' input is provided on the doorcontrol module (which is set up through the Door
screen). As well, door inputs cannot be set for a 24-hr
monitoring, and cannot be bypassed (regardless of
whether "bypassable" is selected or not).
Extended: This pertains to garage door sensors, and
other applications where a longer delay time is
desired. With this setting, the area "Extended" delay
will apply, and the area can be armed while the input
is 'tripped'.
Keyswitch Arming/Disarming: With 'pre-process' set
to "Keyswitch...", the "Level" setting provides
selections for "Arm" and "Disarm". The chime
operation changes as well: If "Chime ()", and the
area is set for "Stay on Fail to Exit", the area will be
armed to 'Stay' if no users exit after turning the switch
(not-Ok to Ok). Conversely, if the chime is not
selected, the "Stay on Fail to exit" setting will be
ignored (the area will fully arm to 'On'). Note: With an
arming keyswitch, disarming is typically done through
an LCD keypad.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Guard Tour: This pertains to guard-tour checkpoints
(stations). For this application:
+ The 'class' should be set as "supervisory";
+ The 'level' will typically be set as "24hr";
+ Any "Transmit" selections will be ignored (guard-tour
point activity is referenced locally during the
monitoring of a guard-tour).
WorkLate: This pertains to a button that can be
pressed (during the pre-arm cycle) to delay the
scheduled closing time for the area associated with
the input-point. To set the time extension for
WorkLate buttons in a specific area, refer to the "Work
Late Input Point" setting under "Areas and Related
Settings".
Notice: Outside of the 15 minute pre-arm cycle, a
worklate point acts as a standard burglary point. This
allows (for example) a motion sensor to function as a
worklate trigger during the pre-arm cycle, and as a
standard motion sensor during its monitored times.
Be careful to set the “Level” and “Transmit / Sonalert /
Siren” values as suitable for your specific application.
Command Point: This allows a button or sensor to
command a device associated with:  Any specific
panel,  Any area or door number (ID) across all
panels, or  All panels/areas/doors of an account.
Tip: The actual command is selected when setting up
the specific sensor(s)/input-point(s).
Related Topic: Configuration, Input Points,
Command.
See: Input Points—Monitored Sensors (previous).
Activity Monitor: This 'officially' detects activity in an
area. For details, refer to "Activity Monitoring and
Auto-Arming" in the 'Area' configuration topic.
Battery Fail, Mains Fail: these inputs are design to
support power supply units, which are not fully
integrated - not monitored by the xL system, but have
a "battery/mains fail" outputs. The ouptuts can be
connected to the inputs in order to monitor the state of
the power supply. Preprocess Delay of these points is
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
271
taken from the corresponding pseudo points. AC
Failure and Battery trouble outputs follow these inputs.
Note: The XL Panel firmware ≥ 4.58g is required.
Level: The arming levels of the area
assigned to the point for which the point will be fully
monitored by the system.
Exception: For keyswitch operation, see the previous
"Keyswitch" note.
Activity Monitor: The arming levels of the input
point's area for which the point will be treated as an
activity monitor versus a standard sensor (e.g.,
Burglary).
- Class: The basic classification for the point /
sensor (this is referenced in messages
transmitted to the monitoring station);
For Command Points: These are fixed as
'Supervisory'. As well, other than issuing the specific
action, command-points are monitored only for
'Tamper' conditions.
------------------------- Bypassable: Whether or not the point can be
bypassed (by a user with 'bypass' authority)
should the need arise (e.g., to allow arming an
area with a broken window, faulty sensor, etc.).
- Chime: Whether or not three short beeps will be
signalled at keypads in the area assigned to this
point whenever the point is triggered (this can
be ‘toggled’ off at a keypad by pressing ƒ5);
transmitted to the monitoring station whenever
the point is triggered;
For Command Points: Other than issuing the specific
action, command-points are monitored only for
'Tamper' conditions.
Sonalert
- Off / Stay / On: The (applicable area’s) arming
levels for which keypad sonalerts will be
sounded for 1 second when the point is
triggered;
Siren
- Off / Stay / On: The (applicable area’s) arming
levels for which siren outputs will be sounded
when the point is triggered. (The “Siren Time” is
set through the System screen.)
For Command Points: Other than issuing the specific
action, command-points are monitored only for
'Tamper' conditions. So, the Transmit, Sonalert, and
Siren selections will take effect only for tamper
conditions.
Exception: For keyswitch operation, see the previous
"Keyswitch" note.
- Pre-Alarm Warning: For associated inputpoints, alarm transmission (to the central
station) will be delayed as per the "Pre-Alarm
Delay" setting (for the specific 'area'). During
the delay, keypad sonalert(s) will be sounded,
giving an authorized user time to "Silence" the
alarm at a keypad. (Selecting "Verify User" will
cancel the alarm transmission.)
Siren Time: To allow a pre-alarm warning to occur,
the siren time for the panel must be greater than 30
seconds. (Siren Time appears under:
Configuration, System, Standard )
For details on setting the "Pre-alarm Delay" time, refer
to "Areas and Related Settings".
To assign an area to be monitored by a specific
keypad, refer to "Expansion Modules".
For Command Points: This selection does not apply
to command points (do not select 'Pre-Alarm Warning'
for command points).
Transmit
- Off / Stay / On: The (applicable area’s) arming
levels for which an alarm message will be
272
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Custom Circuit-Types for Input Points (V4.4)
Custom Circuit-Types
Newer styles of modules support custom
circuits for input points, while any older-style
modules will continue to support the standard
circuit-types.
Tip: Suitable default values are provided here for north
America, Europe, and UK-ACPO (per panel mode).
The defaults typically need to be changed here only for
sites that require custom/different values.
Note: The specific circuit-type for each input point is
selected when setting up an input point (or suitesecurity keypad).
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Custom Circuit
In the Tree: Configuration (+), Input Points,
Custom Circuit (Under the specific panel group
and panel--if listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows selecting
your preferred view-mode (forms view is recommended
here).
Things You Can Do
 View/Change a Custom Circuit Type:
1) Select the 'tab' for a desired circuit (1-4).
2) Select the desired circuit type near the top
of the screen.
3) Check the onscreen illustration to verify
your selection.
4) If needed, enter new resistor values, and
click [Calculate Thresholds].
For more information, refer to the itemdescriptions for this screen.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
273
Configuration, Input Points, Custom Circuit
Screen Reference
Circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4  )
- Circuit Type: This allows selecting
from the supported types of custom
circuits;
Tip: The circuit-type that you select will be
shown graphically near the middle of the
screen, and default resistor values are
shown farther down.
------------------------- [Reset Circuit]: This reverts the
present circuit number (tab) to its
default value.
Tip: This is the same value as with older-style
modules, and V4.3 Director software.
------------------------- Circuit Name: This is the name that will appear
when this circuit type is to be selected
elsewhere.
Note: Since this will appear on keypad LCD screens,
this can be 1 - 12 letters (all caps) and/or numbers.
- (Coloured bands and legend): This shows the
calculated range of actual circuit resistances
that will be considered as normal state (Green),
tampered condition (Yellow), or in-alarm/tripped
state (Orange);
Tip: The values shown here are for your information
only (do not enter them anywhere).
- (Circuit Diagram): This provides visual
confirmation that you have selected the
correct/desired type of circuit;
End of Line Resistors
- EOL R1/R2 (ohms): Custom resistor values
are entered here (if needed);
Note: Enter the actual value for each resistor being
used (not any calculated circuit value). See the circuit
diagram for resistor orientation.
- [Calculate Thresholds]: Clicking here updates
the colored bands for your new resistor values
(details previous).
274
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Programmable Outputs (Signalling & Device-Switching)
Output Points and Related Settings
Output points are programmable electronic
switches that can be used to signal alarms or
control items such as lights, garage doors, etc.
The Output Points screen allows viewing or
changing the characteristics for each of these
outputs.
Power: Outputs provide a switching function only
(devices must include a suitable power source).
Map/Graphic Annunciator Modules: Outputs on a
"Map" module pertain to firing the LEDs on the module
itself rather than external devices.
Exception: Outputs 1 and 2 on a map module can
each fire an LED and are also provided on the board
(OP1=+V/High; OP2=0V/Low).
Door Controllers and Suite-Security Keypads: These
devices have built in dedicated outputs that are set up
directly under "Doors" or "Suite Security".
Special Features and Complex
Equations
Beginning with V4.2, output programming has
been greatly enhanced, including:
 Any output function can be set as a positive
trigger (Normally 0V/Low; +V/High when
triggered), or negative trigger (Normally
+V/High; 0V/Low when triggered);
 In addition to steady operation, three On/Off
cadence selections are provided;
 Outputs can be triggered by just about any
type of event(s)--including the new activitymonitoring and user-counting features.
 Complex equations can be set up using
"Boolean" operators (AND, OR, XOR, etc.)
Outputs 5-8, or 5-8 & 121-128 (see exception)
can be set to signal a numeric pager when
triggered by their associated alarm condition.
Exception: Beginning with V4.4 (software and
firmware), the outputs to use for numeric paging are
configurable.
Related: Configuration, System, I/O Mapping 
 I/O Mapping  (under "General System Settings
for a Panel").
Outputs 005 - 008: These are 'virtual' outputs that are
not associated with any physical wiring).
Parallel STU / REDCARE and VBUS
Outputs
Outputs pertaining to a Subscriber Terminal
Unit (STU) interface (and also regarding VBUS
operations) need to be reserved ahead of time.
Keypad Function Keys
The function-key feature allows setting up
actions to occur when a user presses the “ƒ”
and a number at an 'LCD keypad'. This
pertains to outputs set to "Function Key X".
ƒ1-ƒ5 are available to all users, while ƒ6-ƒ9 and ƒ0 can
Report
UK/ACPO: This feature is not supported with
UK/ACPO operation.
Also See: [Management], Serial Reporting.
 Software-Based Text Paging (Serial Reporting)
refer to "Monitoring, Paging, & Remote Mgt. Settings".
Outputs can be set to activate whenever a
certain type of input is triggered or a specific
event occurs. This can be associated with a
desired panel ("System"), or a specific "Area",
holiday, or device.
Welcome
The Numeric Paging Feature
The specific alarm/event to be associated with
each of the outputs is defined here, while other
settings for the paging feature are set through
the System Communication screen. For details,
General Signalling Functions
21-0381E v4.9.1
be set (on an area-by-area basis) to require a user with
“Function Key” authority to log in before the keys will
work. For details, see the "Require Function Key PIN"
selection under "Areas and Related Settings".
Function key ƒ5 is pre-set to toggle the keypad chime
feature on and off. It can be programmed for other
actions, but is generally not—since the keypad chime
feature would be toggled as well.
Control
Select Outputs: Configuration, System, I/O
Mapping ;  I/O Mapping  (under "General
System Settings...", previous).
How to Get Here
Multi-Account Systems: First select [Account Folders]
in the 'tree', and locate and double-click the desired
account.
MyTools Bar: Output Points
In the Tree: Configuration (click the "+"),
Output Points (Under the specific panel group and
panel--if listed in the 'tree'.)
Related Topic: "Other Desktop Choices"
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
275
Tip: The Grid / Form toolbar-button allows
selecting your preferred view-mode (forms
view is recommended here).
Configuration Output Points
Things You Can Do
 Add an Output Point: Click [+] at
the bottom of the form, or right-click
the form and select Add New from
the pop-up menu.
 View/Change an Existing One:
Select one from the pop-up list at the
bottom of the form.
 Search for An Output Point: Click
the 'binoculars' symbol. Then, enter
the name and click [Find].
st
Tip: You can search by name or the 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*
 Delete an Output Point: Right-click a blank
area on the form (If grid view: Right-click the
item in the list), and select "Delete". When
prompted to confirm, select Yes.
Working in Grid View: You can:  View or enter values;
 Right-click an item and select from the pop-up menu;
 Click a column heading to sort on that column.
(Filter on Column: Shows only items matching an
st
entered value or 1 few chars.--e.g., nam*. A red
column heading indicates the list is filtered.)
Screen Reference
Pick-Lists (bottom of the form)
-Panel Group & Panel references (optional): This is
where you select a specific panel-group and panel
in a multi-panel system where the 'tree' is not set to
show items on a panel-by-panel basis. For more
information on this feature, refer to "Other Desktop
Choices".
- Output Point: This is where you select a device
(output point) to view or edit. This area shows a
reference number assigned by the system, and
the name of the output, once defined;
Output-point numbers are assigned by the system
when a expansion module that supports 'outputs' is
set up. The number assigned to each 'output' is
based on the module installation order, and the
number of 'outputs' supported by (reserved for) each
module.
Tip: The "Module" and "Range" areas (blue text)
show the device associated with the output-point, and
the range of outputs for that device.
"Offset" values for each panel determine whether
multi-panel sites will have consecutive versus
276
repeating output-point numbers. For details, refer to
the "Display Offsets" value under "System Panels and
Displayed Item-Numbers".
On This Form
- Name: A suitable name for the device (output
point) indicating its location and/or usage, etc.;
- Output (and the small [...] button): Click the
small button to access a second screen for
setting up the output. For an existing output, the
selected function(s) are shown next to the [...]
button;
(See the next screen/section for details.)
- Output Version: This shows the panel firmware
revision need to support the presently-defined
output equation.
Note: In general, the following items require panel
firmware v4.2 or newer:  Multi-segment output
equations;  Timed or inverted output actions;  Type
E (European) selections;  Cadence functions.
- Compatibility Response: This shows whether
or not the output equation is compatible with the
panel firmware (i.e., after one communications
session with the panel).
- Module: This is "Panel" (a system panel) or the
module associated with the specific output-point
number.
- Range: This is the total range of output-point
numbers associated with the specific module (as
defined by the software when each module is
set up).
Tip: The number in brackets, such as "(1)", pertains
to the location of the physical output connection on the
specific module.
Configuring an Output Point
 Open the Output Point configuration form,
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
and add or select the desired output.
 Click the small [...] button to access
this screen.
 Click an "item" (such as
"unassigned") to select a new value.
(Additional items will appear as you
go along--where applicable).
Configuration Output Points [ ... ]
(Edit Output)
Tip: See the "Item" descriptions, to
follow.
 Use the Up/Down arrows to scroll in
pop-up lists.
 Right click items to select a command
(e.g., Invert, Insert, Remove).
Note: Selections under [ More >> ] are for
reference/internal use only.
Items": Event Type, Target Item, Event, "", Output Action, Mapped Input
Note: This pertains to an output being triggered by a
single condition. For complex equations and 'Boolean'
operators, see "Multi-Condition Equations", to follow /
below.
 Event Type: The general type of event that will
trigger the output (System, Schedule, Holiday,
Area, Point (sensor), Output, Door, Elevator (lift),
Floor, Module, or Suite-security keypad); All
function-key selections now appear under "Area".
Note: Selections appear only for device-types that
exist in your system. "System" pertains to events
associated with the specific main/system panel.
Exception: Cadence selections (at the bottom/end of
the list) enable an On/Off pulse-cycle. See
"Cadence".
Tip: To invert a function (i.e., have the output trigger
whenever something is NOT in effect), right-click the
function and select "Toggle Invert".
 Target Item: This is the specific item associated
with the desired event
(e.g., Area 4, Front Door, Suite 705, Function Key
#3, etc.);
Function Keys: Since function keys 6 – 9 & 0 can be
set to require a user-PIN,
you may wish to reserve these keys for more critical
functions.
 Event: This is the specific event/condition that will
trigger the output;
 Output Action: This is how the output will respond
when triggered (i.e., for so many seconds, or while
the condition remains in effect, etc.).
 Mapped Input (optional): Click the double-arrow
symbol to select an input point to be tripped
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
automatically when the event described by the
output equation occurs.
Tip: The mapped input point, in turn, can be set for
the desired signalling/reporting (and/or command)
operation like any other input point in the system.
ATTENTION: The mapping of inputs works in
parallel with normal (hard-wired) operation, such that
the input must be wired/terminated correctly (or
configured as a circuit-type that will take its present
state as 'normal').
Event Types and Events:
In general, event selections appear in plain
language, and are generally obvious in
function. Some notable exceptions and terms
are listed here:
 Activity Detected / Not Detected: Pertaining to
activity detection (V4.2) in an area via custom
"Activity Monitor" points, and area activity-tracking
settings. (Ref:  Configuration Custom Point
Type "Preprocess = Activity Monitor";
 Configuration Input Points "Point
Type = MyCustomType";
 Configuration Areas  Activity ).
 Cadence selections (System - Cadence...): See
the "Cadence..." topic, to follow / below.
 Counter reaches min (or max): Pertaining to user
counting (V4.2).
(Ref: Configuration Areas Counting ).
 Digital: Dial-up modem communications.
 Failed to Close: A scheduled area not set to autoarm was not armed manually at the scheduled
time.
 Force Arm: Pertaining to arming while a
point/sensor is tripped (or tampered).
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
277
 In Window / Out of Window: Simplistic: Working
hours vs. after-hours. Detail: Pertaining to during
vs. outside of the active/valid times of a schedule.
 Pseudo: Internally-monitored conditions. (Ref:
Configuration System Equipment).
 SIP: Reporting to a central station via IP.
 SNAPP: Module communications bus.
 Version E: This indicates conditions pertaining to
European monitoring requirements.
Output Action:
 "Normal": Relay follows the event--Positive
trigger (normally 0V/Low, goes +V/High
when triggered);
 Green "+" durations: Timed--Positive
trigger (normally 0V/Low, goes +V/High for
selected duration when triggered);
The entire bracketed function on the right will be
removed.
Also see "Multi-Condition Equations", and
"Brackets and Equation Processing", to follow /
below.
Cadence (Getting the Output to Pulse
On and Off) (V4.2):
Three 'Cadence' selections are provided that
cause the equation to 'Go False' on a
repeating cycle, thus causing the output to
pulse. These appear at the end/bottom of the
list for the SYSTEM event type. Cadence
functions must be inserted using "Insert
Operation", and then set as an "AND"
operation.
 Red "-" durations (with underscore "_"):
Timed--Inverted (normally +V/High, goes
0v/Low for selected duration when
triggered);
For more information, see "Multi-Condition
Equations", and "Equations with Cadence
(pulsing)", both to follow / below.
Siren Fire Cadence: Outputs can also be set to follow
siren-fire conditions with 1 sec., or 2 sec. on/off pulses.
These can be selected directly instead of using
'System - Cadence'. If the siren output itself (OP3 on
the main panel) is set to System - Siren Fire (1 sec),
this sets 'fire-siren' cadence for UL (3 quick pulses
separated by 1 second pauses).
 "Toggle": Changes state until next trigger.
Multi-Condition Equations:
For a Point Expansion Module with Physical Relays:
In the description above, "0V/Low" will pertain to "relay
not energized", and "+V/High" will pertain to "relay
energized".
Also See: "Cadence (Getting the Output to Pulse On
and Off)", and "Equations with Cadence (pulsing)",
both to follow / below.
To insert additional conditions into an equation, rightclick within a condition/segment near your desired
insertion point, and select Insert Operation on left or
Insert Operation on right, as desired).
 "Inverted": Relay follows the event-Inverted (normally +V/High, goes 0v/Low
when triggered);
Commands (when you right-click an item):
 Toggle Invert: Inserts (or removes) a "NOT"
("Not means whenever the chosen condition is
NOT true);
 Insert Operation (on left / on right): Inserts a new
segment to allow building complex output
equations (see below);
 Remove Operation: Deletes an inserted segment.
This appears only if you right-click a bracket or an
"And/Or" operator (Boolean).
For (deepest nested) brackets, or an "And/Or"
Operator inside them:
The condition on the right side within the brackets
will be removed.
For (external) brackets, or an "And/Or"
Operator preceding a bracketed function:
278
e.g., (Condition1 AND (Condition2 OR
Condition3)) => OutputAction
Tip: In this case, condition 3 was inserted after rightclicking within condition 2, and selecting "Insert
Operation on right".
Notes: "Condition" represents a complete function
(such as "AREA Area1 In Alarm").
An equation can include up to 15 'conditions'.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
"AND/OR"s (Boolean Operators for Multi-Condition
Equations):
If "This" And/Or "That" is true
Choice
OR
This



That



AND
 
NOR
 
NAND
 
 
 
XOR
 
 
XNOR
 
 
Output Will trigger:
When either condition (or
both) are true.
Only when both are true.
Only when neither one is
true (i.e., both NOT true).
When either one or
neither of them are true,
but not both.
When one or the other is
true, but not both.
When both or neither are
true, but not one or the
other by itself.
Tips: You're likely to use "AND" and "OR" the most.
To invert a selection (i.e., "trigger the output when something
is NOT true): Right-click the operator, and select Toggle
Invert. Note: If you end up with two "NOTs" inside the same
set of brackets, your equation will be automatically converted
to a simpler equivalent.
("NOT A" OR "NOT B" = A NAND B;
"NOT A" AND "NOT B" = A NOR B.)
Converting Your Language into an Operator:
 On/While something is in Effect: Is an "AND"
operation;
or 3 (or both) is in effect at the same time as
Condition1.
Example B: With "((Condition1 OR Condition2)
AND (Condition3 OR Condition4))" the output
will trigger if at least one item from each side of the
"AND" is in effect at the same time.
Example C: If you start with example B,
right-click
Condition1,
select
"Insert
Operation on right" , and set it as an AND
function, you will have: "(((Condition1 AND
NewCondition) OR Condition2) AND
(Condition3 OR Condition4))".
The equation would be evaluated in this
order: 1) C1 AND New; 2) Result1 OR C2;
3) C3 OR C4; 4) Result2 AND Result3.
Note: The deepest-nested brackets are analyzed
first.
Equations with Cadence (pulsing)
To obtain a pulsing output, System - Cadence
functions must be "ANDed" with the portion of the
equation to which they apply. If all conditions of
the equation are to cause a pulsing output, the
cadence function should be set up first, with
everything else appearing within a pair of brackets
on the left or right.
Tip: "ANDing" different cadence selections (or
none) with the various segments of an otherwise
"OR" equation allows a single output to respond
differently to different types of events.
For one type of cadence for an entire equation
(for example):
 Except/Unless something is in Effect: Is an "AND
NOT" operation";
Tip: Use the "Toggle Invert" command to insert the
"NOT" function.
 Set up a System - Cadence function first;
Also See: "Cadence (Getting the Output to Pulse On
and Off)", previous/above.
Brackets and Equation Processing
When segments are added (via "Insert Operation"),
they will be inserted on the left or right (per your
selection), and are bracketed together with it.
Brackets determine the order in which the equation
will be processed, with items inside brackets being
evaluated first (deepest nested brackets first, and
then moving outward from there). Try inserting two or
three dummy/temporary operations, and you'll see
how it works.
 Right-click within it, and select Add
Operation on right;
 Set up the second operation as desired,
being sure to use an "AND" operator;
 Insert any other operations by right-clicking
on segments to the right of the cadence
function (not within the cadence function
itself).
Example A: With "(Condition1 AND (Condition2 OR
Condition3))" the output will trigger only if Condition2
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
279
Programmable Output Functions
System
Was In Alarm
System
System WAS IN ALARM. This is only for
input points in alarm e.g. NOT for system
trouble (clears when alarmed areas are
turned off then back on again)
Bypassed
System (events pertaining to the specific
main/system panel):
System
When there is a point BYPASSED
somewhere in the system
Fire
System
Tone if Module Fail
System
When any ‘FIRE’ point is in alarm
Hold-Up
System
When any ‘HOLD UP’ point is in alarm
Auxiliary Alert
System
When any ‘Aux Alert' point is in alarm
Vault
System
Fallback sonalert (at control panel) if Module
Bus fails. Provides 1 sec. output every 8 sec.
And activates if there is no operational
keypad in an area with programmed
keypads.
Ground Start
System
System
Ground Start (can only be used on B004 main panel output 4)
Fully On
When any ‘VAULT / SAFE’ type point is in
alarm
Burglary
System
When system is FULLY ON
Partially On
System
When any ‘'Burglary' point is in alarm.
Delayed burglary for European Version.
Supervisory
System
When any ‘Supervisory' point is in alarm.
Pseudo
System
When system is PARTIALLY ON (Partially or
Fully On for Europe Version)
Fully Off
When any 'Pseudo' condition is in effect.
System Trouble
System
When system is FULLY OFF
In Alarm
System
System
System
When system is IN ALARM - resets when
point(s) restore (includes pseudos &
tampers)
Siren
Pseudo 1 – System Trouble / All type tamper
for European Version.
Battery Trouble
System
Pseudo 2 – Battery Trouble
AC Failure
System
Follows ALARM & FIRE siren (steady)
Siren Fire (1 sec.)
System
Pseudo 3 – AC (Mains) Trouble
Phone Line Trouble
System
Pseudo 4 – Phone Trouble
Report Delay
System
Pseudo 5 – Report Delay
Time Lost
System
Follows ALARM siren - steady for BURG /
EMERG and provides 1 sec on/off for FIRE
per Keypad Tone. Exception: If selected for
the siren output (#3 on main panel), this
enables UL fire-cadence: ½ sec on/off three
times, 1sec pause, and repeats.
Siren Fire (2 sec.)
System
Pseudo 6 – Time Lost
Time Changed
System
Pseudo 7 – Time Change
Program Changed
System
Follows ALARM siren - steady for BURG /
EMERG and provides 2 sec on/off for FIRE
Digital Trouble
System
Pseudo 8 – Program Change
Program Error
System
Pseudo 9 – Program Error
Fuse Failure
  Failed to Close: Area schedule expired, & no
one armed the system;  In Window: Schedule active;
 Out Window: Schedule expired;  Pseudo: Internally
monitored conditions (Ref: Config. System
Equipment);  Version "E": This indicates conditions
pertaining to European monitoring requirements
(requires Director V4.2).
Phone line trouble (follows report delay or
line failure)
Pseudo 10 – Fuse Failure
280
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
System
Pod Trouble
System
Version "E" Fire
System
Version "E" Personal Attack
System
Pseudo 11 – Module Trouble
Pod Battery Low
System
Version "E" Unconfirmed Alarm
System
Version "E" Set/Unset
System
Pseudo 12 – Module Battery Low
Pod Program Edit
System
Version "E" Freezer/Fire Fault
System
Pseudo 13 – Module Program Edit
Pod Program Error
System
Version "E" Bypass in Effect
System
Version "E" Confirmed Alarm
System
Pseudo 14 – Module Program Error
Miscellaneous
System
Pseudo 15 – Misc. Trouble
HSC Trouble
System
Confirmed alarm – European Version (Active
when more than one detector is activated
during a single armed state).
Version "E" Siren
Pseudo 16 – HSC Trouble
Duress PIN
System
Version "E" Confirmed Alarm Strobe
System
System
Any area failed to Arm
System
Duress Pin 5 / Duress Pin or PA Alarm for
European Version.
Door Unlocked.
System
For more information see “Output to follow an
Area Fail to Arm” (≥V4.80).
Cadence 0.5 Hz (1 sec on, 1 sec off)
System
Door Locked Out
System
Cadence, 2 second on pulse on the minute
System
System
Cards locked out at any door.
Door Held Open
Cadence, 10 second long pulse on the
minute
System
Doors Held Open
Door Forced
System
Door Tamper
System
Door contact wiring shorted or cut.
Door Open
System - Cadence Selections: These cannot be used
on their own (must be ANDed within an equation).
Version "E": Pertains to European monitoring
requirements.
System
Door Secure
System
Door Sensor Trouble
System
Doors Sensor Trouble (magnetic bond
sensor not ok)
Global User Lockout
System
Global lockout per bad card/PIN monitoring.
Host Computer On-Line
System
Host Computer Off-Line
System
SIP On-Line
System
SIP Off-Line
Holiday (if a specific Holiday is in effect)
System
Any Point in Tamper
Holiday
System
Any Point in Alarm
System
Forced Arm In Effect
System
Any Area Failed to Close
System
Phone Line Failure
System
Local AC Failure
System
Local AC (mains) failure.
Version "E" System Tamper
System
System Tamper – European Version.
Version "E" System Fault
System
System Fault – European Version.
Bypass in Effect when Armed
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Schedule (Pertaining to a specific schedule)
Schedule In Window (schedule active)
Report
Schedule 15 Minutes Prior to "In Window"
(15 minutes before the schedule is active)
Control
Schedule 15 Minutes Prior to "Out Window"
(15 minutes before the schedule ends)
Schedule Holiday in Effect (any type)
Schedule "No Access" Holiday in Effect
Admin
Holiday in Effect
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
281
Area
Hold-Up
Area
When any ‘HOLD UP’ type point in this area
is in alarm
Auxiliary Alert
Area
When any ‘AUXILIARY ALERT’ type point in
this area is in alarm.
Vault
Area
When any ‘VAULT / SAFE’ type point is in
alarm.
Burglary
Area (if event occurs in a specific area):
Area
Function key #0, #1, ...#9
Area
(Pertains to keypad functions keys)
On
Area
When the area is fully armed (ON).
Stay 2 (future use)
Area
When the arming level is STAY 2 (future)
Stay 1
Area
When the arming level is STAY.
Stay (1 or 2)
Area
Area
When armed to STAY. (Stay 2 = future)
Off
When any ‘BURGLARY’ type point in this
area is in alarm.
Supervisory
Area
Area
When the arming level is OFF
Not On
When any ‘Supervisory' point is in alarm.
Pseudo
When the arming level is "Off" or "Stay".
Not Off
Area
When any 'Pseudo' condition is in effect.
Walk Test
Area is in ‘Walk’ or ‘Hold-up’ test.
Entry / Exit
Area
When the arming level is "Stay" or "ON".
Alarm
Area
Area
Area
When area is in ALARM. Resets when
point(s) restore or follows siren timeout
(includes pseudos & tampers)
Was In Alarm
When area Entry / Exit delay is in progress –
provides a steady output (STAY & ON).
Entry
Area
Area
When area WAS IN ALARM. This is only for
input points in alarm e.g. NOT for system
trouble (clears when alarmed areas are
turned off then back on again)
Siren Fire (1 sec.)
When area Entry delay is in progress provides a steady output (STAY & ON).
Exit
Area
When area Exit delay is in progress provides a steady output (STAY & ON).
Ready
Area
When the area is ‘Ready To Arm’ - i.e. all
points are secure.
Open Window
Area
Follows ALARM siren - steady for BURG /
EMERG and provides 1 sec ON/OFF for
FIRE
Siren Fire (2 sec.)
Area
Area
Follows ALARM siren - steady for BURG /
EMERG and provides 2 sec ON/OFF for
FIRE
Sonalert (E/E tones on Stay)
When the active/open window of the area's
schedule is in effect.
Closing
Area
Area
Follows sonalert, chime & provides Entry/Exit
tones when armed to STAY & ON
Sonalert (No E/E tones on Stay)
When the area schedule is expiring in 15
minutes.
Door Unlocked
Area
Area
Door Locked Out
Area
Door Held Open
Area
Door Forced
Area
Door Tamper
Area
Follows sonalert, chime & does not provide
Entry/Exit tones when armed to STAY but
provides Entry/Exit tones in ON
Extended Delay Entry Tones
Area
Area
Follows Garage/extended delay Entry Tones
Bypasses
Door Tampers (door contact condition: no
EOL resistor etc.)
Door Open
Area
Door Secure
Area
When any point in this area is BYPASSED
Fire
Area
Door Sensor Trouble
Area
Door Sensor Troubles (magnetic bond
sensor not ok)
Panic Token Detected
When any ‘FIRE’ type point in this area is in
alarm
282
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Area
Counter reaches Min
Considered 'empty'; User Count <= Minimum
Point (if event occurs at a specific Point):
Counter reaches Max
Point
Normal (OK)
Considered 'full'; User Count >= Maximum
Point
Open (tripped or tampered--any time)
Area
No Detected Activity
Point
Open (disarmed)
Area
Activity Detected
Area
15 Min before Scheduled Arm to "On"
Area
15 Min before Scheduled Arm to "Stay"
Area
15 Min before Scheduled Disarm Arm to "Off"
Area
Schedule in Window
Area
Auto-Command Schedule In Window
Area
Failed to Close
Point
Area
Any point in tamper in area
Point
Area
Tripped or tampered when area is Off or
Stay)
Point
Open (armed)
Tripped or tampered when area is ON
Point
Alarm
Tripped when area is ON
Bypassed
Preprocess Delay
PreAlarm Warning is in effect.
Area
Armed with Bypasses in Effect
Area
Force Armed
Point
Tamper
Armed with some input points 'tripped'.
Point
Point in Delay
Point is in Delay. Follows a Custom Pt Type
that has a time delay.
Area
User Lockout in Effect
Area
Wandering Patient Detected
Area
Version "E" Siren
Area
Version "E" Confirmed Alarm Strobe
Area
Version "E" Fire
Area
Version "E" Personal Attack
Area
Version "E" Unconfirmed Alarm
Area
Version "E" Set/Unset
Area
Version "E" Freezer/Fire Fault
Area
Version "E" Bypass in Effect
Area
Version "E" Confirmed Alarm
Area
Confirmed alarm – European Version (Active
when more than one detector is activated
during a single armed state).
Failed to Arm
Re: Bad Card/PIN monitoring.
Point
Confirmed point command
Positive Confirmation of Point Command
Activation.
Output (pertaining to another output):
Output
Real Output is On
Output
Equation is TRUE
Output
Manual Command in Effect
For more information see “Output to follow an
Area Fail to Arm” (≥V4.80)
Version "E": Pertains to European monitoring
requirements.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
283
Door (if event occurs at a specific door):
Floor (pertaining to a specific elevator/lift cab):
Door
Unlocked
Floor
Door
Locked Out
Door
Held Open
Module (pertaining to an expansion module):
Door
Forced
Module
On-Line
Door
Tamper
Module
Tamper
Door contact circuit cut or shorted.
Module
Comms Trouble (Subst & Comms)
Floor Desecure
Door
Open
Door
Secure
Module
Communication failure or device replaced.
Battery Trouble
Door
Sensor Trouble
Module
User Logged On (LCD Keypads)
Magnetic bond sensor not OK.
Door
Blocked by Interlock
Door
Wandering Patient Detected
Door
Entry Delay in Effect
Suite (pertaining to a suite-security keypad):
Elevator (pertaining to a specific elevator/lift cab):
Elevator Offline
Elevator Cab Desecured
Elevator Relay Board(s) Offline
Elevator Fire Input Triggered
Suite
Alarm
Suite
Fire
Suite
Tamper
Suite
Siren / Sonalert
Suite
Communication Trouble
Suite
Normal
No Alarm, Fire, Tamper, Siren / Sonalert,
or Communications Trouble
Suite
Stay
Suite
On
Suite
Stay or On
Elevator Bypass
Elevator Cab Reader Tamper
Elevator Cab Panic Button
284
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Output to follow an Area "Fail to Arm" (≥V4.80)
4. Schedule is suspended (automatic
arming) - In the Areas Control&Status
screen it is possible to suspend a
schedule. This means that the
schedule will be ignored for an area.
We should detect if an area does not
(auto) arm because the schedule is
suspended and set the fail to arm.
5. Arming priorities get in the way. We
currently can assign priorities to areas
for arming. If enabled, then areas with
a higher priority (1 is the highest) must
be armed before areas with a lower
priority.
6. If any of the pseudo points is active
when trying to arm in a system set for
ACPO, the arming is blocked as it is
with the points. Checking 8 of the
pseudo points:
The arming of the area will only be
blocked/fail if the Area’s Arm Warning
Mode is set to “Warning Tones
Continuous” or “Warning Tones
Continuous and Blocked Arming”.
Autoarming has a specific set of
requirements to be met to call a fail to arm. It
differs from manual arming - it forces to arm
system, trying to bypass the bypassable
points, ignoring fail to exit, and ignoring
regular alarms such as from a regular points
open. So if before autoarm impulse below
conditions are met, should there be a fail to
arm event, but if they occur after the impuls
(during exit delay) then the area should force
to arm, sending appropriate alarm events.
For fire points there have to be fire in area
wide and the "unlock door on fire" option
set in order to "fail to arm" event occur.
These are the conditions that we monitor in
the panel that could block an area from
arming:
1. Points in alarm - Every Time user
wants to arm the area, or there’s an
automatic arming, and there is an
alarm already. Or when manually
arming from LCD, or Director or
Arming Station, and during exit delay a
regular input becomes active.
2. Users left in area (and user count
checking is enabled) - Every Time
user wants to arm the area, and users
are still in. In cases in which user can
be informed (by Keypad or Director)
about users left and therefore is not
able arm – there is no need to send
the event – Area didn’t get the impulse
to arm.
3. Fire alarm/override - Every Time user
wants to arm the area, or there’s an
automatic arming, and there is a fire
already. Or when manually arming
from LCD, or Director or Arming
Station, and during exit delay a fire
input becomes active.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_MAINPANEL_TAMP
ER;

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_BATTERY_TROUBL
E;

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_LINE_FAILURE;

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_PHONELINE;

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_REPORTDEALY;

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_MODULE_FAULT;

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_FUSE_FAILURE;

ACPO_ENSTANDARD_ACFAIL;
Note: The XL Panel firmware ≥ 4.58g required for this
enhancement.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
285
E-mail / SMS Messaging
The program from version 4.91 allows you to
send notifications through e-mail and SMS
messages.
This functionality is for customers, who want to
inform their users about important events such
as fire alarms, port communication failures or
other manually defined events.
The new functionality requires from the
customer a working SMTP server (mail
server).
To enable this option several parameters have
to be configured:
 SMTP server options, such as host name,
sender, port, etc.
 Schedules that can be assigned to users
286
to determine when notifications can be
sent.
 Groups of users to whom notifications will
be sent.
Also, there is the ability to set new parameters
for each user, like an email address, a phone
number, and a carrier domain.
One notification can be sent to the specific
group of users - this functionality is
configurable from the Event Priority window.
Options for the SMTP server, schedules and
user groups are configurable from the
Management tab  Email node.
Email window in the Management tab
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
This window enables to create groups and add
users. Groups can be later assigned to specific
events. For each user assigned to a group, his
own schedule can be specified, and the Send
SMS message option enabled/disabled.
The SMTP configuration window enables the
operator to set options needed for sending
email messages. In this window, the operator
can set the host name and port, sender
address, SSL, and authentication options.
SMTP Settings window
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
287
Schedule window
The schedule determines when a notification
can be sent to the user and when it cannot.
288
This window is similar to other schedule
windows in the program.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Detect Duplicate Cards
Detect Duplicate Cards allows installers to choose if they would like to detect duplicate cards with an
account only or across all accounts in the Community Group. A new column has been added to the
Community Groups screen to allow the installer to choose the mode of operation.
When the Community is configured for detection “Within Each Account Only” then duplicate cards
will only be detected at the account level. This means that card ids may be duplicated within other
accounts within the Community, only duplicate card ids within an account will be detected. When
the Community is configured for detection “Across All Accounts in this Community” then duplicate
card ids will not be allowed amongst any of the accounts in the Community.
The default when creating a Community is ”Across All Accounts in this Community”. When
performing an installation upgrade to V4.79, the conversion utility will detect if there are any
duplicate card ids. If there are duplicates then the setting will be “Within Each Account Only” else it
will be set to the default of “Across All Accounts in this Community”.
The example: to setup the new options in the Director (≥V4.80)
Create Two Communities:
Add Community Group “Detect Across All Accounts” with “Across All Accounts In This Community”
selected.
Add Community Group “Detect Within Each AccountOnly” with “Within Each Account Only” selected.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
289
To Community “Detect Across All Accounts” Assign Shared Users and Authority ranges:
To Community “Detect Within Each AccountsOnly” Assign Shared Users and Authority ranges:
290
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Create Account “A1 Detect Across All” and Delete “User 1”:
Add Community Group “Detect Across All Accounts” to Account “A1 Detect Across All”:
Create “A2 Detect Across All” and Delete “User 1”.
Add Community Group “Detect Across All Accounts” to Account “A2 Detect Across All”.
Create “A1 Detect Within Each” and Delete “User 1”.
Add Community Group “Detect Within Each Accounts” to Account “A1 Detect Within Each”.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
291
Create “A2 Detect Within Each” and Delete “User 1”.
Add Community Group “Detect Within Each Accounts” to Account “A2 Detect Within Each”.
In Account “A1 Detect Across All” to “User 11” (not a shared User) add Card number “1”:
In Account “A2 Detect Across All” to “User 11” (not a shared User) add Card number “1” – THE
SYSTEM WON’T ALLOW because it detects that that card number is already in use within another
Account with the same Community (“A1 Detect Across All” Card number “1” is already assigned to
“User 11”):
292
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
In Account “A1 Detect Within Each” to “User 11” (not a shared User) add Card number “1”:
In Account “A2 Detect Within Each” to “User 11” (not a shared User) add Card number “1” – The
system WILL ALLOW because it is only looking to detects if that that card number is already in use
within this same Account (Doesn’t check that “A1 Detect Within Each” Card number “1” is already
assigned to “User 11”):
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
293
Installation and
Technical Reference
294
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
PC Issues and Software Installation
Welcome
Service Packs: It is always best to stay current on the
'service packs' available for your version of MS
Windows, and install them as new ones are released.
The topics that follow cover the various
aspects of installing and activating a new
system. For best results, be sure to scan all of
the installation topics that follow, and perform
the steps in sections that pertain to your type
of installation.
MS SQL Server Applications: Beginning with V4.7, the
VEREX Director software uses Microsoft SQL Server
2005 Express, and requires dedicated access to this
component. You may not be able to run other software
applications (on the same PC) that also use this
component. Exception: If you select SQL Server
support during the installation, the database will be
managed through an MS SQL Server (2000 or 2005)
PC, and you will be prompted to provide passwords that
allow the Director software to connect with its database.
Recommended Computer
Specifications
PC and RAM
Windows Version
(P4 Class)
Director
Installation
XP Pro / 2003
Server (Std.)
Windows Vista **
Windows 7
Professional 32or 64-bit
Windows Server 2008
R2 Enterprise 32or 64-bit
…with the latest service pack.
Director Client
only
2 GHz
2 GB
2 GHz
3 GB
2 GHz
3 GB
2 GHz
3 GB
Single PC
System
2 GHz
2.5 GB
2 GHz
4 GB
2.5 GHz
4 GB
2.5 GHz
4 GB
Busy Director
Server
3 GHz
4 GB
3 GHz
4 GB
3 GHz
8 GB
3 GHz
8 GB
Hard Drive
160 GB (for 20 million events, at leat 10 times the database size in free disk space for
database conversion is required)
Video /
Monitor
1024 x 768 or higher
Peripherals
DVD ROM drive
USB ports
Related Topics: "Advanced Database Features"
Summary
** Microsoft Vista: The 'Home' and 'Server' versions of
Microsoft Vista are NOT supported.
(You can also refer to the Director CD and packaging-which may provide additional details.)
Tip: You may need your Windows CD when setting up
a panel connection.
Director Server PC: For optimal performance, we
recommend running the Director (server) software on a
dedicated PC.
Windows XP Home: VEREX Director is NOT intended
for use under the "Home" version of Windows XP.
Windows NT, Millennium (ME), and Windows 2000 and
older: NOT supported.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
SQL Versions supported:
Version (2005)
Express
Standard
Workgroup
Enterprise
Note
Typical installation (managed by
the Director software).
SQL server installation option
(managed through SQL server).
Related Topics: "Advanced Database Features"
IP Connectivity ( V3.30 software and/or panels):
Setting up IP connections is documented separately.
For requirements pertaining to IP addresses, refer to
the installation guide provided with the IP interface
(may also be on the Director CD in PDF format).
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
295
More: IP Connectivity.
UPS Recommendation
Standard best practices recommend that
all servers and core components of
security systems be protected by a suitable
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
including surge protection.
Other Software
The VEREX Director software cannot coexist
on a NetVision capture station PC, or on a PC
running NetVision v2.1 remote station
software. (For the remote station software,
simply upgrade to v2.2 or higher.)
Networking Ports Used (443 and 80)
The Director software requires exclusive
access to ports 443 and 80, and they must not
be blocked on the network.
Note: Port 80 is used only for remote software
downloads.
Required Windows / Networking
Services (single-PC or client-server)
The following services/protocols must be
installed on the VEREX Director PC (Directorserver PC if applicable). This is typically done
by your network administrator or IT
department--as applicable:
 Client for Microsoft networks
 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP);
 "File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft
networks";
Either a network card, or "MS Loopback
Adapter" must be installed. As well,
"Workstation" and "Server" services must be
installed and running (look under:
 Control Panel, Administrative Tools,
Services; and/or:
 Right-click "Network Neighborhood",
Properties, Services").
Virus-Checker Software
Be sure to keep the data files (virus definitions)
for your virus software up-to-date. If Norton
Anti-Virus
erroneously
reports
"ikernel.exe" as being infected, download
and install the latest data files from
http://www.norton.com.
Video Adapter
Video adapter supporting SVGA resolution
(800 x 600) in more than 256 colors (e.g.,
'high-color' or 'true-color).
Tip: XGA resolution (1024 x 768) is recommended.
Display
Colour SVGA high-quality monitor.
(Recommended for 1024 x 768 resolution: Flat Panel:
At least 14"; Tube: At least 17".)
Dual Monitors: If you are using Windows dual-monitor
feature, the one on the right-hand side must be
connected/set-up as monitor #1.
Mouse / Pointing-Device
A mouse (or other type of pointing-device) that
is
equipped
with
a
scroll-wheel
is
recommended. This simplifies scrolling within
forms and in the on-line help.
296
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Hard Drive
At least 500 MB of free space while Windows
is running is recommended for a full installation
and typical database.
Software installation may include:  The Director
software;  The card-badging software;  MS Internet
Explorer components;  MS SQL-server components.
For demonstration purposes, you can likely install with
only 200-250 MB of space available (with Windows
running), however this is NOT recommended for a
real/working installation.
Note: With larger / busier systems, additional hard
drive space will be necessary. (This is unlikely to affect
your PC specifications, though, since the smallest harddrives available today are in the multi-gigabyte range.)
Software Media / other Drives
CD-ROM drive, double-speed (2X) or higher.
Communications Ports (Serial / USB)
One free serial port (COMx) is required for
each direct panel connection (and external
modem), in addition to any serial ports used by
a mouse, or other devices. One USB port will
also be needed (Director-server PC) for the
software 'activation' key.
Notes: Resources for serial ports cannot be 'shared'.
In a multi-PC (client-server) system, panel connections
can be spread across the available workstations as
desired. The activation key works with the provided
license-manager software to manage software licensing
and maximum system capacities.
Modems (for remotely managed panels)
Panels can communicate with the Director
software through a direct-cable-connection, a
dial-up modem, or an IP connection.
xL panels (narrow mainboard) support a
modem module that plugs onto the panel
mainboard.
ISM panels (square mainboard) use a built-in
modem/dialler for small accounts, or an
external modem as described below.
tested, and can be used if desired. Exception: This
modem cannot be used in conjunction with the Bell 103
(300 baud) support which is built into the panels. Bell
103 connections require a USR Sportster 56K modem
at the PC.
Modems for panels must support a standard serial
connection. As well, these modems must support
"Auto-Answer", and a connection speed of "38,400
baud"—either through physical switches, or
programmable in 'Flash' memory that is not affected by
power failure.
Where panels are to dial into the VEREX Director
system to transmit activity messages, each panel
requires its own dedicated modem. Otherwise, up to 30
panels can be connected together (via RS485) to share
a single modem.
Notes: Modems require a direct/analogue telephone
line. Our testing was done using a US Robotics
Sportster 56K modem. We provide details on how to
set up this model of modem. Other brands and models
may require more detailed knowledge of modem
configuration.
Printer and Parallel Printer Port
For printing reports, you can use any printer
supported by your version of Windows
(capable of printing at a suitable speed under
MS Windows).
System Panels
Main panels must have an up-to-date main
board and 'EPROM' chip to be compatible with
this software. Existing/older panels must be
upgraded or replaced. Tip: For details, refer to the
instructions provided with your panel upgrade kits.
Tip: For details on wiring and modem set-up, refer to
the Hardware or Commissioning guide for your panel.
Modems that support a connection speed of
38,400 baud are required (e.g., V90
compliant). It is best to use the same brand at
the PC and panel(s). A US Robotics Sportster
56K modem is recommended.
The LASAT Safire 560 Voice Modem has also been
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
297
For the Photo-Badging Option
The photo-badging option supports these
devices:
Video capture device: This feature works with
any video or frame-grabber board and
supported camera, or any video capture device
that is compliant with the "TWAIN" or "Wintab"
standard.
Writing Tablet: Any writing tablet that works
with your version of Windows can be used to
capture signatures. Signatures can also be
photographed, or entered using your mouse,
but a writing tablet is generally recommended.
Card Printer: Any desired printer can be used
that works with your version of MS Windows.
Installation: These items must be installed as per the
manufacturer's instructions provided with them.
Tip: If you have access to the internet, it is always best
to download and install the latest drivers available for
your devices.
Serial Port Installation and Set Up
Each PC to be associated with direct or
modem panel connection(s) must have free
serial port(s) available. Tip: In a multi-PC
(client-server)
installation,
the
panel
connections can be spread across multiple
PCs as desired.
Windows will normally auto-detect the new
serial card/port when you start the computer
(after installing the new serial card).
Alternatively, you can select Add New
Hardware from the windows "Control Panel".
For details on installing or setting up a serial
card that is not 'plug-and-play', refer to the
documentation provided with the serial card.
Note: This software requires serial ports that are NOT
sharing computer 'resources'. Check to ensure that all
applicable serial ports (COMx) are set to a unique
interrupt (IRQ) and address (I/O range). This can be
done through the Windows 'Control Panel'. (From the
Start menu, select Settings, Control Panel, System,
and Device Manager.)
A bus mouse can be installed to free up an additional
serial port if required.
298
Windows Settings Required
Microsoft Internet Information Services
(IIS)
Beginning with Director v4.7, you must ensure
that the Microsoft Internet Information Services
(IIS) component of Windows is NOT installed:
1)
Open the Windows control panel: [Start]
menu, select Settings (if applicable), and
then Control Panel.
2)
Double-click Add or Remove
Programs, and then select
Add/Remove Windows Components
on the left.
3)
Look for Microsoft Internet Information
Services (IIS) in the list. If it is NOT
selected (no check-mark), you can
simply cancel out of the screen.
4)
If it IS selected (check mark), click to
unselect it, and then use the [Next] and
[Finish] buttons to complete the
process.
Windows Date-Format
For Year-2000 compliance, the short-date
format for Windows must be set to include a 4digit year (yyyy).
1)
Select Settings (from the Start menu), and
then Control Panel.
2)
Double-click Regional Settings, and then
select the Date tab.
In the "Short Date Style" area, enter or
select a value that includes yyyy (4 digits)
for the year (such as yyyy-MM-dd). Then,
click Apply to see a sample in the "Short
Date Sample" area.
Click OK when finished.
3)
4)
Windows' Display Settings:
Access the Windows 'Control Panel' by
opening the Start menu, and selecting
Settings, and then Control Panel. Then,
double-click Display, select the Settings tab,
and set these items:
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
 1024 x 768 (XGA) resolution if supported,
otherwise, 800 x 600 (SVGA).
 High-color or true-color if supported, otherwise
"256 colors";
 Small fonts (NOT large fonts). Tip: Click
[Advanced] to check the font size.
Click OK when finished, and respond
appropriately to any additional screens that
appear.
Windows Authorities:
General Authorities:
+ Windows administrator authority is needed when
installing the VEREX Director software, or setting up
ports and/or modems through the VEREX Director
communications software.
Windows Firewall Settings
+ Beginning with Windows XP with service
pack 2 (SP2), MS Windows includes a
software firewall that blocks unauthorized
access through a network and/or the
internet. Director software components
and the ports that they use must be
identified to the Windows firewall. This is
covered in its own section (>>).
To Allow Database 'Backups' to a Shared
Network Drive
The "MSSQL$VEREX" ** service must be
started using a domain account, and that
account must be given 'write' access to the
specific logical drive/folder used for database
backups.
** SQL Server Exception: If the Director database is
being managed through SQL Server, the
service/instance will be called “MSSQLSERVER” (or
something else as defined by the SQL Server
administrator.
account (e.g., Domain\AccountName);  Enter
their network login password in the two boxes
provided;  Click [OK].
Phase 2: PC with the Shared Drive/Folder:
Run Windows Explorer, locate and right-click
the drive or folder to be used for backups, and
select Sharing from the pop-up menu. Then,
go to Security , and ensure the account
specified in the previous step has been given
"write" permissions.
Drive Formatted as
NTFS:
This will be required for the
drive/partition as well as the specific folder, as
applicable.
SQL Server Support:
User 'Logins' and Passwords:
With Director V4.10, your company's IT
department can optionally take charge of the
database under SQL Server. (This feature has
also been referred to as "Open Database".) If
you select this feature, you will be asked to
enter some new passwords, or optionally enter
some custom login information that was set up
at the SQL Server PC.
MS SQL Server Applications: Beginning with V4.7, the
VEREX Director software uses Microsoft SQL Server
2005 Express, and requires dedicated access to this
component. You may not be able to run other software
applications (on the same PC) that also use this
component. Exception: If you select SQL Server
support during the installation, the database will be
managed through an MS SQL Server (2000 or 2005)
PC, and you will be prompted to provide passwords that
allow the Director software to connect with its database.
Other advanced database features also require user
'logins' to be defined. For a typical system (i.e., not
SQL-server), these must be entered manually.
Related Topics: "Advanced Database Features"
Steps:
Phase 1: Director-Server PC (The PC that
includes "...Director-server.exe"):
 From the Windows [Start] menu, select
Settings, Control Panel, Administrative
Tools,
Services;

Double-click
MSSQL$VEREX (e.g., or MSSQLSERVER);
 Go into Log On ;  Select "This Account";
 [Browse] to and/or enter the specific domain
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
299
Software Installation for a
Fresh/New System
Notes:
Panel & Software Revisions: Beginning with v3.20,
the VEREX Director software is compatible with
panel firmware v2.0 and higher (although some
features will require updating the panel firmware
and/or modules).
Associated panels must be the same rev. level, and
the Director software must typically be upgraded to
the same level or higher.
Notes: Panels V3.3 are required for IP-related
features. V1.x and older legacy panels must be
upgraded or replaced (refer to the instructions
provided with your panel upgrade kit).
Client/Server Tip:
When installing a multi-PC
system, the software is typically installed first at the
VEREX Director server, and then at the client PCs.
Note: Client PCs cannot be used until the server is
up and running, and the client PCs have been
identified to the server--as per references below.
Client-server operation is supported through your
'activation key' and 'license-manager' software.
Director Server and Workstations: The Director
server PC is not to be confused with your network
server PC, or any network-related components,
software, or drivers.
Director Server:
The
(networked) PC that includes "...Director-Server.exe";
Director Client-Workstation: Any networked PC that
contains the VEREX Director main program (operator
client). Tip: With the applicable software installed,
the Director server PC can also be used as an
operator workstation.
Activation Key: The activation key provided with
the software provides 90 days of operation with
standard features. For additional features, clientserver operation, or extended duration, you must
run the license-manager program (after installing
the software).
For details, refer to "Software
Activation and Licensing".
"Cannot Open Database for Photo-badging": If
you see this when starting the Director software,
(re)install the Microsoft DAO software from the
VEREX
Director
CD
(d:\VEREX
Director
Setup\DAO\setup.exe).
Steps:
1) Install the new software from the CD:
 Insert the CD-ROM into the drive, and wait
for the 'auto-run' installation screen to
appear.
(If the 'auto-run' screen does not appear, eject & reinsert the CD, or use the Windows Explorer to run
the "Setup.exe" program file on your CD.)
 Respond to the screens that appear, entering
any required information, and making
selections that are suitable for your installation.
Note: Some stages of the installation may
take a while--with only an hour-glass displayed
(be sure to let it finish).
If You are Prompted to Overwrite any existing Files: In
general, you can select "Yes" to overwrite existing files.
Exception: If the files are indicated as 'Read-Only',
select "No".
Software Components: Refer to the descriptions
below when deciding which software components to
install:
 Operator Client: For each PC to be used as a
VEREX Director workstation.
(For a multi-PC installation, install this on the VEREX
DIRECTOR server PC as well.)
 Communication Client: For each PC to be
associated with a panel / modem connection.
(This may be used on its own, or in conjunction with
other software components.)
 Server: For the PC that will contain the VEREX
Director database--i.e., the 'server' (or only) PC.
Tip: Any or all of the software components can be
selected, as applicable (although "Server" will be
selected only on one PC.)
2) Select [Next] or [Finish] as required to
complete the installation.
Install as a Service?: Select this if you want the
Director components to be able to function when no
one is logged into MS Windows.
V4.7: The Director-Server and Communications
client are installed as a service automatically.
3) Be sure to restart your PC when prompted.
Tip: After restarting, a "DB Generator" utility will
create a default start-up database for your VEREX
Director software.
4) Multi-PC (Client-Server systems): Install the
VEREX Director software on any additional
PCs.
Cyclic-ID Codes at each client PC: After
installing the software at each client
workstation, start the software, open Help,
About... and jot down the "Cyclic-ID" code, as
this will be needed to 'tell' the server to allow
300
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
database access for each of these
workstations.
This is required for the VEREX Director software, as
well as the Communications software, as applicable.
(To start the software, open the Start menu, select
VEREX Director V4, followed by Programs, and
VEREX Director.)
Tip: If you prefer, you can cut-and-paste the ID codes
into "Notepad" or "MS Word", and use a floppy-disk to
transport the file to the server PC (for registration).
Similarly, you'll need to record the "Cyclic-ID"
code from the Communications software on
each PC to be associated with an alarm panel
connection (in addition to the VEREX Director
ID/code, as applicable).
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start the
communications service by right-clicking the icon, and
selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
If prompted for the Server Name: Enter or select the
name (or IP address) associated with the server PC,
and click OK (press F1 if you'd like more information).
If a Device Configuration Screen Appears: If the
"Direct-Cable-Connection" or modem that you'll be
using has already been set up on the PC, you can
select it now (press F1 if you'd like more information).
When finished with this screen, click OK. Otherwise,
click Cancel to close the device-configuration screen.
Then, right-click the LCD/Telephone symbol
near the right-hand end of the Windows taskbar, and select About from the pop-up menu.
Note: A different "Cyclic-ID" code will appear each
time you open the "Help, About" screen. Any of these
numbers can be used for the specific software
application/PC combination.
5)
When finished, be sure to place the CD in a
safe place.
Note: Your software (single PC, or database server)
will need to be activated as described under "Software
Activation and Licensing" (default licensing is valid for
90 days only).
Client-server Note: Once the "Cyclic-ID" has been
obtained from all client PCs, this information will need to
be entered at the server (to activate the client PCs).
For details, refer to "Client/Server Access and
Permissions".
For details on software activation and licensing,
setting up a panel connection, and/or setting up a
new system, skim forward through the topics that
follow, carefully following the steps in any topics that
apply to your type of installation.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Upgrading from an Earlier Version
of Software
Attention: You can upgrade from V4.4 or newer to
the latest. Older software must be upgraded to V4.6
as an initial step. Director databases V4.4x or 4.5x
will be upgraded in two stages to V4.6, then to the
latest version--automatically. This process can take
quite a while.
Note: To upgrade after v4.7 or run the Director DB
Generator utility manually, you must first shut down
the Director software, and "Stop" the Director-Server
service.
Notes: To upgrade after v4.7 or run the Director
DB Generator utility manually, you must first shut
down the Director software, and also "Stop" its
'services' (rather than only shutting down any service
managers). Detail: Right-click the Director server
(or communications) Manager near the right-hand
end of the Windows task-bar, and select "Stop…".
When finished, be sure to restart Windows, or both of
the Director services manually (as applicable).
Related Topics.
 Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager);  Client/Server Issues
and the Director Server Manager
If You Need to Transfer the Database to a
Different PC: Before starting the software upgrade,
skip to the related section (to follow/below).
Capacity Upgrade: If you wish to upgrade your
system capacities, while retaining the same revision
of software, refer to "Software Activation and
Licensing".
Client/Server Tip:
When installing a multi-PC
system, the software is typically installed first at the
Director-server PC, and then at the client PCs.
Director Server: The (networked) PC that includes
"...Director-Server.exe"; Note: Client PCs cannot be
used until the server is up and running, and the client
PCs have been identified to the server--as per
references below.
Client-server operation is
supported through your 'activation key' and 'licensemanager' software.
"Cannot Open Database for Photo-badging": If
you see this when starting the Director software,
(re)install the Microsoft DAO software from the
VEREX
Director
CD
(d:\VEREX
Director
Setup\DAO\setup.exe).
If you are Warned About a Certificate
Problem During a Software Upgrade
Beginning with v4.72, the Director software
supports validation certificates for additional
security when remote operators (and/or remote
communications clients) are accessing the
Director server.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
301
Being told about a certificate problem before
any have been assigned can be considered
normal operation.
If You Are Prompted about a Certificate Problem
Continue: To allow logging in--temporarily ignoring
any problem with the server certificate.
Continue, and don't ask me again: If you will not be
using validation certificates for now. Tip: This will be
reset when a server certificate is assigned.
Stop: To abort the login due to a suspect validation
certificate.
Also See: "Server Validation Certificates"
Typical Steps
1) Ensure your database is in sync with your
system panel(s), and that you have an up-todate 'backup' copy of the database.
For details, refer to the on-line help or User's Guide
for your present version of software. Refer to:
"Alarm Panel Communications and Updates", or;
"Panel Communications and Updates", and;
"Backing Up or Restoring the
Database".
VEREX
Note: With software V3.3, you cannot
upgrade directly from a database
st
backup (you must 'restore' 1 if
needed, and then upgrade the
software).
VEREX Director workstation.
(For a multi-PC installation, install this on the VEREX
DIRECTOR server PC as well.)
 Communication Client: For each PC to be
associated with a panel / modem connection. (This
may be used on its own, or in conjunction with other
software components.)
 Server: For the PC that will contain the VEREX
Director database--i.e., the 'server' (or only) PC.
Tip: Any or all of the software components can be
selected, as applicable (although "Server" will be
selected only on one PC.)
3) Select [Next] or [Finish] as required to
complete the installation.
Install as a Service?: Select this if you want the
Director components to be able to function when no
one is logged into MS Windows.
V4.7: The Director-Server and Communications
client are installed as a service automatically.
4) Convert the previous database for use with
the new software:
Director-DB Convert.exe
-------------------------
When finished, shut down your
VEREX Director software.
2) Install the new software from the
CD:
 Insert the CD-ROM into the drive,
and wait for the 'auto-run'
installation screen to appear.
(If the 'auto-run' screen does not appear,
eject & re-insert the CD, or use the
Windows Explorer to run the
"Setup.exe" program file on your CDROM drive.)
- (Action Type): Select the database version that you are
upgrading from;
- [OK]: Click this button to start the conversion process.
 Respond to the screens that appear,
entering any required information, and
making selections that are suitable for your
installation.
+ If You are Prompted to Overwrite any existing
Files: In general, you can select "Yes" to overwrite
existing files. Exception: If the files are indicated
as 'Read-Only', select "No".
Software Components: Refer to the descriptions below
when deciding which software components to install:
 Operator Client: For each PC to be used as a
302
Notice: If you have only a backup file (.BAK), you
must perform a database restoral first.
QuickRef: VEREX Director-Repair.exe
Backup/Restore [ Restore Database ].
Related Topic: Reverting to (Restoring) a Backup
Copy of the VEREX Director Database
 Select [Yes] when asked if you wish to
convert the database;
Tip: If you wish to start the database conversion
utility manually, look for "VEREX Director-DB
Convert.exe" in the "VEREX Director Vx" folder (not
available through the Windows [Start] menu).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
 Select the database version that you are
upgrading from;
 Click the large [Copy…] button at the bottom
of the screen, and follow any additional
prompts that appear. When this process is
finished, click the X (top-right corner) to close
the database update module.
 To allow the installation to finish, be sure to
restart the PC when asked (and follow any
additional prompts that appear).
information). When finished with this screen, click
OK. Otherwise, click Cancel to close the deviceconfiguration screen.
Then, right-click the LCD/Telephone
symbol near the right-hand end of the
Windows task-bar, and select About from
the pop-up menu.
Note: A different "Cyclic-ID" code will appear each
time you open the "Help, About" screen. Any of
these numbers can be used for the specific
software application/PC combination.
5) Multi-PC (Client-Server systems): Install the
software on any additional PCs as required.
Cyclic-ID Codes at each client PC: After
installing the software at each client
workstation, start the software, open Help,
About... and jot down the "Cyclic-ID" code,
as this will be needed to 'tell' the server to
allow database access for each of these
workstations.
This is required for the VEREX Director software, as
well as the Communications software, as
applicable.
(To start the software, open the Start menu, select
VEREX Director V4, followed by Programs, and
VEREX Director.)
Tip: If you prefer,
you can cut-and-paste the ID codes into "Notepad"
or "MS Word", and use a floppy-disk to transport the
file to the server PC (for registration).
Similarly, you'll need to record the
"Cyclic-ID" code from the
Communications software on each PC to
be associated with an alarm panel
connection (in addition to the VEREX
Director ID/code, as applicable). Detail:
Check the Windows taskbar for an
LCD/keypad symbol.
If the LCD/telephone symbol is not present, start
the communications service as follows:
From the Start menu, select Programs,
Administrative Tools, Component Services.
Then, select the "Services" tab, locate VEREX
Director-Communication in the list, right-click it,
and select "Start".
If prompted for the Server Name: Enter or select
the name (or IP address) associated with the server
PC, and click OK (press F1 if you'd like more
information).
If a Device Configuration Screen Appears: If the
"Direct-Cable-Connection" or modem that you'll be
using has already been set up on the PC, you can
select it now (press F1 if you'd like more
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
6) When finished, be sure to place the CD in a
safe place. Reminder: If is best to perform a
database backup right away. For details, refer to
"Backing Up or Restoring the Database".
Notice: After upgrading, previous database
'backups' may not be supported. Perform a new
database backup right away. For details, refer to
"Backing Up or Restoring the Database".
Note: Your software (single PC, or database
server) will need to be activated as described under
"Software Activation and Licensing" (default
licensing is valid for 90 days only).
Client-server Note: Once the "Cyclic-ID" has been
obtained from all client PCs, this information will
need to be entered at the server (to activate the
client PCs). For details, refer to "Client/Server
Access and Permissions".
Additional Steps/Related Topics
For details on software activation and licensing, setting
up a panel connection, and/or setting up a new system,
skim forward through the topics that follow, carefully
following the steps in any topics that apply to your type
of installation.
If You Need to Transfer the
Database to a Different PC
(i.e., changing the VEREX Director-server PC)
Activation Key and Licensing
If the database is transferred to a different PC,
the 'activation key' (on the back of the PC)
must be transferred with it, and the software
licensing upgrade must be performed on that
PC (after upgrading the software as described
previously/above).
For details on upgrading your software licensing, refer
to "Software Activation and Licensing". {button
,Alink(License, , , )} View Topic
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
303
If the communications client
(modem/panel connection) is being
transferred as well:
 Go into each defined "Communications
Pool", and remove all devices (on the left
side of the screen), and then delete all
devices (on the right side of the screen).
3)
4)
QuickRef: VEREX Director-Repair.exe
Backup/Restore [ Restore Database ].
Related Topic: Reverting to (Restoring) a
Backup Copy of the VEREX Director Database
Notice: Do NOT start the Director software yet.
Refer to: Communication Pools for System Panels
 Ensure the new/replacement modems
and/or "Direct-cable-connections" have
been:
+ Set up under Windows on the new PC,
and;
+ Added through the communications
software, and;
+ Updated in any applicable
"Communication Pools".
Refer to: "New Installation? Try the Wizard!", or
"Panel Connection Overview".
A "Could not make call" or "Serial Cable on COMx not
Available" error is an indication that the items above
have not been dealt with.
Typical Steps:
Notice: This pertains to a typical system (i.e., not using
SQL server). If switching to a SQL-server-managed
installation, the database will be transferred
automatically by the installation program (or DB
generator).
Related Topics: Advanced Database Features
If upgrading from V4.4 or Newer: In this
case, you need to work from a current 'backup'
(.BAK file) of the existing database, which
must be 'restored' and then converted using
the new software.
5)
Perform a backup with the existing
Director software.
QuickRef: VEREX Director-Repair.exe
Backup/Restore [ Backup Database ].
Related Topic: Backing up or Restoring the
Database
2)
304
Copy the backup (BAK file) to
somewhere on your network, or onto a
Convert the restored database for use
with the new software.
QuickRef: VEREX Director-DB Convert.exe.
Related Topic: See step #4 under "Upgrading
from an Earlier Version of Software",
previous/above.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If Not Upgrading: If you are transferring
your existing version of VEREX Director
(v3.3) to a different PC, perform the
following steps:
1)
Perform a backup with the existing
Director software.
QuickRef: VEREX Director-Repair.exe
Backup/Restore [ Backup Database ].
Related Topic: Backing up or Restoring the
Database
2)
3)
Attention: You can upgrade from V4.4 or newer
to the latest. Older software must be upgraded to
V4.6 as an initial step. Director databases V4.4x
or 4.5x will be upgraded in two stages to V4.6,
then to the latest version--automatically. This
process can take quite a while.
1)
CD-R, etc., and then transfer it to the
new PC (any suitable folder);
Install the (new) Director software on
the new PC (including generating a default
database);
Perform a database restoral;
Copy the backup (BAK file) to
somewhere on your network, or onto a
CD-R, etc., and then transfer it to the
new PC (any suitable folder);
Install the Director software on the new
PC (including generating a default 4)
A Director.XDF file was created
during the installation. Copy this file to
the folder that contains your transferred
BAK file.
Source XDF file location:
 Windows XP: C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Director,
or;
C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users.Windows\Application Data\Director
5)
Perform a database restoral using the
existing Director software;
QuickRef: VEREX Director-Repair.exe
Backup/Restore [ Restore Database ].
Related Topic: Reverting to (Restoring) a
Backup Copy of the VEREX Director Database
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
DCOM Setup (Required for Client-Server VEREX Director Systems):
Beginning with v4.7, the VEREX Director software no longer uses DCOM,
and it does not require any DCOM set up.
Firewall Settings (e.g., Windows XPsp2)
Beginning with XPsp2, MS Windows includes a 'firewall' that blocks unauthorized access through a
network or the internet. Proper operator requires Director software components to be identified to
the firewall. (This is done through the Windows 'Control Panel' – which will require someone with
'Administrator' authorities on each specific PC.)
Note: If 'Windows Firewall' is not listed in the Windows Control Panel, then this section does not apply.
Locator (Select / Enter this): [Start], Run, type "Control", and click [OK].
Double-click "Windows Firewall", and then select the
following items:
Required for the
Director Server
Required for
Workstation PCs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(PC w/ Director-server.exe)
General Tab:
 On (recommended)
Exceptions Tab:
Ensure the following programs and ports have been added and
selected in the list:
[Add Program]:
 VEREX Director.exe;
 VEREX Director-Communication.exe;
 VEREX Director-Server.exe;
 VEREX Director-Server Manager.exe;
Note: As applicable.
Director-server and
Server Manager will not
apply.
[Add Port]:
 TCP ports 80 and 443. (This is needed only for remote
downloading and client/server operation across the
internet.)
After adding items to the list, ensure they are all selected in the
list () before clicking [OK] to close the screen:
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
305
Software Activation and Licensing
More: For additional topics related to capacities and supported features, refer to “System Capacities” and “AccountWide Panel Settings”.
Software "Activation Key"
System capacities and types of expansion / application modules supported depends on your
software licensing, which is managed through a small 'activation key'.
Activation Key: The VEREX Director software uses a small 'activation key' to manage
software licensing and optional features. This device must be plugged onto the PC that
contains the software database (V4: USB connector; V3.3.2: Parallel/printer port;
V3.3.3: Either).
Note: Director software V4 will not start up if the USB key is missing.
Activating Your Software
The Director USB Security Key or “HASP” must be registered or the Director Program will stop
operating!
Your software (activation key) comes pre-enabled to operate for 90 days with standard features.
For additional features, client-server operation, or extended duration, you must run the license-manager program.
Attention: License validations cannot be done over the phone. As well, for sites with NO access to the internet,
software activation keys must be registered ahead of time. For details, see “If you Have Access to the Internet from
a Different PC Only”, to follow/below.
Dealer Code and Password
Before you begin, you will need a Dealer code and password that must be entered in the
Licensing Manager’s Registration Information.
The Dealer code and password can be obtained from VEREX.
Please perform the following
procedures to obtain a new
validation key number and register
the security key.
 After the Director program has been
installed, run the version 4 License
Manager program
(Director Server PC if client-server):
[Start]  Programs  VEREX
Director  VEREX Director –
License Manager.
 The “Information” screen will open
supplying a list of system features
that are enabled or not enabled that
were included with the system.
The “Registration” screen will display. Enter
the information beginning with the Dealer
Code.
306
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
If you HAVE Access to the
Internet on This PC
 After entering the Registration
Information and Internet Access is
available on the Director host PC,
select:
and press the “Next” button.
 The License Manager will connect
with the Licensing Server over the PC’s Internet connection, to register the key. After a few minutes, a
message should appear that the procedure was successful and your validation Key value will be
automatically changed.
 Press the “Done” button at the bottom of this screen.
 The Information screen will display again with the Key Type Feature Value listed as “Registered”
 You can now exit License Mgr. and the
Director program will be fully functional.
If you Have Access to the Internet
from a Different PC Only
 Select:
and then the “Next” button.
 A message will appear with instructions for connecting to the Internet Server at another PC that does
have Internet Access.
 If there is a printer connected to the Director host PC, press the “Print…” button at the bottom of the
Dealer Information screen.
 The key value and Dealer Info will print out or, if no printer is available, write the information down.
 Take this information and the Director version 4 installation CD to a computer that does have Internet
access.
 Run the CD and run the “Secure License Agent” from the CD’s directory.
 Select the “Register” button and enter the key value and Dealer Info. in this Registration screen. Press
the “Next” button.
 The License Agent will connect with the Licensing Server over this PC’s Internet connection and if
successful, a new validation key value should display where the old one was. Record this new key
value. Close the Secure License Agent and remove the Director installation CD.
 Take the new key value back to the host Director PC running the License Mgr. and enter the new key
value in place of the old one in the Register screen. Press “Next”. A success message should appear.
Press “Done” and the Information screen will display the Feature Key Type Value as “Registered”.
 Close the License Manager and the Director program is now fully functional.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
307
Upgrading Your Software (Adding Optional Features)
To enable the upgraded functionality, you will need to register your system and obtain a new
validation key number. The following registration procedures are available with Director
Version 4. NOTE: This process must be repeated for each feature added.
 After the Director program has been installed, run the version 4 License Manager program
(Director Server PC if client-server):
[Start]  Programs  VEREX Director  VEREX Director – License Manager.
 This Information screen will appear displaying your current system settings.
 Click [Upgrade System] at the bottom of this screen.
 The Upgrade screen will now display.
 Enter the 15-character option number provided with your software upgrade, in groups of 5, in the
“Option” boxes supplied.
308
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
If you HAVE Access to the Internet on
This PC
March Networks R4-R5 DVR
Support
 If the PC you are working from has Internet
Access, select:
 Press the “Next” button at the bottom of this
screen. The License Manager will connect with
the Licensing Server to register your upgrade.
After a few minutes, a message should appear
that the procedure was successful and your 30
character, validation Key number will be
automatically changed.
 Press the “Done” button at the bottom of this
screen.
 The Information screen will display again with
your new option enabled.
You can now exit License Mgr. and operate the
Director normally.
Beginning with Director software v4.7,
March Networks R4 and R5 DVRs are
supported via optional licensing.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for
March R4 DVRs.
To activate this feature, perform the
following steps:
1) Activate Your license option
This is described in the preceding topic:
"Software Activation and Licensing" (<<).
2) Install the March DVR Drivers
If you Have Access to the Internet from a
Different PC Only
a) On the Director CD, locate the folder:
d:\…Director Setup\March R4 (or
R5).
 If you do not have access to the Internet on the
Director PC, after entering the option number
in the License Mgr’s Upgrade screen, select:
b) Double-click to run the exe file located
in that folder.
(e.g., …DVR_SDK.exe).
and press
“Next”.
 Follow the information that is displayed
regarding using the “License Agent” on the v4
Director’s installation CD on another PC with
Internet access to obtain a validation key
number.
c) Click [Next] and/or [Finish] as
necessary to move through the
screens that appear while leaving all
available selections at their default
values.
(Do NOT change any settings.)
d) Follow any additional instructions that
appear.
(Restart the PC only if prompted to do
so.)
Note: If you will be working with R4 and R5 DVRs, be
sure to run both of the exe files--in any order that you
prefer.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
309
Network USB HASP Key
(Director V4.51)
Introduction:
This optional feature allows running the
Director software in an environment
such as Microsoft "Virtual Machine" that
doesn't support a USB HASP key
directly. This feature is supported
beginning with V4.51 of the Director
software.
310
Instructions:
Before installing or upgrading the
Director Software:
1) Insert this USB Network HASP key
on any regular PC on the network
(i.e., not running MS virtual
machine).
2) Install the HASP license manager
software on that PC.
Detail: Locate the "HaspHL
License Manager" folder on the
Director CD, and run the file
"LMsetup.exe" therein.
3) Respond as desired when asked if
you wish to install it as an
application, or as a service.
Tip: Installing as a service means
that the HASP license manager
software will start automatically when
the PC/OS is restarted, and that it
will work whether anyone is logged in
or not.
4) Ensure the HASP license manager
software is running on its PC.
5) Now, go ahead and install the
Director Software (V4.51) on its PC.
Note: The Network HASP key and
Director PC must be on the same
network 'subnet'.
Tip: Before upgrading an existing
installation, ensure that you have a
current backup of the Director
database.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Remote Software Download and Remote Access (V4.7)
Introduction
Beginning with v4.7, you can download the
Director (client) software across a network, or
via the internet for installation on a remote PC.
This replaces the previous web browser
feature, and supports all features--instead of a
limited subset.
Requirements
Tip: The server(s) and remote clients must be the
same revision. If you try to log onto a newer server,
you'll be asked if you'd like to automatically download a
software update.
To Download the Software
Director-Server PC
 You need to know the IP address (or public
name) of a PC where the VEREX Directorserver software (V4.7) has been installed.
 That PC must be running, and the Directorserver service must not have been 'stopped'.
 Port 80 must be 'open' on the network, and
any firewalls must NOT be set to block
downloading.
 The Director-server PC must be running, and
the Director-server service must not have
been 'stopped'.
 Port 443 must be 'open' on the network, and
any firewalls must be made aware of the
Director software components.
Details: Firewall Settings (Windows XPsp2)
Remote/Your PC
 You must have access to the Director-Server
PC--through a network, or the internet.
 If connecting out through a proxy server,
some additional information must be
included when logging into the Directorserver (domain, user name, and password
for the client PC's proxy-server).
(For these and other proxy settings, get an
'IT' person to help you.)
Downloading and Installing the
Software
1)
2)
Remote/Your PC
3)
 You must have access to the Director-Server
PC--through a network, or the internet.
 You must be using Internet Explorer v6 or
higher, and its internet security must not be
set to block downloading. Locator: Tools,
Internet Options, Security.
Launch your Internet Explorer browser.
In the address bar, type: "http://" (without the
quotes), plus the IP address (or public name)
of the Director-server PC (e.g.,
111.222.333.444), and press Enter.
Follow the instructions that appear to
download and install the Director (operator
client) software.
Tip: If you have trouble downloading, try the following:
 Close and re-open your IE browser;
 In the browser, go to: Tools, Internet Options,
General (tab), Temporary Internet Files: [Settings].
Then, select "Every Visit to the Page", and click [OK].
To Use the Director Software Remotely
Director-Server PC
 To log in, you need to know the IP address
(or public name) of a Director-Server PC
(V4.7).
Tip: This can be an IP address, or a name (FQDN).
Contact your IT rep. for assistance if needed. For
remote access (different PC) with certificate
authentication, this value must be as supported by
the certificate.
More: Server Validation Certificates
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
311
Client/Server Issues and the Director Server Manager (v4.7)
Problems? See "Troubleshooting", to follow/below.
Introduction
For systems with client-server licensing, the
VEREX Director database can be on one PC,
and
accessible
from
multiple
client
workstations--either on a single network, or
through an internet connection.
Various
licensing options are available to support
different numbers of client connections.
Tip: The server(s) and remote clients must be the
same revision. If you try to log onto a newer server,
you'll be asked if you'd like to automatically download a
software update.
Database connections are managed through
the Director Server software--which is installed
as a service so it starts automatically with the
Windows operating system. A typical Director
installation uses SQL server Express
(included).
You also have the option of
managing the database on any PC running the
full SQL Server software (initially, 2000 or
2005).
Permissions can be set to determine which
features will be available.
This is done
separately for each client PC (under
"[Management],
PC
Access,
Client
Permissions"), and then for each specific
operator (via "[Management], Operator,
Operator Permissions").
Requirements
 Software Key: The Director server PC
includes a USB activation key that must be
present before any connection to the Director
database can occur. If this key is missing, no
one will be able to log into the Director
software.
 Cyclic-ID: All client software must be
identified to the Director server PC. This is
done by obtaining a "Cyclic-ID" value at each
client PC (under "Help, About"), and then
entering those values at the Director server PC
(under "[Management], PC Access, Client
Access").
312
 Ports / Firewall Settings: For PCs using a
personal firewall (e.g., Windows XPsp2),
Director software components must be
identified to the firewall. To connect to the
Director server via the internet, ports 80 and
443 must also be "open" on the network.
Check with your network people to ensure this
is dealt with.
Details: Firewall Settings (Windows XPsp2)
 Service Manager Settings: Typically none
needed.
Exception: To access the Director-server on a different
PC, the server location must be identified through the
server manager.
The Director-Server manager
Beginning with Director v4.7, the Director
Server is installed as a 'service', so it starts
automatically with the Windows operating
system.
The Director Server manager
provides access to various settings and tasks
pertaining to the Director Server.
Locator: Right-Click the LCD/Folder
Symbol
on the right-hand edge of the Task-Bar
- Start Server: Select this to restart the DirectorServer service (e.g., after stopping it previously).
- Stop Server: Select this to stop the DirectorServer service.
Attention: Stopping the server service is NOT
recommended while any panel updates are in
progress.
- Server Language: Some of the text for detailed
audit reports comes through the Director-server
(in the language of the last operator who was
logged in). This selection allows temporarily
changing the language as desired.
- Server Location: Typically, leave this as
"127.0.0.1". To access "Director-server" on
another PC, enter the network "computer name"
or "IP Address" here.
Tip: This can be an IP address, or a name (FQDN).
Contact your IT rep. for assistance if needed.
- Proxy Configuration: Provides settings used
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
to connect out to Director-server on another PC
via the internet through a proxy server.
Typically not used.
Settings: "Proxy Type" (select "None" if not using this
feature), "Domain", and a "User Name" and
"Password" that has suitable permissions on that
domain. (For these and other proxy settings, get an
'IT' person to help you.)
- Manager Language: This allows changing the
language for this menu and subsequent
screens.
- About: This shows the version number and
other information for the Director-server
manager.
- Exit: This shuts down the Director-server
manager, while leaving the Director-server
service in its present state.
Tip: This service manager will be available again the
next time someone logs into the Director-server PC.
To restart it manually, go to: [Start], (All Programs),
Programs, Startup, and select VEREX DirectorServer Manager. (This can also be found under (e.g.)
C:\Program Files\VEREX Director V4.)
Troubleshooting
Start-up of the VEREX Director-services
(Director server or communications) may be
delayed or blocked in certain situations. If you
suspect this, you can use the Windows "Event
Viewer" to see what's going on.
Locator: [Start], ..Run, .."eventvwr", [OK]. Then, go
to the "Application" node, and double-click error
messages to look for ones pertaining to Director
services (Director server or communications).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
313
Client/Server Access and Permissions
Licensing: Client-server operation is optional, and must
be selected though the license-manager software.
For details on upgrading your licensing, refer to
"Software Activation and Licensing"
(previous).
Assigning
a Certificate to the Director Server
How to Get Here (Locator)
Select Server Access from the MyTools bar, or from the
'tree', select [Management], PC Access (+), and Server
Access.
Server Validation
Certificates (V4.72)
Introduction
Beginning with v4.70, the Director
software uses secure IP-based
communications between the server
and client PCs. As an extra measure
of security, Director V4.72 allows the Steps / On This Screen
- Validation Certificate: This area shows details on the
use of "certificates" for server
certificate file that is presently in effect for this server.
validation with client/server operation.
These can be obtained through your
dealer.
- […] (Add Certificate): Click this to browse for, and assign a
certificate. (VVC file).
- [X] (Remove Certificate): Click this to unassign the certificate
that is presently in effect.
Also See (To assign for each Communication Client): 
Certificate validation occurs whenever
someone (or the communications
service) initiates a connection with the
Director server. You may also be told
there is a problem with the certificate before
one has been assigned. This is normal.
If You Are Prompted about a Certificate Problem
Continue: To allow logging in--temporarily ignoring
any problem with the server certificate.
Continue, and don't ask me again: If you will not be
using validation certificates for now. Tip: This will be
reset when a server certificate is assigned.
Stop: To abort the login due to a suspect validation
certificate.
Also See: + Client Access (Allowable Client List)
+ Secure IP Communications
314
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
well as the Communications software, as applicable.)
Client Access (Allowable Client
List)
Tip: This is not needed (does not apply) for
communications client software on the same PC as the
Director-server.
Allowable Client List
In a client/server system, client workstations
are given access to the central database by
identifying them to the server. (After installing
the VEREX Director software at the server and
client workstations.)
Note: This requires obtaining a "Cyclic-ID" code from
the VEREX Director software running on each client PC
(main program, and the communications module).
Communications Client Software: Client access
pertains separately to communications client software,
although the concept of permissions does not apply
(i.e., you need to obtain the 'Cyclic-ID' code from the
communications client software and 'register' it here as
an allowed client, but the permission setting is ignored).
Director Server and Workstations: The Director
server PC is not to be confused with your network
server PC, or any network-related components,
software, or drivers. Director Server: The (networked)
PC that contains the VEREX Director database, and the
database-server component of the Director software;
Exception: For systems managed under SQL server,
the Director-server PC contains the "... DirectorServer.exe" software module, and the Director
database will be stored on the MS SQL server PC;
Validation Certificate for each
Communication Client
For secure IP panel communications and
reporting/monitoring via HSC-IP, Director
V4.72 allows the use of "certificates" as an
extra measure of security.
These can be obtained through your dealer.
Note: Certificates appear here only for communications
clients, and apply only for secure (encrypted) IP
communications.
More: Secure IP Communications
Obtaining the "Cyclic ID" Codes from
Each Client PC
A security code must be obtained from each
client PC that is to be given access to the
VEREX Director database.
(This is required for the VEREX Director software, as
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
After installing the software at each client
workstation, start the software, open Help,
About... and jot down the "Cyclic-ID" code,
as this will be needed to 'tell' the server to
allow database access for each of these
workstations. (To start the software, open
the Start menu, select VEREX Director V4,
followed by Programs, and VEREX
Director.)
Tip: If you prefer, you can cut-and-paste the ID codes
into "Notepad" or "MS Word", and use a floppy-disk to
transport the file to the server PC (for registration).
Similarly, you'll need to record the "CyclicID" code from the Communications software
on each PC to be associated with an alarm
panel connection (in addition to the VEREX
Director ID/code, as applicable).
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start the
communications service by right-clicking the icon, and
selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
If prompted for the Server Name: Enter or select the
name (or IP address) associated with the Directorserver PC, and click OK (press F1 if you'd like more
information).
If a Device Configuration Screen Appears: If the
"Direct-Cable-Connection" or modem that you'll be
using has already been set up on the PC, you can
select it now (press F1 if you'd like more information).
When finished with this screen, click OK. Otherwise,
click Cancel to close the device-configuration screen.
Then, right-click the LCD/Telephone symbol
near the right-hand end of the Windows
task-bar, and select About from the pop-up
menu.
Note: A different "Cyclic-ID" code will appear each time
you open the "Help, About" screen. Any of these
numbers can be used for the specific software
application/PC combination.
Adding a Client PC to the List
Select Client Access from your MyTools bar,
or select [Management] in the 'tree', open the
PC Access branch, and select Client Access.
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
Forms view: Details for one item at a time;
Grid View: All defined items in a list.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
315
Now, click [+] at the bottom of the form, or
right-click the form, and select Add New from
the pop-up menu.
Alternative: You can also select a blank/grey item from
the list (Forms view: bottom of the window).
Now, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while entering and/or selecting your
desired settings.
Viewing or Changing the Listed Name
or "Cyclic ID" for a Client PC
Select Client Access from your MyTools bar,
or select [Management] in the 'tree', open the
PC Access branch, and select Client Access.
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
(In 'Forms' view, select the desired item at the
bottom of the window. Tip: You can also use the
'browse' buttons to scan through the listed client PCs,
or use the 'Find' and 'Find Next' buttons (binoculars) to
st
search by name (or 1 few characters--e.g., nam*).
(In Grid view, scan the list as desired. Tip: You can
resize or maximize the window as desired, or use the
bottom scroll-bar to view additional columns.)
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing or changing settings as
desired.
316
Testing for Database Access from a
Specific PC
Once a client PC has been added here, it
should have access to the database as long as
the "server" PC is running. Simply go to the
specific PC, start the VEREX Director
software, and attempt to login.
For client-server login details, refer to the applicable
topics under "Welcome to VEREX Director".
Blocking Database Access to a Specific
Client (Deleting a Client from the List)
Select Client Access from your MyTools bar,
or select [Management] in the 'tree', open the
PC Access branch, and select Client Access.
Then, use the Grid / Form toolbar-button to
select your preferred view-mode.
(In 'Forms' view, select the desired item at the
bottom of the window. Tip: You can also use the
'browse' buttons to scan through the defined items.
Now right-click the specific client (a blank area
if in forms view), and select Delete. When
asked to confirm, select Yes.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Screen Reference
[Management] PC Access Client Access
- Client Description (bottom of form):
This is where you select a client
workstation (or communications client)
to view or edit. This area shows the
name of each defined client
workstation;
- Cyclic ID: This is a 16-digit number
obtained from each VEREX Director
client PC (under "About..." from the Help menu
on each specific PC).
Tip: To check that you entered a correct value, click
[Save] on the toolbar, and watch for the symbol to
change (see below).
Note: A different number will appear each time you
open the "Help, About" screen. Any of these
numbers can be used for the specific PC.
- Symbol / Icon: This indicates the type of
software associated with each "Cyclic-ID" that
you enter. (Click the Save button on the toolbar, and
watch for the symbol to change.)
This indicates an invalid ID-code, or that the other
PC is not presently available through the network;
LCD Keypad Symbol: This indicates a client
workstation (VEREX Director software);
Communications Symbol: This indicates the
communications software (to allow a panel
connection).
:
Operator Permissions
Scheduled Event Filtering for Operators
Setting Up Client Permissions (to follow).
- Validation Certificate: This area shows
details on the certificate file that is presently in
effect for this communications client.
Notes: This applies only for secure (encrypted) IP
communications. If this is left blank, any certificate
assigned for the server will be used if needed (see
previous/above). This would typically apply to smaller
systems.
- […] (Add Certificate): Click this to browse for,
and assign a certificate. (VVC file).
- [X] (Remove Certificate): Click this to unassign
the certificate that is presently in effect.
More: Secure IP Communications
Also See: Assigning a Certificate to the Director
Server (previous/above).
You can count the number of each type of symbol, and
compare this against the number allowed as per your
software licensing.
To check the number of software and communications
clients allowed, open the Help menu, select [About...],
and then [License Info.].
------------------------- Description: This is any suitable text to
describe the specific workstation.
- Permissions: This selects a (previouslydefined) permission-set to determine what
features will (or will not) be available through
this specific client workstation (for operators who
also have permission for each specific feature).
Tip: If no permission-sets are listed, this means they
need to be set up. Follow Operator Permissions:
Select this if feature-access is to be limited only by the
permissions assigned to each operator.
Communications Client Software: The permission
setting does not apply to communications client
software (this setting will be ignored).
Related Topics:
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
317
Setting Up Client Permissions
Introduction
If you Need to Delete a Permission-Set
'Client permissions' allow blocking (or granting)
access to individual features for all operators
at each client workstation.
Before attempting to delete a permission-set,
you must first check to ensure that it is not
assigned to any client PCs (and assign a
different one as necessary.)
Tip: For each specific item, click once to allow viewing
only (magnifying glass), or click again to allow viewing
and editing (pencil). If you click a 3rd time, this will
clear the selection.
Note: Client (PC) permissions work in conjunction with
permissions assigned to each specific operator. (i.e., a
feature will be available only if allowed for the PC and
the specific operator.
Related: Management Operator Operator
Permissions
Communications Client Software: Client permissions
do not apply to communications client software.
Locator:
Select Client Permissions from your MyTools
bar, or select [Management] in the 'tree', open
the PC Access branch, and select Client
Permissions. Then, use the Grid / Form
toolbar-button to select your preferred viewmode.
Note: Forms view is generally recommended here.
Setting Up a New Permission-Set
See "Locator" (previous). Then, click [+] at the
bottom of the form, or right-click the form, and
select Add New from the pop-up menu.
Alternative: You can also select a blank/grey one (or
"New Item") in the list (Forms view: bottom of the
window).
The simplest way to do this is to:
 Select Client Access from your MyTools bar, or
select [Management] in the 'tree', open the PC
Access branch, and select Client Access.
 Switch to 'Grid' view (click Grid on the toolbar).
 Scan through the list, checking for the specific
permission-set in the list;
 Assign a different permission-set to any
operators as required.
Now, select Client Permissions from your
MyTools bar, or select [Management] in the
'tree', open PC Access, and select Client
Permissions. Then, use the Grid / Form
toolbar-button to select your preferred viewmode.
Forms view: Details for one item at a time;
Grid View: All defined items in a list.
In 'Forms' view, select the desired permissionset at the bottom of the window. Then, rightclick a blank portion of the screen and select
Delete. When asked to confirm, select Yes.
(In Grid View, right-click the desired permission-set in
the list, and select Delete. When asked to confirm,
select Yes.)
See the selection-descriptions for this screen
while entering and/or selecting your desired
settings.
Viewing or Changing Selections for an
Existing Permission-Set
See "Locator" (previous). Then, select the
desired item at the bottom of the form.
Tip: You can also use the 'browse' buttons to scan
through the listed items, or use the 'Find' and 'Find
st
Next' buttons (binoculars) to search by name (or 1 few
characters--e.g., nam*).
See the selection-descriptions for this screen
while viewing or changing settings as desired.
318
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
[Management] PC Access Client Permissions
Screen Reference
Pick-List (bottom of the form)
- Client Permission: This is where you
select a permission-set to view or edit.
This area shows the name of each
defined permission-set to use with
client software;
On This Form
- Name: A suitable name/description for
this permission-set (such as "Admin
PCs").
Common Permissions
- These are permissions pertaining to
the entire system (such as editing
operators, backing up the database,
etc.);
Global Account Permissions
- Management tasks such as editing
users, schedules, holidays, etc., plus
working with guard tours.
Panel Configuration Permissions
Legend/Reminder:
Magnifying Glass: Permission to view the item.
Edit Only (question mark with pencil): Permission to make a
draft/pending edit that will not take effect until approved by another
operator with “Approve and Save” permission.
Approve and Save (): Permission to approve and save changes
made by someone with “Edit Only” permission.
Pencil: Permission to view and add/delete/edit the item.
- Selections pertaining to setting up
areas, and the physical items in a system
(sensors, doors, etc.)
Reports
- Issuing the various types of reports: Activity
reports, viewing or printing programmed settings
(panel config.), etc.
Panel Config. Reports: This requires the specific
panel configuration permissions as well.
Communications
- Selections pertaining to panel communications,
monitoring, and "Visual Director" (maps and
cameras) -- V4.0 software.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
319
New Installation? Try the Wizard !
Users Shared Across Multiple Accounts: Beginning with Director V4.20, groups of users (and holidays) can be set up
once, and then applied to multiple accounts. If your system will include these features, be sure to skip these topics
(plus authorities) in the wizard.
Beginning with V4.0 of the VEREX
Director software, you can let a
helpful "Wizard" lead you through
some common tasks.
Check the new Tools menu to see
the Wizards that are available. In
V4.0 there is one that helps you
connect
with
a
panel
(Communications Wizard), and one
that leads you through setting up a
new system (Configuration Wizard).
The Wizard
(Locator: Tools menu)
Instructions and Selections
Pick me
No, pick me
Outline
of Steps
Whenever VEREX Director screens (forms)
are shown in the wizard, you can click the
[Help] button provided (or press F1) to get
details on the displayed settings.
Wizard Permission: To use the Wizard,
your operator permissions must grant
"Permission Type: All permissions" for the
specific account folder.
< Back
Next >
Cancel
Forms from the
Director Software
when needed
Also See: "Operator Permissions"
320
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Panel Connection Overview
Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use the Communications Wizard to set up and initiate communications
with a panel. For more information, refer to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
Connections Supported (V4.4)
Line Type
HSC
IP or
secure IP
Bell
103
External
56k
modem
W.W.
modem
(w/o STU) xL panels
Yes 5
W.W.
modem (w/
STU)-xL panels
Yes 5
Comms
Type
-Yes
Yes
Yes 2
Director
4
initiated
comms
session
-Yes
Yes
No / Yes
Yes 5
Yes 5
Panel4
2
initiated
config
upload
-Yes
-No / Yes
--Panel
2
initiated to
transmit
events to
Director
Panel
Yes
Yes
Yes
-Yes
Yes
transmit to
(SIP)
1
Central
Station
1 Bell 103 to central station: Can be used by itself, or as backup to HSC/SIP reporting.
Parallel STU
only
(xL panels)
Direct cable
connection
--
Yes 3
--
--
--
--
Yes
--
2 External modem connection: Connection (and panel group) must be dedicated to one panel only.
xL (narrow) Mainboards: RS485 only. Dial-out to Director only via IP connection.
ISM Mainboards: For dial-out to director via external modem, the modem connection must be RS232.
3 xL (narrow) mainboards: Direct connection via RS485.
ISM mainboards: Direct connection can be via RS232 (with no support for external modem) or RS485.
4 Max. feature-set 3; (300 users).
5 Max. feature-set 7.
Beginning with V3.20, the VEREX Director software
can connect with panels V2.0 and higher.
Welcome
The following is a quick outline of the steps
needed to set up a panel connection. For
details on each step, refer to the indicated
section, and look for headings that apply to
your present task, and type of connection.
Browsing for Topics: You can also browse forward
through the remaining topics, and follow the sections
that pertain to your present task and type of connection.
IP Network Connections
Secure / encrypted and regular IP connections are
also supported for panel communications through a
network, or across the internet.
More: "IP Connectivity".
Panel & Software Revisions:
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Note: Associated panels must be the same rev.
level, and the Director software must typically be
upgraded to the same level or higher.
Steps
1) Install/Setup Modems and/or DirectCable Connections
Ensure the windows "Direct Cable Connections" and/or modems have been set up on
each applicable PC.
IP Connections: This step is not needed for an IP
connection.
For a panel that connects directly (through a cable),
refer to "PC-to-Panel—Direct Connection" in addition to
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
321
any wiring instructions for your hardware.
For a dial-up modem connection, refer to "PC and
Panels—Modem Connections" in addition to any wiring
instructions for your hardware. Note: Modems require
additional set-up as described in the indicated section.
2) Make Your Software Aware of Modems
and Direct-Cable-Connections
Ensure the communications service is aware
of your modems and serial (or IP) connections
to be used for panel communications.
For details, refer to "Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)".
Note: This step requires administrator authority under
Windows.
3) Set Up a "Communications Pool"
Set up a "Communications Pool" for your
panel, and assign the connection that was
selected in the preceding step. This screen is
accessed through the Communications
section in the 'tree' window.
Tip: The very first communications pool for a brand
new system is set up automatically. When adding
panels, the communications pools must be set up
manually. For details, refer to "Communication Pools
for System Panels".
4) Enter Your "Connection Configuration" Settings (Panel Group screen)
Enter the "Connection Configuration" settings
for your panel (including selecting the
'Communications Pool' that was set up in the
previous step. These settings appear on a
"Connection" tab after selecting your "Panel
Group" in the tree. (Logical Tree View must
not be in effect.)
Tip: For a brand new system, these values are set up
automatically. (Exception: The phone number for a
dial-up connection must be entered manually). When
adding panels, these items must be set manually.
For details, refer to "Panels, Panel Groups, and Related
Settings".
5) Enter Basic Communication Settings
(System Configuration screen)
Go to:
System, ->Communication, >Configuration (tab), to enter basic settings
needed for panel communications. This will
include the panel serial number, a non-zero
322
"Panel Code", and other desired settings. IP
connections will include an IP address, and a
port number.
For details, refer to "Monitoring, Paging, & Remote Mgt.
Settings".
6) Panel Settings (Account Information)
Select these items under Account Information:
 Account Type;  Panel Operating Mode;
 Panel Version;  Feature Set.
For details, refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
Actual Panel Version: The software will recognize this
st
during the 1 communication attempt, and display it in
the "System" configuration screen. Related topics:
+ "System Settings for each Panel".
+ "Panel Communications and Updates".
Feature Set: This determines your system capacities.
The maximum supported feature-set is based on your
software licensing. Related topics:
+ "System Capacities".
+ "Software Activation and Licensing".
------------------------------------------------------------------
See Also (Related Topics):
Setting up a New System (Commissioning)
For a brand new system, you'll need to enter
items, and configure the system for desired
operation.
For details, refer to "Setting up a New System
(Commissioning)".
Update or Synchronize Panel(s)
Communications Session)
(Panel
Once the connection has been configured, you
can set up a 'panel communications session' to
transfer settings or synchronize your software
with specific panel(s).
For details, refer to "Panel Communications and
Updates".
Make a 'Backup' Copy of Your Database (to
protect against data loss)
To protect against data loss (i.e., having to reenter information), you'll need to make a 'backup'
copy of your database.
For details, refer to "Backing up or Restoring the
Database".
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
IP Connectivity
Secure IP Communications
(V4.72)
Introduction
VEREX
Director
systems
support
communications through a secure IP
connection.
This can be:
 Utilized through a network, or
via the internet.
 Used for central monitoring
(HSC-IP), panelPC
communications, and/or
client/server communications.
Operation
Item
Director
software
IP Module
firmware
Panel
Firmware
Receiver
Requirements:
Client/Server via
Secure IP
V4.70 (w/o cert's)
v4.72 (full)
n/a
PanelPC
via Secure IP
Monitoring via
HSC-IP
 V4.72
 V4.72
HSC-IP
module
 V4.0
HSC-IP module
 V4.0
n/a
 V4.40
 V 4.49
n/a
n/a
R1000
receiver
(check for
latest firmware)
(Central Station)
General
Secure IP communications is encrypted, and
allows the use of validation certificates for
additional security. Certificate problems may
be logged as an alarm/event, and also in the
Windows event viewer.
For Client/Server Operation
Server validation certificates are checked
when each operator logs in (and when the
communications service starts up). If there is
a problem with the certificate, the operator will
be notified, and given these choices:
If You Are Prompted about a Certificate Problem
Continue: To allow logging in--temporarily ignoring
any problem with the server certificate.
Continue, and don't ask me again: If you will not be
using validation certificates for now. Tip: This will be
reset when a server certificate is assigned.
Stop: To abort the login due to a suspect validation
certificate.
For Communications and Monitoring
Communications certificates are checked
whenever a panel connection is attempted.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Similarly, HSC-IP monitoring certificates are
checked whenever an IP connection to the
receiver is attempted.
IP modules can be set to ignore validation
certificates. Otherwise, communications for an
invalid network location will be blocked.
Welcome
Report
Control
 Software and Firmware versions:
 Panel Wiring: Each system panel must
have its own IP board. (Panels cannot be
chained together on one IP board.)
(Although--with software and firmware
versions indicated above--a single HSC-IP
module can be used for both features at
the same time.
 Networking Ports: The Director software
requires exclusive access to port 443, and
this port must NOT be blocked on the
network.
Set-up Overview:
 Hardware: The IP module (and receiver)
must be set up--as applicable. Refer to
the documentation for the specific version
of IP module or receiver.
e.g., HSC-IP Module v4: 21-3691x
e.g., R1000 Receiver: 21-3690x
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
323
 Certificate Files: Obtain through your
dealer.
Assign for the Director Server:
[Management], PC Access (+), Server Access.
Details: Server Validation Certificates
Assign for each Communication Client:
[Management], PC Access (+), Client Access.
Details: Client Access (Allowable Client List)
Assign for a Receiver (Monitoring via HSC-IP):
Refer to the programming guide for the receiver.
e.g., R1000 Receiver: 21-3690x
 Director Software:
Client/Server via Secure IP: No set-up needed.
Exception: If connecting out through a proxy-server,
some proxy information must be entered in the login
screen. Get an 'IT' person to help you with this.
PanelPC via Secure IP:
1) "Encrypted IP" must be selected for the
Communications Device, Communication Pool, and
Panel Group.
More: Panel Connection Overview
2) Configuration, ->System, ->Communication.
All settings as usual, plus:
Interface IP Address: This is the IP Address or
name (FQDN) for the panel's IP interface--which
must also be as supported by the certificate.
Contact your IT rep. if you need assistance.
Interface IP Port: 443 (typical).
Monitoring via HSC-IP:
Configuration, ->System, ->Communication,
->SIP / HSC: SIP Mode: SIP over IP.
Note: Firmware rev. levels, plus IP module set-up will
determine the use of HSC-IP protocol.
Basic IP Connections / Older
Firmware
Note: The Director software is backward-compatible
with existing IP connections. These are not
recommended for use on a public domain.
Beginning with version 3.30, the VEREX
Director software allows connecting to a panel
through an IP connection (LAN/WAN), and/or
reporting to a central monitoring facility through
an IP connection (SIP reporting).
The PC-to-panel connection via IP does not
require any specific revision of panel firmware.
The SIP reporting feature requires v3.30 panel
firmware or higher.
324
IP connections include an IP interface board
that must be properly set up for use with the
VEREX Director system.
All details on setting up an IP connection
are documented separately.
For full
details, refer to the instruction manual
included with your IP interface board.
Tip: This may also be available on the Director
CD as a printable/viewable 'PDF' file.
Panel & Software Revisions: VEREX Director
software V3.2 and higher can connect with panels
V2.0 and higher.
Associated panels must be the same rev. level, and
the Director software must typically be upgraded to
the same level or higher.
Exception: V3.3 panels OK with V3.20 software (if IPrelated features are not needed).
PC-to-Panel—Direct
Connection
Panel & Software Revisions: VEREX Director
software V3.2 and higher can connect with panels
V2.0 and higher.
Associated panels must be the same rev. level, and
the Director software must typically be upgraded to the
same level or higher. Exception: V3.3 panels OK with
V3.20 software for this type of connection (i.e., nonIP).
Physical Wiring
For details on the physical PC-to-panel
connection, please refer to the wiring
instructions for your panel and any connection
kit or DB adapter.
Windows Direct-Cable-Connection
Setup
To allow connecting to panels through a physical
cable, you must ensure that support for this has been
installed and set up through your MS Windows.
(Windows XP):
Note: Windows treats a 'direct-cable-connection' the
same as a modem.
1)
(Shut down VEREX Director if applicable).
2)
From the Windows Start Menu, select
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Settings, Control Panel, and Phone and
Modem Options.
3)
Select the "Modems" tab, and click [Add].
4)
5)
Select "Do not detect...", and click [Next].
Under "Standard Modem Types", select
"Communications Cable between two
computers", and click [Next].
Select the serial port (COMx) that the cable
will be using, and click [Next].
6)
7)
Click [Finish].
8)
In the next screen, click [OK] to close the
screen. Note: The name of the direct-cableconnection will be set as "Communications Cable
between two computers".
Also See (Related Topics):
"New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
"Panel Connection Overview"
"Setting Up a New System (Commissioning)"
"Panel Communications and Updates
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
325
PC and Panels—Modem Connections
Tip: For details on the types of modems supported,
refer to "PC Issues and Software Installation".
Panel & Software Revisions: VEREX Director
software  V3.2 can connect with panels  V2.0.
Associated panels must be the same rev. level, and the
Director software must typically be upgraded to the
same level or higher. Exception: V3.3 panels OK with
V3.20 software for this type of connection (i.e., non-IP).
PC Modem Installation or
Connection
Ensure that any PCs to be used for dial-up
panel communications have the required
modem(s) available, or install additional
modem(s) as necessary.
Systems with
multiple dial-up panels should generally have
at least two modems available (or more as
needed,
depending
on
the
system
communications requirements).
For an external modem (that sits on the PC or
desk), connect to an available serial port using
a standard serial cable (with the appropriate
size 'DB' connector at each 'end').
Notes: A typical cable will be DB9-female to DB25male (check your PC and modem to verify your
requirements). Standard modem cables are available
in lengths up to 15 m (50 feet). Attention: Do NOT
connect using a "null-modem" cable or "file transfer"
cable. DB9 to DB25 adapters can be used if needed.
(Ensure all 9 pins are connected—some 'mouse'
adapters cannot be used).
Once connected to the computer, the modem
simply plugs into a standard telephone jack
using a telephone extension cable. Note:
Modems require a direct/analogue telephone
line.
Windows Modem Setup
When a new modem is installed on a Windows
PC, the Windows software will normally detect
the new device, and lead you through some
simple installation steps. An installation CD or
diskette may also be provided with the modem.
If a new modem is not recognized, you can go into the
windows Control Panel and select "Add New
Hardware", and follow the prompts that appear. Note:
Older modems may not meet compatibility requirements
for "Plug-and-Play" installation. In this case, you may
be able to use an installation diskette provided with the
326
modem (or the modem may need to be upgraded or
replaced).
Once the modem is installed and recognized
under Windows, you need to set a couple of
items through the Control Panel as follows:
 Open the Windows [Start] menu, and
select Control Panel.
 Open Phone and Modem Options
(double-click).
 In the next screen, select the Modems tab.
 Select your modem in the list, and click
[Properties].
 In the Modem tab, ensure the "Maximum
Speed" is set to 38400 or higher.
 In the Advanced tab, enter the following text
as a modem initialization string: ATS7=140.
Tip: Uppercase as shown; 0 = zero.
Purpose: This allows for a longer 'phone number'
(e.g., with pauses, long distance access codes, etc.)
 When finished, click [OK] as needed to close
the screens.
Tip: Be sure to repeat the preceding steps for any
additional modems (on any applicable PCs).
Note: The steps described in the next section are
not required for a modem associated with a VEREX
Director PC (since the settings are handled by the
Director software and/or Windows operating system).
Panel Modem
xL panels (narrow mainboard) use a plug in
modem module that do not require any special
set up--other than general communications
selections including setting the "Modem Type",
under
"Your
Account,
Configuration,
System, Communication".
ISM panels (square mainboard) use a built-in
modem/dialler for small accounts, or an
external modem that requires special set-up to
allow it to work correctly with the panel. For
details on wiring and modem set-up, refer to
the Hardware or Commissioning guide for your
panel.
Tip: PDF files for manuals are included on the Director
CD.
Note: External modems pertain to panel-to-PC
communications only. Messages are transmitted to a
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
central monitoring facility through the built in (or
modular) modem and/or an IP connection ( V3.3
panels), or high-security communications--HSC (via
Mark7/DVACS service in Canada).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
327
Serial Port / Modem Setup (Communications Manager)
Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use the
Communications Wizard to set up and initiate
communications with a panel. For more information,
refer to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
To manually set up a panel connection, refer to "Panel
Connection Overview".
The initial topics in this section provide general
information and details on starting the communications
software module. To go directly to the details on
making ports and modems available to the
communications software, browse forward to the
heading entitled "Add Modems and Serial Cables to be
Used for Panel Communications".
Note: Setting up ports and/or modems through the
communications software requires administrator
authority under Windows (since data needs to be
written to the "registry").
The Communications Software
To manage panel communications, the
VEREX Director program uses separate
communications software on each PC to be
connected to a panel or modem.
The modem(s) and connections you'll be using
to connect with system panel(s) must be
added here. (For details, refer to "Add Modems /
Connections
for
Panel
Communications",
to
follow/below.)
Before You Begin: Each direct cable connection or
modem to be accessed by this software must have
been previously set up under MS Windows.
For details on setting up a panel connection, refer to:
 "PC-to-Panel—Direct Connection", or;
 "PC and Panels—Modem Connections", or;
 "IP Connectivity".
Note: To allow panel communications, the VEREX
Director 'activation' key must be present on the Director
PC (Director-server PC if applicable;
V4: USB connector, V3.3.2: Parallel/printer port,
V3.3.3: Either).
In a multi-PC system, the Director-server PC and
software must be running as well. For more
information, refer to "Client/Server Issues and the
Director Server Manager (v4.7)" (a previous section).
Client/Server Operation
For a multi-PC installation, the communications software can be run on its own if
desired.
This allows utilizing ports /
connections on other PCs—regardless of
328
whether or not they are running the VEREX
Director software.
In a client-server system, the panel connection set-up
must be done on each specific PC to be associated
with a modem and/or panel(s).
Licensing: Client-server operation is optional, and must
be selected though the license-manager software. For
details on upgrading your licensing, refer to "Software
Activation and Licensing".
All communications modules (running on client PCs)
that are to be allowed access to the database must be
identified to the server. This is done using a "Cyclic-ID"
code that can be found by right-clicking the
LCD/Telephone symbol on the right-hand end of the
taskbar, and selecting About. To register this value at
the Director-server PC, refer to "Client/Server Access
and Permissions".
Start Up the Communications Software
Beginning
with
v4.7,
the
Directorcommunications software is installed as a
service. This means it will start automatically
whenever the PC or operating system is
restarted.
At each PC associated with the specific panel
connection(s),
check
to
ensure
the
communications service is running:
Detail: If the LCD/Telephone icon on the Windows
taskbar is black-and-white (color = running), start the
communications service by right-clicking the icon, and
selecting "Start Communications".
Related Topic: Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)
If prompted to set the "Server Location", refer
to the "Server Location" description (to
follow), while selecting or entering the server
name or 'IP' address. (Click Login when
finished.)
To ensure the software started: Re-check the task-bar
to ensure the LCD/Telephone symbol appears in color
on the right. ("Start Communications" should also
appear 'greyed-out' in its right-click menu.)
If "Cannot Connect to Server" appears: This may mean
that you mistyped the "Server Location", or that the
Director-server PC and/or software is not running. Tip:
For more information, refer to "Client/Server Issues and
the Director Server manager".
Problems? See "Troubleshooting", to follow/below.
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Identifying the Server to a PC Running
only the Communications Software
Open the Windows task-bar (move your
mouse to the bottom-right of the screen), rightclick the LCD/Telephone symbol, and select
Server Location.
If this symbol is not present: Start up the
communications software as described previously /
above.
If the right-click menu does not appear: This may mean
that the Director-server PC or software is not running,
or the activation key is not installed on the server (or
only) PC.
Then, refer to the "Server Location" description
(to follow) while selecting or entering the
server name or 'IP' address. (Click Login
when finished.)
If an error message appears, refer to the notes under
"Start Up the Communications Software on each
Applicable PC", previous / above.
On a typical VEREX Director workstation, the server is
identified during login.
Add Modems / Connections for Panel
Communications
Open the Windows task-bar (move your
mouse to the bottom-right of the screen), rightclick the LCD/Telephone symbol, and select
Port Configuration.
When the 'Device Configuration' screen
appears, right-click the screen and select Add.
Then, refer to the details for the "Port / Device
Configuration Screen" while making your
selections. When finished, click Save.
Why Can't I Change Items after Saving? You cannot
edit saved settings for a comms device. If settings
need to be changed, you must delete the specific
modem or cable-connection, and then re-add it with the
new settings. (See "If you Need to Delete..." to follow.)
After adding the desired modems and cableconnections here, they must be included in a
"Communication Pool".
Exception: With a brand-new installation, the first
'Communications Pool' is set up for you.
To set up a communications pool, refer to
"Communication Pools for System Panels".
If the database is ever transferred to another PC:
You must ensure that either:
 Any previously referenced modems and/or "Direct
Cable Connections" have been set up on the new
PC, or;
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
 The equivalent on the new PC have been installed,
added through this (comms) software, and included
in any applicable "Communications Pools".
For details, refer to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!",
or "Panel Connection Overview".
If you Wish to Remove an Item (modem
or connection) from the List
Before deleting, check to ensure the item is
not presently being used by an active
communications session.
For details, refer to "Panel Communications and
Updates", and "Communication Pools for System
Panels".
Removing an item through the port/device configuration
screen does not delete it from the PC. Rather, it
removes references in the software for the specific
item.
Note: In a client-server environment, communications
sessions can be initiated from any VEREX Director
workstation.
-------------------------
Now, open the Windows task-bar (move your
mouse to the bottom-right of the screen), rightclick the LCD/Telephone symbol, and select
Port Configuration.
When the 'Device Configuration' screen
appears, right-click the desired cableconnection or modem, and select Delete.
Final Steps:
 Add any cable or modem connection(s) if
required to replace the deleted one.
For details, refer to:
 "PC-to-Panel—Direct Connection", or;
 "PC and Panels—Modem Connections"
 Check the 'communication pools' to ensure
they have the desired connections assigned.
For details, refer to "Communication Pools for
System Panels".
Troubleshooting
Start-up of the VEREX Director-services
(Director server or communications) may be
delayed or blocked in certain situations. If you
suspect this, you can use the Windows "Event
Viewer" to see what's going on.
Locator: [Start], ..Run, .."eventvwr", [OK]. Then, go
to the "Application" node, and double-click error
messages to look for ones pertaining to Director
services (Director server or communications).
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
329
When You Select "Port Configuration"
(Right-Click the LCD/Telephone
Symbol
on the right-hand edge of the TaskBar)
Screen Reference
- Start Communications: Select this to restart
the Director-Communications service (e.g., after
stopping it previously).
- Stop Communications: Select this to stop the
Director-Communications service.
Attention: Stopping the communications service is
NOT recommended while any panel updates are in
progress.
- Port Configuration: Allows adding directcable-connections and modems for use with
the VEREX Director software (for details, refer
to the next screen, as needed).
(These must have been already been set up under MS
Windows.)
- Debug Screen: This selection is for internal use
only;
- Server Location: This identifies the DirectorServer PC--by its IP-address, or name (FQDN).
Tip: This is typically 127.0.0.1 (i.e., where the
Director-server is on the same PC as the
communications client). Contact your IT rep. if you
need assistance.
- Proxy Configuration: Provides settings used
to connect out to the Director-server via the
internet through a proxy server.
Settings: "Proxy Type" (select "None" if not using this
feature), "Domain", and a "User Name" and
"Password" that has suitable permissions on that
domain. (For these and other proxy settings, get an
'IT' person to help you.)
- Manager Language: This allows changing the
language for this menu and subsequent
screens.
- About: Shows the revision level of the VEREX
Director communications software, and provides
330
access to licensing details. As well, a "CyclicID" code is shown here that allows registering
the communications software at the server PC
(in a client-server system).
For details on software licensing, refer to "Software
Activation and Licensing".
To register the communications software for use on
the specific PC, jot down the "Cyclic-ID" code, and
then refer to "Client/Server Access and Permissions".
- Exit: This shuts down the DirectorCommunications manager, while leaving the
Director-Communications service in its present
state.
Tip: This service manager will be available again the
next time someone logs into this PC.
To restart it manually, go to: [Start], (All Programs),
Programs, Startup, and select VEREX DirectorCommunications Manager. (This can also be found
under (e.g.) C:\Program Files\VEREX Director V4.)
- Communication Device: The 'Serial Cable
Connections and modems that have been
installed under MS Windows on this PC. Select
the desired one to use with a panel connection.
IP Connections: Secure and regular IP connections
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
are also supported.
More: IP Connectivity"
Tip: The right-click menu provides "Add" and
"Delete" selections for utilizing additional connections
on this PC, or deleting ones that are no longer
needed.
Note: Parallel connections (LPT ports) do not apply to
this application.
- Modem/Direct: Whether the selected
'communications device' is a modem, a directcable connection, or an IP connection;
- Answer Mode: A setting for modems that tells
the software if it will be communicating with a
standard (external/high-speed) modem, or a
panel's built-in Bell 103 (300-baud)
modem/dialler.
Bell 103 Connections: This requires a USR Sportster
56K modem at the PC. As well, due to speed
considerations, Bell 103 connections are supported
only in smaller systems ("Feature Set" 1, 2, or 3:
one panel / up to 300 users per account). To set the
'feature-set', refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
- Modem Init. for Bell 103 Standard: An
"initialization string" (start-up settings) to be
used for a "Bell 103" connection. Select a
suitable one from the list for your modem.
- Device Status: Whether or not the selected
communications device is properly recognized
by MS Windows.
- Line Status: Whether or not an active panel
connection is presently using the specific cable
or modem connection.
Also See (Related Topics):
"New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
"Panel Connection Overview"
"Setting Up a New System (Commissioning)"
"Panel Communications and Updates
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
331
Communication Pools for System Panels
Beginning with V4.0 VEREX Director, you can use the Communications Wizard to set up and initiate
communications with a panel. For more information, refer to "New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
About Communication Pools
"Communication pools" allow the VEREX
Director
software
to
manage
panel
communications. Each 'pool' can contain a
direct-cable-connection, or one or more
modems or IP connections.
IP Connections: Secure and regular IP connections
are also supported.
More: IP Connectivity"
Including more than one modem in a 'pool'
allows modems to be shared for multiple
panels / accounts. Communication pools also
allow selecting groups of modems on phone
lines with preferred rates to specific locations.
Tip: The first communication pool for a new singleaccount system is set up automatically. When adding
panels, the communications pools must be set up as
desired.
Note: A communication pool cannot contain multiple
direct-cable-connections, or different types of
connections at the same time.
Adding a Modem or Direct-CableConnection to the Selection List
Alternatively: You can select "New Pool" from the list at
the bottom of the window. Note: Grid view does not
apply to this screen.
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while entering a suitable name, and
adding the desired item(s) to the 'pool'.
If a modem or direct-cable-connection is not listed (that
has recently been added through the communications
software), click [Refresh] on the toolbar.
Tip: Your settings will be saved automatically when
you move to a different screen, or select a different
'pool'.
After being configured here, communications pools can
then be assigned to specific 'Panel Groups'. For
details, refer to "Panel Groups and Connection
Settings".
Viewing or Changing Selections for a
Communication Pool
Select Communications Pool from the
MyTools bar, or click [Communications] in
the 'tree', and select Communication Pool.
Now, select the desired 'pool' from the list at
the bottom of the window.
(i.e., if your cable / modem / device is not in the list)
Note: Grid view does not apply to this screen.
a) Ensure your modem(s) and/or direct-cable
connections have been set up (i.e., are
available under MS Windows).
Then, refer to the selection-descriptions for this
screen while viewing or changing selections as
desired.
For details, refer to: "PC-to-Panel—Direct
Connection", or "PC and Panels—Modem
Connections" (as applicable).
b) Then, ensure your software is aware of the
modem(s) and other connections (i.e., by
"Adding" them through the Communications
Software).
For details, refer to "Serial Port / Modem Setup
(Communications Manager)".
Adding and Setting up a
Communication Pool
Select Communications Pool from the
MyTools bar, or click [Communications] in
the 'tree', and select Communication Pool.
Now, click [+] at the bottom of the form, or
right-click the form, and select Add New from
the pop-up menu.
332
Tip: Your changes will be saved automatically when
you move to a different screen, or select a different
'pool'.
Removing an Item from a
Communication Pool and/or from the
List of Available Items
To remove a modem or direct-cableconnection from a 'pool', select the item under
"Devices in Pool", and click [Remove].
To delete an item from the list of available
choices, select the item under "Devices not in
Pool", and click [Delete Device].
Note: Deleting an item here is similar to deleting it
through the communications software. To add a
replacement connection to the list of choices, refer to
"Adding a Modem or Direct-Cable-Connection to the
Selection List" (previous/above).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Deleting a "Communication
Pool"
[Communications] Communication Pool
Before deleting a 'pool', check to
ensure it is not presently being used
by a panel communications session:
Select Communications from the
MyTools
bar,
or
click
[Communications] in the 'tree', and
select Pending/Online.
Now, for
each active communications session
(selected at the bottom of the
screen), click the panel group near
the centre of your screen, and view
the 'Comms Pool' and 'Results'
information on the right.
that can be added to a communication pool.
Note: Do not delete a 'pool' that is found to be in use.
For more information on communications sessions,
refer to "Panel Communications and Updates".
-------------------------
To proceed, select Communications Pool
from
the
MyTools
bar,
or
click
[Communications] in the 'tree', and select
Communication Pool. Select the desired
'pool' at the bottom of the window. Then, rightclick the screen and select Delete. When
asked to confirm, select Yes.
After deleting a communications pool, check to ensure
that your panel groups have the desired communication
pool assigned. For details, refer to "Panel Groups and
Connection Settings".
Screen Reference
- Pool (bottom of form): This is where you select
a communications 'pool' to view or edit. This
area shows a reference number assigned by the
system, and the name of the 'pool', once
defined;
- Pool Name: This is a suitable description for
the 'pool' such as "PC XYZ Direct-Connect",
"Bell 103 Calls (300 baud)", or "0.12 per
minute to Asia".
- Devices in Pool: The communications
devices that have been added to this 'pool'.
A communications pool can contain one 'direct-cableconnection', or one or more modems or IP
connections. It cannot contain different types of
connections at the same time.
For connections to be available, they must have been
set up under MS Windows, and added through the
communications software. For details, refer to
"Adding a Modem or Direct-Cable-Connection to the
Selection List" (previous/opposite).
Client/Server Systems: Connections can be set up
through any VEREX Director workstation on the
network. (The list will show modems and cableconnections from all PCs.)
(Buttons)
- [Add]: This allows adding a modem, directcable, or IP connection to the current
communications 'pool'. (Select the desired item
under "Devices not in Pool", and then click
[Add].)
- [Remove]: This allows removing a
communications device from the current
'pool'. (Select the desired item under
"Devices in Pool", and then click [Remove].
- [Delete Device]: This allows deleting a
connection/device from the list of selections.
Note: Deleting an item here is similar to deleting it
through the communications software. To add a
replacement connection to the list of choices, refer to
"Adding a Modem or Direct-Cable-Connection to the
Selection List" (previous).
Also See (Related Topics):
"New Installation? Try the Wizard!"
"Panel Connection Overview"
"Setting Up a New System (Commissioning)"
"Panel Communications and Updates
- Devices not in Pool: These are available
modems and direct-cable (or IP) connections
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
333
Setting Up a New System (Commissioning)
Note (v4.10): If you wish to use SQL Server to manage your database, refer to "Advanced Database Features"
Welcome
There are a number of ways to set up a new
system:
Enter the information yourself
 Using the Wizard (Try It!)
Menu: Tools, Configuration Wizard
Related Topic: "New Installation? Try the Wizard"
 Form by form on your own (described in this
section--to follow);
Upload the Data from a Panel that Has
Already been Set up (Get from Panel)
Additional Things you Need to Do
 Activate any optional features, and extend
your software expiry date;
Menu: [Start], Programs, VEREX DirectorLicense Manager.exe
Related Topic: "Software Activation and
Licensing"
 (For client-server systems): Identify the
client PCs to the Director-Server PC;
Menu: [Management], PC Access,
Client Access Related Topic: "Client/Server
Access and Permissions"
 For details, see "Importing Settings from
an Existing VEREX Director System
Panel" (in a following section/below);
Transfer the Data from Elsewhere
 Manually import data from a text file (Caution:
Your file must be structured properly.);
Menu: File, Import Users
Related Topic: "Manually Importing User-Data
From a Text File"
 Automated card import (interfacing with an
ERM system);
Menu: [Management], Database
Maintenance, User Import
Related Topic: "Automated User-Import (Used for:
ERM Integration)"
334
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Before You Begin (Form-by-Form Data Entry)
Do I Need an LCD Keypad?: Setting up a new
system/panel does not require an LCD keypad to be
installed. (You only need to know the serial number of
each main panel and expansion module--look for a
small hand-written label on the back of each circuit
board.) Transferring settings from an Existing Panel:
In this case, you will need an LCD keypad to view (or
set) the "Panel Code" (S001:5) and "Third-Party
Password" (S005:1). Note: The "Panel Code" must be
set to a non-zero value.
1)
This section assumes that your system
devices (panels, expansion modules,
doors, and sensors) have already been
installed, or that someone else is installing
them.
4)
5)
Tip: The serial number for each device can
typically be found on a hand-written label on the
device's circuit board.
6)
Note: If you do require details on physical
installation of a system components, refer to the
Commissioning or Installation Guide for your
system, in conjunction with the installation
instructions provided with each physical device.
If your VEREX Director software has not
been installed yet, or if you are upgrading
from an earlier version of software, refer to
"PC Issues and Software Installation".
3) The provided 'activation key' needs to be
plugged onto the server (or only) PC. (
V4: USB connector; V3.3.2: Parallel/
printer port; V3.3.3: Either).
2)
The activation key provides 90 days of operation
with standard features. For additional features,
client-server operation, or extended duration, you
must run the license-manager program.
For
details, refer to "Software Activation and Licensing".
If you wish to transfer settings from an xL
main panel that was programmed through
a system LCD keypad, refer to "Importing
Settings from an Existing VEREX Director
System Panel", to follow / below.
For each main panel, and expansion /
application module (POD) in the system,
you will need to know the device's serial
number so it can be correctly identified to
the software.
You must be aware of how the facility is to
be divided into 'Areas', if applicable. In
general, this will typically pertain to
departmental divisions, or any other major
divisions where different monitoring
characteristics are to be in effect, and/or
where a different set of users are to have
access.
Note: If you need more information on this, find
out from the installation co-ordinator, building
manager, or other contact at the site.
7)
For basic testing of access-control
functions, you will need at least one
access card / token with a known "ID"
number (and optional 'PIN' number).
Note: For a client-server installation where you'll be
working from a separate client PC, you'll also need to
identify this PC (and other client PCs) to the server.
For details, refer to "Client/Server Access and
Permissions".
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
335
Basic Settings for Testing, and Panel Communications
Nothing feels better when setting up a new
system than that first "Access Granted". If
your system does not include door control, the
equivalent might be verifying that first motion
sensor as being monitored only when the area
is armed (On), or checking system status
through a system (LCD) keypad.
The steps that follow provide the 'minimalist'
approach to entering basic settings, and
getting you communicating with a panel so you
can transfer the information, and test for basic
operation.
Tips: In general, look for the sub-topic that refers to
"Adding..." in each referenced section. As well, for
initial testing, you can typically leave all settings at the
factory default values.
Basic Account and Device Settings for Initial Testing
Step (Do This):
1) Set up the operators required to complete this
task, along with their associated permissions.
For details, refer to:
"Operators...", and
"Operator Permissions".
Also: "Client/Server Access and
Permissions"
2) Multi-Account Systems:
Set up account
folders and accounts as desired.
"Working with Accounts and Folders
(multi-account systems)"
3) Set these items under "Account
Information":  Account Name;
 Account Type;  Panel Operating Mode;
 Panel Version;  Feature Set.
"Account-Wide Panel Settings..."
For system security, you may also wish to change the default 'service PIN'.
Tip: Be sure to log the new Service PIN somewhere, and/or select one that is easy to remember.
4) Rename the default 'Panel Group' and Panel
name if desired, or set up new ones as
required for additional panels.
"Panels, Panel Groups, and
Related Settings"
Tip: You can leave any panel communications settings as-is for now.
5)
If the site includes access-controlled doors
and/or elevators, be sure to specify the format
of the access cards/tokens.
"System Card-Access Settings"
6) If you wish to initially test any scheduling
features, be sure to create at least one
schedule for testing purposes.
"Schedules for User-Access and Area
Automation"
7) Ensure at least one "Area" has been set up to
allow testing your initial basic configuration.
"Areas and Related Settings"
8) Ensure one sample user "Authority Level" is
available to allow testing access-control and
other user-related features.
"Authorities for Users/Entrants"
9) Define one system "User" (with sample access
card/token) to allow testing access-control and
other user-related features.
"Users (Entrants / Panel Users)"
...continues...
336
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
10) From the installed devices, select one LCD
keypad module, one door controller module (if
applicable), and one point expansion module,
and define these items through the software.
"Modules (PODs)"
11) Similarly, select 1 - 3 doors, and monitored
sensors, and create entries for these items.
"Doors, Readers, and Related
Settings", and "Input Points—
Monitored Sensors".
12) Select which system (equipment) conditions
are to be monitored or ignored.
"Equipment Settings
(Pseudo / Internal Inputs)".
Tip: This helps to avoid unnecessary signalling at
area keypads.
Settings Required for Panel Communications
Step (Do This):
13) Set up all items as required for connecting
with the panel.
For details, refer to:
"Panel Connection Overview"
Transfer Settings and Test for Basic Operation
Step (Do This):
14) Set up and activate a "Send to Panel"
communications session with the specific
panel(s).
For details, refer to:
"Panel Communications and Updates"
15) After the data is transferred, test that the
sample card can unlock the applicable door(s).
For details on using a system LCD
keypad for various tasks, refer to the
xL (panel/keypad) User's Guide.
Finish Data Entry for All Devices, Areas,
and Desired Operation
With basic data entry and testing completed,
now you can define the rest of the devices in
the system, and customize settings for desired
operation. Your database of 'Users' will need
to be entered as well.
For a large system, you may wish to divide the
user-list and system devices into manageable
'chunks'—so you can keep track of what's
been done, and what still needs to be done as
you go along.
Tip: You may wish to set up any required "Schedules"
right-away, since they can be assigned to userauthorities, areas, and readers.
For
more
information,
refer
to
the
"Administration" and "Configuration" chapters
in the table of contents (at the front of this
guide).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
337
Importing Settings from an Existing VEREX Director
System Panel
Panel & Software Revisions:
Beginning with
V3.20, the VEREX Director software can connect
with panels V2.0 and higher.
Associated panels must be the same rev. level, and
the Director software must typically be the same level
or higher. Exception: V3.3 panels OK with V3.20
software (if IP-related features are not needed).
For an existing VEREX Director system that
had been programmed locally (without
software), the settings from a single panel can
typically be imported into the software. Typical
steps appear below.
5)
Set up and activate a "Get from Panel"
communications session. For details, refer
to "Panel Communications and Updates".
6)
This would be a good time to check what
information was obtained from the panel.
The list of users is a good place to start. For
details, refer to "Users (Entrants/Panel
Users)".
7)
When finished, you can enter the facility
address information if desired, and set up
any operators who will have access to this
account (this information is not stored at the
panel). You can also set the "Service PIN",
and "Feature Set" for the account at this
time. For details, refer to "Account-Wide
Panel Settings", and the section on
"Operators".
8)
Now, you may wish to add new items to the
database, or set up additional features.
For details, refer to the table of contents.
Note: These steps pertain to sites that were
programmed through a system keypad. For a site
being upgraded from an earlier version of VEREX
Director software, refer to "Upgrading from an Earlier
Version of Software".
1)
Before You Begin: Obtain this information
from a service person for the site.
+ The panel serial number (S005:0, or check
for a small hand-written label).
+ The "Panel Code" / Account UID (S001:5)
and "Third-Party Password" (S005:1).
Be sure to write down the information above, as it
will be needed in step 6. Note: If the panel's
"Third-Party Password" is zero (0), it must be set
to a non-zero value through a system keypad.
Conversely, if the "Panel Code" (Account UID)" is
zero, it will be set automatically by the software.
2)
Set the "Account Name" as desired. For
details, refer to "Working with Accounts and
Folders". Multi-Account Systems: Rename the
default 'Account folder' and Account name if
desired (or set up a new account folder and/or
'Account' to be associated with the specific panel).
3)
Rename the default Panel Group and Panel
name if desired (or set up new ones if
desired). For details, refer to "Panels, Panel
Groups, and Related Settings".
4)
Set up all items as required for connecting
with the panel. For details, refer to "Panel
Connection Overview".
338
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Customizing the MyTools Bar
You can Customize Your MyTools Bar
The MyTools bar/list can be customized as
desired. The MyTools settings are saved
separately for each operator, allowing
everyone to use their preferred layout.
Tip: The contents of your MyTools bar (i.e., for the
present operator) are saved automatically when you
change any settings through this screen.
Changing the Look or Content of Your
MyTools Bar
Tip: If you are doing this for someone else, be sure to
login as that operator.
To access the "Customize MyTools" screen,
open the View menu, select MyTools, and
then Customize. (You can also right-click the
double-line at the starting-edge of the MyTools bar, and
select Customize.)
Opening and Positioning the MyTools
Bar
Adding Items: Select the desired item(s)
under "Available Buttons" and click [Add].
To open or close the MyTools bar, click
[MyTools] on the toolbar. To change its
position, click-and-drag the top or left edge of
the bar to a new location.
(Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop items into
position.)
Tip: Use the "Separator" to visually separate blocks of
items on your MyTools bar.
You'll typically use the MyTools bar, or the Tree, but
not have both of them open at the same time.
Notice: If no items are set to appear on the MyTools
bar, it will appear as a small empty button (right-click it
to access this screen).
To save the position of your MyTools bar (along with
other desktop changes) open the View menu, select
Desktop Settings, and Save. (You will also be asked
if you want changes saved when you logout or exit.)
Removing Items: Select the desired item(s)
under "Current MyTools Buttons" and click
[Remove]. (You can also click-and-drag items out of
the list.)
Changing Item-Positions: Select the desired
item(s) under "Current MyTools Buttons", and
click on the 'hand' pointing up or down as
necessary. You can also 'drag' items to a new
position (release items just above the desired position).
Changing Item-Names: Click twice slowly
on the item-name in the "Current MyTools
Buttons” list, and edit the name as desired.
When finished, press the [Enter] key (or click
elsewhere on the form).
-------------------------
For more information, refer to the selectiondescriptions for this screen. When finished
click OK to save your settings.
If you wish to leave your workstation: Click [OK] before
you leave, and make any additional changes when you
return.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
339
Screen Reference
View (menu) MyTools Customize
- Show Button Captions in MyTools:
Whether or not you want the textdescriptions to appear for items in your
MyTools bar.
- Show Button Icons in MyTools:
Whether or not you want the graphic
symbols to appear for items in your
MyTools bar.
- Icon Position: This selects the
position of the graphic symbols relative
to the text-description for each item in
the MyTools bar (above, below, to the
left, or to the right).
- "Current MyTools Buttons" List:
This list shows the items that have
been selected to appear on your
MyTools bar.
This also shows the order of the items on
your MyTools bar, in addition to the textname for each item (refer to the task-descriptions for
details on changing item positions or renaming items).
- "Available Buttons" List: This list shows all
items that are available to you (as per your
operator-permissions).
Tip: Use the "Separator" to visually separate blocks
of items on your MyTools bar.
Buttons
- [Up] / [Down] Hand Symbols: These buttons
allow moving selected items up or down in the
"Current MyTools Buttons" list.
- [Add]: This allows adding item(s) to your
MyTools bar (first select the item(s) in the
"Available Buttons" list).
- [Remove]: This allows removing items from
your MyTools bar (first select the items in the
"Current MyTools Buttons" list).
- [Reset to Operator Defaults]: This resets
your list of selected items to include
everything in the "Available Buttons" list
(i.e., all items available through your operatorpermissions).
- [OK]: This saves your selections and closes
the screen.
- [Cancel]: This closes the "Customize
MyTools" screen without saving your
selections.
If you wish to leave your workstation: Click [OK] before
you leave, and make any additional changes when you
return.
340
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
System Capacities
Software Licensing and Activation
Key
Checking or Updating Your
System Capacities
Maximum system capacities and types of
expansion / application modules supported
depends on your software licensing, which is
managed through a small 'activation key' and
the license-manager software.
To update your system capacities, refer to
"Software Activation and Licensing".
To check your present system capacities, open
the Help menu, and select [About]. Then,
click [License Info], and scroll within the small
window to view your capacities.
(Any three-letter acronyms typically pertain to different
types of door-controller modules, and other
peripherals.)
To make use of your available capacities, the
panel "Feature Set" needs to be set
appropriately.
For details, refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
Note: Some of the capacities that follow also require
additional panel memory to be installed (see the next
table). System upgrades may involve a combination of
upgrading software, hardware, and/or licensing (refer to
the instructions provide with the upgrade kit).
Software Versions and Basic Capacities
License =>
Users
Doors *
(+ Elevators/Lifts)
Graphical User Interface
(floating licenses)
Communication Clients
Panels
Accounts
Visual Director (and
unlimited NetVision
DVRs)
Visual Director (and
unlimited TruVision
DVRs)
Photo-badging
Client/Server
Deployment
Database Views and
SQL Server Support
ERM Capability
Remote Software
Download (V4.7)
VeDVR / NVe DVRs
21-0381E v4.9.1
PRIME
1,000
16 *
2 (V4.73) §
1
1
1
 (V4.73)
Enterprise
10,000
1920 *
/ 3200 ‡ / 8000‡
10 +1/+5 ‡ 50
Enterprise Elite
64000
1920 *
/ 3200 ‡ / 8000 ‡
10 +1/+5 ‡ 50
3 / 10 ‡ / 25 ‡
60 / 100 ‡ 250 ‡
10

3 / 10 ‡ / 25 ‡
60 / 100 ‡ 250 ‡
100

(V4.90) please see specific HAL version for details of supported
models
 (V4.73) ‡
‡
‡
 (V4.73) §






 (V4.73) §


 ‡ "Adv. Features"

1 only (V4.73) §
(V4.71)
(V4.71)
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
341
-- +1 / +5 DVRs
March Networks DVRs
-- +1 / +5 R5 DVRs
-- R4 DVRs (unlimited)


1 - 1023 ‡
1 - 1023 ‡
(V4.7)
1 - 1023 ‡
‡
(V4.7)
1 - 1023 ‡
‡
Notes and Exceptions: ‡ Optional via licensing; § For new systems / updated hasp key only;
* To support doors/access-control and/or 'memory model' 4, xL panels (narrow mainboard) require a feature
expansion board;  Client/Server operation also allows multi-server login;  Adding panels allows for more areas,
sensors, doors, etc.;  Elevator (lift) capacity is shared with the door capacity;  Floor capacity is the same per panel
or account (124), and can be for one building, or shared across multiple buildings;  Suite capacity is per panel, and
is reduced by 5 for each (other type of) hardware module present.
Note: Playback for video events is NOT supported for March R4 DVRs.
Converted TDC/PDC Door Controllers: Up to 10 per panel (combined total). The above lists show only the items that
are different between the two system versions. The sections that follow describe the overall maximum system
capacities. * Support for suite-security keypads requires a "Feature-Set" selection of 5 or higher. To set this value,
refer to "Account-Wide Panel Settings".
Account Capacities
System-Wide Capacities
Client / Server Operation: This is dependant
upon your software licensing (as managed
through the license-manager software).
No. of Client Workstations and/or PanelConnection Ports: These items are limited
only by the licensing agreement, but subject to
network performance, and system size /
activity.
Operators: Not limited (subject only to harddrive space).
Message Log Capacity (V4.7x):
The
following number of messages are supported:
Message
Type
Typical (SQL
Server
Express)
1,000,000
SQL Server
Inst. Option
Alarm/event
20,000,000
messages
Communi50,000
50,000
cations logs
Operator logs
240,000
240,000
Related Topics: Removing old Activity or Audit Logs
(Purge)
Saved Reports: Not limited (subject only to
hard-drive space).
Panels and Connections: Number of panels
per account is limited by the software
licensing, and is also subject to PC and
network performance. Up to 30 panels at a
time can be connected together to share a
single connection to a PC or modem. The
number of panel connection ports is limited by
licensing, port/modem availability, and PC
performance.
Notes / Exceptions:
 The "Prime" version of the VEREX Director software
('feature set' 1, 2, 3, and 4) is limited to 1 panel per
account.
After Auto Automatic dial-in to transmit messages to
Purge
the VEREX Director system is not supported
through a shared connection (a modem is
needed for each remote panel).
Minus 5%
 Remote management through the panel's
built-in Bell 103 (300 baud) modem/dialler is
Minus 10%
limited to 'feature set' 1 – 3 (one panel / up to
300 users per account).
Minus 10%
Users: Same as the 'per panel' capacity (see
the next table).
Card No./IDs vs. Firmware: Beginning with V3.2 panel
firmware, 32-bit ("9.5 digit") card numbers are
supported (previously 7 digits). This also requires 
V1.5 door/elevator controller firmware. With panel
firmware V3.2, card IDs can be up to 999999999. With
firmware V3.31, card numbers can be up to
4294967295.
Authorities: Same as the 'per panel' capacity
(see the next table).
342
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
systems, while local system configuration is supported
only in single panel systems set to "Feature Set" 1, 2,
3, or 4. Exception: Keypad programming is
supported in all systems for any 'application' modules
that require this due to custom settings stored only at
the module itself (HSC/printer module, RF/wireless
module, and Smart PODs).
For details on setting the 'memory model', refer to
"Account-Wide Panel Settings...".
Schedules: (Depends on panel type and
memory-model supported.)
50: V4.3, or panels set to memory-model 1-3;
100 (V4.4): Panels set to memory-model 4-7;
250 (V4.4): Panels set to memory-model 8 or higher.
Holidays: 32 V4.3; 50 V4.4
Note: "Holiday" 1 and 2 are reserved for the dates to
change between daylight savings and standard time.
Floors: 124 (in a single building, or the
combined total for multiple buildings).
Guard Tours: Not limited (subject only to
hard-drive space).
For each Main Panel (per panel-type
+expansion, licensing and 'Feature-Set')
Panel Legend (for this table only, col. 2): P0: ISM
(square mainboard);
P1: xL (narrow mainboard); fe: +Feature Expansion
board.
Feature
Set
Panel +
Expansion
(½, 1, 2 MB)
Doors (+
Elev./Lifts)
Auth.
Levels
History
Events
(Logs)
Users
User
Names at
Keypads
User LogOn
Panels
Minimum
Software
Needed
1*
P0 / P1 / P1fe
16 / 0 / 16
30
1024
20
Yes
Pin Only
1
Prime (opt.)
2*
P0 / P1 / P1fe
16 / 0 / 16
30
1024
100
Yes
2d ID + Pin
1
Prime (opt.)
3*
P0 / P1 / P1fe
16 / 0 / 16
30
1024
300
Yes
3d ID + Pin
1
Prime (opt.)
4*
P0 / P1fe
16
100
2048
1000
Yes
3d ID + Pin
1
Prime (opt.)
5†
P0 / P1fe
32
100
2048
1000
Yes
3d ID + Pin
6†
P0 / P1fe
32
100
2048
2000
Yes
4d ID + Pin
7†
P0 / P1fe
32
100
1024
4000
No
4d ID + Pin
8†
P0 / P1fe, +½
32
500
8192
10000
Yes
4d ID + Pin
9†
P0 / P1fe, +½
32
500
8192
10000
No
4d ID + Pin
10 †
P0 / P1fe, +1
32
500
8192
20000
Yes
5d ID + Pin
11 †
P0 / P1fe, +1
32
1000
16384
20000
No
5d ID + Pin
12 †
P0 / P1fe, +1
32
1000
16384
20000
Yes
5d ID + Pin
13 †
P0 / P1fe, +2
32
1000
65536
64000
No
5d ID + Pin
14 †
P0 / P1fe, +2
32
1000
32768
64000
Yes
5d ID + Pin
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
60 / 100 /
250
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Ent. Elite
Ent. Elite
Ent. Elite
Ent. Elite
Ent. Elite
† Supported 'feature-set' depends on your software
licensing (as managed through the license-manager
software). Feature-sets higher than 4 are supported
only with the "Enterprise" version of VEREX Director.
* Local user admin. (via keypad) is supported in all
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
343
Common Per-Panel Capacities (not based on 'Feature-Set')
Expansion / Application Modules:
24
system LCD keypads and/or other modules, or
60 suite-security keypads (see exceptions).
Floors:
The "Enterprise" version of the
software supports 124 unique accesscontrolled floors. (These can be in a single building,
Exceptions: Suite-security keypads can be mixed with
other modules if desired (the capacity for suite-security
keypads is reduced by 5 for each system LCD keypad,
and each other expansion / application module added.
or the combined total across multiple buildings.)
Monitored
Sensors
(Input
Points):
(Depends on panel type, and number of point
expander modules.)
(For example, with 2 system keypads, 3 door
controllers, and one point expansion module, a fullcapacity "Enterprise" system could still support 30
suite-security keypads).
Converted TDC/PDC Door Controllers: Up to 10 per
panel (combined total).
Up to 128: ISM panels (square mainboard).
Up to 256 (V4.4): xL panels (narrow rectangular
mainboard).
Input Capacity Detail:
ISM (square mainboard): 128 (120 external to the
main panel). All of these can be wireless if keypads
are set to zero each.
xL (narrow mainboard): 256 (all can be external /
wireless if the main panel and keypads are set to 0
each).
Also See:
- Expansion Modules (I/O tab, then "Inputs:")
- System Settings for each Panel (I/O Mapping tab)
Areas: 16 monitored 'areas' per panel;
Doors:
The "Enterprise" version of the
software supports up to 32 doors per panel.
The "Prime" version supports a single panel
with 16 doors.
Note: To support doors/access-control, xL panels
(narrow mainboard), require a 'Feature Expansion
Board'.
Programmable Outputs: 128 per panel.
Elevators: The "Enterprise" version of the
software supports up to 32 elevator (lift) cabs.
Note: With ISM panels (square mainboard), outputs
005-008 are virtual outputs available only for use with
the numeric paging feature.
Exception: This is shared with the door capacity (max.
32 combined total).
Expansion Module Capacities and Features
Inputs and Outputs
LCD
keypad
Suite
Keypad
Fire
module
MAP
annun.
RF
module
Door
ctrlr
I/O
expansion
Elevator
Controller
Inputs
1
8/4/2
4
32
8
8
16
0
Outputs
1
2/1
8
class
A/B
2 (8)
16
-
4
2 (10)
8 (16)
0
LCD
keypad
Suite
Keypad
Fire
module
MAP
annun.
RF
module
Door
ctrlr
I/O
expansion
Elevator
Controller
Normally Closed


-





Normally Open
with EOL
Normally Closed with
EOL
Form C with EOL
Dual EOL


-






-
-








-
-










Supervision
344
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Class ‘A’
(4 wire loop)
Class ‘B’
(2 wire loop)
Tamper
LCD
keypad
Suite
Keypad
Fire
module
MAP
annun.
RF
module
Door
ctrlr
I/O
expansion
Elevator
Controller
-
-

-
-
-
-
-
-
-

-
-
-
-
-








New style modules (V4.4): These use custom circuit types (configurable).

Readers / Doors
LCD
keypad
N/A
Suite
Keypad
-
Fire
module
N/A
MAP
annun.
N/A
RF
module
N/A
N/A
-
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
-
N/A
N/A
-
-
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
-
-
-
-
LCD
keypad
Suite
Keypad
Fire
module
ULC

-
UL

CE
I/O
expansion
N/A
Elevator
Controller
N/A
1
(inside
cab)


-


N/A
N/A



-
-









-





MAP
annun.
RF
module
Door
ctrlr
I/O
expansion
Elevator
Controller
-


-

-
-
-

-


-

-
-
-
-


-
DOC (ICAN)







-
FCC







-
Doors
Readers
(In/Out)
Reader Features
 Reader Tamper
 5/12 VDC Selectable
Reader Support
 Wiegand
 Magstripe
 Proximity
 Arming Station
Door Unlock Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Module Heartbeat
Module Comm.
Module Low Power
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Door
ctrlr
2
4
8
4
8
16
N/A
N/A
2
(elevator
cabs)
Standards
Main Panels: The main panels comply with all of the standards above.
Note: UL commercial burg. compliance will require the attack-resistant main cabinet.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
345
Advanced Database Features
already using SQL server to manage other
databases.
Overview of Features
VEREX Director provides a number of
advanced database features:
 Database Query: Provides database 'views',
allowing you (or other software) to link to the
Director database to perform custom reporting
tasks;  Automated User Import: Allows the
Director software to be interfaced with a
personnel management system (Also called:
"Enterprise Resource Management");
 SQL Server Support: Allows your company's
IT department take charge of the database
under SQL Server.
Note: These features are optional and/or depend on
your software licensing. Details: "System Capacities"
(previous).
Tip: Many of the topics in this section (>>)
either work together or apply to more than one
database feature. As such, it is very useful to
read all of these topics at least once before
you attempt to set up any of this.
SQL Server Support
Tips: This feature is NOT required to enable any
other features. Advanced database features are
limited only by software version and licensing. This
feature has also been referred to as "Open
Database". This term is being phased out due to
misinterpretation.
SQL Versions supported:
Version (2005)
Express
Standard
Workgroup
Enterprise
Note
Typical installation (managed by
the Director software).
SQL server installation option
(managed through SQL server).
Installing with SQL Server Support
During software installation (and/or if you run
the database-generator utility on its own), you
will be asked if you wish to manage the
database through a SQL-Server PC. If you
select "Yes", you will be asked for a number of
"User Logins" and passwords. These are
discussed in the following section ( >> ).
Using the DB-Generator to Switch to SQL Server
Support: Before running the database generator
utility, ensure you have an up-to-date backup of the
database (created with the current/newest version of
Director software), as this will be needed to restore
your data thereafter. Notice: If you accidentally
select SQL server support during a software
upgrade, switching back to the standard approach
may require removing and reinstalling the VEREX
Director software. You will be prompted accordingly
if this applies to you.
Introduction
Beginning with v4.7 for a typical installation,
the Director database uses SQL server
Express (which is included). You also have
the option of letting your company's IT
department take charge of the Director
database under SQL Server (e.g., including
maintaining backups, etc.). With the initial
release of Director v4.7, SQL Server 2000 and
2005 are supported. In this case, the VEREX
Director database will be placed on your SQL
Server PC during software installation. This is
intended only for larger systems that are
346
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
User-Logins (Needed for: Database Query, and SQL Server Support)
User 'Logins'
The Table Repair Utility
The "Database Query" feature, and SQLserver support require you to provide
some login information that will be used to
access the VEREX Director database.
In a client-server VEREX Director system, the
database/table repair utility is available only
through the server PC.
(This is the PC that includes "...Director-Server.exe".
Before using the table repair utility, first:
Tip: With a system managed under SQL server,
this information must match these values for the
Director database entered at the SQL Server PC.
Also, if you wish to change these settings later
on, you must ensure that no one is presently
accessing the Director database (see the steps
under "Table Repair Utility").
1) Client-server systems: Ensure that no copies of the
VEREX Director (or communications) software are
logged into the database (Tools menu, "Who is
logged In").
2) Shut down Your VEREX Director (and
communications) software (details follow).
Note: The communications software pertains to PCs
that connect with system panels--via cable, modem, or
IP-LAN/WAN (V3.3).
Overview
If you select SQL-server support during
installation, you will be prompted for the
"user
login"
information
directly.
Otherwise (or to change the settings later),
you need to access the required form
manually:
VEREX Director-Repair.exe (User
Logins ).
Shutting Down the VEREX Director
Software
At the VEREX Director server, and each client
PC (that uses this main database):
 Open the File menu;
 Select Exit;
 Select Yes when asked to confirm.
Shutting Down Communication Modules
At each PC that connects to system panels or
modems:
 Open the task bar (move your mouse to the
bottom-right of the screen);
 Check for a telephone/communication symbol
on the right-hand side;
 If present, right-click this symbol, and select
Exit from the pop-up menu.
 Select Yes when asked to confirm.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
347
VEREX Director-Repair.exe User Logins 
Setting Up "User Logins"
Before starting the table repair utility, ensure
that all copies of the VEREX Director
software (and associated server and
communications components) are shut
down.
-------------------------
At your VEREX Director workstation
(server PC if client-server) open the
Windows Start menu, and select
Programs, VEREX Director V4, and
VEREX Director-Repair.
-------------------------
Select User Logins , and then
refer to the item-descriptions for this
screen while making your selections.
When finished, click the [x] in the
upper-right corner of the 'DirectorRepair' screen to close the database
check/repair utility.
Screen Reference
When you click [Change...] for each item below,
you will be asked to enter a "User Login" and
password. For a typical system (i.e., not being
managed under SQL server), you can leave the
login names at our default settings, and enter
only your desired passwords.
Tip: For a system managed under SQL server, this
information must be set to match the 'User Logins'
(and passwords) for the Director database as entered
at the SQL Server PC.
Notice: If you wish to change these settings later on,
you must ensure that no one is presently accessing
the Director database (see the steps under "Table
Repair Utility", previous/above).
- Query User / Change Query User Login: This
allows you (or your custom software) to link to
the database and view stored information. This
allows setting up custom queries (reports), and
is also used by the auto-user import feature
(ERM integration).
- Import User / Change Import User Login: This
is used with the automated user import feature
(ERM integration) feature.
This is required when opening and editing the tables:
ErmUserImport and ErmUserImportResult;
Server roles: None required.
- Backup User / Change Backup User Login:
This allows the VEREX Director software to
backup and restore its database (for a system
managed under SQL server);
Server roles: Disk Admin.; Database Creator.
- System Administrator / Change SA User
Login: This allows the VEREX Director software
to access the database (for a system managed
under SQL server).
Server roles: System Administrator.
Server roles: None required.
348
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Linking to the Database (Used for: Custom Query/Reporting; ERM Integration)
Introduction
Director's "Database Query" feature allows you
(or your custom software) to link to the
database, and view or use the data as desired.
(This pertains to read-only database 'views'
(provided) that mirror the contents of the
database.) This allows setting up custom
reports (e.g., setting up your own custom
queries in MS Access, or using a program
such as "Crystal Reports". Database 'views'
are also used with the auto user-import feature
(ERM integration).
Linking to the Database to Generate
Custom Queries and Reports
The following example and screens pertain to
using MS Access to link to the database.
1)
In MS Access, open the File menu, and
select New. Tip: From now on, I'll condense
menu selections (e.g., File, New).
Notice: To generate custom queries and reports, you
need to create a new (blank) database, and link to
the Director database as discussed below.
Typical Systems (i.e., not running SQL
Server)
"Query User Login" information is required to
allow linking to the database. For a system set
to be managed under SQL server, you will be
prompted automatically for this during the
installation. With a typical system (i.e., NOT
using SQL server), you'll need to set this
through the table repair utility.
Double-click "Database".
2)
In the next screen, give it a suitable name.
Details / Steps: See "User-Logins" (previous).
Auto-User Update (ERM Integration): This feature uses
the "ImportUserLogin' instead for any tasks involving
the 'ErmUserImport' and 'ErmUserImportResult' tables.
Then, click [Create].
3)
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Select: File, Get External Data, Link
Tables like this:
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
349
4)
You can ignore most of this screen.
At the very bottom, open the "Files of type"
field [], and select "ODBC Databases ()".
5)
6)
This screen will appear:
Select: User Data Source (...) at the top,
and click [ Next ].
7)
In the next screen:
You can ignore most of this one, too:
Select: SQL Server in the list, and click
[ Next ].
8)
In the next screen, click [ Finish ].
Just select Machine Data Source at the
top, and click [ New ].
350
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
If you see any additional screens before the
one shown below, respond appropriately (
[Next], etc.).
11) In the next screen, make selections similar to
as shown:
Tip: If asked to log in, enter the
"DirectorQueryUser" login name and password.
Exception: Auto card-import tasks involving the
'ErmUserImport' and 'ErmUserImportResult'
tables require the "ImportUserLogin" login name
and password.
9)
In the next screen, enter a suitable data
source "Name", plus a "Description" if
desired.
When ready, click [ Next ].
12) And, again (almost done):
Then, select your "Server" in the list, and
click [ Next ].
Tip: This may also be (or include) the name of the
PC that contains the database.
10) In the next screen, select "With SQL...", and
"Connect to SQL..." as shown:
When ready, click [ Finish ].
Then, enter your "DirectorQueryUser" login
ID and password, and click [ Next ].
Exception: Auto card-import tasks involving the
'ErmUserImport' and 'ErmUserImportResult'
tables require the "ImportUserLogin" login name
and password.
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
351
13) In the next screen, click [OK], or [Test Data
Source], as desired:
15) Now, select the VEREX Director database
view(s) that you want to be available to you:
When ready, click [ OK ].
16) Your selected VEREX Director database
view(s) are now linked to your new database.
Tip: A successful "Test" indicates you've entered
correct login data, etc.
14) In the next screen, select Machine Data
Source at the top:
Now, you can apply the full power of your
database software and programming skills to
meet your requirements (set up database
queries, etc.).
Understanding the Data
Then, select the "data source" you created,
and click [ OK ].
352
 SID is an account identifier.
 The remaining initial columns (up to 3 or 4)
comprise the "Primary Key" that uniquely
identifies each row.
 For details on additional columns, refer to
the specific screens in the Director software
(and/or the applicable help topics).
 For more information, and details on
encoded values, search your Director CD for
a file pertaining to "Database Views".
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Automated User-Import (Used for: ERM Integration)
[Management] Database Maintenance
User Import 
Introduction
VEREX Director provides an
automated user import feature-allowing it to be interfaced with a
personnel management system
(Also
called:
"Enterprise
Resource
Management").
Caution: This requires source
data with very specific structure.
Notice: For tasks involving the
'ErmUserImport' and
'ErmUserImportResult' tables, this
feature requires connecting using the
"ImportUserLogin" login name and password.
(and deletes processed information to keep
the file to a manageable size);
 Prompts an IT / system operator to fix any
errors in the source data/commands.
Conceptual Aspects
 Link/Database Query: Allows looking at
what's in the Director database (through the
database 'views' provided). This is covered
previously/above.
 ErmUserImport and ErmUserImportResult
Tables: The ErmUserImport table can be
updated by your custom software, and then
polled on a regular basis (configurable) by
the Director software, thus allowing user
information to be updated automatically.
When the information is imported, results
and errors will be posted to the
ErmUserImportResult table--providing
feedback on how things went.
Required Data Format
Refer to the "Director ERM User Import"
document which is included on the VEREX
Director CD.
Typical Systems (i.e., not running SQL
Server)
Note: It is your responsibility to delete data as
needed to keep this table at a manageable size.
Details / Steps: See "User-Logins" (previous).
 Director's Automatic User Import Feature:
This allows setting up VEREX Director to
automatically poll the ErmUserImport table
(details to follow).
Setting Up Automated User Imports
Software Interface ("Middleware") Tasks
The ERM interface typically includes custom
software that:
 Queries the database to verify present
content, and/or run custom reports;
 Writes data-commands (Add/Edit/Delete) to
the ErmUserImport table;
 Checks the ErmUserImportResult table for
errors,
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
"Query User Login" information is required to
allow linking to the database. For a system set
to be managed under SQL server, you will be
prompted automatically for this during the
installation. With a typical system (i.e., NOT
using SQL server), you'll need to set this
through the table repair utility.
Notice: As a precaution before setting up this feature,
ensure you have an up-to-date backup copy of the
database.
For details, refer to "Backing up or Restoring the
Database".
1)
Select [Management] in the 'tree'.
2)
Select Database Maintenance, and open
User Import.
3)
Then, refer to the item-descriptions for this
screen while making your selections.
Screen Reference
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
353
- Enable Periodic Processing of User Import
Table: Select this to 'turn on' the automated
card import feature.
- Period (in minutes): This is how long Director
will wait before processing the 'ErmUserImport'
table again (e.g., 15 minutes = 4 times per
hour);
Note: As discussed under "Conceptual Aspects", and
"Software Interface ("Middleware") Tasks" -- both
previous/above, it is the responsibility of your custom
software to update the table with the desired
commands and data--which will then be processed by
the Director software at the time intervals selected
here.
- [Process User Import Table Now]: This
causes Director to process the table right away,
rather than waiting until the next scheduled time.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ensuring Panels are Updated
To ensure panels are updated regularly, you
should set up scheduled communications
sessions for the panel(s). Tip: For any
panels that are already connected/online, the
update
will
occur
automatically.
Related Topics:
Updates"
354
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
"Panel
Communications
and
21-0381E v4.9.1
Manually Importing User-Data From a Text File
Introduction
User data an be imported from an external file
if necessary. Caution: This requires a source
text file with very specific structure (otherwise,
the database can become corrupted). As
such, this feature should not be used by
persons who are unfamiliar with computers or
text file formats.
Authority:
users.
Importing Card Data Manually
1)
As a precaution before using this feature,
ensure you have an up-to-date backup copy
of the database.
For details, refer to "Backing up or Restoring
the Database".
2)
Ensure your text file matches the required
structure.
3)
Open the File menu, and select Import
Users.
This feature requires the authority to edit
Required Software Version and
Licensing
This feature is supported beginning with v3.0
software. No special licensing is needed.
Required Data Format
4)
Locate and open your file ( [Open], or doubleclick).
Refer to the "File Requirements for User
Import" document which is included on the
VEREX Director CD.
5)
Note: This file is not associated with the automated
card import feature.
6)
Follow any additional prompts that appear.
(If errors occur, you may need to fix your file, and
import it again.)
When finished, be sure to update the
panel(s) with the new data.
Tip: For any panels that are already
connected/online, this will occur automatically.
Related Topics: "Panel Communications and
Updates"
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
355
System / Hardware Reference
System Design Aspects
(Topology)
The following concepts can be 'mixed and
matched' as desired when designing a system:
PCs / Environments: The VEREX Director
software can be installed for use on a singlePC, or across multiple PCs in a network
environment. Different aspects of the software
will be installed, depending on what each PC is
used
for
(database
server,
operator
workstation,
and/or
for
panel/modem
connections).
Client access to the server database is protected—
based on a definable list of clients, each with its
associated network "IP address". Multiple central
databases can also be managed if desired. An
operator can logoff from one server, and then login to
another one.
356
Sites / Accounts:
For managing larger
systems, and systems in multiple locations, the
VEREX Director software uses the concept of
"Accounts". Each account can be a single
panel, or many panels in different locations.
Essentially, an account is a set of panel(s) or
site(s) that will be managed as a single entity
(shared users, etc.).
Accounts can be
arranged in folders, which are referenced
when assigning operator permissions.
Selecting an account shows the monitoring window with
messages received from the specific account, and
provides access to admin. and configuration topics for
the selected account.
Panels and Connections: Each account can
include 1-60 panels (subject to licensing and
PC / network performance). Up to 30 panels
at a time can be connected together to share a
single connection to a PC or modem.
Panels can connect through any PC in the
VEREX Director system. A specific connection
can be direct (via cable), or using dial up
modems, or through a network (via IP). Cable
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
connections are 'serial', with or without
conversion to "RS485". (RS485 connections
allow for longer distances, and/or multiple
panels per connection.)
IP Connections: Secure and regular IP connections
are
also
supported.
More: IP Connectivity
Dial up panels with dedicated external modems (one
panel per modem) can be set to automatically dial-in
to the VEREX Director system to transmit alarms or
blocks of activity messages. In other configurations,
the alarms and events are transmitted when a
connection is made with the specific panels
(immediately, at a pre-programmed time, or on a
repeating schedule).
Central monitoring is configured separately (for each
individual panel), utilizing the 'Bell 103' (300 baud)
modem/dialler built into each main panel, and/or an
IP connection (SIP Reporting), or high-security
communications (HSC--via Mark7/DVACS service in
Canada). Tip: HSC modules also support a printer.
The built-in modems can also be used to remotely
manage smaller sites (single-panel accounts with up
to 300 users).
VEREX Director panel communications are managed
through "Communication Pools", which allow
selecting groups of modems to choose from when
'calling' a specific panel/site. Note: Communication
'pools' are used in all systems.
Initiating a connection with desired panel(s) allows a
VEREX Director operator to monitor activity at an
account (live/real-time), monitor guard-tours that are
in effect, perform status-checking and device-control
tasks, and/or synchronize panels with the software.
Note: Panel updates can also be scheduled for
regular intervals and/or 'quiet' times at the specific
sites (such as overnight).
Alarm System Hardware
Main system panels, LCD keypads, and
expansion modules provide the basic building
blocks for each security system. Monitoring
sensors, and various output/signalling devices
complete the system.
System Capacities: For an extensive list of the number
and types of
devices supported, refer to "System Capacities".
Main System Panels: This is the box or panel
on the wall that acts as the brain of the system.
All of the various detection devices connect to
it. When a device is triggered, the control panel
activates sirens or lights. If monitored, it alerts
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
the Monitoring Station through the telephone
lines (HSC or dial-up).
Expansion Modules:
Various expansion
modules are supported allowing additional
monitored sensors, programmable outputs,
and/or special features to be added to the
system (such as door/access control,
elevator/floor control, and suite security). All
modules from an existing Fx or FxPro system
are also supported. The system supports a
total of 24 expansion modules (or 60 suitesecurity keypads).
xL LCD Keypad: A keypad provides users
with on-site control, and the ability to operate
the total alarm system. As well, LCD keypads
provide an on-premise read-out indicating the
location and nature of alarms.
Suite-Security Keypad: These units provide
security features for 1 - 8 users in a single
apartment/suite or facility. A suite-security
keypad can be thought of as a private security
system, providing intrusion monitoring and
signalling features for a single suite/facility.
Two types are available: 2-zone & 8-zone.
Contacts (Door and Window sensors):
These are magnetic sensors that detect door
or window openings. Contacts are normally
required on exterior doors and both groundfloor and basement windows that can be
opened. Upper-level doors and windows that
can be reached from the roof, balcony, or
'deck' should also be protected.
Motion Detector: This is a device mounted
strategically inside the facility to detect motion
within a predetermined area. The most
commonly used type is the infrared detector,
which senses changes in infrared energy
(temperature) related to movements within the
coverage area. The coverage pattern and
sensitivity of the unit can be adjusted during
the installation to avoid false alarms due to
pets.
Glass Break Detector: This is a sensor
placed on a window or skylight that initiates an
alarm at the moment glass is broken. This
sensor 'listens' for the distinct sound of
breaking glass or the feel of its vibrations.
These sensors are not always necessary,
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
357
however, if window contacts and/or motion
detectors are used.
Smoke Detector: This is a smoke detector
that senses smoke or flame, triggering a local
alarm as well as transmitting an associated
message to the monitoring station.
The
Monitoring Station, in turn, is able to notify the
fire department on a 24-hr a day basis.
Panic Alarm: A panic alarm is another type of
detector that can be added to a centrally
monitored system. Panic buttons can be used
to notify police, or other authorities as set up
during installation. Panic buttons can be fixed
or portable, worn around the neck or carried.
This feature can provide immeasurable peace
of mind for elderly or infirm persons---or
anyone spending time alone in their home.
Carbon Monoxide Sensor: A device that
detects toxic levels of carbon monoxide gas.
Early warning of low levels of carbon monoxide
allows preventative steps to be taken before
serious harm occurs.
Critical Points:
In addition to providing
intrusion detection and peace of mind for fire
and personal protection, many other conditions
can be electronically supervised. For example
supervising a freezer to alert someone when
the temperature rises.
Water and gas
detectors also exist to safeguard against
property damage, etc. These critical points
can be monitored by a Monitoring Station 24
hours a day.
Readers and Cards/Tokens: Updated doorcontrol modules are supported, providing
access control (with In/Out tracking) for two
doors (1 or 2 readers per door). The readers
can be magnetic stripe, Wiegand, Proximity, or
other readers that output in a standard
magnetic stripe or Wiegand (swipe) format.
G-Prox readers, and the newer G-Prox II
intelligent
(jumper-free)
readers
and
associated G-Prox proximity cards are fully
supported. These readers are available with
or without keypad, and in standard (wall/flush
mount), mullion-mount, and "Arming Station"
designs.
(Wiegand-output keypads allow for "Card Plus
PIN" entry, and duress signalling.)
Two (definable) card formats are supported at the
same time, allowing two types of Wiegand/Proximity
cards to be used (per panel), or Wiegand/Prox and
Magstripe/Barcode. Wiegand cards (or Wiegand
output) can be the industry standard format-A 26-bit,
or proprietary 36-bit format, plus user-definable
Wiegand formats up to 40-bits in length. Magnetic
stripe cards (or equivalent output) can be either
standard magnetic stripe access cards, or
custom/existing cards that meet the ISO 3554
industry standard (user-definable formats).
Cards with 'version numbers' are also supported,
allowing fixed-ID cards to be reissued if lost or stolen.
"Matrix" style reader-keypads (i.e., that require
additional wiring for the keypad) are supported only
via converted PDC and TDC door controllers.
358
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Keypad Tone Reference (V4.5 with V4.42 firmware)
The following table shows keypad tones for the indicated conditions. Tones that are different for
“Standard” vs. “Reversed” are shown in bold.
Tip: “Standard” versus “reversed” tones is selectable under:
Account Information, Setup, ”Arm/Disarm and Tones”.
LCD keypad Tones
Condition
Fire
Chime
Exit/Entry Delay
Exit Delay with point open
(see note below)
Standard Tones
1 second on and off.
Three 125 ms, short low level
beeps
Slow turn on/off tones:
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time:750 ms
Fast turn on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Fast turn on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Steady continuous tone
Reverse Tones
1 second on and off.
Three 125 ms, short low level
beeps
Steady continuous tone
Fast turn on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Confirm Exit delay
Fast turn on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Trouble – Alarm,
Slow turn on/off tones:
Area Fail to Arm
On Time: 250 ms
(see note below)
Off Time:750 ms
Entry delay with
Very Fast turn on/off tones
Very Fast turn on/off tones
was/current in alarm
On Time: 125 ms
On Time: 125 ms
Off Time: 125 ms
Off Time: 125 ms
Area closing – 15 minutes
Three 125 ms, short tones.
Three 125 ms, short tones.
Tones faster during last 5 minutes
Tones faster during last 5 minutes
Note: For conditions referencing this note, the tone will NOT be generated if the applicable area’s “Fail to Exit Mode” is
set to None/0 (zero).
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
359
Table 2: Arming station Tones
Condition
Fire
Chime
Exit/Entry Delay
Exit Delay with point open
(see note below)
Confirm Exit delay
Trouble – Alarm,
Standard Tones
3 times 500 ms on and off, then
there 1 second gap
Double short :
125 ms on and 125 off four times
Slow cadence: slow on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time:750 ms
Fast cadence: fast on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Fast cadence: fast on/off tones:
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Steady continuous tone
Area Fail to Arm
(see note below)
Entry delay with
was/current in alarm
Reverse Tones
3 times 500 ms on and off, then
there 1 second gap
Double short :
125 ms on and 125 off four times
Steady continuous tone
Fast cadence: fast on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Fast cadence: fast on/off tones:
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Slow cadence: slow tune on/off
tones:
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time:750 ms
Fast cadence: fast on/off tones
Fast cadence: fast on/off tones
On Time: 250 ms
On Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Off Time: 250 ms
Area closing – 15 minutes
Double short tones:
Double short tones:
125 ms on and 125 off four times.
125 ms on and 125 off four times.
Tones faster during last 5 minutes
Tones faster during last 5 minute
Note: For conditions referencing this note, the tone will NOT be generated if the applicable area’s “Fail to Exit Mode” is
set to None/0 (zero).
Table 3: Buzzer via Output set to Follow Sonalert
Output Ref: Configuration, Output Points, […], ”Area, Area x, Sonalert…”)
Condition
Standard Tones
Reverse Tones
Fire
2 seconds on/off.
2 seconds on/off
Chime
1 second on
1 second on
Exit/Entry Delay
1 second on two second off
Steady continuous tone
Exit Delay with point open
1 second on/off
1 second on/off
(see note below)
Confirm Exit delay
1 second on/off:
1 second on/off
Trouble – Alarm,
Steady continuous tone
1 second on two second off
Area Fail to Arm
(see note below)
Entry delay with
1 second on/off:
1 second on/off
was/current in alarm
Area closing – 15 minutes
1 second on.
1 second on.
Tones faster during last 5 minutes
Tones faster during last 5 minutes
Note: For conditions referencing this note, the tone will NOT be generated if the applicable area’s “Fail to Exit Mode” is
set to None/0 (zero).
360
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
On-Line Support & Product Information
www.utcfssecurityproducts.eu/suppor
t
On-Line Information and Support
The
Interlogix
web
site
(http://www.interlogix.com) provides access
to product marketing and support information
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Interlogix provides all product data-sheets
and marketing materials as Adobe® PDF files
for direct download and printing. Installation
instructions and user's guides for current
products are also available in PDF format.
Technical Support Web-Site
The technical support web site can be
accessed through the main web site, and is
also available directly under:
www.interlogix.com/customer-support
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
The Interlogix web site is being updated for
ease of use, and additional features.
To view or print a PDF file, you must have the
Adobe® Acrobat reader software installed on your
computer, and/or PDF support set up for your Internet
'browser' software. The Adobe® Acrobat reader is
distributed freely, and can be downloaded from
www.adobe.com.
To access the Interlogix web-sites, you must have
both Internet access and 'web browser' software
installed and properly set up on your computer.
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
361
Additional information
4)
Follow the screens that appear. If
selecting your modem manually, select
the brand, and then the specific model
in the list. When finished, click [Next].
5)
Select the serial port (COMx) to be
used for the connection, and click
[Next].
6)
If a screen appears with a spot for your
'Area Code', and other items, respond
appropriately, and [Close] this screen
when finished).
Click [Next], [Finish] and/or [OK] as
required to complete the process.
Windows XP
Note: Windows treats a 'direct-cable-connection' the
same as a modem.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
In the Modems tab, click [Add].
Select "Do not detect...", and click
[Next].
Under "Standard Modem Types",
select "Communications Cable
between two computers", and click
[Next].
Select the serial port (COMx) that the
cable will be using, and click [Next].
Click [Finish].
In the next screen, click [OK] to close
the screen.
Note: The name of the direct-cableconnection will be set as "Communications
Cable between two computers".
-------------------------
Alternative Method: If you have a modem
installation disk(ette) or a 'driver' that was download
from the internet, you can make use of this. (Shut
down all software first, and then follow the instructions
provided with the disk / file. Then, start the Director
software, and run the Communications Wizard again.
The TCP/IP Protocol is Missing
Adding a Modem
Note: Windows will normally auto-detect an internal
modem, so if you are reading this, you are likely to be
using an external modem connected through a serial
cable, or you may have cancelled out of Windows
auto-installation process. For an internal modem that
has not been physically installed yet, you must first
shut down (and unplug) the PC, and install the
modem.
-------------------------
Manually Setting Up a Modem under MS
Windows:
1) Follow the prompts that appear, and
click [Next] to move through the
screens.
External Modem: Ensure the modem is
connected, and powered up.
2)
When presented with an [Add] button,
select it.
3)
When a screen appears with "Don't
Detect my modem, I will select it
from a list", select this only if you do
not want Windows to try to identify your
modem (and port) automatically.
Then, click [Next].
362
7)
Since the TCP/IP protocol does not appear to
be installed on this PC, the Wizard cannot
finish setting up a panelPC connection via
IP. Please [Cancel] the wizard, shut down
the Director software, and contact your
network administrator to get TCP/IP installed
and set up.
Note: For panel-initiated communications with a
Director PC, the PC must have a fixed IP address as
provided by your network administrator.
If you require more information on the IP feature, and
on setting up the IP interface board (that connects to
the system panel), please refer to the IP Connectivity
Guide included with the IP interface. Tip: This
document is also included on the Director CD (in PDF
format).
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Index
Absentee report ................................................ 13
Access ...... 26, 146, 154, 163, 245, 261, 266, 276
Card format ................................................. 240
During comms failure .......................... 175, 240
Reporting on User Access Rights (by Area¸
Door¸ or Floor) .......................................... 26
User-photo verification .................................. 48
Access control 146, 154, 163, 175, 245, 261, 266,
276
Card format ................................................. 240
None (see token-format) ............................. 240
Access settings (card format etcDot) .............. 240
Access-Controlled Elevators (Lifts) and
Associated Readers .................................... 276
Account ........................................................... 200
Find an account across multiple servers ..... 200
Account button on the toolbar ......................... 197
Account Folders .............................................. 197
Setting up .................................................... 197
Account Information ................ 213, 218, 219, 222
Account Type¸ Feature-Set¸ etc. ................. 213
Alarm / Event Instructions ........................... 219
Alarm / Event Priorities................................ 222
Bad card/PIN tracking ................................. 216
Event Response .......................................... 218
Shared Users and Shared Holidays ............ 217
Site/Mailing Address and Contact Information
................................................................ 216
Account Information (Custom Information
Categories for Users) .................................. 161
Account list...................................................... 197
Sorting......................................................... 197
Account Status ................................................ 131
Account UID (see Panel Code) ....................... 236
Accounts ................................................. 197, 200
Setting up .................................................... 197
Viewing accounts across multiple servers... 200
Account-Wide Panel Settings (Feature-Set¸ etc.)
.................................................................... 213
Acknowledge and/or resolve an alarm .............. 45
Acknowledging alarms (Comment/Resolve) ..... 45
ACPO/UK ................................................ 105, 214
Panel Operating Mode ................................ 214
Reset confirmed alarm ................................ 105
Activating and Monitoring Guard Tours ............. 52
Activating Communications and Transferring
Panel Settings ............................................. 123
Activating views (for DB query) ....................... 374
Activation key .......................................... 330, 368
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Control
Activity
Monitoring system activity ............................ 39
Reporting on activity for an account ............. 20
Activity Monitoring and Auto-Arming ...............250
Activity reporting ............................................... 20
Import archived data to report on ................191
Adding ..................... 141, 146, 154, 163, 197, 296
Activating a Pseudo-point ............................243
An account folder ........................................197
Areas ...........................................................245
Authorities for users/entrants ......................154
Cardholders/entrants ...................................163
Doors...........................................................266
Elevators (lifts) ............................................276
Expansion modules .....................................256
Holidays ......................................................149
Input-points / sensors ..................................284
Operators ....................................................136
Programmable output points .......................296
Required-attendance periods ....................... 17
Schedules ...................................................146
Set up operator permissions .......................141
Setting up a panel communications session123
Users ...........................................................163
Users who can enter during comms-failure .175
Adding features ...............................................330
Address ...........................................................216
Mailing address for an account ...................216
Adjusting Camera Quality for your
Connection/Bandwidth ................................. 69
Administrator
Windows Administrator................................321
Advanced Camera Settings .............................. 78
Advanced Database Features .........................373
After a Multi-Server Login ................................200
Aim or zoom a PTZ camera ............................. 66
Alarm ................................................................ 39
Checking status for the system or various
items ......................................................... 80
Alarm instructions ............................................219
Alarm notes ...................................................... 45
Alarm priorities ................................................222
Alarm reporting (transmission mode paging etc.)
....................................................................236
Alarm reporting settings ..................................236
Alarms ...............................................39, 144, 226
Acknowledge/resolve ................................... 45
Listing only specific messages ..................... 43
Scheduled event filtering for operators ........144
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
363
Text paging (Serial Reporting) .................... 226
Alarms (blocking unwanted alarms from
'pseudos') .................................................... 243
Allow duress ................................................... 213
Antipassback status ........................................ 107
Resetting for one user or everyone ............... 87
Resetting for users in a specific area .......... 107
Apartment ....................................................... 261
Suite-Security Keypads............................... 261
APB Reset for an area .................................... 107
APB status ...................................................... 107
Reset for users in a specific area ................ 107
Resetting for one user or everyone ............... 87
Archive ............................................................ 191
Archiving Activity or Audit logs ........................ 191
Area Groups and Multi-Panel Arm/Disarm ...... 253
Area settings ................................................... 245
Area Users ...................................................... 104
Areas .............................................................. 248
Area Users (Activity¸ User Count¸ and APBReset) ..................................................... 104
Auto disarm on valid token.......................... 248
Check status by area .................................. 101
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ... 230
Areas and Related Settings ............................ 245
Arm an area .................................................... 101
Arm/Disarm ..................................................... 254
Setting up Multi-Panel Arm/Disarm ............. 254
Arm-disarm keyswitch (setting up custom input
point types) ................................................. 291
Arrival/departure reports ................................... 13
Attendance........................................................ 13
Time and attendance reporting ..................... 13
Attendance periods (for time and attendance
reports) ......................................................... 17
Attendance zone ............................................. 270
Audit report ....................................................... 32
Audit Reporting
Import archived data to report on ................ 191
Authorities for shared users .................... 203, 205
Authorities for users / Entrants (V4.4) ........... 154
Authority Groups to Manage Large Numbers of
Authorities (v4.6) ......................................... 152
Authority levels ............................................... 154
Auto-connect to panel (see Auto-Connect under
2nd screen) ................................................. 123
Auto-disarm on valid token (for an area) ......... 248
Auto-login to control and status ...................... 136
Automated user/card import ............................ 380
Automatic door unlocking................................ 268
Backing up or Restoring the Database ........... 184
Backup the database ...................................... 187
364
Setting Backups to Occur Automatically
(Scheduled Backups) .............................. 187
Bad Card/PIN .................................................... 89
Clearing a global lockout ............................... 89
Bad card/PIN tracking ..................................... 216
Badging cards ................................................. 168
Badging option (using) .................................... 168
Bandwidth ......................................................... 69
Battery Fail ...................... 284, 286, 290, 291, 292
bCAPL ............................................................. 119
Control and Status of Outputs ..................... 119
bCAPL (programmable output points) ............. 296
bCAPL outputs
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ... 230
Browsing ......................................................... 388
Verex on the Web ....................................... 388
Buzzer tones reference ........................... 386, 387
Cable connection support ............................... 351
Camera quality .................................................. 69
Camera Status/Control and Adjustments .......... 65
Camera views (for event-triggered cameras) .... 78
Camera-image .................................................. 68
Maximum size ............................................... 68
Camera-Image Settings .................................... 69
Cameras ........................................................... 72
Initial set up ................................................... 72
Monitoring remote cameras........................... 58
Cannot log in to Control and Status due to conflict
...................................................................... 81
Capacities ....................................................... 213
Activating or updating your software ........... 330
Maximum system capacities ....................... 368
Set panel feature-set ................................... 213
Capturing user photos ..................................... 168
Card access ............................................ 266, 276
Card action (card enable/disable reader) ........ 271
Card badging option (using) ............................ 168
Card disabling reader (Card Action) ................ 271
Card enabling reader (Card Action) ................ 271
Card format settings ........................................ 240
Card import (automated) ................................. 380
Cardholders (users/entrants) .......................... 163
Cardholders / panel users ............................... 163
Cards that have been Lost .............................. 173
Central monitoring ................................... 243, 245
Central Monitoring ........................................... 238
Central monitoring via IP ................................. 239
Central monitoring via IP (LAN/WAN) ............. 349
Certificate ........................................ 339, 340, 349
Change Server ................................................ 354
Changes
Updating system panels .............................. 121
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Changing settings for ...... 141, 146, 154, 256, 296
An account folder (renaming) ...................... 197
Areas .......................................................... 245
Authorities for users/entrants ...................... 154
Cardholders/entrants .................................. 163
Custom input point types............................. 291
Daylight-savings date .................................. 149
Doors .......................................................... 266
Editing a panel communications session .... 123
Elevators (lifts) and associated readers ...... 276
Equipment (pseudo-points) ......................... 243
Expansion modules ..................................... 256
Global access-control settings .................... 240
Holidays ...................................................... 149
Input-points / sensors .................................. 284
Login password ........................................... 138
Monitoring paging & remote management .. 236
Operator password for logging in ................ 138
Operator permission assignment ................ 136
Operator permissions .................................. 141
Operators .................................................... 136
Paging feature............................................. 296
Programmable output points ....................... 296
Required-attendance periods ........................ 17
Schedules ................................................... 146
Standard-time date ..................................... 149
System settings for each main panel .......... 232
Updating panels .......................................... 121
Users .......................................................... 163
Users who can enter during comms-failure . 175
Changing the look of your desktop .................... 10
Changing the VEREX Director-server PC ....... 327
Check Database for Conflicts.......................... 179
Checking Camera/PTZ Connection Status ....... 67
Checking or Synchronizing the panel Date &
Time .............................................................. 85
Checking Panel Status (Monitored Conditions). 92
Checking status for the system or various items
...................................................................... 80
Checking Status or Controlling a Suite Security
System .......................................................... 99
Checking Status or Controlling Elevators ........ 112
Checking Status or Controlling Floors ............. 115
Checking Status or Controlling Outputs
(Electronically switched Devices) ................ 119
Checking the Status of Modules ....................... 96
Checking the Status of Panels (Equipment)...... 92
Checking to see if client PCs are logged in ..... 181
Checking User In/Out Status........................... 108
Checking/Repairing database tables .............. 182
Checkpoints ...................................................... 54
Setting up guard-tours .................................. 54
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Class map (for readers)...................................271
Clear imported archive-data ............................191
Clearing a Bad Card/PIN Global Lockout ......... 89
Client PCs .......................................................337
Checking to see who is logged in ................181
Client/server startup issues .........................337
Client Permissions...........................................343
client/server .............................................339, 340
validation certificate .............................339, 340
Client/server ....................................................335
Remote Software Download and Remote
Access .....................................................335
Client/Server Access and Permissions............339
Client/server operation (DCOM set up) ...........329
Client/server startup issues .............................337
Clock (setting a panel to match the computer) . 85
Close / Up button on the toolbar ......................197
Command Points .............................................287
1 Define custom point type .........................291
2 Command selections ...............................287
Comments for alarm messages ....................... 45
Commissioning ................................................345
Try the configuration wizard ........................345
Communications..............................................121
Auto-connect to panel (see note under 2nd
screen) ....................................................123
Auto-login to Control & Status .....................136
Host connection settings .............................237
Panel communications log report ................. 32
Panel groups and connection settings.........228
PC and Panels—Modem Connections ........352
Serial Port / Modem Setup (Communications
Manager) .................................................354
Communications client ....................................354
Communications failure ...................................175
Users who can enter during ........................175
Communications log (purging) ........................193
Communications Manager ..............................354
Communications software ...............................354
Communications via the Internet .....................349
Communities (under Community Groups) .......206
Community Groups
1A - Misc. Account Settings ........................203
1B - Ensure Authorities Have Been Set up for
Each Account ..........................................203
1C - Ensure Authorities Have Been Set up for
Each Account ..........................................205
2A - Set Up Communities ............................206
2B - Reserve User ID#s (Shared User-Groups)
................................................................206
2C - Reserve Holiday ID#s (Shared Holiday
Groups) ...................................................208
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
365
3A - Setting up Shared Users ..................... 209
3B - Defining groups of shared holidays ..... 210
4A - Assign Groups of Shared Users to
Accounts (Shared User Management) .... 211
4B - Assign Groups of Shared Holidays to
Accounts (Shared Holiday Management) 212
Computer requirements .................................. 317
Condo ............................................................. 261
Suite-Security keypads ............................... 261
Condominium LED keypads ............................. 99
Configuration .......................... 213, 261, 294, 296
Account-Wide Panel Settings (Feature-Set¸
etc.) ......................................................... 213
Areas and related settings .......................... 245
Custom Input Point Circuit-Types ............... 294
Custom input-point types ............................ 291
Doors and readers ...................................... 266
Elevators (lifts) and Associated readers...... 276
Expansion modules..................................... 256
Monitored conditions (Equipment settings) . 243
Monitored sensors (input points) ................. 284
Outputs (electronic switches) ...................... 296
Panels, Panel Groups, and Connection
Settings ................................................... 228
Reporting on Operator Audits or Panel
Communications Logs .............................. 32
Setting panels and groups to appear in the
'tree' .......................................................... 10
Suite-Security keypads ............................... 261
System settings for each Panel .................. 232
Configuration updates to panels ..................... 121
Conflict .............................................................. 81
Cannot log in to Control & Status .................. 81
Conflicts
Checking for panel vs. software differences 179
Partial updates shown in Yellow/Green in user
list ........................................................... 164
Errors;Correcting software vs. panel
differences;Conflicts
Correcting database.................................... 129
Connecting
A modem to a system panel ....................... 352
Auto-connect to panel (see note under 2nd
screen) .................................................... 123
Transmitting settings to panels ................... 121
Connection overview....................................... 346
Connection type .............................................. 228
Monitoring¸ Paging¸ & Remote Mgt. Settings
................................................................ 236
Panels¸ Panel Groups¸ and Connection
Settings ................................................... 228
Contact information for a site/account............. 216
366
Contacting Verex............................................. 388
Contacts .......................................................... 388
Control
Check status or control an elevator ............. 112
Check status or control floors ...................... 115
Control & status
Login automatically ..................................... 136
Control & Status .............................................. 108
Activity in area ............................................. 104
APB Reset .................................................. 107
Area Users .................................................. 104
User Count .................................................. 104
User In/Out Status....................................... 108
Controlling a Pan/Tilt/Zoom Camera ................. 66
Controlling an Area or Device ........................... 64
Controlling items ............................................... 80
Using Maps and video ................................... 58
Copyrights and Trademarks ............................... vi
Custom Circuit-Types for Input Points............. 294
Custom Information Categories for Users ....... 161
Custom Input Point Circuit-Types.................... 294
Custom point types ......................................... 291
Custom reports (custom lists of users) .............. 29
Custom reports (database query).................... 376
Custom User Information ................................ 161
Customizing How Events are Displayed (Event
Priority) ........................................................ 222
Customizing the MyTools Bar ......................... 366
Conflicts;Database
Correcting panel vs. software differences ... 129
Database
Partial updates shown in Yellow/Green in user
list ............................................................ 164
Database ......................................................... 177
Database
Maintenance................................................ 177
Database
Check for panel vs. software differences .... 179
Database
Checking to see who is logged in ................ 181
Troubleshooting
Check/Repair the database ......................... 182
Database
Backing up the database ............................. 184
Database
If you You Need to Transfer the database to
another PC .............................................. 327
Database
If you You Need to Transfer the database to
another PC .............................................. 327
Database
Managing through SQL server .................... 374
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Database backup ............................................ 184
Database query............................................... 376
Activate for a typical system........................ 374
Date format settings ........................................ 320
Daylight-Savings and Standard time
Dates for time-change ................................. 149
Synchronize panels after time-change .......... 85
DCOMCNFG ................................................... 329
Dealing with alarms (Comment/Resolve) .......... 45
Define cameras ................................................. 72
Deleting ........................... 141, 146, 154, 197, 296
A panel communications session ................ 123
An account folder ........................................ 197
Areas .......................................................... 245
Authorities for users/entrants ...................... 154
Cardholders/entrants .................................. 163
Disabling a pseudo-point............................. 243
Doors .......................................................... 266
Elevators (lifts) ............................................ 276
Expansion modules ..................................... 256
Holidays ...................................................... 149
Input-points / sensors .................................. 284
Operator permissions .................................. 141
Operators .................................................... 136
Programmable output points ....................... 296
Required-attendance periods ........................ 17
Schedules ................................................... 146
Users .......................................................... 163
Users who can enter during comms-failure . 175
Department (define custom user field) ............ 161
Desecure
Elevators ..................................................... 112
Floors .......................................................... 115
Designing printed card layout.......................... 168
Desktop ............................................................... 8
Changing the look of ..................................... 10
Resetting ......................................................... 9
Detailed Operator and User Audit Trail (V4.6)
.................................................................... 224
Detect Duplicate Cards ................... 203, 206, 311
Diagnostics ................................................. 34, 90
Checking System Status (Remote Diagnostics)
.................................................................. 90
Reporting on Panel Diagnostics .................... 34
Did it work (viewing the status of previous
communications sessions) .......................... 127
Direct cable connection installation ................. 351
Director Server manager (v4.7)....................... 337
Director-Server Language ............................... 224
Director-Server PC .......................................... 327
Changing the VEREX Director-server PC ... 327
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Disable cards
Card disabling reader (Card Action) ............271
Disabling Pseudo-Points .................................243
Disarm an area ................................................101
Disclaimers ......................................................... vi
Display offsets .................................................230
Door control .....................................................110
Door forced delay ............................................273
Door interlock (man-trap) ................................274
Door monitoring ...............................................273
Door settings ...................................................266
Door unlockings ......................................245, 268
Doors...............................................................274
Add a door or view/change settings ............266
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ....230
Video Events ...............................................274
View status or control a Reader/Door..........110
Doors, Readers, and Related Settings ............266
Download software ..........................................335
Duplicated item numbers (see display offsets) 230
Duress
PIN requirements (see note under 'PIN') .....163
Duress (enabling) ............................................213
Early departure report ...................................... 13
Elevator (lift) settings (configuration) ...............276
Elevator control ...............................................112
Elevators
Add new or view/change settings
(configuration) .........................................276
View status or control ..................................112
Elevators (Lifts) and Associated Readers .......276
Emergency keys ......................................261, 284
Set up for a suite-security keypad ...............261
Set up for an LCD keypad (1st 3 inputs) .....284
To trigger a programmable output ...............296
To trigger a suite-security keypad output ....261
Enable cards
Card enabling reader (Card Action).............271
Enabling sounds ..............................................220
Encrypted IP ....................................................349
Encrypted IP Network Connection ..................357
Ensure Authorities Have Been Set Up for Each
Account ...............................................203, 205
Enterprise resource management ...................380
Automated user/card import ........................380
Entrants / panel users .....................................163
Equipment
Checking status ............................................ 92
Equipment screens
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ....230
Equipment Settings (Pseudo-Points)...............243
ERM ................................................................380
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
367
Automated user/card import ........................ 380
Error messages due to database damage ...... 182
Errors
Checking for panel vs. software
differences/conflicts ................................ 179
During a panel-update session;Don't decide
now ......................................................... 129
Partial updates shown in Yellow/Green in user
list ........................................................... 164
Escort Privilege ............................................... 158
Event................................................................. 39
Event filtering for operators ....................... 43, 144
Event instructions ........................................... 219
Event log (purging) ......................................... 193
Event priorities ................................................ 222
Event Responses ............................................ 218
Event Responses for Acknowledging Alarms . 218
Events ....................................................... 39, 220
Enabling sounds ......................................... 220
Events pertaining to an account ........................ 20
Event-triggered cameras................................... 78
Event-triggered video events ............................ 46
Exiting from the software .................................... 6
Expansion Modules and related settings ........ 256
Expired cards
View or print a report..................................... 26
Export / archive data ....................................... 191
Extended point-type ........................................ 291
Set up custom point type ............................ 291
Fall-back users (can enter during comms failure)
.................................................................... 175
Feature set...................................................... 213
For shared users ......................................... 203
Features
Adding......................................................... 330
Files for firmware updates............................... 132
Filter on column .............................................. 164
Find / select a system panel ............................. 10
Find a user ...................................................... 164
Firewall Settings (e.g., Windows XPsp2) ........ 329
Firmware files ................................................. 132
Firmware Files for Panel Updates ................... 132
Firmware update ............................................. 131
Status.......................................................... 131
Flash firmware ........................................ 132, 133
Flash Firmware ............................................... 131
Status.......................................................... 131
Floor control .................................................... 115
Floors
Control all floors for a specific elevator ....... 112
View status or control.................................. 115
Folders for accounts ....................................... 197
368
Full screen (maximizing a window) ..................... 8
Function key operation .................................... 296
Garage/extended point type ............................ 291
Set up custom point type ............................. 291
Get system status ............................................. 90
Global lockout ........................................... 89, 216
Clearing ......................................................... 89
Global Panel Settings ...................................... 213
Glossary (system / hardware reference) ......... 383
Grant last user (look for the door commands) ... 64
Group (panel group/location) .......................... 228
Grouping items by location (setting up Areas) 245
Groups
Setting up panel groups .............................. 228
Groups of areas (to arm/disarm via LCD keypad)
.................................................................... 253
Guard tours
Setting up guard tour input points ............... 291
Starting and monitoring ................................. 52
Guard Tours ...................................................... 51
Guard-Tours
Guard tour ..................................................... 51
Initial setup .................................................... 54
Reporting on Previous Guard-Tours ............. 23
Hardware activation key .................................. 330
Hardware key .................................................. 368
Hardware reference/glossary .......................... 383
HASP .............................................................. 334
Network USB HASP Key (Director V4.51). 334
Help................................................................. 345
Try the helpful Wizard ................................. 345
Holidays .......................................................... 149
Assign Groups of Shared Holidays to Accounts
(Shared Holiday Management) ............... 212
Holidays shared across multiple accounts ..... 208,
210
Host address (see Serial Number) .................. 237
I/O Mapping .................................................... 233
ID and Name (under Panel Information) ........... 10
ID+PIN digits (per feature-set selection) ......... 213
If a panel is replaced ....................................... 230
If You Need to Transfer the database to another
PC ............................................................... 327
Image format/quality for a camera..................... 68
Image quality ..................................................... 69
Import archived data ....................................... 191
Import User ..................................................... 382
Importing or Exporting Activity or Audit Logs
(Archive) ...................................................... 191
In/Out status reports.......................................... 13
Inactive cards
View or print a report ..................................... 26
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Information on products .................................. 388
Initial Set Up of
Views, Maps, Cameras ................................. 70
Input points ..................... 284, 288, 290, 291, 294
Check status of input points ........................ 117
Custom circuit types .................................... 294
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ... 230
Video Events ............................................... 288
Input points (Monitored Sensors) .................... 284
Input Points—Custom Point Types ................. 291
Input Points—Pre-Defined Sensor Types ....... 290
Inputs
Setting up Input Points ................................ 284
Installation sheets ........................................... 388
Installing .......................................................... 317
The VEREX Director software..................... 317
Interface .............................................................. 8
Interlock (man-trap) ......................................... 274
Internet ............................................................ 349
Intrusion node under configuration - system ... 234
Invalid card/PIN tracking ................................. 216
IP connections ................................................ 349
Item numbers .................................................. 230
Items to appear in the MyTools bar ................. 366
Key (software activation key) .......................... 368
Keypad Tone Reference (V4.5 with V4.42
firmware) ..................................................... 386
Keypad Tones (V4.5 with V4.42 firmware) .. 387
Keyswitch for area arm-disarm (setting up custom
point-types) ................................................. 291
Language ................................................ 163, 224
Director-Server Language ........................... 224
For this software ......................................... 136
For user prompts (LCD keypads) ................ 163
Large Systems--Checking for Software vs. Panel
Differences / Conflicts ................................. 179
Late arrival reports ............................................ 13
LCD keypad ............................................ 253, 254
Groups of areas (to arm and disarm together)
................................................................ 253
Setting up Multi-Panel Arm/Disarm ............. 254
License
Activating or Updating Your Software Licensing
................................................................ 330
License key not found! .................................... 337
Licensing ......................................................... 368
Lift (elevator)
Add new or view/change settings
(configuration) ......................................... 276
Location of a site ............................................. 216
Location of items (setting up areas) ................ 245
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Lock a door manually ......................................110
Logging off ......................................................... 6
Logical tree view .............................................. 10
Login .................................................................. 4
Login automatically to control & status ............136
Logins (user)
For database access using SQL server ......374
Logoff ................................................................. 6
Logon ................................................................. 4
Lost cards ........................................................173
Identify (add to list) ......................................173
View or print a report .................................... 26
Mailing address ...............................................216
Main panel
System settings for each panel ...................232
Main Panels ....................................................230
Main screen (desktop) ........................................ 8
Mains Fail ........................ 284, 286, 290, 291, 292
Maintaining the database ................................177
Maintenance ....................................................194
Windows Maintenance ................................194
Man trap ..........................................................274
Managing Accounts and Account Folders .......197
Managing the database using SQL Server......374
Manually Controlling an item ............................ 80
Manually Importing User-Data From a Text File
....................................................................382
Maps ................................................................ 70
Initial Set Up of
Views, Maps, Cameras ............................ 70
Visual status and control .............................. 58
Maps and Cameras (Visual Monitoring &
Status/Control) ............................................. 58
Maps and video ................................................ 58
March Networks R4-R5 support ......................333
Maximize (enlarging a portion of the screen) ..... 8
Maximum image size........................................ 68
Memory model (see Feature-Set) ...................213
Microsoft Virtual Machine ................................334
Misc. Account Settings (for Shared Users and/or
Holidays) .....................................................203
Miscellaneous Status Tasks ............................. 85
Mismatch of panel version...............................129
Modem ............................................................352
Panel Connection Overview ........................346
Windows Modem Setup ..............................352
Modem connections and setup .......................352
Modem setup (communications Manager) ......354
Modem setup under MS windows ...................352
Modules............................................................ 99
Check status ................................................ 96
Check status of a Suite Security System...... 99
Control
Admin
Sys Config
Tech-Ref
369
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ... 230
Modules and related setting ............................ 256
Monitoring ............................................... 144, 236
A guard tour in progress ............................... 52
Listing only specific events/alarms ................ 43
Monitoring Paging & Remote Mgt. Settings 236
Remote cameras........................................... 58
Scheduled event filtering for operators ....... 144
The system monitoring window ..................... 39
Using Maps and video .................................. 58
Monitoring Paging & Remote Mgt. Settings .... 236
Monitoring settings for a door ......................... 273
Multi-Server Login ....................................... 5, 200
Logging into multiple servers .......................... 5
Viewing accounts across multiple servers .. 200
Multi-tenant ..................................................... 261
Suite-Security keypads ............................... 261
Multi-tenant facilities ....................................... 163
MyTools list / bar
Customizing ................................................ 366
If the MyTools bar appears as a small button
................................................................ 366
Network USB HASP Key (Director V4.51) .... 334
New Installation? Try the Wizard ! ................. 345
New site (commissioning) ............................... 345
Try the Configuration Wizard ...................... 345
No access cards (see token-format) ............... 240
Note that the time lost pseudo point has been set
.................................................................... 243
NTSC camera image format ............................. 68
Number of ID+PIN Digits (per feature-set
selection) .................................................... 213
Number of users in an area ............................ 104
Numbers
Item numbers duplicated (see display offsets)
................................................................ 230
Offsets ............................................................ 230
Open database (SQL server support) ..... 373, 374
Operating system maintenance ...................... 194
Operation ........................................................ 290
Point operation reference............................ 290
Operator
Reporting on Operator Audits ....................... 32
Operator Log................................................... 224
Operator Permissions ..................................... 141
Operators ................................................ 141, 144
Change password for an operator .............. 138
Permissions ................................................ 141
Scheduled event filtering for operators ....... 144
Switching to a new operator ............................ 6
Operators (People who can use this software) 136
Options (from the Tools menu) ......................... 69
370
Visual Director (camera settings) .................. 69
Other Desktop Choices ..................................... 10
Output to follow an Area ‘Fail to Arm’ .............. 307
Outputs ................................................... 119, 296
Configuring .................................................. 296
Status & Control .......................................... 119
Outputs (bCAPL)
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ... 230
Paging ............................................. 226, 233, 236
Numeric paging ........................................... 233
Paging outputs, and Paging output base 233
Software-Based Text Paging (Serial Reporting)
................................................................ 226
Paging feature ................................................. 296
Pal camera image format .................................. 68
Panel ................................................................. 34
Reporting on Panel Diagnostics .................... 34
Panel clock (resetting)....................................... 85
Panel communications
Panel communications log report .................. 32
Panel Communications
Auto-connect to panel (see note under 2nd
screen) .................................................... 123
Panel Communications and Updates .............. 121
Panel configuration reports ............................... 29
Panel connection choices ............................... 383
Panel Connection Overview ............................ 346
Panel diagnostic reporting ................................. 34
Panel Firmware Files ...................................... 132
Panel Firmware Files and Updating Panel
Firmware ..................................................... 132
Panel groups
Selection not available (greyed-out) .............. 10
Set panels/groups to appear in the tree or on
forms ......................................................... 10
Panel Groups
Panel Groups and Connection Settings ...... 228
Panel Groups and Connection Settings .......... 228
Panel groups not listed...................................... 10
Panel Information ...................................... 10, 213
Panel Modem .................................................. 353
Panel serial number ........................................ 237
Panel time zone .............................................. 228
Panel to modem connection ............................ 352
Panel to PC via IP (LAN/WAN) ....................... 349
Panel updates ................................................. 121
Panel version mismatch .................................. 129
Panel vs. software conflicts ............................. 179
Panels ............................................................. 213
Account-Wide Panel Settings (Feature-Set¸
etc.) ......................................................... 213
Add or set up ............................................... 230
Verex Director V4.9.1 User's Guide
21-0381E v4.9.1
Check status ................................................. 92
Define/setup ................................................ 230
Find/select..................................................... 10
Selection not available (greyed-out) .............. 10
Set panels/groups to appear in the tree or on
forms ......................................................... 10
System Panels and Displayed Item-Numbers
................................................................ 230
System settings for each panel ................... 232
Panels not listed................................................ 10
Panels, Panel Groups, and Connection Settings
.................................................................... 228
Panel-to-PC communications via the Internet . 349
Panic keys............................................... 261, 284
Set up for a suite-security keypad ............... 261
Set up for an LCD keypad (1st 3 inputs) ..... 284
To trigger a programmable output ............... 296
To trigger a suite-security keypad output .... 261
Parallel STU .................................................... 233
Map outputs ................................................ 233
Password ........................................................ 177
Maintenance issues .................................... 177
Password (changing for an operator) .............. 138
Password and Personal ID Number Issues..... 177
PC access ....................................................... 339
PC and Panels—Modem Connections ............ 352
PC Issues and Software Installation ............... 317
PC requirements ............................................. 317
PCF (card format) settings .............................. 240
Perimeter (points) ................................... 284, 291
Permissions .................................................... 343
Client Permissions ...................................... 343
Operator permissions .................................. 141
Personnel management .................................. 380
Automated user/card import ........................ 380
Photo badging option (using) .......................... 168
Photos (capturing) ........................................... 168
Photo-verification .............................................. 48
Physical Wiring ............................................... 351
PIN for service technician ............................... 217
PODs
Check status ................................................. 96
PODs (expansion modules) ............................ 256
PODs (modules)
Duplicated numbers (see display offsets) ... 230
Point Custom Types ........................................ 291
Point operation reference ................................ 290
Points ...................................... 284, 288, 290, 291
Check status of input points ........................ 117
Video Events ............................................... 288
Port (serial port setup) .................................... 354
Ports ............................................................... 329
21-0381E v4.9.1
Welcome
Report
Needed for internet access .........................329
Position (define custom user field) ..................161
Printing ............................................................. 34
A panel diagnostic report.............................. 34
An activity report........................................... 20
Printing reports after viewing them ............... 37
System/device settings etc. .......................... 29
Printing cards with user photo .........................168
Product information .........................................388
Programmable Outputs ...................................296
Programming ...................................................121
Updating panels with changes ....................121
Protecting against data loss ............................184
Pseudo points .................................................243
Pseudos
Check status ................................................ 92
PTZ cameras ...............................................66, 72
Aiming or zooming........................................ 66
Initial set up .................................................. 72
Purge...............................................................193
Purging Activity or Audit Logs .........................193
Purging VEREX Director Logs ........................193
Quality .............................................................. 69
Quality of a camera-image ............................... 68
Query ..............................................................376
R4 DVRs
March Networks R4-R5 support ..................333
R5 DVRs
March Networks R4-R5 support ..................333
Reader 1 & 2 Settings for a Door ....................270
Reader settings ...............................................270
Readers
In elevator (lift) cabs ..........................